the recent digitization of the aircraft in the A-10 "Charlie" and the addition of targeting pod and GPS weapons.



 
When writing this manual we wanted make it even better than the DCS: Black Shark flight manual. A big part of achieving that is to add a wealth of instructional content in addition to detailed reference information. Continuing the work already established in DCS: Black Shark. the second half is instructional in nature and will walk you through the many functions of the aircraft step-by-step. both of those projects failed to see the light of day. low-level tankbusting. In doing so. The A-10C is just a cool aircraft! The combination of the 30 mm cannon. The decision to model the A-10C was driven by several factors:  The Fighter Collection / Eagle Dynamics has been developing a high-fidelity Desk Top Simulation (DTS) of the A-10C for the U. We hope that Warthog fills this desire for simmers to fly the Hog. and glass cockpit. Please note that all listed key commands are in regards to a standard U.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for your purchase of DCS: A-10C Warthog! A-10C Warthog is the second module in the Digital Combat Simulator (DCS) series and follows the critically acclaimed DCS: Black Shark. When we create a module for DCS. This manual should be used in conjunction with the tutorials included with this simulation and the online videos available on the DCS website. this latest module shifts gears from attack helicopter operations to perhaps the most famous Close Air Support aircraft: The Fairchild Republic A-10C Warthog. keyboard. Although A-10 simulations were in work by both EA/Jane’s Combat Simulations and Microprose.S. In the process of adding the A-10C to the DCS stable. the first chapters of this manual are focused on the jet's technical aspects and its historical background. These include:
14 INTRODUCTION
. it is very important for us to create it at the highest level of fidelity. make the A-10C an incredibly entertaining aircraft to fly and fight in. There are few modern aircraft that have the visual and name recognition of the A-10 Warthog. an equally important aspect of this program has been the many improvements we have made to the DCS combat environment. Air National Guard for the past several years. Given our DTS experience with the A10C. As such. pushing it to the next level with new features and game play. Warthog builds upon the CAS environment created for Black Shark. The A-10C was the perfect choice. unlike other aircraft that the data is simply not available for. A high-fidelity A-10 simulation has been a long time in coming.S. giving us a tremendous access to A-10C information. We were fortunate enough to work out an agreement with our client to release an entertainment version of this simulation. to learn this aircraft. we wanted to improve the Close Air Support (CAS) environment. but we wanted to introduce a fixed-wing aircraft into DCS. we had the data and the means to meet this standard. We call this ―The DCS Standard‖.

Sincerely.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
         Improved terrain and sky modeling for a more realistic look Expanded terrain into eastern Georgia Interactive Joint Terminal Air Controller (JTAC) Smarter AI that more dynamically responds to threats Hearing radio communications for additional friendly air and ground units Interactive training Improved visual effects New sound engine Mission Editor improvements
We hope you enjoy the fruits of our labor of love. It is our hope that DCS: A-10C Warthog will help you appreciate this unique aircraft and understand why it is considered by many to be the best CAS aircraft over today’s battlefields. The DCS: A-10C Warthog Team
EAGLE DYNAMICS 15
.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
A-10 HISTORY
16 /
.

Figure 1. it was not deemed survivable enough in a European battlefield scenario. On the other hand. The primary environment was still considered Europe at the time. Air Force did not take close air support seriously and a few high-level service members sought a specialized attack aircraft to remedy this. and weapon delivery inaccuracy proved problematic and an expensive solution. While fast jets like the F-100. slower aircraft like the U-10 and OV-10 lacked the firepower punch needed. surface-to-air missiles. high speeds.S. A-1D Skyraider
During the Vietnam War. However. and low-level anti-aircraft gunfire. This resulted in a desire for a much more survivable aircraft operating in the CAS environment.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 17
. The A-1 Skyraider was used to fill this CAS and Combat Search and Rescue (CSAR) role. This criticism resulted in charges that the U. and such an aircraft would need to be survivable operating over Warsaw Pact forces with an extensive array of air defense weaponry.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
A-10 HISTORY
Identifying the Need
The need for the A-10 germinated from the experience of U. F-4 and F-5 could provide Close Air Support (CAS) to troops in emergency situations.S. forces in the Vietnam War. large weapon loads and loiter capability proved to be a success in Southeast Asia. and its ruggedness. their lack of loiter time. the primary threat to CAS mission aircraft was small arms.

18 A-10 HISTORY
.1 and 44. $1 million per aircraft. Of the 12 companies. and using twin high-bypass fanjets was determined. 1967. the characteristics of a target weight of 35. CAS supporting UH-1 and AH-1 gunships did not have the capability to effectively engage enemy armor forces in a feared mechanized Soviet thrust through Western Europe. Each company would build two prototypes.4 million each (fly away cost). The Northrop entry would be designated the YA-9 and the Fairchild Republic would be designated the YA-10.000 ft Easy to maintain at Forward Operating Bases (FOB) Low cost Ability to use integrated 30 mm cannon to destroy main battle tanks Use of off-the-shelf hardware whenever possible to reduce costs
Moving away from the earlier fixed-price contract.5 kN Combat mission radius of 250 nm Two hour mission loiter time at max mission radius with 9. Northrop and Fairchild Republic were selected as the winners of the prototype competition on December 18. The performance requirements were set as follows:          Turbofans generating between 31. 1970 with the intent to purchase 600 aircraft at a price of $1. 1970. This led to the requirement focusing on low.000 lbs. As such.000 ft takeoff distance Highly maneuverable below 1. it was decided to pursue a Fly-Before-Buy policy when choosing the A-X. competitive RFP contracts were issued to 12 companies on May 7. the Air Force was looking for the following in a replacement for the A-1:      Rugged and survivable Long-loiter capability Ability to carry large weapon loads including anti-armor Excellent slow speed agility Relatively short takeoff and landing rolls
Given the projected dense Warsaw Pact Integrated Air Defense System (IAS) threat. By 1969. Given these items. it was also determined that the flight profile of this aircraft would need to be very near and over the battlefield in order to maximize the use of terrain masking. The Request For Proposal (RFP) was issued by the Air Force to 21 defense contractors on March 6.500 lbs payload 4.to midaltitude operations at the exclusion of high-altitude flight profiles.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
In addition to the then current fast and slow Air Force attack aircraft.
The A-X Competition
In June 1966 the Attack Experimental (A-X) program was launched and the requirement issued in September of the same year.

Between April 16 and May 10. General Electric was funded to provide slightly modified TF34 engines. The competition between the two prototypes lasted between October 10. 1972 and December 9. 10 pre-production YA10s went into construction by Fairchild Republic. The modified engine is hardier and became designated the TF34-GE100A. At the end of the second evaluation fly-off. the YA-10 was again deemed to be the better aircraft for the mission due to:     More survivable More lethal with the to-be-fitted 30 mm cannon Less expensive to operate Significantly longer loiter times. the YA-10 made its maiden flight from Edwards AFB on May 10.2 million contract was signed on March 1. 1973. the YA-10 came out on top despite both aircraft exceeding requirement specifications. 1973. It is interesting to note that the losing YA-9A bears a striking resemblance to the Russian-developed Su-25 CAS aircraft that has seen service world-wide in large numbers.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
At the hands of test pilot Howard ―Sam‖ Nelson.S. The YA-10A was initially fitted with an M61A1 20 mm cannon that would later be replaced in production aircraft with the GAU-8/A 30 mm cannon. the two aircraft squared off at McConnell AFB by experienced Air Force pilots to evaluate which aircraft was better suited to the initial A-X requirements. 1972. This is a testament to the excellent design of both contenders. While there has been discussion updating the engines of the A-10. This was due to:       Most of the test pilots generally preferred the flying qualities of the YA-10 over the YA-9 Less roll inertia Ease of access to the under-wing hardpoints Shorter estimated transition from prototype to production model Use of the existing TF-34 engine that had already been in use with the U. Responding to a congressional recommendation. Two hours versus only 11 minutes of the A-7D!
20 A-10 HISTORY
. If you are interested in the Su-25. In parallel. 1972. available at your local retailer.
Production
After the pre-production $159. we suggest flying our simulation of the Su-25T in ―Lock On: Platinum‖. the TF-34-100A has proved a reliable and durable engine for the past 40 years. Navy S-3 Viking Better system redundancy / survivability
The YA-10 was announced the winner on January 18. the Air Force was asked to evaluate the new YA-10 against the existing A-7D Corsair II. 1973. At the conclusion of the faceoff.

These changes included:          Added leading edge slats for improved airflow to engines at higher angles of attack Added trailing edge fairings Wing span slightly increased Maximum flap deflection was reduced Vertical stabilizers were reshaped Aerial refueling receptacle was added to the nose Added an integrated boarding ladder Gun boresight was reduced 2-degrees for better over-the-nose aiming A pylon on the right side of the forward fuselage was added to carry the Pave Penny pod laser spot tracker
EAGLE DYNAMICS 21
. During this time.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 4. the number of pre-production aircraft was reduced by four due to budget constraints. A-10A in the earlier camo
The first pre-production YA-10 entered testing in February of 1975 and included several changes from the two prototype aircraft that took part in the fly-off competitions (YA-9 and A-7D).

This was later rectified in production aircraft. not much of a delay! The 355th conducted final operational tests and brought the A-10A to Europe for the first time for air shows and NATO exercises. 73-1665. 6 was lost due to gun gas ingestion that flamed out both engines. The first production A-10A flew on October 10. 73-1664. and along with the next three production aircraft. Sub-systems and weapon delivery Aircraft No. 73-1669. Due to the reduction in test aircraft from 10 to 6. By today’s standards. 73-1667.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
The six pre-production aircraft created were each tasked to specific areas of the aircraft flight test program:       Aircraft No. 4. 1975. 5. the first operational A-10A was delivered five months behind schedule to the 355th Tactical Fight Wing (TFW) in March 1976. 73-1668. Operational test and evaluation Aircraft No. took part in the flight testing effort. Climate test certification
Note: Aircraft No. 1. 2. 355th A-10As went on to put the new aircraft through its paces during Operation Jack Frost arctic exercise. Weapon certification Aircraft No. 73-1666. A-10A at JAWS Trials
22 A-10 HISTORY
. Red Flag.
Figure 5. Independent Initial Operational and Evaluation (IOT&E) and stores certification Aircraft No. and the Joint Attack Weapon System (JAWS) trials. 3. 6. Performance and handling Aircraft No.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
At the delivery of the 100th A-10A. navigation and target acquisition. A-10A in Operation Colors
EAGLE DYNAMICS 23
. The vertical stabilizers were also extended.
Figure 6. 1 to create the YA-10B Night/Adverse Weather (N/AW) prototype. 715 A-10s were produced. the Pentagon christened the aircraft the Thunderbolt II. This nickname tradition coupled with the not-so-graceful lines of the A-10A was quite apt. However. the A-10A community nicknamed the A-10A the ―Warthog‖ or just ―Hog‖ for short. In the event the Air Force lost interest. it was also proposed as a combat-trainer for the A-10. The variant was ultimately canceled and the only two-seat A-10 built now sits at Edwards Air Force Base. In an effort to create a night-attack all-weather version of the A-10. the last delivered in 1984. the F-84F ―Superhog‖ and the F-105 ―Ultra-Hog‖. A Forward Looking Infrared (FLIR) pod was to be mounted on the right side of the fuselage and a ground mapping radar on the left side. In total. It included a second seat for a weapons system officer responsible for ECM. in the tradition of the F-84 nickname ―Groundhog‖. Department of Defense (DoD) and Fairchild Republic converted pre-production aircraft No.

24 A-10 HISTORY
. and provided the ability to employ the Litening AT targeting pod from either station 3 or 9 (later moved to stations 2 and 10 in Suite 3). the system and capability remain. Although Pave Penny functions have largely been replaced in modern A-10s by the targeting pod. LASTE updated aircraft evolved over several forms including LASTE v4.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
A-10 Evolution
The A-10 has received many upgrades over the years.0 and LASTE v6. Initial aircraft were upgraded with the Heading Attitude Reference Systems (HARS) that provided basic inertial navigation and the Pave Penny laser sensor (marked target seeker) pod that allowed the pilot to detect laser energy for PID (Positive Identification) of an illuminated target. Imagery from the targeting pod could be displayed on the Television Monitor (TVM) that could also display Maverick video or as a CDU repeater. The Suite 2 A-10A upgrade standardized the A-10A fleet to full EGI capability. and ground-collision warning system (GCAS). replaced the Control Display Unit (CDU). The first major upgrade to the A-10A fleet was the Low-Altitude Safety and Targeting Enhancement (LASTE).0 with and without embedded GPS INS (EGI) navigation. Suite 2 also made the Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer (IFFCC) standard and dramatically improved weapon delivery accuracy. Pave Penny control is done through the Target Identification Set. Laser (TISL) panel in the cockpit. The Pave Penny is a passive seeker and cannot self-designate a target for a Laser Guided Bomb (LGB). a Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP). LASTE provided computerized weapon-aiming equipment. replaced the defensive countermeasure systems (CMS).

EAGLE DYNAMICS 25
. This upgrade started in 2005 and will eventually be standard for the entire A-10 fleet of 356 aircraft. When complete. Digital Stores Management System. and an updated. SADL datalink. Overall. glass cockpit. and service life extension plans for the A/OA-10 force at up to $4.4 billion. A-10A Cockpit The current Suite 3 A-10 has been designated the A-10C. This program was accelerated by 9 months as a result of experiences in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The Precision Engagement (PE) modification is the largest single upgrade effort ever undertaken for A-10. refurbishment. an April 2/07 GAO report places the potential total cost of upgrades.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 7. it will provide true precision engagement (PE) capability by combining multiple upgrade requirements into a one time and money-saving program rather than executing them as standalone projects. A multi-billion dollar wing replacement program supplements the technology upgrades including support for IAM-guided weapons (JDAM and WCMD).

26 A-10 HISTORY
. The A-10C upgrades are to be completed in 2011. A-10C Cockpit The Air Force Material Command's Ogden Air Logistics Center at Hill AFB. Utah completed worked on its 100th A-10 precision engagement upgrade in January 2008. The A-10 is scheduled to stay in service with the USAF until 2028 and will continue to evolve with new upgrades.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 8.

It is the JTAC mission to coordinate with the A-10C pilot to effectively and accurately deliver weapons exactly on the directed target to best support the friendly ground forces in contact with the enemy. with actual A-10 combat operations in the Persian Gulf.
Ba t tl ef ie l d Ai r I n t er di c ti on ( BA I)
The goal of BAI is to use airpower to attack enemy forces behind the front line that are not in contact with friendly forces. A-10 operations generally moved to medium altitude (12. the A-10 was initially focused on Close Air Support (CAS) of friendly troops in contact with Warsaw Pact forces in the event of the Cold War going hot. today CAS is a common mission for A-10C crews supporting allied forces in Iraq and Afghanistan. logistics. This was made possible due either to a lack of credible medium to high altitude air defense threats and/or sufficient friendly support assets to neutralize the threat. For many years the A-10 was relegated to Battlefield Interdiction while other aircraft such as the F15E. and lines of communication. The updates to the A-10C of the better integrated targeting pod and the SADL datalink system provide an improved level of coordination and weapon employment accuracy to avoid tragic blue-on-blue. Oil. and F-111 took the Deep Interdiction missions. and Battlefield Interdiction targets second-echelon forces behind the front line that are currently not in contact with friendly ground forces.000 ft) to minimize the threat from Anti-Aircraft Artillery (AAA) and Man Portable Surface to Air Missiles (MANPAD). this has gradually
EAGLE DYNAMICS 27
. Lubricants (POL) targets. Given the much greater air defense threat at low-altitude compared to medium altitude. Often A-10C crews will be tasked to eliminate hostile forces within ―danger close‖ range of friendly units. most of the A-10s combat use has been above 12. Although this was originally envisioned as NATO forces holding off a Warsaw Pact advance.000 ft with excursions to lower altitude to employ weapons (strafing and CCIP rocket/bomb delivery). As such. However. line of communication. the A-10C has four general types of missions in can conduct:
Cl os e A ir S u pp o r t ( C AS )
As the initial mission of the A-10. Meeting the initial A-X requirements. However. and Afghanistan. and Petroleum. artillery/rocket system. Depending on how far the target is behind the front line. the A-10 mission has continued to evolve to meet everchanging mission requirement and battlefield complexities. a JTAC can now send digital tasking onto the moving map display and a text message. Working from these altitudes in such a manner. Today’s A-10C in particular use a combination of the Litening AT targeting pod with precision-guided bombs and missiles to attack from medium altitudes and stand-off ranges to avoid low-altitude threats. this is what it was designed to do… provide direct support to friendly ground forces in contact with the enemy. command and control. the Balkans. Paramount of effect CAS support is the Joint Terminal Attack Controller (JTAC) on the ground with friendly troops. friendly fire incidents. the initial low-altitude CAS mission changed dramatically. F-117.000 to 20.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
A-10 Missions
In the 30+ years of operational service. this does not preclude the traditional verbal directions over a radio to talk the pilot’s eyes onto the intended target. there are generally two levels of BAI: Deep Interdiction against targets far behind the front line that generally consisted of logistical. This can include rear echelon reinforcements. F-16. With the integration of the datalink. However.

where as the A-10 AFAC role in Iraq and Afghanistan was often are tasking CAS strikes supporting friendly troops in contact. Along with the targeting pod. the AFAC often performs the dual function of assigning both CAS and BAI attacks. but also target handoff from an Airborne Forward Air Controller (AFAC). it is termed an OA-10. Unlike a JTAC that is most often assigning CAS strikes. Of course. For combat operations like Desert Storm and Allied Force. the A-10 is a much more capable AFAC that can operate day or night. With the addition of the Litening AT targeting pod. Previously. more and more A-10s are assigned both types of BAI missions. target type. nighttime AFAC could be problematic and relied solely on the use if night vision goggles (NVG). As such.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
changed and now BAI mission assignments are based on weather. the AFAC performs the same role but from the cockpit of an aircraft.
28 A-10 HISTORY
. Because targets are well behind the front line. For day time AFAC.
C o m ba t S e arc h a n d R esc u e ( CS A R)
When an airman goes down behind enemy lines. In ODS. Clear examples of this can be seen in the AFAC role the A-10 often played in coordinating BAI strikes in the Balkans. contact with a JTAC is rare except when tasked by a Special Forces team behind enemy lines. and terrain. An A-10 that is dual tasked for CAS/BAI and AFAC is sometimes referred to as an A/OA-10 or a ―Killer Scout‖. there was a similar target area assignment. the SADL datalink allows the OA-10 to digitally transmit target locations to other aircraft on the network as well as sending clarifying text messages. the A-10 will have responsibility for attacking enemy forces threatening the rescue helicopters and enemy ground forces closing in on the position of the downed pilot. the verbal ―talk on‖ is also available over the radio. In the CSAR role. an A-10 flight is a crucial part of the package that will go in to retrieve him or her. expected threats. During operations of Serbia and Kosovo. the A-10 will often be the on-site coordinating party responsible for the extraction operation. Additionally.
Air b o rn e Fo rw ar d Ai r C o n tr ol l er (A F A C)
Much like a JTAC tasks a CAS-assigned aircraft to a specific target. There is no real difference between an A-10 and an OA-10 other than the mission and the OA-10 will generally have an AFAC payload consisting of Willy Pete marker rockets and several weapons. In OAF. A-10 crews were often assigned ―Kill Boxes‖ to hunt for and destroy enemy units. the older OA-10 models had to use binoculars. When an A-10 is performing the AFAC role. this was the most common type of mission. both CSAR operations where run from the cockpit of an A10.

Osan AB. Barksdale AFB. Louisiana. based at DavisMonthan Air Force Base in Arizona in March of 1976. Tailcode OS
Figure 10. Current operators of the A-10 as of mid-2009 include:
Figure 9. 917th Wing (ACC).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Operational Use
The first operational unit to receive the A-10 was the 355th Tactical Training Wing. 47th Fighter Squadron (Training). Tailcode BD
EAGLE DYNAMICS 29
. 25th Fighter Squadron 'Assam Draggins'. The first unit to achieve full combat-readiness was the 354th Tactical Fighter Wing at Myrtle Beach AFB. Republic of Korea. and Air National Guard (ANG) squadrons. A-10s are deployed with active duty. Reserve. 51st Fighter Wing (PACAF). Deployments of A10s followed at bases both at home and abroad. South Carolina in 1978.

Operation Allied Force
The A-10 saw its next combat in 1999 when the 81st FS deployed to Aviano AB in Italy in support of Operation Joint Forge. The strong contribution of the A-10 in ODS contributed in a large way to the Air Force reversing its decision to phase out the A-10 and replace them with a CAS version of the short-legged.
Figure 28.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 37
. With a deployment of 15 aircraft by 23 March. 1999 On March 27. for a NATO Operation Allied Force mission on April 12. A-10 Thunderbolt II at Gioia del Colle. and run" F-16.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Both wings had one squadron assigned to night sorties and this often comprised the use of night vision goggles and using the seeker from an Infrared Imaging (IIR) AGM-65D Maverick to hunt for targets at night. Italy. combat operation over Kosovo commence with the goal of removing all Serbian forces from Kosovo. This marked the start of Operation Allied Force. A-10s from the 81st FS led the CSAR effort to retrieve a downed F-117 pilot. "drop-twobombs.

In late 2007. A-10 units provided daytime AFAC support to coalition aircraft operating over Kosovo. the A-10 in its CSAR role was a large part of why no downed allied pilot was ever captured.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
In early April of 1999. A-10s conduct their first successful attacks. the 81st FS did a remarkable and rapid re-deployment from Aviano AB to Gioia del Colle AB in southern Italy and elements of the 74th FS from Pope AFB were co-deployed with the 81st FS. Although two A-10s received battle damage. In support of Operation Iraqi Freedom. A-10s provided valuable CAS to rapidly advancing forces and contributed to the rate of advance. 60 National Guard and Reserve A-10s from various squadrons were deployed to the region in support of the initial ground offensive. A-10 units accounted for the destruction of more Serbian deployed weapons than any other aircraft. A-10s were tasked with a combination of both CAS and AFAC duties. A-10 units also conducted BAI along the line of advance. 172nd. A-10 Thunderbolt II maintenance members inspect aircraft after it was hit by an Iraqi missile
38 A-10 HISTORY
. and 190th FS deployed to the region.597 rounds of 30 mm gun ammunition. Near the end of the operation.
Current Operations in Iraq and Afghanistan
Following the events of 9/11. the Maryland ANG 104th FS took the A-10C into combat for the first time. OAF showed that the A-10 could be an effective platform in today’s battlefield. Additionally. the 103rd. This relocation placed A10 units much nearer to Kosovo and increased their mission effectiveness. During the course of the operation. Despite losing one aircraft to hostile fire late in the operation. Whereas F-16 units provided nighttime AFAC.
Figure 29. A-10 units concluded the operation with a 85% mission capable rate and fired 311. US forces conducted combat operation in Iraq (Operation Iraqi Freedom) and in Afghanistan (Operation Anaconda). As with ODS. Also in April. not a single one was lost to enemy fire. In addition to traditional CAS operations.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
A-10 operations in Afghanistan first began from Bagram airfield. A-10 operations in Afghanistan have focused heavily on CAS and AFAC missions. They then later moved operations to Kandahar airfield. More so than ODS and OAF.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 39
.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
GENERAL DESIGN
40 /
.

the A-10 was designed from the ground up to be the most survivable and potent CAS aircraft over a very deadly battlefield.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 41
. Originally designed to counter a massSoviet armor thrust across Europe.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
GENERAL DESIGN
The A-10A/C is a fixed-wing. single-pilot aircraft with two high bypass turbofan engines that is optimized for the Close Air Support (CAS) combat mission. we will discuss the various design components of the A-10 and how they contribute to its combat mission. A-10A
In this chapter.
Figure 30.

This does provide the A-10 the ability to better loiter over the battlefield in both regards to endurance and more easily stay over a CAS assigned target area. The nose gear retracts fully into the fuselage. Loading on stations 5 and 7 is exclusive to loading on station 6. the aerial fueling receptacle. However. forward position of the cockpit provides excellent visibility over the nose. They also improve aileron effectiveness at low speeds. and other equipment. station 6 is only loaded with the TK600 external fuel tank. This allows the gun to be mounted centrally along the fuselage for increased accuracy.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Fuselage
The most forward section of the fuselage houses the GAU-8/A 30 mm gun barrels and firing mechanism that extend back behind the cockpit. Alongside of the gun barrels is the nose gear that is installed right of centerline. The aft portion of the fuselage has the two primary functions of mounting the two engine nacelles and the attachment point to the elevator and rudder control surface assemblies.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 43
. and the various cockpit controls and instrumentation.
Wings
The wings of the A-10 are of the low-mounted straight design and provide low wing loading. Mounted on either side of the aft fuselage spine are the two nacelles for the TF-34-GE-100 engines. This provides excellent maneuverability and a low stall speed. 6 and 7. The cockpit sits high over the gun and nose gear bay and consists of a retractable Plexiglas canopy. The center section of the fuselage contains the forward and aft fuselage fuel tanks. the forward fuselage houses multiple avionics bays. Generally. The wings have Hoerner wingtips that reduce induced drag and wingtip vortices. it does limit the A-10 to pedestrian speeds compared to other fighter aircraft. Additionally. a zero-zero ejection seat. and the Environmental Control Unit (ECU). The high. the left and right hydraulic system reservoirs. Between the nacelles and inside the fuselage are Auxiliary Power Unit (APU). Along the lower surface of the center fuselage are the hard points for store stations 5.

The corresponding right wheel well end is colored black and houses the IFF receiver. As with the fuselage tanks. the tanks are self-sealing and filled with a flexible foam to prevent a fuel tank explosion. On the side trailing edge of the wings are the flaps. Flaps are set to MVR for takeoff. but will auto-retract. Underneath each wing and extending forward left and right of the slats are the wheel wells. Note that the external tanks do not have such precautions and are never flown with in combat. They all raise and lower simultaneously. TK600 fuel tanks can also be mounted on wing stations 4 and 8. Flap position is indicated in the cockpit on the flap position indicator. The forward end of the left wheel well housing contains the single point refueling receptacle. A-10 maintenance
At the base of the left and right wing are the left and right wing fuel tanks. On the inside leading edge of the wings are the slats that automatically deploy according to Angle of Attack (AoA). The two main gears are partially covered by the wells and the gear retract forward into them. and DN (20-degrees).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 32. The flaps themselves are divided into two outer and inner ―wings‖. MVR (7-degrees). They only have two positions and are deployed down to improve air flow to the engines at high AoA. The flaps are generally manually controlled from the flap lever on the throttle quadrant and can be set to UP (0-degrees). Flaps will not extend.
44 GENERAL DESIGN
. This is governed by the Emergency Stall Prevention System (ESPS). if the airspeed exceeds 185 to 219 KIAS depending on altitude. Fuel is first depleted from any external tanks and then the wing tanks. On the outer left and right trailing edges are the ailerons that can also split to act as speed brakes. Additionally.

8 and 9 are 1760 smart stations and allow the A-10C to talk to stores such as IAMs. The two elevators are attached using a sharable crossover shaft that can be sheared if one of the elevators becomes jammed. etc. targeting pods. Stations 3. 7. Control Surfaces
Elevators
Pitch control is provided by two elevators attached to the trailing end of the horizontal stabilizer. and these in turn are provided by the elevator.
Control Surfaces
The three controlling forces on the aircraft are pitch.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 45
. This will allow the other to still operate but with less pitch authority.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Beneath the wing are the remaining eight hard points that a wide variety of stores can be mounted on. Triple Ejector Racks (TER).
Figure 33. and Maverick. aileron and rudder control surfaces on the aircraft. Maverick and AIM-9 launchers. These control surfaces have the following functionality and characteristics that are often unique to the A-10. roll and yaw. 5. These include single pylons. 4.

roll control will only be supplied by the operating aileron. Elevator trim is provided by trim tabs on the outboard trailing edge of the elevators and can be set both from the control stick and from the Emergency Flight Control System panel using two.
Ailerons
Roll control is provided by the two ailerons at the trailing outside end of each wing. If the elevators are still connected with the sharable crossover shaft. Because of the tandem hydraulic control mechanism. a single elevator actuator / control path can power both elevators if one of the actuators or control paths fail. independent electrical circuits. If however the linkage is lost to one of the actuators. inputs are sent to the hydraulic aileron actuators using cables and linkage paths. Each aileron is powered by either hydraulic system. From the disconnect units.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 34. Each actuator has inputs sent to it via a cable and linkage path that connect to it to a disconnect unit. As such. the Elevator Emergency Disconnect switch can be used to free it. The Stability Augmentation System (SAS) channels provide pitch rate dampening for better tracking and dampening pitch when the speed brakes are deployed.
46 GENERAL DESIGN
. roll control authority will be reduced by half and greater stick forces will be required. the loss of one system will not impact aileron control. Elevator
Each elevator is in turn powered by a separate hydraulic actuator. If an elevator jams in place. These circuits lead to a trim motor that sets the trim tabs and provides artificial feel. A series of push rods then provide input from the control stick to the disconnect unit. Roll inputs from the control stick are sent to a disconnect unit through push rods.

Aileron trim is provided by trim tabs on each aileron trailing edge that are powered by trim motors. the Aileron Emergency Disconnect switch can be used to free it. but an increase in pedal input will be required.
Rudders
Yaw control is provided by the two rudders running vertically down the trailing edge of the vertical stabilizers. If hydraulic power is lost to a rudder.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 47
. Even if the aileron of the trim tab is disengaged.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 35. Unlike the elevators and ailerons. Note that roll trim is not available when in Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS) mode. the trim will still function. there is no disconnect option. In addition to the primary function of imparting roll control to the aircraft. stick movements drive the roll trim tabs. Instead. the aileron trim tabs also provide artificial stick feel. Each rudder is powered by separate hydraulic actuators that are in turn connected to the rudder pedals via a cable and linkage path. Wing Tip and Aileron
If an aileron jams in place. direct control using the cables is automatically provided. If however power is lost to both. control of both rudders is still possible. In addition to manual roll trimming of the aircraft. each aileron can also split vertically to form a speed brake.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Flight Control Systems (FCS)
The primary elements of the A-10C Flight Control Systems (FCS) of the A-10 include the Stability Augmentation System (SAS). SAS can also be disconnect with the SAS disconnect button. The most noticeable effect of this is pipper tracking on a target through the HUD in the pitch axis. the FCS determines how the pilot’s control inputs are transferred to the aircraft.
Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS)
The MRFCS is used for emergency situations when both hydraulics systems have failed or a complete failure is impending. and if there is an excessive difference.
Y aw S AS
The SAS yaw channels have three main functions:    ± 7-degrees of yaw rate dampening ± 7-degrees of rudder authority for turn coordination ± 10-degrees of rudder authority for yaw trim
The SAS continuously compares the output of the two channels. In combination and according to the situation. the Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS).
M RF CS P i tc h
Control is shifted from hydraulic to mechanical (push rods and cables). it is not feasible to land with. Note that SAS does not affect roll.
48 GENERAL DESIGN
. the pitch channel acts on elevator control input and the yaw channel acts on rudder input. As you might imagine. This results in better target tracking and reduces the amount of trimming needed.
P i tc h S AS
The SAS pitch channels allows the Integrated Flight and Fire Control Computer (IFFCC) to provide pitch control functions up to +5/-2 elevator trailing edge. While sufficient for light maneuvering. SAS consists of control inputs in two channels: the pitch axis and the yaw axis. the system will automatically deactivate both channels of the axis. and the Enhanced Attitude Control System (EAC). Flight control is radically reduced and primarily relies on use of trim tabs to fly the aircraft. For SAS operation.
Stability Augmentation System (SAS)
The SAS improves the handling qualities of the A-10 and allows better and finer control. hydraulic power must be provided. Trim is still provided in pitch.

Ease of servicing the engines. The unusual placement of the engines provides several distinct advantages:     The high mounting reduces the likelihood of the engines ingesting Foreign Objects Debris (FOD) when operating from rough. each engine produces 8. Reduced IR signature from below due to of shielding of the horizontal stabilizer. This includes the autopilots modes of Altitude/Bank Hold. the Central Air Data Computer (CADC) and the SAS.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 49
.
Each engine is housed in a nacelle with maintenance doors that provide easy access. its FCS is not a fly-by-wire system and the pilot is much more in charge of what the aircraft is doing rather than being a voting member. stable weapons platform to accurately employ weapons from. This leads to faster mission turn-around. However.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
M RF CS R ol l
Control is shifted from hydraulic to stick control moving aileron trim tabs. unlike an F-16 for example. and Path Hold modes. forward bases in war-time. Engines can remain running when aircraft is being rearmed and refueled. the FCS of the A-10C provides a good. In PAC 1. Combined. Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP). As such. and then provides input into elevator and yaw as part of the SAS.900 pounds of standard thrust at sea level on a standard day. At maximum thrust.
M RF CS Y aw
Control is shifted from hydraulic to mechanical (push rods and cables)
Enhanced Attitude Control System (EAC)
The EAC system was one part of the LASTE update to the A-10A that provides an autopilot capability. The EAC system provides two major FCS functions: Precision Attitude Control (PAC). pressing the trigger in Gun master mode will trim the aircraft through SAS to keep the gun pipper on the target point.
Engines and APU
Engines
All versions of the A-10 have been powered by twin TF-34-GE-100A engines that are mounted high on the rear fuselage between the wings and the rear stabilizers. the A-10 is very much a seat-of-your-pants aircraft to fly and can be extremely responsive in the right hands. EAC uses sensor data from the Embedded GPS INS (EGI) navigation system. Altitude/Heading Hold.

and electrical generator.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Although there has long been talk about upgrading the A-10 engines. fuel economic. This provides redundancy. To do so. As such. Thrust (amount of fuel supplied to the engines) is governed by the two throttle levers in the cockpit. oil pump. Within the fan section are the inlet guide vanes that automatically adjust themselves to maximize thrust through the entire engine operating range. the best indication of thrust in the cockpit is from the fan speed indicators. In the combustion stage. fuel pump. the high pressure air and fuel (according to throttle settings) are mixed and ignited.
Figure 36. this has yet to actually happen. the A-10 is not a speed demon. Each engine has its own accessory gearbox and own set of associated pumps and generators. From the high pressure turbine stage. From engine IDLE to MAX takes approximately 10 seconds at sea level. durable engines in its current form. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
50 GENERAL DESIGN
. but it does have engines that provide reliable. Because the vast majority of thrust is generated by the bypass fan. Behind the fan section and below the compressor is the accessory gearbox that provides power to a hydraulic pump. Bleed air can be siphoned from the fan to power additional systems. This ignited fuel mixture is then expelled through the high pressure turbine stage. it uses a single-stage bypass fan and a 14-stage axial flow compressor. the thrust is exhausted out through the back-end low pressure turbine and then out the back of the engine. TF-34-GE-100A The TF-30 is a high-bypass turbo fan that generates 85% of its thrust with bypass air. Above the accessory gear box are the first stage compressor stages that flow and compress air into the combustion stage behind it.

Once both engines are started and their generators enabled. A-10C Cockpit
EAGLE DYNAMICS 51
. The APU also drives an electrical generator and a hydraulic pump. the APU and APU generator can be shut down. they have evolved over the years with some of the more notable changes:     Multiple LASTE versions Addition of GPS navigation and integration with INS (EGI) Suite 2 A-10A Suite 3 A-10C (subject of this simulation)
Figure 37.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Located in the rear fuselage between the engine mounts is the APU. When running. the A-10 has seen numerous improvements and most of these have had to do with the avionics systems. The APU is a small engine in itself and draws fuel to run. You would only need to use the APU again in case of an engine re-start. Although the A-10 avionics systems began rather simple.
Avionics Systems
Over the last 30 years. the APU supplies compressed air to turn the compressor fans to start the engines.

one elevator and half a wing torn off. one tail. They also are all hinged toward the rear of the aircraft. the A-10 is sufficiently controllable under favorable conditions to return to friendly airspace. hydraulics. Targeting Pod (TGP) video. the main landing gear is designed so that the wheels are retracted so as to make gear-up landings easier to control and less damaging to the aircraft's underside. The right throttle of the throttle quadrant has been removed and replaced by the same left throttle used in the F-15E. The most visibly obvious result of the upgrades has been to the cockpit of the A-10C. Aircraft Status (STAT). fuel.
52 GENERAL DESIGN
. However. Most of the functions of the ACP have been moved to the DSMS page on an MFCD and the AHCP now controls basic power and operating mode of the major aircraft weapon. This essentially added a ―glass cockpit‖ to the A-10 and brought it into the 21st century. so if landing gear hydraulic power is lost. In manual reversion mode. Maverick (MAV) seeker video. sensor and navigation systems. with mechanical systems to back up double-redundant hydraulic systems. communications. the avionics are a combination of old and new.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Regarding the A-10C. The self-sealing fuel tanks are protected by fire-retardant foam. Although it is a full-deflection stick (unlike the F16). sensor usage (targeting pod). Below the HUD is the new Up Front Control Panel (UFC) and this is a combination of buttons and rocker switches that allow the pilot to more easily input data and control subsystems at eye-level. This permits pilots to still fly when hydraulic power or part of a wing is lost using the Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS). flight control. Replacing the old Armament Control Panel (ACP) of the A-10A has been the Armament HUD Control Panel (AHCP). the pilot can simply drop the gear and a combination of gravity and wind resistance will open and lock the gear in place. The aircraft is designed to fly with one engine. The aircraft has triple redundancy in its flight systems. Digital Stores Management System (DSMS). Most of the engine. the current A-10C has a great many differences in regards to the integrated weapon and navigation system. it has a much greater level of functionality compared to the older stick based on the F4 ―Phantom‖ stick. Both MFCD can display a wide variety of data including the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD) with moving map.




Pilot Survival and System Redundancy
The A-10 is an exceptionally survivable aircraft with excellent pilot protection. electrical. datalink. Additionally. and systems monitoring. The Precision Engagement (PE) Modification Program made several important changes to the cockpit to support the avionics upgrades:  New control stick based on the F-16 stick. the new left throttle provides an additional level of control and functionality. As with the new control stick. emergency and lighting systems have remained the same since the first A-10A went operational. and repeat data from the EGI navigation system. Dominating the new front dash of the A-10C are two 5x5 inch Multi-Function Color Displays (MFCD). Its strong airframe can survive direct hits from armor-piercing and high-explosive projectiles up to 23 mm.

Additionally. These radios can be used for both open and secure voice. It is made up of titanium plates with thicknesses from ½ inch to 1½ inches determined by a study of likely trajectories and deflection angles. The tub has been tested to withstand strikes from 23 mm cannon fire and some strikes from 57 mm rounds. The canopy consists of a bullet-proof diffusion-bonded stretched-acrylic to withstand small arms fire and is resistant to spalling. the armor itself weighs almost 6% of the entire aircraft’s empty weight.
Radio Equipment
The A-10C radio communications suite includes two AN/ARC-186(V) VHF radios and one AN/ARC-164 UHF radio. Left Console Showing VHF and UHF Radios
EAGLE DYNAMICS 53
. To protect the pilot from the fragmentation likely to be created from impact of a shell. the back left console houses the intercom control head that allows the pilot to adjust radio and other audio device volumes. any interior surface of the tub that is directly exposed to the pilot is covered by a multi-layer Kevlar spall shield. though. The front windscreen offers shielding resistant to 20 mm cannon fire.
Figure 38.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
The cockpit and parts of the flight-control system are protected by 900 pounds (408 kg) of titanium armor. data and ADF communications. This protection comes at a cost. referred to as a titanium "bathtub".

The other two sets are housed in the rear of the main landing gear wheel bays. Combined. Mode C. it included an updated Countermeasure System.
54 GENERAL DESIGN
. the A-10 includes the KY-58 Secure Voice Control Panel and allows the pilot to set multiple encryption code presets to either VHF or UHF communications. Two sets are on the wingtips and these are generally loaded with chaff cartridges. Mode 2.
Figure 39. Note the A-10 does not have the ability to interrogate other aircraft using IFF. these two panels allow the pilot to select and program chaff and flare release programs and set how electronic countermeasures should be used (manual to fully automatic). and Mode 4 IFF response. The A-10 has four sets of chaff and flare dispensers. and these are generally loaded with flares. Mode 3/A. This system consists of the Countermeasure Signal Processor (CMSP) on the right console and the Countermeasures Set Control (CMSC) below the HUD.
Countermeasures Systems
When the A-10A Suite 2 was introduced.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
For secure communications. Countermeasure Signal Processor (CMSP) Panel On the left front dash is the ALR-69 Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) and this display alerts the pilot of detected radar signals and the detection of launched missiles via the Missile Warning System (MWS). The IFF/SIF panel allows the pilot to set Mode 1.

The Ju 87G was an outmoded airframe with improvised anti-tank weapons attached. "Stuka Pilot". Rudel flew the Ju 87G Stuka for the Luftwaffe and destroyed many Soviet tanks using its two underwing Bordkanone BK 3.7 37 mm caliber anti-tank auto cannon. YA-10 proto-type aircraft No. Particularly for the possible battleground of Western Europe being invaded by hordes of Warsaw Pact tanks.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
A-10C STORES
A/A 49E / GAU-8/A
In 1974. These tests proved highly successful. In World War II. GAU-8/A
EAGLE DYNAMICS 55
. His book was required reading for members on the A-X project team. The decision to make the 30 mm GAU-8/A cannon the main anti-tank weapon of the A-10A was influenced by Vietnam-era A-1 pilots and by Hans-Ulrich Rudel and his book. the GAU-8/A was an ideal and necessary choice. yet still inflicted significant casualties on Soviet tank forces.
Figure 40. 1 was retrofitted with the production model GAU-8/A sevenbarreled ―Avenger‖ 30 mm cannon and initial tests were performed against an array of M48 and T-62 tanks.

940. The system weighs 4.200 lbs. high setting. GAU-8/A 30 mm Round The cannon has three possible ammunition loads and can be configured from the IFFCC Test Menu:  Combat Mix (CM). The current version of the A-10C only has a single. In earlier models of the A-10A.240 ft/sec. and weighs as much as a car. Target Practice (TP). This load exclusively uses the PGU-13 (HEI) round.000 lb recoil was sufficient to move the nose of the aircraft. a very high rate of fire can be achieved without excessive barrel heating. One PGU-13 High Explosive Incendiary (HEI) for every five rounds of PGU-14 Armor Piercing Incendiary (API) rounds. the gun could be fired in either low or high rate of fire. To remedy this. The GAU-8/A is actually part of the larger A/A 49E-6 gun system that also includes the ammunition drum. This is the ammunition of choice for armored vehicles and can destroy a tank out to 21. the nose gear was moved to the right and the cannon placed along the center line of the aircraft. these are all joined around a single rotor along a common axis using a hydraulic motor.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Using the Gatlin gun’s seven rotating barrels. During Operation Desert Storm. Tests results showed that the 10. This is because as one barrel fires the other six are briefly cooling down. The API round uses Depleted Uranium (DU) and has a muzzle velocity of 3.600 ft. Each of the seven barrels acts as an individual 30 mm cannon with its own breech and bolt. Inert warhead round version used for training.
Figure 41.
 
56 A-10C STORES
.254 rounds of CM were fired. High Explosive Incendiary (HEI).

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
A-10C Station Racks
On each of the 11 weapon stations. Note that BDU-33 can only be mounted on a TER mounted on stations 5 and 7. is middlerightleft. A TER can only be mounted on stations 3. The Single Ejector Bomb Rack can be mounted on any of the 11 stations and any of the unguided bombs can be loaded on it depending on the station. 5.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 57
. 4. For example: lighter bombs can only be mounted on the far-outboard stations. one of two types of bomb racks can be mounted and will in some cases depend on the station:
S in g le Ej ec t o r Ra ck (S E R)
This rack mounts a single weapon and is the only rack type or launcher that can be loaded with particularly heavy bombs like the Mk-84 (GBU-31 / GBU-10). 7. and 9. The release sequence for weapons on a TER. when facing the TER. Weapon Station with Single Ejector Rack
Tri p le Ej ec t o r Ra ck (TE R)
The TER allows you to mount three weapons of a single type on a weapon station. 8.
Figure 42.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 43.75 inch Folding Fin Aerial Rockets (FFAR) in this simulation use the MK66 rocket motor.75 inch Hydra 70 rockets using either the LAU-68/A or LAU-131 seven-tube launchers. FFAR rockets are an area effect weapon and are certainly not a precision attack weapon. there is no significant difference between these two launchers. the Hydra 70 has evolved into wide array of air-to-surface aerial rockets.75 inch Hydra 70 Unguided Folding Fin Aerial Rockets
The A-10C can employ a wide variety of 2. Although initially designed as an air-to-air weapon.
58 A-10C STORES
. Other than a minor weight difference. Triple Ejector Rack BRU-42
2. Common targets for most of the rocket warheads include un-armored or lightly armored targets and they can be useful as a suppression weapon. All the 2.

the Mk-82 is the most commonly dropped general purpose bomb by the A-10 and it provides good blast and fragmentation effects against unarmored and lightly-armored targets. Weighing 510 lb with 192 lb of Tritonal high explosive. The bomb has a thin steel jacket that contributes to fragmentation effects.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Unguided Bombs
Unguided bombs that the A-10C can employee fall into three categories: General Purpose (GP). The Mk-82 serves as the basis for several other bombs including the Mk-82AIR. GBU-38.
Figure 46. MK-82 LDGP
EAGLE DYNAMICS 61
. The Mk-82 can be mounted on a TER and SER racks The standard Mk-82 is a low-drag ―slick‖ bomb. and Training:
General Purpose Bombs
Mk -82 L DGP
Developed in the 1950s as part of the Mk (pronounced Mark) 80 series of bombs. Cluster. GBU-12. also referred to as a Low Drag General Purpose (LDGP) bomb. The bomb is aerodynamically streamlined with four conical tail fins for flight stability. and BDU-50(HD/LD/LGB).

75 in
Mk -82 AI R
This version of the Mk-82 adds the BSU-49/B high drag tail assembly. The Mk-82AIR can be mounted on a TER and SER racks. the Mk-84 can also be effective against armored targets when dropped in close proximity. select nose/tail or tail fuze setting in the DSMS profile. This allows the bomb to rapidly slow down after release.
62 A-10C STORES
. Although most effective against unarmored and lightly-armored targets.
Figure 47.039 lb with 945 lb of H-6 or Tritonal high explosive. You can choose to release the Mk-82AIR in either retarded or ―slick‖ (no ballute deployed) modes. you can release such a retarded weapon at low altitude and not be caught in the blast effect of the weapon. By slowing down. and to release retarded. also called the ―ballute‖. select only a nose fuze. To drop as a slick. The Mk-84 can only be mounted on a SER.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Total Weight Explosive Weight Length Diameter 510 lbs 192 lbs 87. MK-82AIR HDGP
Mk -84 L DGP
The Mk-84 is the big brother of the Mk-82 and it weighs 2.4 in 10.

Each BLU-97/B CEB contains a shaped-charged. the CEB can be effective against the generally light armor covering the top of an armored vehicle such as a tank. the bomb can create a crater measuring 50 feet across and 36 feet deep.039 lbs 945 lbs 129 in 18 in
Cluster Bombs
CB U -87
The CBU-87 Combined Effects Munitions (CEM) weighs 950 lbs and is an all-purpose cluster bomb.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
As with the Mk-82. The dispersal footprint of the bomblets depends on the Height of Function (HOF) and RPM spin setting in the DSMS/Inventory weapon configuration setting page. The CBU-87 can only be mounted on a SER. Each CEB is designed to fragment into 300 fragments. The Mk-84 forms the basis for other bombs including the GBU-10 and GBU-31 that the A-10C also carries. the Mk-84 has a thin steel casing with four conical stabilization fins mounted on the rear of the bomb. Mk-84 LDGP Total Weight Explosive Weight Length Diameter 2. anti-personnel fragmentation. scored steel casing and a zirconium ring for antiarmor. However.
Figure 48. the general bomblet footprint coverage is 200 by 400 meters. Given the top attack angle of the weapon. The SW-65 Tactical Munitions Dispenser contains 202 BLU-97/B Combined Effects Bomblets (CEB) and they are effective against armored and unarmored targets. and incendiary effects device.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 63
. At impact.

This bomb can be mounted on both TER and SER racks.50L D
The BDU-50LD is the low drag (slick) training version of the Mk-82 but with an inert warhead.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
General Purpose Training Bombs
BD U. This bomb can be mounted on both TER and SER racks.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 65
.
Figure 50.50 HD
The BDU-50HD is the high drag training version of the Mk-82AIR but with an inert warhead. BDU-50LD
BD U.

66 A-10C STORES
. BDU-50HD
BD U.33
The BDU-33 is a miniaturized training bomb that mimics the ballistics of larger general purpose bombs.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 51. The BDU-33 contains a small smoke charge to help round spotting.

In regards to the LUU-2.000 feet. Visible-spectrum illumination. LUU-19. a programmable timer deploys a parachute and ignites the flare candle.
Figure 53.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 52. The SUU-25 pod can be loaded on both SER and TER racks. After ejection. Deployed LUU-2B/B
EAGLE DYNAMICS 67
. IR-spectrum illumination that provides assistance to night vision devices. It can be loaded on a single rack on stations 2. 3. The LUU-2 and LUU-19 series of flares are carried 8 a piece in the SUU-25 pod and are deployed one at a time using CCRP mode.   LUU-2B/B. The flare will burn for approximately 5 minutes. BDU-33
Illumination Flares
The A-10C can drop illumination flares to illuminate a battlefield area for ground forces without benefit of night vision devices. the flare burns magnesium and provides illumination over a 500 meter circular area when the flare is at 1. 9 and 10 and on TERs on stations 3 and 9.

If in CCIP. it will be important to note that both the designating aircraft and the aircraft dropping the LGB are set to the same laser code. the wing-like airfoil surfaces at the rear of the bomb extend and are used to maneuver the bomb to the laser designation
68 A-10C STORES
.
Laser Guided Bombs
The A-10C can employ Laser Guided Bombs (LGB) by either self-designating the target with its own targeting pod. SUU-25 Canister Illumination flares can only be released in Manual Release mode using CCRP.10 P a ve way II
This Guided Bomb Unit (GBU) weighs 2. When buddy-lasing for another aircraft. The laser code is set in the Control Page of the A-G targeting pod mode. Once dropped. you will be given a HUD message to switch to CCRP. The laser detector on the nose of the bomb detects the reflected energy of the designating laser at the set laser code. or allowing another air or ground unit to laser designate the target for an LGB attack. Either way. The two types of LGB available for the A-10C are:
GB U.562 lbs and is basically a laser-guided version of the Mk-84 unguided bomb with a general purpose warhead.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 54. the basics of an LGB delivery are roughly the same.

The GBU-12 guides using the same principles as the GBU-10.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
point. 5. 8. 2. the A-10C can carry a large number of these bombs for pinpoint attacks. GBU-10 LGB Total Weight Explosive Weight Length Diameter Glide Range Impact Accuracy 2. 7. and in Triple Ejector Racks (TER) on stations 3. 4. A direct hit from a 500 lb-class bomb will destroy even the most heavily armored tank every time! This bomb can be loaded on both single ejector racks on stations 1. 4. Suitable targets for the GBU-10 are large and/or hardened targets that require an accurate and powerful strike.081 lbs 945 lbs 170 in 23 in (includes airfoils) 8 nm Within 9 m
GB U. the only difference being the bomb the LGB is based on. Given the ability to carry three GBU-12s per TER. 9. 3. general purpose bomb. and 9.
Figure 55. GBU-10 can only be hung from a single ejector rack on stations 3.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 69
. 7. 4. During Operation Desert Storm for example: F-111 bombers used GBU12 to great effect to ―plinking‖ Iraqi tanks sitting static in the desert. the bomb uses a series discreet input corrections and this is often referred to as ―bang bang‖ guidance mode. Rather than a smooth and constant input of course-corrections to reach the target. and 11. Such targets often include bridges. 8. bunkers. 8. and 9. 10. and hardened command posts. 5.12 P a ve way II
This GBU is the laser-guided version of the Mk-82 unguided.

they are useless against moving ones.
Inertially Guided Munitions (IAM)
The A-10C can carry two types of Inertially Aided Munitions (IAM): Global Positioning System (GPS) guided and Inertial-guided system (INS) guided. 7. the bomb will correct its flight path to impact at the coordinate which is also the SPI. The BDU-50LGB is the training version of the GBU-12 with the only difference being an inert warhead and the casing being colored blue (standard color for training ordnance). 5.
70 A-10C STORES
. and 9 on single ejector racks. IAMs can only be mounted on the six 1760 smart stations of the A-10C: 3.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 56. and once released. Although these weapons can be useful against static targets. These bombs use a coordinate position (SPI in the A-10C case) downloaded into the guidance system of the bomb. 8. GBU-12 LGB Total Weight Explosive Weight Length Diameter Glide Range Impact Accuracy 611 lbs 192 lbs 131 in 18 in (includes airfoils) 8 nm Within 9 m
BDU-50LGB. 4.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 71
. This kit. the GBU-31 has the strakes along the sides of the bomb to improve flight characteristics. Unlike the GBU-38 though.
Figure 57.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
GB U. GBU-38 can only be loaded one per station on the 1760 smart stations. turns an ordinary Mk-82 into a precision guided munition with a significant stand-off glide range. and strakes along the body of some JDAM versions (not so with the GBU-38).38
The GBU-38 is a standard Mk-82 general purpose bomb fitted with a GPS guidance kit.31
The GBU-31 is a standard Mk-84 general purpose bomb fitted with a JDAM guidance kit. referred to as the Joint Directed Attack Munition (JDAM) kit. actuated tail surfaces to steer it. For the A-10C.75 in 8 nm Within 33 feet
GB U. This ability to strike targets through clouds and weather gives it a significant advantage of laser-guided bombs. As long as the bomb can be provided adequate GPS signal. it can strike within 33 feet of inputted target coordinates day or night and in most any weather.64 in 10. The kit consists of the GPS antenna on the rear of the bomb. the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) can be set as the target point for a JDAM attack. GBU-38 IAM Total Weight Explosive Weight Length Diameter Glide Range Impact Accuracy 558 lbs 192 lbs 92.

Using Inertial Navigation System (INS) guidance.6 in 14. a WCMD (pronounced ―Wick Mid‖) does not use GPS guidance. and then use the tail kit to steer the bomb to the target location.
CB U -10 5
The CBU-105 is the Wind Corrected Munitions Dispenser (WCMD) tail kit version of the CBU-97. Unlike the GBU-31 and GBU-38.5 in 8 nm Within 33 feet
CB U -10 3
The CBU-103 is a standard CBU-87 cluster bomb fitted with an INS guidance kit to form a Wind Corrected Munition Dispenser (WCMD). This provides an inexpensive means to deliver CBU systems at medium to high altitudes accurately. the WCMD system uses the aircraft’s inertial navigation system to ―know‖ its current location and the location of the target.
72 A-10C STORES
. Rather. the CBU-105 can be dropped at much higher altitudes than the CBU-97 and guide to the targeted location (SPI).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 58.085 lbs 945 lbs 148. GBU-31 IAM Total Weight Explosive Weight Length Diameter Glide Range Impact Accuracy 2. The CBU-103 marries a CBU-87 with a WCMD guidance kit.

The Maverick can only be loaded on stations 3 and 9 and either from the LAU-117 single rail launcher or the LAU-88 triple rail launcher. Imaging infrared seeker with 125 lb shaped warhead. air defense. AGM-65G. and this generally happens between 3 and 7 nm. The Maverick is a fire-and-forget weapon.6 in 14. Can be loaded on LAU117 or up to three on a LAU-88. and fortified targets. Can only be loaded on LAU-117. stand-off air-to-ground missile that is best suited against armored. Practical engagement range of the Maverick is generally restricted by seeker lock on range. you may wish to first use Maverick to eliminate any air defense units from a distance first. Maverick versions include:   AGM-65D. CBU-103 IAM Total Weight Explosive Weight Length Diameter Glide Range Impact Accuracy 950 lbs 945 lbs 148. When attacking a target area.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 59.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 73
. Imaging infrared seeker with 300 lb heavyweight penetrator warhead. meaning. The Maverick includes several different versions that differ in seeker type and warhead type.5 in 8 nm Within 30 feet
AGM-65 Maverick
The AGM-65 Maverick is a precision-guided. once launched you no longer need to guide the weapon. Each version also has a training version (designated TGM or CATM).

Training version of AGM-65D with inert rocket motor and warhead.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
      AGM-65H. Can be loaded on LAU-117 or up to three on a LAU-88. Training version of AGM-65G with inert rocket motor and warhead. CATM-65K. Training version of AGM-65H with inert rocket motor and warhead. Can only be loaded on LAU-117. Electro-optical seeker with 300 lb heavyweight penetrator warhead. Can be loaded on LAU-117 or up to three on a LAU-88. Training version of AGM-65K with inert rocket motor and warhead. TGM-65H. Can only be loaded on LAU-117. TGM-65G. TGM-65D.
Figure 60. Maverick Launch
74 A-10C STORES
. Electro-optical seeker with 125 lb shaped warhead. Can be loaded on LAU-117 or up to three on a LAU-88. Can only be loaded on LAU-117. AGM-65K.

Air-to-Air weapons of the A-10C include the 30 mm gun in Air-to-Air mode and the AIM-9M Sidewinder Air-to-Air Missile. The A10C does not include any sort of radar. but the rocket motor and warhead are inert.150 km/h 17+ miles
AIM-9M / CATM-9M Sidewinder
Although the A-10C is not designed for air-to-air combat.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 63. the A-10C can also carry the CATM-9M training missile. TGM-65D Weight Diameter Length Speed Range 485 lbs (D and H) and 670 lbs (G and K) 12 in 2. In addition to the AIM-9M Sidewinder. it does have capabilities for air-to-air selfdefense and can engage the hapless enemy helicopter that strays too close. so using these weapons is based on visual aiming and acquiring targets with the targeting pod if desired. This store has the same seeker as the AIM-9M.
76 A-10C STORES
.5 m 1. Both the AIM-9M and the CATM-9M are mounted on the Dual Rail Adapter (DRA) which can be mounted only on stations 1 and 11.

However.85 m 127 mm 91 kg 1.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
The AIM-9 uses an infrared detector in the nose of the missile to detect and track the infrared energy of targets. As such.5
TK600 External Fuel Tanks
The TK600 external fuel tank carries 600 gallons of fuel and can be carried on stations 4. 6 and 8. some target aircraft may deploy infrared countermeasure flares that will attempt to decoy the missile. As such.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 77
. AIM-9M Sidewinder Length Diameter Weight Range Speed 2. target aircraft that are in after burner or have a larger infrared signature are more easily detected and tracked. The fuel tank is unarmored and has no self-sealing capability.18 km Mach 2. this fuel tank is only carried during ferry missions and is never flown with in combat.
Figure 64.

The pod can also detect laser illumination and track it in the Laser Spot Search and Laser Spot Track (LSS/LST) modes.
Figure 66. AAQ-28 Litening AT
78 A-10C STORES
. Also built into the pod is a laser designation and ranging system and an infrared pointing device (IR Pointer).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 65. TK600 External Fuel Tank
AN/AAQ-28 Litening AT Targeting Pod
The Litening AT targeting pod incorporates both a day-time Charged Coupled Device (CCD) TV camera and a Forward Looking Infrared (FLIR) camera that are used to acquire and track targets day and night.

20 m 0. you can use the pod to laser designate a target for another aircraft to drop a laser-guided bomb on. The Litening pod allows you to acquire targets at long range at day or night and be able to cue the designation point as the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI). Once tracked.5 in 183 in
EAGLE DYNAMICS 79
. The pod is a very powerful device but is best used above 10.000 feet to take advantage of its sight range. This pod would never be carried in a combat mission. for the A-10C it acts as a travel pod when the aircraft is deployed.406 m 200 kg
MXU-648 Travel Pod
Although this container has seen a broad range of uses over the years over a wide range of aircraft. Additionally. The pod generally contains such items as intake covers. and pin flags. MXU-648 Travel Pod Carry Weight Diameter Length 234 lbs 26. The pod can either be hung on station 2 or 10.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
In addition to the air-to-ground (A-G) mode of operation. and this is often a visible means to identify an A-10C compared to an A-10A in which the pod is hung on station 3 or 9. wheel chocks. the pod can also be placed in air-to-air (AA) mode and be capable of acquiring and automatically tracking air targets. Length Diameter Weight 2.
Figure 67. the AIM9M air-to-air missile can automatically have its seeker slewed to it.

engine state. aircraft system states. A-10C Cockpit The cockpit of the A-10C contains three primary instrument panels that include gauges and indicators that display flight parameters. all flight and weapon system controls must be readily accessible to the pilot. Owing to the single-pilot operation of the A-10C cockpit. with practice and a study of this manual. You
82 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. a study of the many MFCD pages and HUD modes will be a must. many of the operations have been streamlined and simplified compared to the older A-10A model. However. and system warnings. In this manual. This has led to a rather crowded cockpit that at first can seem quite intimidating! However. the first several chapters are devoted to reference data on all the various systems.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
COCKPIT CONTROLS
Instrument Panels Overview
Heads Up Display (HUD) Front Dash
Left Console
Control Stick
Throttles Right Console
Figure 68. With the addition of two Multifunction Color Displays (MFCD). control positions. the cockpit will soon feel like your home office. The second half of this manual will walk you through how to operationally use these functions.

these can be reviewed in your keyboard input control list. All of the mouse click functions also have keyboard press equivalents. the A-10C stick is a full-motion stick that is centrally mounted like the A-10A stick. This can include:     Left mouse click to toggle a switch or button Left or right mouse click to rotate a rotary dial Rotate the mouse wheel to spin a knob Left click and drag to spin a knob
When the mouse is placed over a control that can be manipulated. Possible SOI may include:   Tactical Awareness Display (TAD) active Targeting Pod (TGP)
EAGLE DYNAMICS 83
. many of the stick switches and buttons can have multiple functions. the cursor will turn green and provide you an icon to indicate the type of possible action. Note that you can also use the trim hat to adjust pitch and roll stick neutral settings. Pushing and pulling on the stick affects aircraft pitch (move elevators) and moving the stick from side to side inputs roll (move the ailerons). These tool tips can be toggled off and on from the options menu. Using your mouse. Let’s do a walk-around of the primary areas of the cockpit: The primary flight instruments are located on the front dash. The A-10C stick differs from the older A-10A stick that was based on the control stick of the F-4 ―Phantom II‖. Many of the controls in the cockpit have pop-up tool tips displayed when the mouse is hovered over them.
Control Stick
The primary function of the control stick is to provide pitch and roll commands to maneuver the aircraft. The stick has a number of buttons and hats that allow you to manipulate the various systems of the A-10C without having to take your hands off the stick.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
may wish to cross reference back and forth between chapters to best understand a system and its operational functionality. Depending on selected Sensor Of Interest (SOI). These keyboard commands are listed in blue within this manual. you may manipulate many of the controls. beneath the Heads Up Display (HUD). However. The A-10C stick on the other hand is based on the F-16 ―Viper‖ stick. This can be useful when trying to remember the many control functions within the cockpit. unlike the side-mounted F-16 stick that is pressure based and barely moves. The most common means to set the SOI is by use of the Coolie Hat on the throttles.

Speed Brake 8.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
8. Throttles The throttles are your primary means of controlling the thrust of your two TF-34-GE-100A engines. moving them forward and over the ―hump‖.
Throttles
1. Functions according to SOI include: TGP Fire Cannon HUD Fire Cannon AIM-9 Fire Cannon MAV Fire Cannon
Note: The Precision Attitude Control (PAC) system can be assigned to a single stage trigger to be enabled when the cannon is fired. China Hat
Figure 70. If you want to increase thrust. push the throttles forward and if you want to decrease thrust pull them back. Left Throttle Button 5.   Linked throttles up Linked throttles down
EAGLE DYNAMICS 87
. TAD Fire Cannon Trigger. If you have a programmable control stick at home. The left throttle is the same left throttle as found in the older A-10A and the right throttle is taken from the F-15E ―Strike Eagle‖. Coolie Hat 3. it will initiate the auto-start (assuming other startup steps are first accomplished) and the engines will be at IDLE power. If you have a two-stage trigger joystick. You can do so using the input control manager in the options screen. Mic Switch 6. Slew Control 2. Pinky Switch (Invisible)
7. When both the left and right throttles are all the way back. the engines are shut down (OFF). However. you may assign PACS to the first stage and cannon fire to the second stage. you may wish to program it to match these settings. Boat Switch
4.

Also like the control stick. The most common means to set the SOI is by use of the Coolie Hat on the throttles.
Boat Switch.
Speed Brake. Functions according to SOI include: TAD Retract Brakes Extend Brakes Hold Brake Position TGP Retract Brakes Extend Brakes Hold Brake Position HUD Retract Brakes Extend Brakes Hold Brake Position AIM-9 Retract Brakes Extend Brakes Hold Brake Position MAV Retract Brakes Extend Brakes Hold Brake Position
Direction Forward Aft Center
3. the function of a switch or button will often vary according to the selected Sensor of Interest (SOI). the time duration an input is made (Short or Long) can determine the output function of the control. Functions according to SOI include: TAD VHF 1 Transmit VHF 2 Transmit TGP VHF 1 Transmit VHF 2 Transmit HUD VHF 1 Transmit VHF 2 Transmit AIM-9 VHF 1 Transmit VHF 2 Transmit MAV VHF 1 Transmit VHF 2 Transmit
Direction Forward Aft Up Down
UHF Transmit
UHF Transmit
UHF Transmit
UHF Transmit
UHF Transmit
2. Mic Switch. Functions according to SOI include: TAD TGP FLIR BHOT FLIR WHOT HUD AIM-9 MAV Black Symbols White Symbols
Direction Forward Aft
88 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The throttles’ functions are as follows according to SOI: 1. Like the control stick.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
    Left throttle up Left throttle down Right throttle up Right throttle down
On both throttles are several switches and buttons that allow you to control aircraft systems.

Functions according to SOI include: TGP Slew TGP LOS HUD Slew TDC AIM-9 Slew AIM-9 Seeker / Consent MAV Slew Maverick / Consent
8. Functions according to SOI include: Duration TAD HUD as SOI Short Swap MFCD Content DSMS Quick Look Cycle Left MFCD Set Left MFCD as SOI Cycle Right MFCD Set Right MFCD as SOI TGP HUD as SOI Swap MFCD Content DSMS Quick Look Cycle Left MFCD Set Left MFCD as SOI Cycle Right MFCD Set Right MFCD as SOI HUD HUD as SOI Swap MFCD Content DSMS Quick Look Cycle Left MFCD Set Left MFCD as SOI Cycle Right MFCD Set Right MFCD as SOI AIM-9 HUD as SOI Swap MFCD Content DSMS Quick Look Cycle Left MFCD Set Left MFCD as SOI Cycle Right MFCD Set Right MFCD as SOI MAV HUD as SOI Swap MFCD Content DSMS Quick Look Cycle Left MFCD Set Left MFCD as SOI Cycle Right MFCD Set Right MFCD as SOI
Direction Up Down
Long Left Short Long
Right
Short
Long
90 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. TAD Slew TAD cursor Slew Control.
Coolie Hat.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
7.

center.
8 1
9
13
2
3 10 4
5 11
6
7 12
Figure 71. gauges. We’ll discuss each of these in detail. and top. 2.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Front Dash
The forward area of the cockpit consists of a variety of instruments. the analog gauges can provide a valuable backup and provide additional information not present on the HUD.
Left Front Dash
The left forward panel is primarily dedicated to various flight control gauges and warning systems. Left engine ―T Handle‖ fire extinguisher discharge select Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) display Airspeed indicator
EAGLE DYNAMICS 91
. displays and controls. right. While most of the primary flight information will be displayed on the heads up display (HUD). 3. The front dash is divided into four primary areas: left. Left Front Dash 1.

Please reference the Defensive Systems chapter to learn about this display in detail. this gauge is divided into increments (tick marks) of 20-knots with a maximum speed indication of 550 knots. This display will also provide azimuth of detected missile launches. The solid-white pointer indicates current airspeed and the black and white striped pointer indicates maximum airspeed according to altitude. Radar Warning Receiver The azimuth indicator is a circular-shaped display that provides you a visual representation of radar emitters around your aircraft.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) Display
Figure 73.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 93
.
Airspeed Indicator
2 3
1
Figure 74. Airspeed Indicator Displaying indicated air speed. The rotary drum indicates decimals of main dial.

An OFF warning flag appears on the left side of the gauge if no power is applied or the gauge has been caged. 1. this backup serves as independent attitude verification. 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1. Current Airspeed Maximum Speed Decimals rotary
Standby Attitude Indicator (SAI)
1 2
Figure 75. 2. 3. This is a backup instrument and would only be used in case the ADI fails. A knob labeled PULL TO CAGE is located to the lower right of the gauge and allows you to cage the gauge by pulling it or you may rotate it to adjust the level pitch angle. OFF Warning Flag Cage Knob
94 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Standby Attitude Indicator Mirroring the basic function of the ADI.

When the gauge is not powered. points to the current angle of attack except when no power is applied.
Angle of Attack Indicator
1 2
Figure 77. The angle of attack gauge displays this angle as an indication between 0 and 30 units with each tick mark on the gauge as one unit. UHF Repeater The preset UHF frequency on the AN/ARC-164 UHF radio control head is repeated on this indicator.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
UHF Frequency Repeater
Figure 76. a red OFF flag is displayed on the right side of the gauge.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 95
. With no power. The pointer. the pointer defaults to 30 units. The A-10C measures this with a vane on the wings. extending from the center of the gauge. Angle of Attack Indicator Angle of attack measures the difference between the longitudinal axis of the aircraft and the relative wind.

The buttons are labeled ―SEL‖ for select and ―CTRL‖ for control. 1. Two pushbuttons on the front face of clock are used to select the desired operating mode. Select Button Control Button
96 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. These buttons have various functions:   CLOCK MODE (default) displays current time. 2. and a third press resets the timer to zero. the CTRL button has no function
When in Elapsed Time mode. as indicated by an ―ET‖ in the display
Clock mechanization works as follows:    When in Clock Mode.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1. the second press stops the timer.‖ ELAPSED TIME MODE displays elapsed time counting upward from 00:00:00. Digital Clock The clock has a digital readout in HH:MM:SS format where the seconds are displayed on the bottom. A digital second hand also rotates depicting seconds on the periphery of the display. the CTRL button is used to start. stop and reset the timer. the SEL button switches to Elapsed Time Mode When in Elapsed Time Mode. Current angle of attack OFF warning flag (not pictured above)
Digital Clock
1
2
Figure 78. the SEL button switches to Clock Mode When in Clock Mode. 2. The first press starts the timer. as indicated by a ―C.

Once pressed.
Left Multifunction Color Display (MFCD)
Adjust Display Backlight Brightness
Video Contrast
Display Brightness
Day / Night Select
Symbol Brightness
Figure 80. TAD. DSMS.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Emergency Jettison Button
Figure 79. all stores will be released in station priority order. Information displayed on the MFCDs is derived from the Central Interface Control Unit (CICU). etc.). the MFCDs are activated and deactivated by the CICU toggle
EAGLE DYNAMICS 97
. and regardless of landing gear handle position. you may press the EXT STORES JETT button located in the top left portion of the front dash. Emergency Jettison Button To immediately jettison all stores (excluding the Targeting Pod and ECM pod) on stations 1 through 11. As such. Multifunction Color Display (MFCD) The A-10C contains two Multifunction Color Displays (MFCDs) that allow display of multiple system pages (DTS.

Ground reference. The vertical line mark represents the vertical stabilizer and the two horizontal lines represent the wings. the arc increases in size above 180° the greater the dive angle (360° in a 90° dive).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
switch on the Armament HUD Control panel (AHCP). The ARS symbol is composed of three primary components: Ownship reference. Consequently. This is a static symbol that always stays in the center of the ARS with the aircraft longitudinal axis represented by the circle in the center of the symbol.     OSBs 1 – 5 are along the top of the MFCD OSBs 6 – 10 are along the right side of the MFCD OSBs 11 – 15 are along the bottom of the MFCD OSBs 16 – 20 are along the left side of the MFCD
To activate a button. during a 45° bank. The ground reference arc revolves around this symbol to denote pitch and bank angle. During level flight. Each MFCD is 5x5 inches and has five Option Select Buttons (OSB) on each of the four sides (20 total). you may either left mouse button on it our press the assigned keyboard key. These OSB will have various functions depending on the MFCD page and page function. an equal amount of ground and sky is seen. It provides you an indication of the aircraft’s current pitch. as such. the arc will decrease in size according to the nose-up angle (no arc would be displayed at a 90° climb angle). roll and barometric altitude. the indicator displays increasingly more ground as the dive pitch increases. However. If the aircraft is diving. Please refer to the MFCD Pages Chapter for further details about the MFCD.
At t i tu d e Re fe r en c e S ym b ol ( A RS )
Roll Symbol Region Ownship Reference
Ground Tie
Ground Reference Arc
In the lower left corner of each MFCD is the Attitude Reference Symbol (ARS). Each OSB is also Tool Tip context sensitive and you will receive a tool tip of the OSB function when you hover the mouse cursor over it. If the aircraft is nose up. you still see a full 180° arc but it is rotated 45°. the arc represents 180°. The arc portion of the display is the ―ground‖ portion and is similar to an ADI indicator.
98 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.

De cl u t te r
Several of the MFCD pages have a Declutter option. The Declutter state of a page is saved. Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).500 feet. each page can be decluttered independently. Family pages include: o o o All TGP pages Maverick video page All TAD pages



EAGLE DYNAMICS 99
. the ―DCLT‖ legend is displayed in reverse video. the OSBs still function according to their assignment. Performing a Declutter or deactivating Declutter in a Family of pages applies the function to all pages within the Family. For example. If the DCLT OSB is selected and Declutter is active on the selected page. The Declutter (DCLT) OSB allows you to remove the OSB legends 1 through 10 and OSB legends 16 through 20 on the Targeting Pod (TGP). ―025‖ indicates 2. Declutter of a page only applies to the selected page and not others. The first two large digits represent thousands of feet and the small digit to the right indicates hundreds of feet. Pressing DCLT a second time disables the Declutter function and the ―DCLT‖ legend will appear normally (in non-reversed video). In the lower left corner of the symbol field is the barometric altitude. the original page will remain decluttered. Additional rules regarding the Declutter function:  Even if a page is decluttered and the removed legends are not visible.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Straight and Level
Straight and 45º Climb
Straight and 45º Dive
Ownship Altitude. This indicates that Declutter is active. The Declutter is assigned to OSB 11 by default. This includes having the same page on both MFCDs (one MFCD can have the page decluttered and the other not). This allows you a more unobstructed view of these pages. and then comes back to the original page. This means that if you declutter a page. and Maverick MFCD pages. go to another page. Tool tips associated with those OSBs will still function as well.

or switch to a different page. data entry is not possible. press it a second time. If the Rotary OSB is held down for more than 0. the user uses the SOI select Coolie Hat Down Short command. In order to enter values in this manner. System Action. This type of character informs you that pressing the OSB will command a specified action. then the values will automatically cycle at every three seconds or until the OSB is no longer pressed. When an Increment/Decrement OSB is selected. the scratchpad is cleared upon entry.5 seconds. When an OSB is selected. To initiate a Swap. Branch. There are six types of OSB symbol characters:  Data Entry. select a different OSB. If the CDU is unavailable. If the data entered is valid. This type allows you to cycle through a series of values in a preset order.controller on the UFC to cycle through a series of values. an error indication is placed on the scratchpad (see UFC section). Indicated as either a left or right pointing arrow. etc. These can include cycling of selections. Rotary. however. the character (symbol) will be displayed in reverse video. When displays are swapped.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
S wa p
The Swap function allows you to exchange the contents of the left and right MFCDs. Each press of the Rotary OSB cycles to the next specified value. the first value will be displayed (the values will ―wrap‖). the Increment/Decrement OSB must be selected first. system action. Increment/Decrement. The selected value will not take effect until 1/2 second after the Rotary OSB has been released. This character type denotes the ability to use the +/. To deselect such an OSB. a press of the ENTER button on the UFC or CDU saves the data entry. however. This function is similar to the Increment/Decrement function but does not rely upon the UFC to cycle data values. This OSB action type is denoted by the up and down pointing. generally indicated by the OSB label. if that data is invalid. OSBs with this character will direct to a different page when pressed. This character type ―[ ]‖ allows you to enter data from the Control Display Unit (CDU) or Up Front Controller (UFC) scratchpad and enter it into the system. it can be done on the MFCD. solid arrows next to the OSB. data entry. Once the data is entered into the scratchpad. Navigation. If the last value is selected and the Rotary OSB is selected. the selected SOI will not change. selecting one OSB automatically deselects an already selected OSB. Only one OSB may ever be selected at one time. the label is displayed in reverse video.


  
100 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.
OS B S y m b ol C har ac t er s
Next to an OSB may be a symbol character that represents a process function that the OSB will perform when pressed. This OSB function allows you to cycle values in two directions (up and down). This can include both alphanumeric or a string of numbers.

Day illumination of MFCD. Immediately to the left of the Downlock Solenoid Override button. the auxiliary handle.
In addition to the rocker switches. When TAD page is active. When one of the wheels is down and locked. Rotating this knob will control the brightness of the display. it indicates that landing gear is extended. In the event of left hydraulic system failure. or the Downlock Override button is also depressed. there must be no weighton-wheels. can be used and it requires no electrical power. which uses the right hydraulic system. If the landing gear handle is down. an audio gear warning tone will also be heard. speed brakes‖ message will be heard. when DC power is available. NT. the landing gear locks can be released and gravity and aerodynamic forces will likely extend the landing gear. Landing gear extension and retraction is normally powered by the left hydraulic system.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
M FC D P h ysi cal Dis p l ay C o n tr ol s
Around the MFCD bezel are 5 rocker switches that control aspects of the display:      Brightness (BRT). Adjust Display (ADJ). Before the handle can be moved to the up position (raise landing gear). the representative light will turn green.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 101
. OFF. When a wheel is up and locked. No function. the + and – ends of the rocker can be used to zoom and un-zoom the map display when in Manual Map Control Mode. This lamp will turn on when the landing handle is moved from down to up until the landing gear is locked. Video Contrast (CON). Night illumination of MFCD. one or both throttles are at max power and the speed brakes are extended. It will also light when the landing gear is locked after moving it from the up to the down position. Disable power to MFCD. an audio ―Speed brakes. a 3-position switch is located in the lower left portion of the bezel. No function. These three lights represent the two main wheels and the nosewheel and are labeled N SAFE. In the handle of the landing gear is a red lamp. the representative light will not be lit. Display Entity Levels (SYM). three lights indicate the current position of the landing gear. If however both hydraulic systems are inoperative. No function Backlight Brightness (DSP). During landing gear transit time. When the handle is in the down position.
Landing Gear and Flap Control Panel
The A-10C has tricycle-configuration landing gear that is controlled by the landing gear handle or the auxiliary landing gear extension handle in an emergency. This switch has 3 positions:    DAY. The landing gear handle is circular-shaped and has a LDG GEAR DOWN label beneath it. the aircraft is traveling 145 KIAS or less.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
4. Downlock Solenoid Override Button.
Landing Gear Handle. Depressing the button allows the landing gear handle to be moved to UP even if aircraft weight is on the main gear.
102 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. If in the center.
6. Landing Lights Switch. Landing Gear Handle
7. the nose and main gear will not retract until weight has been removed from the main gear and both struts have extended. Flap Position Indicator
3.
3. Raise and lower the landing gear. However. controls the fixed landing light on the nose wheel strut and the taxi light affixed to the lower portion of the nose wheel strut that turns in conjunction with the nose wheel. No function. Anti-skid Switch
1. both lights are turned off. Landing Gear Position Lights
2. OFF. When the switch is in the TAXI (down) position. Prevents landing gear from locking when braking is enabled.
4. position. This three-position switch on the front console above the landing gear handle.
Downlock Solenoid Override Button.
Anti-skid Switch. Turbine Engine Monitoring System (TEMS) switch
Figure 81. When the LAND position is selected. Landing Gear and Flap Control Panel 1. Landing Lights Switch
5. only the taxi light illuminates. both the landing and taxi lights illuminate.
2.

6. No function in this simulation. the flaps consist of four trailing edge elements. 7. 20-degrees
If the flaps lose hydraulic power. the flaps cannot be extended. the flaps will automatically retract to the UP position. The slats deploy automatically according to angle of attack to provide best airflow to the engines. the leading edge slats are located in the inboard portion of both wings. If airspeed exceeds 185 KIAS. Indication of landing gear position. Turbine Engine Monitoring System (TEMS) switch. The gauge is incremented between 0.
Landing Gear Position Lights. 7-degrees (takeoff) DN. Located below the landing gear handle.and 30-degrees and the pointer will move to the current setting. the flaps will extend to their previous position if the aircraft decelerates below 185 KIAS.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
5. Powered by the right hydraulic system. Down. Controlled by the left hydraulic system. A green light indicates the landing gear is down and locked. they will retain their current position unless the flap emergency retract switch is enabled. In such a situation. Flap Position Indicator. This switch provides engine diagnostic data for maintenance support. Maneuver. 0-degrees.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 103
. MVR. the Flap Position indicator provides you an indication of the current flap setting. See Emergency Flight Control Panel chapter. The positions are:    UP. If the flaps are extended and the aircraft reaches 185 KIAS or greater. The flaps have three positions that can be controlled from the flap control on the throttle.

HUDMODE
9. The AHCP replaces the Armament Control Panel (ACP) of the A-10A. the following functions are enabled: Arming the gun. Below are listed each switch and its possible settings:
1. The switch has three positions:  ARM position (Up). Trigger control.
104 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. LASER
4. All ARM functions are disabled. Must be set for weapons to be selectively jettisoned.  SAFE position (Middle). IFFCC
8. CICU
Figure 82. ALT SCE
6. Must be set for the gun to be armed. This does not apply to emergency jettison. Jettisoning weapons. When set to ARM. The Master Arm switch enables the arming of weapon systems. The trigger is inoperative unless set. Armament HUD Control Panel 1. Master Arm switch
2. GUNPAC
3.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Armament HUD Control Panel (AHCP)
The AHCP is a physical panel on the front dash that is composed of seven large switches and three smaller switches. Master Arm switch. TGP
5. JTRS
7.

3. indicated by blue symbology in the DSMS. The GUN/PAC switch enables the gun with or without Precision Attitude Control (PAC) assist. After being selected. When in combat mode.
 4. This switch has two positions:  ON position (Up). With the laser in SAFE mode. DELTA position (Middle).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 2. the TGP STANDBY page will be displayed with ―TGP OFF‖ indicated. SAFE position (Middle). TRAIN position (Down). Altitude will be derived from difference between barometric and radar. Disables the use of the laser in both combat and training settings.
TGP. and PAC will be active when the gun is fired. TRAIN position (Down). The Targeting Pod (TGP) switch enables targeting pod operation.
ALT SCE.
GUN/PAC. Each of the two switches has two positions:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 105
. LASER. Disables the gun from being fired. This switch has three positions:   ARM position (Up). The HUDMODE switches set the HUD in either DAY/NIGHT or NORM/STBY modes. the laser may fire only at combat strength when in this position. Altitude data is derived from barometric. the TGP will begin its activation process.
HUDMODE. Altitude is derived from radar altimeter. Places the weapon and control systems in training mode. PAC automatically adjusts aircraft pitch and yaw control inputs such that gun rounds fall in a tighter grouping around the aim point. The ALT SCE switch selects the data source for altitude computations.
6. but PAC assist will be disabled. rather than being impacted lengthwise along the aircraft’s line of travel when firing. OFF position (Down). Disables the targeting pod from being used on the TGP MFCD page.

5. The LASER switch enables the laser. the ―L‖ will not be displayed on the TGP page. RADAR position (Down). Placing this switch in the ON position provides power to the TGP and automatically begins cooling down the FLIR sensor. This switch has three positions:    ARM position (Up). Enables both the gun to be fired. If the TGP page is accessed with the AHCP switch set to OFF. The gun may be fired. The laser will only fire at training level energy. GUNARM position (Down). Enables the targeting pod to be used from the TGP MFCD page.
Selecting the gun and placing the switch in either ARM or GUNARM will result in a ―RDY‖ weapon status indication on the HUD. This switch has three positions:    BARO position (Up). SAFE position (Middle).

Places the HUD in the NORM/STBY mode.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
  7.
9.
8. This will result in data being supplied to the two MFCDs. which in turn provides data input to the MFCD displays and associated subsystems. Upon activation.
IFFCC.) TEST position (Middle): The HUD TEST setting displays the HUD settings display on the HUD. Deactivates (turns off) the two MFCDs and discontinues operation of any subsystems running from them. (When the HUD is first displayed. OFF position (Down). it defaults to GUNS mode. Places the HUD in the DAY/NIGHT Green or Amber modes. the DTS load page is displayed on both MFCDs. The Joint Tactical Radio System (JTRS) switch enables power to the Datalink system.
106 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Switch may be set to the Up position to provide datalink power. The Integrated Flight and Fire Control Computer (IFFCC) switch applies power to the IFFCC and HUD. NORM/STBY (Up/Down) toggle switch. This switch has two positions:   ON position (Up). Switch may be set to Down position to discontinue power to the datalink system. This switch has three positions:    ON position (Up): Activates the IFFCC system and displays (turns on) the HUD. This switch applies power to the Central Interface Control Unit (CICU). This switch has two positions:   ON position (Up).
CICU.
JTRS. OFF position (Down). OFF position (Down): Removes power from IFFCC and HUD (no display). DAY/NIGHT (Up/Down) toggle switch.

HARS and EGI are mutually exclusive. this pair of lights operates independently. you will notice that the OFF flag on the ADI and the pitch angle from the HUD are removed. Upon aircraft startup.
Gun and Nose Wheel Steering (NWS) Lights
Figure 84. Pressing the switch re-cages the HARS gyro. the GUN READY light will be displayed.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Heading Attitude Reference (HARS) Fast Erect Button
Figure 83. Gun Arm and Nose Wheel Steering Lights Located at eye-level above the left MFCD. As such. If the gun is armed and ready to fire. Under normal conditions. meaning that you cannot select both simultaneously from the Navigation Mode Select Panel.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 107
. HARS Fast Erect Button The HARS fast erect button is used to correct errors in the HARS attitude displays. HARS will be the active system until you select EGI by enabling it from the AAP. HARS is a backup gyro-system to EGI that provides heading and attitude aircraft state. it will control the ADI and HSI. you will have little use of HARS. When pressed. you will want to be flying straight and level when performing a HARS fast erect. If you have nose wheel steering enabled. When HARS is enabled. then the STEERING ENGAGED light will be visible.

you designate where fire extinguisher agent will be sent to after pressing the fire extinguisher discharge switch. the chaff and flare dispensers.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 109
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
APU ―T Handle‖ Fire Extinguisher Discharge Select
Figure 86. This panel is discussed in detail in the Countermeasure Systems chapter. the handle will light indicating a fire there. and the Missile Warning System (MWS).
Countermeasures Set Control (CMSC)
Figure 87. By pulling a handle. APU T-Handle This ―T‖ shaped handle is located below the HUD in the center of the dash. When a fire is detected in the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU). Countermeasure Set Control The CMSC panel displays the status and activity of the Electronic Countermeasure (ECM) system.

Surrounding the lower half of the attitude sphere casing is a series of lines that indicate aircraft bank angle.
2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
At t i tu d e D ir ec t o r I n di ca t or (A DI )
6 1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
11
Figure 88. Attitude Director Indicator Located centrally on the front dash.and 20-degrees. Miniature Aircraft. if the marker is pointed into the dark portion of the hemisphere. 60-degrees and 30-degrees and smaller tick marks at 10. the ADI provides your primary instrument indication of aircraft pitch. dark etched with perspective lines representing the ground and light representing the sky. Attitude Sphere. As the aircraft banks. Positioned in the center of the ADI is a marker shaped like a ―W‖ with wings. This sphere is divided into two hemispheres. the aircraft is heading towards the ground. If the ball is centered in the tube.
4.
5. Located within a liquid-filled tube directly beneath the attitude sphere is a ball that can move laterally according to lateral accelerations. Turn and Slip Indicator. the turn indicator displays the yaw rate. Elements of the ADI include: 1. this represents the current pitch and roll attitude of your aircraft in relation to the attitude sphere. On the sphere are pitch angle markings and a dashed white line that represents the horizon. the plane is not slipping. Next to the knob is a small triangle that represents a 0 pitch setting. this triangle moves in relation to the outside casing of the attitude sphere. white triangle. Bank Scale and Bank Pointer.
110 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. If the marker is in the light portion of the hemisphere. Pitch Trim Knob and Pitch Trim Index.
3. Just below the slip indicator. roll and yaw in relation to an artificial horizon represented on a sphere. this is called the Pitch Trim Index. Rotating this knob allows you to manually calibrate the pitch angle of the aircraft symbol in relation to the horizon line. Large tick marks are located at 90degrees. the aircraft is pointed at sky. The location of this mark along the bank scale indicates aircraft bank angle. Attached to a point on the sphere that is perpendicular to the horizon is a small.

the chevron will be below the center line. Regarding FM station finding. the bar indicates signal strength . this flag at the top of the instrument will become visible.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 111
. you will need to bank the aircraft towards the direction the bar is positioned from center. if you are too low. This vertical bar indicates deviation from the desired HSI bearing. or tracking a tracked TISL target.low or high on the ADI. This bar can also be used to determine if the aircraft is flying towards a tracked TISL target or a selected VHF/FM ADF transmitter. If you wish. the aircraft has reached the programmed ADF FM station.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
6.
9. If the bar is centered. Course Warning Flag. this flag at the left of the instrument will become visible. Glide Slope Warning Flag. Glide Slope Deviation Scale and Glide Slope Indicator. you are flying to the desired destination. To the right of the scale is a white chevron that moves up and down the scale according to your position on the glide slope. If the ADI loses electrical power. Arrayed vertically along the left side of the ADI is a line with two equally spaced dots above it and below it. If you are too high. if it is off to either side. you can stow the Flag by pressing the PT STOW switch on the Navigation Mode Select Panel. Attitude Warning Flag (OFF). Additionally. Pitch Steering Bar. 11. this flag will also be displayed in you depress the HARS fast erect button.
7. If no ILS glide slope signal is detected. the chevron will be above the center line. This is the Glide Slope Deviation Scale and is used when performing in Instrumented Landing System (ILS) landing.
10. When an operative ILS or TACAN signal is received. This horizontal bar is used to indicate if the aircraft has intercepted the ILS glide slope. the OFF warning flag will be displayed. Bank Steering Bar.
8.

3. Compass Card. This is a fixed line that runs from the aircraft symbol to the top of the compass card. All HSI displays are in reference to this symbol. Power OFF Flag.
6. and radio beacons. Aircraft Symbol. this three-place drum indicator provides slant distance from your aircraft to the selected steerpoint or TACAN station. If the HSI gauge has no power. 4. 2.
112 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. this red. This line represents current aircraft heading in relation to the compass card. a striped white/orange warning flag covers the digits. this indicator points to magnetic bearing of
5. a firm understanding of the HSI is necessary in case of battle damage and having access to additional navigation data that is not present on the HUD or CDU displays. Indicating range in nautical miles. Elements of the HSI include: 1. This arrow-shaped indicator moves around the outside of the compass card and points to the magnetic bearing of the selected TACAN station when TACAN mode is selected. Lubber Line. Horizontal Situation Indicator The HSI is your primary gauge to assist in navigation to steerpoints. When there is no power supplied to this gauge. this is a compass that rotates such that the top of the compass indicates the aircraft’s magnetic heading. When in ADF mode. Range Indicator. In the center of the gauge is the aircraft symbol that always remains static. Arrayed around the periphery of the HSI. While you will likely be using HUD symbology for most of your navigation purposes. Bearing Pointer 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
H or iz on t al S i t ua t io n I n di ca t or ( HS I)
4 9
7
12
5
13
6
1
3
2
14
10
8
15
11
Figure 89. OFF warning flag will appear in the right side of the gauge. TACAN beacons.

you are on course. thick lines on the outside of the compass card. Course Deviation Indicator (CDI). Bearing Validity Flag. This line that runs through the center area of the gauge provides an indication of how accurately you are flying on the set course line. IF both TACAN and ADF are selected.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
the selected UHF station. you will use the Navigation Mode Select panel. this knob. 12. Set by the Course Set Knob. points to current steerpoint.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 113
. Course Set Knob. Located 180-degrees from the Bearing Pointer 2 head is the tail and represents the reciprocal bearing. allows you to set the course numeric in the Course Selector Window and move the course arrows around the compass card. If the aircraft is significantly off-course. Located in the lower left portion of the gauge. Heading Set Knob. when rotated. 11.
Nav i ga ti o n M o d e S e l ec t P a n el
The A-10C has various means to navigate to mission locations that include ADF homing UHF/FM. Located 180-degrees from the Bearing Pointer 1 head is the tail and represents the reciprocal bearing. which is longer and skinnier than the Bearing Pointer 1 indicator. these two lines represent the set course and reciprocal course on the compass card. this window displays numeric of the laid course. 14. this marker can be moved around the compass card using the Heading Set Knob. the ADF takes priority. TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) stations. To select between these different navigation inputs. the indicator aligns with Bearing Pointer 2. After being set. Bearing Pointer Number 1. this knob allows you to set the position of the Heading Marker on the compass card. you need to correct your heading to place the aircraft back on the course line.
8. Heading Marker. To-From Indicator. 9. 7. These two triangles along the intended course line indicate the flown course will fly the aircraft to or away from the selected TACAN station or steerpoint. Positioned in the lower right corner of the gauge. HSI. If neither TACAN nor ADF modes are selected. and HUD. Shown as two. this flag will become visible.
10. 13. The arrow indicator. After a course has been set using the Course Set Knob. 15. Course Arrow. when rotated. These data inputs will in turn drive data being displayed on the ADI. Inertial Navigation System (INS) steerpoints and Instrumented Landing System (ILS). Course Selector Window. If it is to either side. When the line runs through the aircraft symbol in the center of the gauge. this marker rotates with the Compass Card to provide a heading to the selected magnetic bearing.

9. and two indicator lights. Glide slope information for instrumented landing system is displayed on the ADI and HSI receives localizer information. 3. The switch labeled PTR enables you to display or stow the pitch and roll steering bars on the ADI and the course warning flag. 6. When one of the seven buttons is active. See ILS chapter. ADI and HUD and according to the selected TACAN station. STR PT. See CDU chapter. Navigation data on the HSI. When enabled. 7. 4. Pitch and Roll Bar Switch. HARS. ILS. ADI. TISL. Navigation data is driven by the CDU.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
10 2
1
3
4
8
5
9
6
7
Figure 90. directly below the HSI gauge. Navigation data on the HSI. When the VHF/FM control panel is set to homing mode. 2. the FM light will turn amber. the CDI on the HSI will be set to the steerpoint. UHF Homing Light. See CDU chapter. a two-position switch. Elevation and azimuth data from the laser spot tracker determines the ADI pitch and bank steering bars. When the UHF control panel is set to ADF mode. Navigation Mode Select Panel The Navigation Mode Select panel is located on the central dash. EGI. 5. Setting this switch to ABLE enables them to be shown and setting the switch to STOW disables them unless TISL or FM homing are active. and HUD. 8.
10. The panel consists of seven buttons. The seven buttons include: 1. the UHF light will turn amber. Sets HARS as the input for the HSI. Note: HARS and EGI are mutually exclusive. ADI and HUD and according to the anchor point set in the CDU. ANCHR. VHF Homing Light. TCN. a green triangle will appear in it.
114 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
TIS L C on t ro l P a n el
2 3
1
9
6
7
8
5
4
Figure 91. TISL cannot acquire or track targets. startup status and is bore sighted along the aircraft's longitudinal axis. Directs the TISL system to along the HUD sight line in a 10-degree azimuth. With the A-10C. Places the TISL in standby. LVL NAR. Directs the TISL system to search 41 mils below the HUD sight line with a 10-degree azimuth. information regarding its location is provided on the HUD and ADI. CAGE. Laser (TISL) system detects and tracks reflected laser energy. The TISL can be used to locate targets being laser designated by another asset such as another aircraft or ground forces. The dial consists of five settings that include:   OFF. The TISL needs to stay in this setting for 30 seconds before switching to a different mode. Removes all power to the TISL system. Once a target is located. TISL Control Panel The Target Identification Set. 1. DIVE. This dial in the top left portion of the panel allows you to set the general operational mode of the TISL system.
  
EAGLE DYNAMICS 115
. it is a passive-only system. Mode Selector Dial. This panel is not functionally implemented in this simulation. all laser spot detection is done with the targeting pod in LSS/LST modes. TISL does NOT emit any laser energy. In this mode. LVL WIDE. From this panel you may set illumination codes and provide information to the TISL to better locate a target energy source. The TISL pod hangs on the right side of the forward fuselage underneath the cockpit. Directs the TISL system to along the HUD sight line in a 20-degree azimuth. The TISL Control panel is located low on the center dash pedestal between the circuit breakers and the Navigation Mode Panel.

If the TISL system detects and begins tracking the set laser code.
5. Labeled BITE in the center of the panel is the BITE button. has two fields. If the entry is valid. Slant Range Selection Switch. Located in the lower right corner of the panel is a three-position code select switch. 8. Combined. Settings include:    3. This indicator. Code Select. Both TISL and the auxiliary system at the same time AUX. Once a laser code has been entered using the Code Select thumbwheels. the altitude in thousands of feet is entered using the thumbwheels. This three-position switch labeled SLANT RNG helps the TISL to know where to search for a target. each of which can display 0 through 9. Pressing this button when the Mode Selector dial is set other than OFF will run the test sequence. Used with the Slant Range switch. the button will display TISL. DET ACD will be displayed on the button for 10 seconds if no errors are encountered. Search for targets 10 nm away or greater 5. Search for targets under 5 nm away
Altitude Above Target Thumb Wheels and Indication. Code Select Thumb Wheels and Indication. the TRACK button will light to let you know that you have a valid lock.
Enter Button. the OVER TEMP light will be visible. Track Light. you may press the ENTER button to confirm a valid entry. BITE Button. Choices include:    TISL.10. labeled ALT ABV TGT. The TISL system BOTH. This switch allows you to set what system should be searching for the entered laser code.
116 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Search for targets between 5 and 10 nm away UNDER 5. Each field can display between 0 and 9. After which. An auxiliary system such as a laser guided weapon
4.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
2. In the bottom portion of the panel is the CODE SELECT portion that provides four windows and thumbwheels to enter a TISL laser code to search for and lock on to. 9.
7.
6. If the TISL detector reaches a temperature too high for operation. OVER 10. the Altitude Above Target indicator allows the TISL system to better determine seeker depression angle. Over Temperature Light.

Engine monitoring instruments
Fire Extinguisher Discharge
Figure 93. As such. Right Multifunction Color Display
118 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. you may press the FIRE EXTING DISCH switch on the right side of the dash left or right. Please consult the left MFCD sections for details. Pressing left or right activates the left or right pressurized extinguisher bottles to the designated area. Fire Extinguisher Discharge Once one of the three ―T‖ handles has been pulled.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
8.
Right Multifunction Color Display (MFCD)
The right MFCD performs exactly as the left MFCD. you have only two bottles of extinguisher to use.
Figure 94.

The large. Left and right pointers indicate total internal fuel for respective system MAIN. circular gauge displays fuel remaining according to the fuel display selector setting. each tank has a co-located boost pump.800 gallons externally. the A-10C is capable of carrying 1. In the top center of the gauge is a digital indication of total fuel remaining in pounds. Using the rotary dial. However.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 119
. This panel located on the right side of the front dash provides you information on fuel remaining and left and right hydraulic system pressure. Components of the gauge include: 1. Fuel Quantity Gauge. the wing tanks will automatically empty before the fuselage tanks. The settings include:   INT. The right side fuel tanks feed the right engine and the left side tanks feed the left engine and APU. the aircraft can be loaded with up to three 600 gallon external fuel tanks (TK600 external store). Fuel Quantity Indicator and Selector Panel. Additionally. you may view remaining fuel according to types of fuel tanks. This is a five-position dial that enables you to determine which set of fuel tanks are determining the fuel gauge readings (not including the digital reading). Below the fuel quantity gauge is the Fuel Display Selector Dial. Fuel Display Selector. crossfeeding between the two fuel systems can be enabled from the Fuel System Panel. Fuel Quantity and Hydraulic Indicator Panel The fuel storage system for the A-10C consists of left and right internal wing tanks and right and left fuselage tanks. Due to differing boost pump pressures. To provide redundancy.630 gallons of fuel and an additional 1. Internally. Left and right pointers indicate fuel in their respective main tank
2. To provide fuel pressure. The gauge consists of two analog pointers (left and right) that indicate fuel loading in each fuel systems (left and right) in thousands of pounds.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Fuel Quantity and Hydraulic Indicator Panel
4
1
3 2
Figure 95. the fuel system operates under two independent systems.

The two pointers will point to 3 and the digital readout will indicate 6. left elevator.
120 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Located on the Fuel Quantity Indicator and Selector Panel. slats. speed brakes. gauges for the left and right hydraulic pressure are located. wheel brakes.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
   3. As with the fuel system. you designate where fire extinguisher agent will be sent to after pressing the fire extinguisher discharge switch. These are labeled HYD SYS L for left hydraulic system and HYD SYS R for the right hydraulic system. The right hydraulic system powers right rudder. each with their own systems they power. it will test the fuel quantity gauge.   Maximum pressure is above 3. these two gauges indicate the current hydraulic pressure for the two. left and right ailerons. landing gear. The left hydraulic system powers left rudder.000 until the button is released. Located at the top of the Fuel Quantity Indicator and Selector Panel. right elevator. When a fire is detected in the right engine. the handle will light indicating a fire there. emergency wheel brake.350
4. and slipway door.
RIGHT Engine ―T Handle‖ Fire Extinguisher Discharge Select
Figure 96. Hydraulic System Pressure Gauges.800 and 3. As long as this button is depressed. Left pointer indicates centerline external fuel tanks and right pointer will indicate 0
Test Button. Indications are a measure of psi and a normal reading is above 1000 psi. WING. auxiliary landing gear extend.350 psi Normal pressure is between 2. left and right ailerons. flaps. By pulling a handle. Right T-Handle This ―T‖ shaped handles are located below the HUD on the right side of the front dash. and nose wheel steering. Left and right pointers indicate fuel in their respective wing tank EXT WING. independent hydraulic systems. the A-10C has two hydraulic systems. Left and right external fuel tanks EXT CTR.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Marker and Canopy Lights
Figure 97.
Vertical Velocity Indicator (VVI)
Figure 98.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 121
. Vertical Velocity Indicator The VVI displays rate of climb or decent in increments of feet per minute. The scale is in increments of 100 feet. this pair of lights operates independently. If you are in ILS mode and over-fly a marker beacon. the CANOPY UNLOCKED light will appear. Marker and Canopy Lights Located on the right dash. the MARKER BEACON light will be visible. If the aircraft canopy is open.

you should set the instrument to PNEU.000-foot readings.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Altimeter
1
2
Figure 99. 2. In case of a CADC failure.000-foot and 1. Beneath and to the right of these indicators is a field that can be used to manually enter a barometric altitude (such as your takeoff / landing airfield). In the center of the gauge are indicators for the current 10.
122 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Pressure Set Knob. electric mode (ELECT) or pneumatic mode (PNEU) for altimeter operation. Elect/PNEU Switch. Along the outside ring of the gauge are markers for 100-foot increments (1 to 0). Rotate this knob clockwise or counter clockwise to manually set a barometric altitude. 1. the indication after these is always 00. Altimeter This altimeter gauge measures barometric altitude in relation to altitude above sea level. Located outside the lower right corner of the gauge is a twoposition switch that allows you to select normal. In the center of the gauge is a pointer that indicates the current altitude along the 100-foot scale.

3. 4.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Heads Up Display Area Above Dash
5 1 6 2
3
4
Figure 101. 1. HUD Area The area over the front dash primarily consists of the Heads Up Display (HUD) and the Up Front Controller (UFC) beneath the HUD. This area also has a set of gauges and lights. 6. Standby compass Aerial refueling status indicator Heads Up Display (HUD) Up Front Controller (UFC) Accelerometer (G-meter) Angle of attack indexer
EAGLE DYNAMICS 125
. 5. 2.

Air Refuel Status Lights
126 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Standby Compass Hanging from the right canopy bow. Because it is a pendulum-type bearing. it is not stabilized and will tilt. After nozzle is removed. this is a basic.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Standby Compass
Figure 102. the light will go off.
Air Refuel Status Lights
These three lights provide you an indication of the aerial refueling status. Once refueling nozzle has locked into the refueling receptacle. the READY light will turn off and the LATCHED light will come on. After the slipway door has been closed. the READY light will come on. the DISCONNECT light will come on. magnetic compass.
Figure 103. The compass is most accurate in level flight and will lose accuracy as bank angle increases due to the mechanical limit. liquid-filled. After the aerial refueling slipway door has opened.

and provides indication of proper landing angle of attack. The indexer presents the information by displaying illuminated green and yellow symbols.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Accelerometer (G-meter)
Figure 104. this gauge indicates current G-loading on the aircraft. Accelerometer Located on the left canopy bow. The pointer will indicate current positive or negative value. low-speed symbol "\ /".
Angle of Attack Indexer
Figure 105. on-speed symbol "circle". and high-speed symbol "/ \".
EAGLE DYNAMICS 127
. The AOA indexer lights operate only when the nose gear is down. AoA Index Lights The AoA Indexer is located on the left/front canopy rail beneath the accelerometer gauge. Slightly low/high speed is indicated by the on-speed and low/high speed symbols coming on simultaneously.

boost pumps are enabled with the left (L) and right (R) BOOST PUMP switches. In order to provide needed fuel pressure from the left and right wing fuel tanks.
3. The pumps can be enabled and disabled individually for the left and right wing tanks. In the top left of the panel are switches to enable or disable the transfer of fuel from external fuel tanks. The left switch up position is labeled WING and enable the transfer of fuel from any loaded external fuel tanks attached to the
2. These paired switches labeled EXT TKS both have OFF down positions.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Fuel System Control Panel
Used to control fuel tank feeding and boost pump control. Main Boost Pump Switches. In order to provide needed fuel pressure from the main left and right fuel tanks.
130 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. boost pumps are enabled with the left (L) and right (R) BOOST PUMP switches. Controls available on this panel include:
3 10
9
5 8
7 4 6 2
1
Figure 107. Wing Boost Pump Switches. The pumps can be enabled and disabled individually for the left and right main tanks. the Fuel System Control Panel is located on the forward section of the left console. Wing and Fuselage External Tank Switches. Fuel System Control Panel 1.

4.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
wings. consult the Flight School chapter. Two sets of buttons are present. left and right main tanks and left and right wing tanks. two illumination lamps are located on either side of the aerial refueling slipway. a DISCONNECT light appears but will be removed once the lever is moved to the CLOSE position. After the probe has been disconnected.
9. Line Check Button. No function
Note: For negative G flight. Air Refuel process. Air Refuel Control Lever. These switches act like circuit breakers in that when you select them they are pulled out and the selected tank will be disabled for refill. both fuel systems are isolated. To disable the filling of the four internal tanks (due to battle damage for instance). setting the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED will link the two fuel systems and allow the boost pumps to feed both engines. No function
5. the A-10C may refuel in flight.
10. 6. When the door is opened. Tank Gate Switch. Fill Main and Wing Tank Disable Switches. For a more detailed discussion on aerial refueling. you risk the engines shutting down due to lack of fuel supply. The gray lever labeled RCVR allows you to open and close the refueling port slipway door. You would most often use Crossfeed when one of the boost pumps fails. the A-10C has collector tanks that will supply the engines with sufficient fuel for 10 seconds of operation at MAX power. The right switch up position is labeled FUS and enables the transfer of fuel from a center fuselage loaded external fuel tank. the READY light is replaced with a LATCHED light. However. The aerial refueling port is located directly forward of the cockpit and has a retractable slipway door that opens to the receptacle. Signal Amplifier Switch.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 131
. You may want to do so for battle damage reasons. If the Crossfeed switch is set to OFF. Setting this switch to CLOSE will isolate the two tanks from each other. Located on the Fuel System Control panel is the RCVR LT dial that allows you to set the brightness of these lights. the transfer of fuel is automatic to the main and wing fuel tanks. Generally you will want to keep this switch disabled as being enabled can lead to fuel center of gravity problems. Crossfeed Switch. If you fly at negative G for more than 10 seconds. This dial allows adjustment of lights around aerial refueling receptacle and floodlight over the engines. Although the A-10C fuel system is designed with two parallel fuel systems. Exterior Lighting Dial. 7. To assist in aerial refueling. you may prevent the filling of selected fuel tanks using the Fill Disable buttons. you can elect to disable filling of a selected tank. Linking the left and right main fuel tanks is a transfer valve that may be opened by setting the TK GATE switch to the OPEN position. a flood light is located on the spine of the fuselage that illuminates the two engine nacelles. Using the flying-boom aerial fueling process. Moving the lever down to the OPEN position opens the door and moving forward to the CLOSE position closes the door. When the refueling probe is latched in the receptacle. the READY status light appears on the canopy rail indicator.
8. The dial can be set between OFF (no lighting) to BRT (full brightness). Once the refueling probe has latched into the receptacle. Additionally.

900 pounds. Given the role in fan speed in producing thrust. the fan speed indication is your best indication of total engine thrust. So. and bleed air. In this simulation. oil pumps. hydraulic pump.
3
4
2
1
5
Figure 108. Each engine is composed of a 14-stage axial flow compressor with a single bypass fan. power generation is not instantaneous. a gear box from the engine provides power to run electrical generators. this will be the means you will use to start both of your engines. When the engine is under power. fuel control and fuel pump. Engine power is controlled by the throttle lever on the left side of the cockpit. as you can see. For the engines to generate thrust from idle to full power takes approximately 10 seconds. To start the engines without need of an external power source. each with a maximum thrust of 8.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Throttles Panel
The A-10C is powered by two General Electric TF34-GE-100A engines. the A-10C is equipped with an Auxiliary Power Unit (APU). Moving the throttle forward increases power and pulling the throttle towards you decreases power. Throttles Panel
132 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The bypass air provides 85% of the total engine thrust.

These levers are generally moved in unison. commanded thrust can be overridden in case of engine over-temperature. When in the OVERRIDE position. When in the OFF position. IDLE and MAX. but they can be moved independently for cases such as engine start.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
The APU allows the aircraft to start engines using compressed air for turning the turbines. Engine Fuel Flow Switches. The A-10C throttle is a split throttle. IDLE. several actions are enabled that automatically start the engine. Note: For engine start.

Moving the throttle between IDLE and MAX controls the amount of fuel supplied to the engines and thus controls the thrust commanded to the engines. The APU draws fuel and is located in the rear of the aircraft between the two engines. each controlling the thrust of a single engine.  MAX. The switch underneath the ―L‖ controls fuel flow to the left engine and the switch underneath the ―R‖ controls fuel flow to the right engine. fuel flow is controlled by throttle position and maximum power trim. Air Turbine Start (ATS) valves open. you will need to enable the APU Generator Power switch to allow the APU to provide DC and AC electrical power. electrical and APU systems will first need to be enabled. Setting the throttles to OFF will shut off the engines or make it impossible to start them when in this position. The APU switch is located on the throttle panel and is used to activate and deactivate the APU with a two-position switch. the fuel pumps are shut off and no fuel is provided to the engines. temporarily provides DC and AC electrical power. engine damage or adjusting yaw.  OFF. To the right of the throttle on the throttle panel are several switches that provide engine and APU control. meaning that it consists of two levers. thus allowing you to obtain normal engine operation in situations where the ITT
EAGLE DYNAMICS 133
. When set to Override. these two switches have two possible positions: NORM and OVERRIDE. When moved forward to the IDLE position. However. Positioned at the top of the throttle panel. The throttle has three positions which are marked on the right side of the levers: OFF. Throttles. This stop is at the forward limit of the throttles and represents maximum thrust (generally 82% fan speed at takeoff). 3. When set to NORM. 1. Setting this switch to the START position will do the following if the Battery Power Switch has been set to PWR:     Enables the fuel pump that feeds the APU Opens the APU fuel valve Enables the APU starter Activates the gauges for APU EGT and APU tachometer
Once the APU has been successfully started. APU Switch. these switches disable to ITT amplifier and give you direct control of fuel flow. and temporarily powers the hydraulic systems. and ignition is supplied to the engines. fuel is controlled by throttle position only and exceeding ITT limits is possible. engine bleed air valves are opened. 2. These include the fuel pumps being enabled.

MOTOR is also used for an engine restart with the APU operating. These altitudes are set on the Up Front Controller (UFC). then the


134 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. This function is not designed to give you a power boost to get you out of trouble or go a bit faster.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
amplifier has failed. This button below the APU switch and will silence the landing gear horn. GCAS can provide you with an ―ALTITUDE.
LASTE Control Panel
Introduced into later versions of the A-10A. This would most often be used for an in-flight wind mill engine restart that relies on the power of one engine to crank the un-powered one. These two three-place switches are used to set the three operating modes of the two engines. PULL UP‖ audio message. This will be required after a failed engine start and the need to purge fuel before a restart to avoid a hot start. The switch underneath the ―L‖ label is for the left engine and the switch underneath the ―R‖ label is for the right engine. GCAS uses a combination of inputs from the radar altimeter. it will not prevent the impact. If one of the switches is held in the IGN position. 4. the engine ignition will start for that engine. Landing Gear Horn Silence Button. INS and LASTE computer to judge such an event. Chief among them is the autopilot system. For more details on use of the MOTOR and IGN Engine Operate Switches. In most cases switching to override will result in no change to engine performance. a manual engine ignition for that engine will be initiated regardless of the engines current throttle setting or RPM. flashing break-X on the HUD and a ―PULL UP. Engine Operate Switches. Moving one of the switches to the MOTOR position when a throttle is set to OFF will attempt to purge the combustion chamber of the affected engine of fuel. Ground Collision Avoidance System (GCAS)  GCAS provides you warning of a potential ground impact. and possibly push the core RPM a few percent higher. At most this will allow you to exceed the ITT limits. it's there to allow you to make it home in case of engine damage. please see the Emergency Procedures chapter. the Low Altitude Safety and Targeting Enhancement (LASTE) system provides several advancements to the A-10A and later A-10C. The default position is the center position marked NORM. only in cases where the ITT amplifiers are limiting core rpm/and exhaust gas temp will overriding them cause the engine RPM/ITT to increase. If either switch is set to NORM and the corresponding throttle is moved to IDLE. ALTITUDE‖ audio alert messages when the aircraft is below a preset mean sea level (MSL) altitude and above ground level (AGL) altitude. 5. A GCAS warning is indicated by a large. however. If the speed brakes are open and the landing gear handle is up with only one throttle at maximum power or both throttles at maximum power but less than 145 KIAS.

See HUD chapter for more details. and air speed is less than 145 KIAS. the audio warning "WARNING. Additionally.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
―SPEEDBRAKES. at least one throttle is at maximum power. The same audio message will be heard if the speed brakes are open. Continuously Computed Impact Point (CCIP) bomb release mode When an unguided weapon is selected for CCIP delivery. EGI.
NOTE: EAC will disarm (switch moved automatically to off) when invalid data is received from the LASTE sensors (CADC. when any of the SAS Engage switches on the SAS Control Panel are disengaged. occurs over the intercom. LASTE Control Panel
EAGLE DYNAMICS 135
. The LASTE Control panel is located directly behind the throttle panel and allows control of the EAC. IFFCC switch in position other than OFF. SPEEDBRAKES‖ audio message will be heard. the landing gear handle is down. AUTOPILOT".
Air-to-Air HUD mode New elements on the Air-to-Air HUD that include a funnel gunsight. multiple reference gunsights (MRGS). Enhanced Attitude Control (EAC) The EAC provides three autopilot modes to the A-10C: Path.
2 4
3 1
Figure 109. BLENDED or INS-only NAV solution is selected after full EGI INS alignment. Any disarming of EAC will cause the EAC light on the caution light panel and the MASTER CAUTION light to illuminate. or. and an air mass impact line (AMIL). See HUD chapter for more detail. EAC relies on LASTE. or. the pipper and reticle on the HUD continuously display the impact point of the weapon when in valid solution. INS and SAS to work properly. Engagement of the EAC autopilot or PAC modes is possible only if the EAC switch is set to ARM. and LAAP modes. Continuously Computed Release Point (CCRP) bomb release mode The CCRP option allows you to deliver unguided and guided weapons on the SPI ground location that is not visible (below) the HUD field of view. it provides the Precision Attitude Control (PAC) system for a more accurate gun strafe. radar altimeter. and air refueling door lever is in the closed position. If autopilot mode was engaged. SAS is engaged. Altitude/Heading and Altitude/Bank. when EGI is deselected either automatically (by an EGI failure) or manually via the switch on the NMSP. See HUD chapter for more detail. EGI is selected. and SAS).

ALT/HDG (middle position). This mode will attempt to maintain the barometric altitude and heading of the aircraft when the mode was activated. the radar altimeter is functioning and will provide data for GCAS functions. EAC Switch. if conditions are suitable. the EAC functions are disabled and the EAC caution light appears. you must press the Autopilot Engage button to activate the mode. You may also press the autopilot engage/disengage left throttle button.


Note: The A-10C does not include a route autopilot system that automatically flies the aircraft to a steerpoint or along a loaded flight plan. Once an autopilot mode is selected. Autopilot Select Switch. Located along the right side of the panel is a three position switch that allows you to select the active autopilot mode. This mode will not engage with a bank angle greater than 10-degrees.
2. ALT (down position). To the left of the LAAP mode switch is the Autopilot Engage/Disengage button. AUTOPILOT‖ message will be heard. These autopilot modes form the Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) system. This button will enable. If however an autopilot mode is active.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1. You can also disengage autopilot by pressing the Autopilot Engage/Disengage button or left throttle button. Radar Altimeter. the selected autopilot mode if no mode is active. When this mode is engaged. If however the switch is in the DIS (disable) position. This mode will attempt to keep the aircraft on its current flight path. EAC is provided to LASTE. the active autopilot mode will automatically disengage and a ―WARNING. represented by the total velocity vector symbol on the HUD. the radar altimeter is disabled as well as GCAS functions. When in the ARM position.
136 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. 4. the autopilot will attempt to maintain current bank angle and barometric altitude. The three selections are:  PATH (top position). The two position switch labeled RDR ALTM allows you to enable or disable the radar altimeter.
3. OFF (down) and ARM (up). Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button. pressing this button will disable autopilot. This mode will not engage with a bank angle greater than 10-degrees. If in the OFF position. The EAC switch has two positions. If a control input is commanded while in autopilot. If the switch is the NRM (normal) position.

and the right most knob sets MHz in hundredths and thousandths in steps of 25 (0-75). aft of the throttle panel. Also like the UHF radio. Preset Channel Selector Wheel. The panels are generally the same. Frequency Selector Knobs. 3. If during a mission the amount of radio traffic from this radio becomes too much. the second sets 1 MHz (0 – 9). Each of the two radios can store 20 preset channels. This however will be done automatically if you enable "Easy Communications" in Option. If the radio is tuned to a frequency outside the valid range.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM Radio 1 Control Panel
5 3
8
2
7
6
4
1
Figure 110. ARC-186 Radio Head The A-10C has two VHF radios onboard. but one is used for AM (Radio 1) and the other FM (Radio 2).975 MHz. Both radios have 20 preset channels and the ability to set channels manually. Load Button. you can always turn down its volume using the Volume Knob or switch the frequency. these radios are located on the left console. a warning tone will be heard. As with the UHF radio.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 137
. 1. you will need to set these radios to assigned frequencies in order to communicate with mission assets. The volume knob in the top left corner of the panel controls initial volume from the radio.00 and 151. moving left to right.
5. Volume Knob. After a frequency has been manually entered. Moving the wheel adjusts the preset channel number displayed in the Preset Channel Indicator window above it. These radios can be used for both air-to-air and air-to-ground communication. this is a thumb wheel that can move to the left and right. For the VHF/AM.
2. 4. The VHF/AM (Radio 1) transmits and receives between 116. This sets of four knobs are turned clockwise or counter clockwise to set the frequency digit in the field above it. you may press the LOAD button and that frequency channel will be saved to the currently displayed preset channel listed in the Preset Indicator Window. This window above the Preset Channel Selector thumb wheel displays the selected preset channel. the first knob sets 100 to 10 MHz (1 – 99). the third sets MHz in tenths (0 – 9). Preset Channel Indicator Window. Located along the bottom of the panels.

Set the Frequency Mode Dial to the MAN setting.
Squelch Switch. Manual selection allows you to manually input a frequency using the selector knobs above. Set the Frequency Mode Dial to the PRE setting.
When you now have the radio in PRE mode. this dial in the lower left portion of the panel controls the manner in which frequency channels are selected. MAN. Using the Preset Channel Selector Wheel. EMER AM.    7. Press the Load button. Not functional. Note that when you select a Preset channel.
Frequency Selection Dial. Places the radio in transmit and receive mode and acts as a transceiver radio for voice. the frequency tied to that Preset channel will NOT be displayed in the frequency display windows. TK. the guard channel is automatically selected. The preset position sets the radio to use the current preset channel listed in the Preset Channel Indicator window.
To set a Preset Channel. DN. Direction finding mode allows VHF/FM to detect ADF signals and provide steering information to the ADI and HSI. Using the Frequency Selector Knobs. OFF. the guard channel is automatically selected. PRE. Consisting of four positions. This selection has no effect on VHF/AM. VHF/AM does not have this capability. select the Preset channel that you wish to save the frequency to. This selection has no effect on VHF/FM. follow these steps: 1. When the radio is set to this position. Disables power to the radio. When the radio is set to this position. 5. The dial has three positions. This dial located in the lower right portion of the panel governs the general operational mode of the selected VHF radio. 3.     EMER FM.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
6. enter the frequency you wish to save as a Preset. Provides squelch tone. Frequency Mode Dial. 2.
138 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the saved frequency of the Preset channel selected will be used.
8. 4. Only the MAN frequency is displayed there.

you will communicate with your flight using this radio. you can always turn down its volume using the Volume Knob or switch the frequency. 1. The preset channel number is displayed in the Preset Channel Indicator window and the frequency associated with the selected channel is displayed in the Frequency Status Indicator window. located on the left console aft of the throttle panel. support flights. Preset Channel Indicator Window. Preset Channel Selector. The UHF radio has 20 preset channels (PRESET) and the ability to manually enter a channel frequency (MNL).975 MHz. various assets (wingman.000 to 399. When flying a mission. If during a mission the amount of radio traffic from this radio becomes too much. Frequency Status Indicator Window. controllers.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 139
.) will be assigned unique frequencies. After a frequency has been selected as a preset or entered manually. 3. The preset UHF channel selected via the Preset Channel Selector dial is displayed in this window (1 – 20). You will need to be aware of these frequencies and set your UHF radio accordingly in order to communicate with those assets. etc. the six-digit frequency is displayed in this window. Rotating this dial clockwise or counter-clockwise will cycle through the 20 preset UHF channels.
2.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
AN/ARC-164 UHF Radio Control Panel
14 2
5
1
4
3
11
8
10
7
12
6
13
9
Figure 111. ARC-164 Radio Head The AN/ARC 164 UHF radio. This channel is also repeated on the front dash in the UHF Frequency Repeater. In top right corner of the panel is the Preset Channel Selector dial. provides you the ability to transmit and receive communication on designated UHF frequencies. During most missions. The frequency range runs from 225.

meaning that it can monitor the selected channel and broadcast on it. Rotating this dial sets the 10 MHz digit of the frequency. . Labeled VOL. you simply dial in the frequency manually. 8. this four position dial determines the operational function of the UHF radio. Rotating this dial sets the tenths MHz digit of the frequency. MAIN.    MNL.025 MHz Selector. Lifting this cover reveals an orange button labeled LOAD. Squelch Button. No function 13. Volume Knob. Load Preset Cover. Located in the lower left corner of the panel.01 MHz Selector. the UHF radio acts as a transceiver. Rotating this dial sets the 1 MHz digit of the frequency.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
4. 3. 12. ADF. This dial can be rotated to select between 0 and 9. GRD.
10. The ADF mode allows the UHF radio to act as an automatic direction finding device. or A. T-Tone Button. Provides squelch tone.
11. Rotating this dial sets the thousandths MHz digit of the frequency. this dial controls the audio output from the UHF radio.
140 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. 14. 0. PRESET. When in this mode. and then press the LOAD button. 1 MHz Selector. When in the BOTH mode. BOTH. In MAIN mode. No function. When in the OFF setting. This three position dial located in the lower right portion of the panel allows you to determine how a frequency is set in the Frequency Status Indicator window. Manual mode allows you to use the MHz selectors to enter a frequency. Function Dial. no power is sent to the panel. 9. 100 MHz Selector. This dial has three positions: 2. the UHF radio monitors the guard channel and acts as a transceiver. Guard mode automatically sets the Frequency Status Indicator window to the guard channel. 7. To load a frequency to a preset channel. This dial can be rotated to select between 0 and 75 in steps of 25. select the preset channel you wish to assign the frequency to.     OFF. This dial can be rotated to select between 0 and 9. ADF information from the UHF radio will then be sent to the ADI and HSI to provide steering information. Rotating this dial sets the 100 MHz digit of the frequency. This dial can be rotated to select between 0 and 9. Preset mode enables the Preset Channel Selector to set the frequency. 10 MHz Selector. Frequency Mode Dial. the UHF radio disables guard and transceiver functions. 6. 5.

Preset Channel Selector Wheel. 4. follow these steps: 1. Set the Frequency Mode Dial to the PRE setting.
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM Radio 2 Control Panel
5 3 8 2
7
6
4
1
Figure 113. a warning tone will be heard. Each of the two radios can store 20 preset channels.000 and 76. Click on the Load Preset Cover to open it and press the red load button to save. In most missions. 1. If the radio is tuned to a frequency outside the valid range. Rotate the Preset Channel Selector to the Preset channel that you with to tie a frequency to.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 141
. but is assigned the VHF FM radio frequency range. Moving the wheel adjusts the preset channel number displayed in the Preset Channel Indicator window above it. 3. Radio 2 will be used to communicate with JTAC units. enter the frequency you wish to save to the selected Preset channel.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Load Frequency to Preset Channel
Figure 112. The VHF/FM operates between 30. Using the Frequency Selector Knobs. 2. ARC-186 Radio Head This radio operates like Radio 1.000 MHz. this is a wheel that can move to the left and right. Located along the bottom of the panels. Load Preset Button
To set a Preset Channel.

Load Button. 4. moving left to right.
142 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. follow these steps: 1. After a frequency has been manually entered. and the remaining two knobs should always be set to 0. The dial has three positions. The volume knob in the top left corner of the panel controls initial volume from the radio. the guard channel is automatically selected. Volume Knob. 3. this dial in the lower left portion of the panel controls the manner in which frequency channels are selected. VHF/AM does not have this capability. the second sets MHz in units. Provides squelch tone. Using the Frequency Selector Knobs. This sets of four knobs are turned clockwise or counter clockwise to set the frequency digit in the field above it. Disables power to the radio TK. This window above the Preset Channel Selector wheel displays the selected preset channel.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
2.
7. Frequency Mode Dial. Press the Load button. Direction finding mode allows the radio to detect ADF signals and provide steering information to the ADI and HSI. Not functional. enter the frequency you wish to save as a Preset. Places the radio in transmit and receive mode and acts as a transceiver radio for voice DN. For VHF/FM. 4. PRE. This selection has no effect with VHF/AM. Consisting of four positions. Using the Preset Channel Selector Wheel.
To set a Preset Channel. the guard channel is automatically selected. Set the Frequency Mode Dial to the MAN setting. 2. you may press the LOAD button and that frequency channel will be saved to the currently displayed preset channel listed in the Preset Indicator Window. select the Preset channel that you wish to save the frequency to. MAN. This selection has no effect with VHF/FM.     EMER FM. This dial located in the lower right portion of the panel governs the general operational mode of the selected radio. When the radio is set to this position. 3.
5. Preset Channel Indicator Window.
8. Frequency Selector Knobs.
Squelch Switch. the first knob sets MHz in tens (0-9).    OFF.
6. The preset position sets the radio to use the current preset channel listed in the Preset Channel Indicator window. Manual selection allows you to manually input a frequency using the selector knobs.
Frequency Selection Dial. EMER AM. When the radio is set to this position.

Encryption Code Preset. Set the Frequency Mode Dial to the PRE setting. This dial controls the main operating mode of the KY-58 but will generally be left in the Operation (OP) setting. 2.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
5. In order for you to transmit and receive encrypted data with another entity. Mode Dial.    4. This is a three-position dial that determines which radios have their data encrypted. Note that when you select a Preset channel. KY-58 Panel 1.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 143
. the saved frequency of the Preset channel selected will be used.
KY-58 Secure Voice Control Panel
The KY-58 secure voice panel allows encryption and decryption of voice communication over the VHF and UHF radios. OP allows transmission and reception of encrypted communications. Move this switch to the ON position to enable voice encryption of the selected radio. Only the MAN frequency is displayed there. C/RAD 1 encrypts UHF communications PLAIN removes encryption from all radios (Plain Voice) C/RAD 2 encrypts VHF communications
3.
When you now have the radio in PRE mode. Radio Select Dial. When in combat. transmission of secure voice allows you to be sure the enemy is not listening in on your communications in a multiplayer game! This panel is non-functional is this simulation. Power Switch. the frequency tied to that Preset channel will NOT be displayed in the frequency display windows.
3 2
6
1
5
4
Figure 114. The LD (Load) position allows loading of cipher keys manually using a transfer device. Six encryption codes are preset to the six selections on this dial. both you and the sender/receiver must be set to the same code preset. The RV (Receive Variable) position allows loading of cipher keys remotely via radio.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
5. Note that if you do this. Emergency Hand Brake In the event of hydraulic failure. Delay Switch. using the emergency brake will likely be your best option.
Auxiliary Lighting Control Panel
1 4
2
5
3
Figure 116. you will not be capable of conducting secure communications. the six secure voice crypto-variables are erased. No function Zeroize Switch. which controls the braking system. 6. Auxiliary Lighting Control Panel
144 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. When the switch guard is raised and the switch enabled.
Emergency Hand Brake
Figure 115.

If HARS is active and is feeding bad information to the SAS system. the SIGNAL LIGHT LAMP TEST button will illuminate the following lights as long as the button is held down. has three positions: The up position labeled TOP turns on the top fuselage NVIS light.
Stability Augmentation System (SAS) Panel
Flight control in the A-10C is provided by a series of redundant pushrods and hydraulic systems that actuate the ailerons (roll). Refueling and Indexer Lights Dial. To support night vision devices. SAS will continue to function regardless of faulty HARS input data. Signal Light Test Button. L-ELEV. Loss of a single hydraulic system will not disable control but the level of response will decrease depending on the control surface.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1. the REFUEL STATUS & INDEXER LTS dial allows you to adjust the brightness of the AoA indexer on the left canopy bow and the refueling status lights. HARS/SAS Override.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 145
.
Weapon Station Dimmer Dial.               4. NVIS and NVIS Lights Switch. Also located on this panel is the HARS/SAS Override switch. this control has no function in the A-10C now. Rotate the dial to adjust between DIM (little brightness) and BRT (full brightness). If in the OVERRIDE position though. Located in the top left corner of the panel. When pressed. R-AIL. The Night Vision Imaging System (NVIS) switch. the SAS will automatically disable itself if this switch is in the NORM position. With the move of ACP functions to the MFCDs of the A10C. No function is this simulation. wingtips and tail that are night vision compatible. and R-ELEV on Emergency Flight Control panel Takeoff Trim light on SAS panel TVM bit test light Caution panel
2. the middle ALL position turns on all NVIS lights and the button OFF setting turns all NVIS lights off. elevators (pitch) and rudders (yaw). Button and test lamp. 5.
3. labeled NVIS LTS. the A-10 uses lights on the fuselage. Gun ready Steering engaged Marker beacon Canopy unlocked Master caution press-to-test Landing gear lights Navigation mode select panel buttons AoA indexers Aerial refueling status lights TISL lights L-AIL.

pitch trim compensation.
2. Yaw Trim Control Knob. pitch and yaw rate dampening. Rotate the knob left or right depending on the desired direction of yaw trim bias. the trim tabs can also be used to fly the aircraft in the Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS). The SAS assists in making the A-10C a very stable gun platform. Labeled T/O TRIM. As with the elevators. Roll control is provided by an aileron on each wing. 1. SAS also provides you automatic turn coordination (adding the proper amount of rudder input when banking the aircraft). As a failure backup. Note though that SAS relies upon hydraulic power. systems like PAC use SAS to adjust pitch and yaw when engaged to PAC 1 and PAC 2 up to 10-degrees. and the loss of hydraulics will result in the automatic disengagement of the SAS channels. if you lose one of the hydraulic systems.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Pitch control is provided by two elevators at the tail of the plane. Takeoff Trim Control Button. Additionally. This knob located on the left side of the SAS panel allows you to set yaw trim bias when SAS in enabled. The rudders are controlled in unison by a single cable to the actuators. and makes the A-10C a more stable aircraft to fly.
4
3
5
1 2
Figure 117. that linkage can be disabled and you can fly with the still operational elevator.
146 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. To help dampen and improve flying characteristics in pitch and yaw. the ailerons are powered by both hydraulic systems to provide control redundancy. SAS helps to provide coordinated turns. takeoff settings. When all trim tabs have been set to the proper setting. both powered by the two hydraulic systems. Pitch trim is provided by electrically driven trim tabs on the ends of the elevators. the two connected elevators are both powered by hydraulic system actuators. In addition to a direct link pushrod from the cockpit. SAS Panel SAS is a two-channel flight augmentation system that enhances control in both pitch and yaw. Yaw control is provided by two rudders. linking shaft. the other system will handle the load of the other via a shareable. the takeoff trim light above the button will light and indicate TAKEOFF TRIM. As such. the A-10C is equipped with the Stability Augmentation System (SAS). Roll trim is provided by trim tabs on the trailing end of the ailerons. As noted earlier. pressing this button will automatically set all trim tabs to neutral. If one of the two elevators actuators becomes jammed.

These two switches are electrically driven and can only be engaged as a pair. No function
4. Moving both switches to the ENGAGE position enables the yaw SAS for both channels. These two switches activate pitch channel SAS.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
3. SAS Pitch Engage Switches. Mode 4 incorporates encryption of the IFF signal reception and response.




Control of the A-10C IFF system is done on the IFF panel with the following controls:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 147
. Mode 4. If the interrogated aircraft does not send back the correct signal. This mode has 4. This is the standard air traffic control mode. Mode C. it can respond to IFF interrogations. SAS Yaw Engage Switches. it is assumed hostile. Mode 3/A. Moving both switches to the ENGAGE position enables the pitch SAS channels. These two switches activate yaw channel SAS. An IFF sends out an encrypted interrogation signal that a friendly aircraft will reply with the correct electronic response.
Identify Friend or Foe (IFF) Panel
IFF was first developed in World War II as a means to electronically identify aircraft that were beyond visual range. These two switches are electrically driven and can only be engaged as a pair. This transponder code allows tracking of the aircraft under instrument flight rules conditions and is used by both civilian and military aircraft. This mode uses 3/A but also responds with barometric pressure altitude information of the interrogated aircraft.
5. This panel is non-functional in this simulation. Monitor Test Switch.906 possible reply codes and is used to answer the interrogation with the aircraft’s tail number. The A-10C has five IFF modes it can respond with:  Mode 1. While the A-10C cannot interrogate other aircraft with IFF. but they can be disengaged separately. Mode 2. but they can be disengaged separately. This mode has 64 reply codes and is to determine the type of aircraft that is answering and what type of mission it is on.

5. Move to the ON position to enable Mode 1 IFF interrogations. OFF. Move to the ON position to enable Mode C IFF transponder. IFF receivers are at normal operating level of sensitivity. 3. This dial controls power to the IFF system and basic receiver sensitivity. IFF receivers are at low sensitivity setting.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
13 14
12
1
3
4
2
5
6
11 7 10
8
9
Figure 118. M-3/A Switch. Move to the ON position to enable Mode 3/A IFF transponder. EMER. LOW. M-2 Switch. STBY.
M-1 Switch. ready state but does not receive IFF signals. The dial has five positions:      2. Places the IFF in a powered-up. Move to the ON position to enable Mode 2 IFF interrogations.
148 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. IFF/SIF Control Panel 1. Remove power to the IFF system. 4. Master Mode Dial. No function. NORM. M-C Switch.

Rotate the two wheels to enter the two digit Mode 1 code. Rotate these four wheels to enter the four digit Mode 3/A code. This light will light when the test mode of Mode 1. When the switch is in the down. EMER OVERRIDE position. No function. Mode 1 Code Select Wheels. trim is set by adjusting the Emergency Pitch and Roll switch located to the right. 14. this panel would not be used. Place this switch in the ON position to enable encrypted IFF response. Radiation Test Monitor Switch. Each digit can be set between 0 and 7. Elements of this panel include: 1. Test Light. In normal flight. or Mode C is conducted.
10. Audio Light Switch.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
6. When interrogated in Mode 4. 11.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 149
. 8. Pitch/Roll Trim Switch and Emergency Pitch and Roll Switch. The light will remain on when depressed. this switch is in either the OUT or AUDIO position. No function. Valid codes range 00 to 73. Located in the top center of the panel. trim is controlled by the trim hat on the control stick. Code Dial. 13. Emergency Flight Control Panel The Emergency Flight Control (EFC) panel located on the left console allows you to adjust the flight control systems in emergency situations.
Emergency Flight Control Panel
2 1
4 5
3 6
Figure 119. 7. Identification of Position Switch. 12. Reply Light. Mode 4 Switch. the REPLY light will light when interrogated and replied to. Mode 3/A Code Select Wheels. If in the LIGHT position. the IFF interrogation tone is heard. This light will light when replying to a Mode 4 interrogation. this two-position switch is labeled PITCH/ROLL TRIM. When this switch is in the NORM position. No function. Mode 3/A. 9. Mode 2.

flap control is governed by the flap control on the throttle. When in the up FLT CONT NORM position. flight input control acts normally. the MRFCS is a back up control system using direct cable linkages to the pitch and yaw control surface actuators. Elevator Emergency Disengage Switch. When in the down position. When in the up position. Labeled FLAP EMER RETR. you may move the ELEVATOR EMER DISENGAGE switch left or right to disengage the selected elevator actuator. When in the down position.
3. Flap Emergency Retract.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
2. this is a two-position switch. Labeled SPD BK EMER RETR. This provides the ability for moderate maneuvering.
4.
6.
150 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. To do so. When in the up position. In the event one of the two linked ailerons become inoperative. the flaps are closed using aerodynamic pressure. In the event one of the two linked elevators become inoperative. Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS) Switch. This will bypass the inoperative control path and allow the other elevator to move freely. Speed Brake Emergency Retract. Aileron Emergency Disengage Switch. MRFCS is activated by placing the MRFCS switch in the MAN REVERSION position (down). If the aircraft has suffered dual hydraulic system failure. To do so. This will bypass the inoperative control path and allow the other aileron to move freely. you may need to disable it so that the other elevator can still function. you may move the AILERON EMER DISENGAGE switch left or right to disengage the selected aileron actuator. Roll control is provided through the aileron trim tabs. the speed brakes are closed using aerodynamic pressure.
5. speed brake control is governed by the speed brake control on the throttle. this is a two-position switch. you may need to disable it so that the other aileron can still function.

3. the Intercom panel can control the volume level of tones associated with LASTE such as pull up.
5. Labeled VOL on the panel. Volume Control Knob. AIM Switch.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 151
. This is a two position (in or out) button that enables communication to the ground crew or tanker. etc. for this function to work the Rotary Selection dial must first be set to INT (intercom) and the INT button must be selected. INT Switch. this knob acts as a master volume control and affects all other audio level settings on the panel. Rotary Selector position will not matter. the Intercom panel overrides their settings. 2. FM Switch. the Hot Mic button allows you to communicate with the ground crew and tanker. 1.
4. HM (hot mic) Switch. To hear such audio. This is a two position (in or out) button that enables you to monitor audio from the VHF/FM receivers. Once this switch is enabled.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Intercom Control Panel
5 8
3
6
4
9
2
7
11
12
1
10
Figure 120. Intercom Control Panel The Intercom system panel is a single interface between you and the various navigation and radio systems in regards to their audio input/output. altitude. the AIM-9 Mode Switch must first be set in the SELECT position. This is a two position (in or out) button that enables audio from the AIM-9 Sidewinder seeker to be heard. and it allows communication with ground crew (needed for arming and refueling your aircraft). Additionally. Labeled HM. While each of these navigation and radio systems has their own audio (volume) controls. you must press the HM button to initiate communication. However.

to send a radio message using one of the radios or intercom to ground crew or tanker. VHF Switch. This is a two position (in or out) button that enables you to monitor audio from the VHF/AM receivers.
152 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. a steady warning tone is sounded. This is a two position (in or out) button that enables you to hear the localizer and marker beacons when ILS is enabled. TCN Switch. IFF Switch. VHF. This is a two position (in or out) button that enables you to receive the TACAN signal being broadcasted by the selected station. 11. Only the PEAK PRFM tone can be reduced to zero though. When you hear the chopped tone.
10. 12. Rotary Selector position will not matter. the tone will become chopped. Rotary Selector position will not matter. UHF Switch. Rotary Selector Dial. FM and HF. you must first set this dial to the transmitter you wish to use. When the aircraft is 1 angle of attack unit or less of entering a stall. No function
Stall Warning Control Panel
Figure 121. Adjust volume of interrogation tone. This signal is the name of the station in Morse code. Stall Warning Control Panel When the aircraft is within 2 angle of attack units of a stall. 8. This is a two position (in or out) button that enables you to monitor audio from the UHF receivers. 9. From the Stall Warning Control panel. you may control the volume of these two tones. 7. Selections are INT. As such. it is best to reduce angle of attack immediately. The dial labeled STALL controls the volume of the chopped tone and the PEAK PRFM dial controls the volume of the steady tone. This four-position dial allows you to select which transmitter you wish to broadcast on and monitor. Call Switch.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
6. ILS Switch.

7.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
The right console of the cockpit includes a variety of controls. Cockpit canopy switch Electrical power panel Environment system panel Lighting control panel Countermeasures Signal Processor (CMSP) panel Caution light panel Control Display Unit (CDU) Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) TACAN operation and control panel
10. Canopy Switch and Ejection Handle
154 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. 2. the canopy can be jettisoned using the canopy jettison handle. 4. In an emergency. 8. 5. Instrumented Landing System (ILS) control panel and ILS operation 11. Heading and Attitude Reference Systems (HARS) control panel
Cockpit Canopy Switch and Canopy Ejection Handle
Made of acrylic plastic. the canopy can be opened and closed from within the cockpit using the cockpit canopy control switch. 9. but the most common ones you will probably use are the CDU and AAP for navigation purposes. This console remains largely unchanged from late-model A-10A models. 6. 3. 1.
1
2
Figure 123.

instrumentation and other avionics systems. Canopy switch. This is a two-place switch in the lowerright portion of the panel. Canopy Jettison handle. electrical power will be provided through the onboard battery. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU). Located adjacent to the cockpit canopy control switch is the canopy jettison handle. you may set this switch in the top center of the panel to the STBY position to supply AC-powered engine instruments. allows you to normally open and close the canopy. This black and yellow stripped handle is activated to explosively jettison the canopy. Until the canopy is in a full closed position. The panel consists of a variety of two-and three-place switches. Not functional.
2. Setting this switch to PWR is the first step in starting the aircraft. When held on the OPEN position. the canopy will stay at its current position. when held in the CLOSE position. the electrical power control panel provides you with the primary electrical power and conversion controls. This three position switch labeled CANOPY. Providing the necessary electrical power will be the first step in bringing the aircraft to life from a cold-start. and when in the HOLD position.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1. the canopy will be raised. the canopy will lower. This electrical power is needed to run the engines. This DC power can be used to start the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) and AC power for basic engine instrumentation. the canopy unlock light on the front dash will be lit.
Electrical Power Panel
The A-10C has requirements for both AC and DC power. The aircraft carries a 24-volt battery that can provide DC and AC power to the aircraft. With the on-board battery set to PWR. AC Instrument Inverter. In this simulation.
2 5
3 1
4
Figure 124. 1. Battery Power Switch.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 155
. Electrical Power Panel Located in the forward right portion of the right console. 2. and the generators.

the AC power generated by them needs be supplied to all the AC buses. AC Generators. This allows DC and AC power generated by the APU to take over the electrical load being carried by the battery. Once both engines are fully operating and are providing power through their generators.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
3. Once the engines are operating and powering the two generators.
Environment System Panel
4 5
1 3 2 6 10 7 11 8
12
18
9
15
13
16
14
17
Figure 125. the APU can been turned off. left and right switches allow you to do so. The top half is the oxygen regulator and the bottom half are various controls for air temperature. In the lower left portion of the panel. Emergency Flood. pressurization.
4. Located on the Electrical Systems panel. APU Generator Power. the APU GEN switch can be set to the PWR position. Oxygen Regulator
156 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. and canopy heating. Environment System Panel The Environment System panel consists of two primary sections. After the APU has been started. this two-position switch turns on both flood lights to full brightness when moved to the EMER FLOOD position. These lights may be disabled by moving the switch to the OFF position.
5.

When in the On position. 11.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1. No function. The gauge scales between 0 and 5 liters.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 157
. You will want to enable this shortly before takeoff to avoid pitot icing. Oxygen Indicator Test Button. 12. Temperature/Pressure Control Switch. 9. the needle on the Oxygen Quantity Indicator will spin and the oxygen low level light on the caution panel will illuminate. If it runs out and you are above 13. When in the PITOT HEAT position. This dial may be rotated to control the amount of bleed air being blown from the base of the canopy. Oxygen Quantity Indicator. This dial allows you to control the air temperature of the cockpit. 4. mask test. you will suffer the effects of hypoxia and lose consciousness. This lever can be toggled to 100% oxygen and normal oxygen which is diluted to increase total supply time. 7. oxygen is supplied to you. Emergency Lever. 13. A blocked pitot tube could result in a CADC failure message. Main Air Supply Switch. This small window flashes back and forth between black and white in accordance with each breath. When in the up position.000 feet. This is a three-place switch that allows the windshield to be washed with a solution when in the down position or be blown with bleed air in the up position. 5. Wind shield Defog/Deice Switch. bleed air from the engines and APU can be routed to the environmental systems. No function. 6. The green-colored supply lever has two positions. This gauge indicates the quantity of liquid oxygen in the regulator. and emergency. This red-colored lever has positions for normal operation. Bleed Air Switch. Dilution Lever. Given the nature of this simulation. This is a two-position toggle switch used to provide alternate closure of ECS valve which shuts off engine bleed air to Environment Control System but does not shut off ram air. the pitot is heated to prevent icing.
10. 14. Temperature Level Control.
Note: It will be important that you mind your oxygen supply. Oxygen Supply Pressure. 15. dump and RAM. Flow Level Dial. Wind shield Rain Removal and Wash Switch. 2. only normal mode is modeled. Rotating this dial controls the amount of air coming into the cockpit from the air conditioned system. Air and Pressure Controls 8. This switch controls source of air temperature and pressure between normal. The windshield heater is controlled by this switch and is used to combat windshield fogging and icing. Supply Lever. Pitot Heater Switch. The middle position sets the system to OFF. 3. Canopy Defog Dial. 16. On and Off. When this button is held down and the system is operating normally. Oxygen Flow Indicator. This hemi-sphere indicator shows the current psi of the regulator.

Air Conditioner Control Switch. It is important to note that the Master Exterior Light Switch setting (Pinky Switch on HOTAS) on the left throttle may override panel settings. Current air pressure of the cockpit.  o o o   Pinky Switch Forward: Sets external lights to default settings. Position lights set to steady.
Lighting Control Panel
This panel is located in the rear area of the right console and is your primary means of controlling external and internal aircraft lighting. This switch allows you either manual or automatic control of the air conditioner system.
158 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Cabin Air Pressure Gauge. Retains set illumination levels for formation lights.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
17. and nacelle floodlights. Pinky Switch Center: Turns off all external lights. Pinky Switch Aft: Lights are according to Lighting Control Panel settings. Disables anti-collision lights. nose floodlights. cockpit lighting. The top portion of the panel is dedicated to external lighting and the bottom portion is used for internal. 18.

Formation Lights and Dial. and a white light on the tail. on the fuselage. The three settings are:    2. a red light on the left wingtip. a green light on the right wingtip. In the top left portion of the Lighting Control panel is three-position switch labeled POSITION. Light Control Panel 1.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 159
. The switch to control these lights is located in the top right corner of the panel and has two positions. There are three position lights on the A-10C. Located on the vertical tails.
3. FLASH (up) which turns the position lights off and on repeatedly OFF (center) which turns off all the position lights STEADY (down) which turns on all position lights
Anti-Collision Lights and Switch. ANTI-COLLISION (up) and OFF (down).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1 3
4
2
5
7
8
9
11 6
10
Figure 126. To control the brightness of these formation strips. and on the wingtips are yellow-green luminescent formation lights. Position Lights and Switch. The A-10C has three anti-collision strobe lights: one on each wingtip and one on the tail. These lights are useful when attempting to hold close formation at night and are not visible from long range. The dial can be rotated between the OFF and BRT (bright) stops. you can use the FORMATION dial.

9. Signal Lights Switch. 11. The dial can be set from OFF (no lighting) to BRT (full brightness). The dial can be moved past BRT to the TSTORM setting which will shade all flood lights. this dial controls the brightness of the two flood lights located on either side of the cockpit.
10.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
    SAI Accelerometer Landing gear control panel LASTE control panel
The dial can be rotated from OFF (no lighting) to BRT (full brightness). Labeled FLOOD. 8. This dial controls the brightness of panel lights for flight instruments that include:                Emergency flight control panel Throttle quadrant panel SAS panel Fuel system control panel Canopy control Seat control UHF radio panel VHF/FM radio panel VHF/AM radio panel Intercom control panel IFF control panel Antenna select control panel Circuit breaker panel ILS control panel TACAN control panel
EAGLE DYNAMICS 161
. Accelerometer and Compass Light Switch. Located on the right side of the panel is the two-position ACCEL & COMP switch. Floodlight Dial. Console Light Dial. Placing the switch in the up position turns on the lights and moving the switch to the down position turns them off. This switch provides lighting to the accelerometer and compass on the front canopy bow. This two-position switch located on the left side of the panel is labeled SIGNAL LTS and is used to set warning and caution advisory lights to one of two settings: the BRT setting provides full brightness and the DIM setting is used to provide reduced illumination.

Caution Light Panel
Figure 127. the Master Caution light will light on the UFC. located on the right console. an indication will be listed on the panel. The caution indication cannot be removed until remedial action has been taken to correct the root of the caution.
162 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. alerts you to any abnormal system behaviors.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
      HARS control panel Oxygen control panel Environmental control panel Lighting control panel CDU AAP
The dial can be rotated from OFF (no lighting) to BRT (full brightness). Any time a caution event occurs. Caution Light Panel The Caution Light Panel. When such an event occurs.

No function If bleed air is 400-degrees F or more If left aileron is not at normal position due to MRFCS If right aileron is not at normal position due to MRFCS If air temperature exceeds allowable ECS range.5 psi If right engine oil pressure is less than 27.000 psi If gun is capable of being fired If landing gear is down but anti-skid is disengaged. No function If left hydraulic fluid reservoir is low If left hydraulic fluid reservoir is low If oxygen gauge indicates 5 liters or less. No function If left engine oil pressure is less than 27. No function If at least one pitch SAS channel has been disabled If at least one yaw SAS channel has been disabled If left engine ITT exceeds 880-degrees C If right engine ITT exceeds 880-degrees C If windshield temperature exceeds 150-degrees F.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Below is a list of caution events and how they may be triggered: ENG START CYCLE L-HYD PRESS R-HYD PRESS GUN UNSAFE ANTI SKID L-HYD RES R-HYD RES OXY LOW ELEV DISENG AIL DISENG SEAT NOT ARMED BLEED AIR LEAK L-AIL TAB R-AIL TAB SERVICE AIR HOT PITCH SAS YAW SAS L-ENG HOT R-ENG HOT WINDSHIELD HOT L-ENG OIL RESS R-ENG OIL PRESS GCAS L-MAIN PUMP R-MAIN PUMP L-WING PUMP R-WING PUMP If either engine is in engine start process If left hydraulic system pressure falls below 1.5 psi If LASTE failure detected that affects GCAS If boost pump pressure from left main tank is low If boost pump pressure from right main tank is low If boost pump pressure from left wing tank is low If boost pump pressure from right wing tank is low
EAGLE DYNAMICS 163
. No function If at least one elevator is disengaged from the Emergency Flight Control panel If at least one aileron is disengaged from the Emergency Flight Control panel If ground safety lever is in safe position.000 psi If right hydraulic system pressure falls below 1.

please consult the Emergency Procedures chapter
164 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. For a complete list of remedy actions.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
L-MAIN FUEL LOW R-MAIN FUEL LOW L-FUEL PRESS R-FUEL PRESS L-CONV R-CONV L-GEN R-GEN LASTE IFF MODE-4 EAC STALL SYS APU GEN INU AIR HOT HARS L-R TKS UNEQUAL INERTIAL NAV CADC INST INV If left main fuel tank has 500 pounds or less If right main fuel tank has 500 pounds or less If low fuel pressure detected in left engine fuel feed lines If low fuel pressure detected in right engine fuel feed lines If left electrical converter fails If right electrical converter fails If left generator has shut down or AC power is out of limits If right generator has shut down or AC power is out of limits If fault detected in LASTE computer If inoperative mode 4 capability detected. No function If HARS heading or attitude is invalid If there is a 750-pound difference between the two main fuel tanks If there is a CDU failure while in alignment mode If CADC has failed If AC powered systems are not receiving power from inverter. No function If EAC is turned off If there is a power failure to the AoA and Mach meters If APU is on but APU generator is not set to PWR If air temperature is too hot for INU.

course deviation and station identification only T/R. When used together. The system operates in receive mode only.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
TACAN Operation and Control Panel
3 5
2 1
4
2
Figure 128.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 165
. When the Navigation Mode Select Panel is set to TCN and the TACAN Control Panel has been properly configured. place the cursor over the switch and rotate the mouse wheel to set the value.
Channel Selector Switches. Using the channel selector switches. they can display a two-digit TACAN channel identification.9) or the X/Y value. A/A T/R. OFF. Transmit / Receive mode operates as REC mode but also supplies range information A/A REC. TACAN is often a useful means to quickly get navigation data to friendly airfields. Once selected. The system receives only air-to-air bearing TACAN signal. In this mode. Mode Dial. only range data can be passed. Disables power to the TACAN system REC. This would be used to locate aerial tankers. Adjust the value by placing the cursor on the switch and rotating the mouse wheel. some aircraft can broadcast TACAN beacons as well. Test Button.
3. 1.
4. This mode allows the two-way transmission of TACAN range and bearing data between two aircraft. Right click on the switch to set either the numeric value (0 . Additionally. range and bearing information from a selected TACAN ground station will be displayed on the HSI in regards to Bearing Pointer 1 and Range indicators. TACAN Control Panel TACAN provides you line-of-sight bearing and range to selected TACAN ground stations. Channel Display Window. For air-to-air TACAN in the A-10C. it can receive bearing. The two rotary switches are each used to set a value 0 to 9. Located on the right of the panel. this dial has five selections:      2. the selected channel is displayed in this window. Tests the TACAN system as indicated on the HSI. The TACAN Control Panel is located on the right console behind the CDU and AAP.

05 increments.
3. This transparent window displays the current ILS frequency setting.
ILS Control Panel and ILS Operation
2 1
3
Figure 129. If the base of the knob is rotated. Upon approaching the runway threshold.
166 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. To hear the localizer and marker beacon tones. Setting the switch to PWR with the outside of the knob enables power and setting the switch to OFF will disable power. Volume Knob. Volume Knob. 1. the ILS system provides a localizer signal that can be displayed on the HSI and glide slope indications on the ADI. In addition to indications on the HSI and ADI. you will also hear the audio indication that the localizer signal has been captured. you will need to enable the ILS switch on the Intercom Panel. To adjust volume.
2. This two-position switch controls power to the ILS system. the dial controls the volume of the localizer capture tone and the marker beacon tone.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
5. Labeled VOL. there will also be an audio cue after passing over a marker beacon. the outside of the knob is rotated. Above the window is an ILS label. Rotating this knob adjusts the volume of the TACAN audio signal. ILS Setting Window. Power Control Knob. the ILS frequency in tenths and hundredths will be cycled in . by increments of 1 whole numbers. Rotating the base of the knob will cycle the ILS frequency (displayed in the ILS Setting Window). ILS Control Panel Primarily used for Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) landings at night and/or foul weather.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Heading and Attitude Reference Systems (HARS) Control Panel
1 2
6
3
5
4
Figure 130. You will set the switch to the setting that best matches the magnetic variation of the aircraft’s location. 4. The needle in the center will always be centered to indicate proper alignment. Sync Button. Hemisphere Selector Switch. it acts as a standard gyro-stabilized magnetic compass. To quickly align the HARS gyro and see results on the ADI and HSI. This window labeled SYN on the left side and IND on the right indicates the level of synchronization between the HARS and the remote compass when in slave mode. 1.
2. Normal mode is SLAVE and aligns the HARS gyro to the remote compass transmitter. the HARS Control Panel allows you to adjust HARS derived data. HARS Control Panel Located in the back portion of the right console. To account for gyro drift according to the current latitude.
6. LAT Correction dial. the HARS gyro is disconnected from the remote compass transmitter and can be adjusted manually.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 167
. Magnetic Variation Switch. Mode Switch. N and S. This two-position switch can be either set to SLAVE or DG. This switch labeled MAG VAR has three positions. the switch should be set according to aircraft's hemisphere latitude. you can press this button in the lower left corner of the panel. To account for earth rotation. Rotating the switch. +15. this dial labeled LAT is rotated to the aircraft's current latitude. you can in turn control heading as indicated on the HSI.
5. If placed in the DG (directional gyroscope) position. The hemisphere select switch has two positions. As such. 0 and -15.
3. SYN-IND annunciation.

Can be copied to the mission waypoint database using Waypoint (WAYPT) pages and then modified as a new mission waypoint. as well as attitude and steering information. it will overwrite Mark A. Up to 2. navigation capability. The waypoint database is divided into 4 parts: Waypoint Database The EGI system provides point-to-point navigation with a maximum of 40 waypoints stored in each flight plan plus 25 letter markpoints.
Markpoints    Assigned waypoint letters A through Y (25 total). Flight Plan Waypoints    Assigned waypoint numbers 0 through 40. There are two primary panels associated with the EGI: the Control Display Unit (CDU) and Avionics Auxiliary Panel (AAP). There are two types of markpoints: an overhead mark and an offset mark.077 waypoints can be stored in the waypoint database. When an overhead or offset markpoint is created.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Embedded GPS/INS (EGI) Navigation System
The EGI (often pronounced 'igee') navigation system is the primary aircraft navigation system of the A-10C and provides accurate. It is important to note that the CDU will not branch to the Waypoint page if a Mark Z (weapon release) is currently being displayed.


Flight Plans    The CDU can store 20 flight plans with up to 40 waypoints each. This provides you with instant feedback concerning the new markpoint. This waypoint and flight plan database is generally created beforehand in the mission editor/planner but it can also be modified during a mission. subsequent marks will follow the same logic as above. Mission waypoint 0 is normally the takeoff location. Each waypoint is created with the following set of values:
168 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.
Waypoint Database Fields. If all 25 markpoints are in use and another mark is taken. EGI operations revolve around a set of waypoints and flight plans that are stored in the CDU. Functions only when STEER PT rotary switch on the avionics auxiliary panel (AAP) is in the FLT PLAN position. worldwide. Is loaded automatically from the mission editor or manually entered before or during the flight using the CDU. the CDU will automatically branch to the Waypoint page to display the data for the new markpoint. You can have up to 20 unique flight plans. A flight plan is automatically created in the mission editor or in the CDU. You can insert new waypoints into a flight plan while flying a mission. An overhead mark records the current aircraft position while an offset mark records the coordinates and elevation of a point identified by a sensor like the targeting pod.

These are automatically set as Mission Waypoints in the mission editor or can be created while in a mission. or TERMINAL. WGS84 is always used. Waypoint DTOT: Desired Time on Target. Waypoint Type: The navigation type of the waypoint as set in the mission editor. Area. Default is East. Waypoint VNAV Mode: This can be cycled between 2D and 3D vertical navigation modes. time stored as hours:minutes:seconds using a 24-hour clock. Set in mission editor or with the CDU during a mission. Waypoint Scale: This can be adjusted to display scale in accordance to ROUTE. Set in mission editor. Waypoint Identifier Name: Maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters. No special characters other than numbers or letters allowed in name except a period (―. Set in mission editor. or TO TO. Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP)
EAGLE DYNAMICS 169
. Waypoint Elevation: Number range from -1000 to +32767. Waypoint MGRS: Stored as Grid.xxx. Format is N/S xxoxx. Eastings and Northings. All zeroes indicate no DTOT entered. No two waypoints can have the same identifier. DIRECT. Waypoint Datum: This indicates the spheroid and grid data from which all coordinates are processed. No two waypoints can have the same number/letter. first character must be a letter. Format is: ##N XX YYYYYZZZZZ. Set in mission editor.‖). Waypoint Longitude: Stored as East or West degrees/minutes/tenths. Waypoint Latitude: Stored as North or South degrees/minutes/tenths.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Waypoint Number: Number from 0 to 40 or letter from A to Z. Format is HH:MM:SS.

         
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP)
1 2
4
3
5
Figure 131. Waypoint Steer Mode: This can be set as: TO FROM. Default is North. APPROACH.xxx. Format is E/W xxxoxx. HIGH ACC.

this two position switch has two positions: ON enables power to the CDU and OFF disables power. It consists of two ON/OFF switches.
3. If selected. steerpoint. the OTHER must be selected.  OTHER. FLT PLAN must be selected to display the flight plan route on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
The AAP is located on the right console below the CDU and provides the power for both the CDU and EGI Systems. this two position switch has two positions: ON enables power to the EGI systems and OFF disables power. the dial has three positions:  FLT PLAN. it is advised that you provide power to the EGI soon after engine start as it will take considerable time to align the navigation system. This will provide information about your current position. Doing so will cycle forward and back through the waypoints according to you STEER PT Dial selection. WAYPT. the Steerpoint toggle switch defaults to center but can be toggled both up and down. two rotary knobs. Displays the WP INFO page. PAGE Select Dial. Labeled CDU. STEER. EGI Power Switch. cycling through waypoints will only cycle through the markpoints that you created (A-Z). This four position dial labeled PAGE enables you to determine the general type of information displayed on the CDU screen. all other selection are ―read only‖ / informational.
STEER PT Dial. Located in the bottom center of the panel. the waypoint database is divided into sections.

 5. use of the Steerpoint toggle switch will cycle between flight plan waypoints. and one cycle steerpoint switch.
2.
STEER Toggle Switch. In order to use the function select keys (FSK) on the CDU. MISSION.
170 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Located on the left side of the AAP and labeled STEER PT. Displays the STRINFO page that will provide detailed information about your steerpoint. Upon starting a mission. CDU Power Switch. From OTHER you will be able to add and modify data to the CDU and view additional information. MARK. Upon starting a mission. Each time you select a new waypoint. 1. it is advised that you provide power to the CDU soon after engine start as it will take considerable time to align the navigation system. Note that Z is automatically created when a weapon is used. From this page you can view basic information about your selected waypoint. Select flight plan to make all the waypoints in the active flight plan active.
   4. It allows you to access mission points. and your anchor point. Displays the POSINFO CDU page. When Markpoint is selected. Selecting Mission will allow you to access the entire mission waypoint database. mark points and flight plan points separately. POSITION. As discussed earlier. Labeled EGI. it becomes the steerpoint. Except for the OTHER selection.

Lines 3 through 9 are used with the Line Select Keys (LSK). It is this line definition that we will use throughout this chapter. DTSAS and EGI mode. six Function Select Keys (FSK). It consists of a display window. and several rocker switches and buttons. Each of these fields is distinguished by a L/R and 1-10 character. In addition to the CDU display window. The display screen is a 10-line visual display of 24 characters per line. Line 1 displays the page label.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Control Display Unit (CDU) and Pages
The CDU is located on the right console above the AAP and provides the control and information interface between you and the EGI navigation system.
1
2
2
3
13 4 10 8 9 7
5 12 6 11
Figure 132.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 171
. an alphanumeric keypad. Line 2 is used primarily for annunciations. active flight plan and steerpoint. CDU information may also be displayed on the MFCD CDU repeater page. with up to 15 enterable characters. occupies the left side of the 10th line (L10). and Figure of Merit (FOM). eight Line Select Keys (LSK). Control Display Unit (CDU) 1. CDU Display Window. A scratchpad.

The ± rocker increments or decrements the displayed waypoint. decimal and front slash keys. This character type ―[ ]‖ allows you to enter data from the CDU scratchpad and enter it into the system. Each press of the Rotary LSK will cycle to the next specified value. The keyboard pushbuttons include number/letter. LSK Numbering System 2. the ± rocker switch either steps through the data or enters data into the scratchpad using the keypad. This can include both alphanumeric or a string of numbers.
172 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. [ ] Data Entry.
5. or data as indicated by the + symbol next to a line select key (LSK). When this symbol (plus and minus) is displayed. Typed characters appear in the scratchpad and are then entered into the system via the Line Select Keys. ± Increment/Decrement. an error indication is placed on the scratchpad. Along the left and right sides of the display window are eight keys (four on each side of display). the data is invalid.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 133. If the data entered is valid. When this symbol is displayed. Line Select Keys (LSK). function or action. they control data entry/selection on each page. however. DIM/BRT Rocker. the scratchpad is cleared upon entry. When depressed. Rotary. The DIM/BRT rocker provides dimming and brightness adjustment of CDU display window. markpoint. Indicated as either a left or right pointing arrow. Active line select keys are indicated by one of five symbols being displayed next to the line select key as described below: ← → Branch. and then entering the displayed data by depressing the line select key next to this symbol. LSKs with this character direct you to a different CDU page when pressed.  System Action. depressing the associated line select key initiates the indicated operation. 4. CDU Keypad Keys 3. ± Rocker. if. This type allows you to cycle through a series of values/settings in a preset order. Keyboards.

10.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 173
.e. The CLR pushbutton erases the entire scratchpad. The SPC button provides capability for inserting space in a scratchpad data entry string. Page (P/G) Rocker Switch. etc. These include: On the first line:      Flashing asterisk indicates DTS upload and download activity Page title Active flight plan field (blank if AAP STEER PT is not in FLT PLN) Current steerpoint number (left justified) DTSAS Figure of Merit (FOM). the function select keys select the CDU page indicated when the AAP page select switch is in the OTHER position:       SYS: Commands display of System (SYS) NAV: Commands display of Navigation (NAV) Page WP: Commands display of Waypoint Menu (WP MENU) Page OSET: Commands display of OFFSET Page FPM: Commands display of Flight Plan Menu (FPMENU) Page PREV: Return to previous page
S ta n dar d L in e D is pl ay I t em s
On the first and second line of every CDU page are a set of common elements. Blank Rocker. 9.
7. BCK Button. SPC Button. 11. Some CDU pages have sub-pages (i.. STRINFO.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
6. The MK pushbutton commands creation of an overhead markpoint or overhead update. The Blank rocker provides a means to step through and display in the scratchpad the identifiers in the CDU database on the ANCHOR. Holding the pushbutton depressed will cause characters to disappear in a manner similar to repeated pressing of the pushbutton. Located beneath the CDU display window. The BCK pushbutton erases the character to the left of the cursor in the scratchpad. The Page rocker switch steps backward or forward between these pages. WAYPT. Press this button to clear an error message on the CDU. CLR Button. The FOM value indicates how accurate the DTSAS data is. 1 of 2. MK Button. 13. The Digital Terrain System Application Software (DTSAS) consists of a digital elevation database. Function Select Keys (FSK). 2 of 2. DTSAS allows ground collision and obstacle warnings. WP INFO.). 12. FPBUILD and OFFSET pages. Fault Acknowledge (FA) Button. 8. The Fault Acknowledge pushbutton causes certain displayed fault or status annunciations to disappear and signals the system that the fault has been acknowledged.

INS NAV RDY: Steady annunciation indicates degraded EGI INS navigation capability is available. DTS FAIL: Data Transfer System (DTS) is damaged and inoperative. This will appear each time new data is loaded from the DTS (DTSDNLD page). DOWNLOAD COMPLETE: Simulated data transfer from the data transfer cartridge is complete. DTSAS OFF MAP: Displayed when the current aircraft position is off the loaded digital map. MARK (A-Z): Indicates a markpoint has been generated and stored. This message can be cleared by either placing the IFFCC switch to TEST or ON position. GPS FAIL: Global Positioning System (GPS) navigation is damaged and inoperative. DTC UPLOAD COMPLETE: Data upload from DTS is complete. HARS FAIL: The Heading Attitude Reference System (HARS) is damaged and inoperative. This will most often happen when the DTS is already in a Failed state. It will only clear when NAV is selected on the ALIGN page indicating that the system is now operational. This occurs approximately 30 seconds after the IFFCC switch has been turned on (either TEST or ON). INS FAIL: The Inertial Navigation System (INS) is damaged and inoperative. EGI NOT RDY: Displayed whenever the EGI switch on the AAP is set to OFF. Flashing annunciation indicates full EGI INS navigation capability is available. IFFCC NOT READY: Displayed when the IFFCC is not communicating over the communications bus. INS FLT INST FAIL: Flight instruments (ADI and HSI) being supplied data from the INS system are no longer being fed reliable data. then automatically clear—or the user can push FA to clear. CADC NOT RDY: The Central Air Data Computer (CADC) is not communicating with the communications bus. usually when the IFFCC switch on the AHCP has been placed in the OFF position. The following list shows messages you may receive:   STANDBY: Displayed until CDU detects first valid initial position. or by pressing the FA key on the CDU.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 EGI Navigation solution mode and Figure of Merit (FOM)
On the second line: Line 2 is normally blank and reserved for CDU system annunciations. HUD NOT RDY: HUD not functioning. This message can be cleared by either placing the switch to ON or pressing the Fault Acknowledge (FA) key on the CDU. Default map size is 150 km.



          
 
174 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. DOWNLOAD FAILED: Displayed when the transfer of data from the data transfer cartridge has failed or is incomplete. EGI FAIL: The Embedded GPS INS (EGI) system is damaged and inoperative. CADC FAIL: The Central Air Data Computer (CADC) is damaged and inoperative. This most often happens when the IFFCC switch is set to OFF. This message will display for 30 seconds. This marks the completion of data transfer from the data transfer cartridge.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
   GPS KEY ERASED: When a GPS key is erased.
Wa yp o in t ID S ear ch Fu nc t i on
The waypoint search function is used to quickly locate the identifier name of a desired waypoint and it is automatically available on the CDU pages listed below:       STRINFO Page WP INFO Page WAYPT Page ANCHOR Page OFFSET Page FPBUILD Page
Entering an alphabetical character (A to Z) and then entering a letter (A to Z or 0 to 9) in the scratchpad automatically initiates a search of the waypoint database for waypoint(s) whose identifier name begins with these two characters. the first applicable Waypoint ID name (in alphanumeric order) is displayed in the scratchpad (with the cursor overlaying the third character). If there are no Waypoint ID names found that start with those characters.   The cursor is removed from the scratchpad while the search is in progress. this displays characters entered by you using the CDU keypad. WARM START: Displayed when CDU has suffered 3-second or less power interruption. the HUD scratchpad contains 24 characters. and the EGI will automatically align to the aircraft’s present
EAGLE DYNAMICS 175
. and the cursor returns to the third (blank) position when the search through the Waypoint ID database is complete.


In i tia li z a ti o n an d A l ig n m en t
After applying power to the CDU and EGI. there are two options available: o o Enter a third character into scratchpad and perform another search. The CDU scratchpad consists of 15 characters. GPS NEEDS KEYS: This will happen when GPS key is zeroized and a key is needed. Displayed on the 10th line.
Scratchpad. During this initialization. EGI extracts data from the mission file for the mission plan created in the mission editor. it is selected by pressing the appropriate identifier LSK. If Waypoint ID name(s) are found starting with those characters. or Use the ―←/→‖ rocker to toggle alphanumerically in either direction through the Waypoint ID database until the desired anchor point is found. the CDU and EGI automatically begin their initialization and then alignment. If this is the desired waypoint. the scratchpad displays the entered characters. If the Waypoint ID name displayed in the scratchpad is not the desired waypoint. this message will be displayed.

Displays present position longitude.
P OS I NF O P a g e
The POS INFO page is displayed when the AAP Page Select Switch is in POSITION. The only options available to modify are the temperature and airspeed fields. CDU Startup BIT Upon completion of alignment. L4. If not aligned. where ## is the grid zone letter and N is the grid zone letter.
176 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Displays present position latitude. If not aligned.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
position (waypoint 0). L3. Displays present position grid and WGS84 spheroid. Present Position Grid and Spheroid. If not aligned. the CDU initially displays the CDU STARTUP BIT TEST Page. Present Position Longitude.
Figure 135. This page displays information on current aircraft location and conditions. this field will display 11 asterisks. L6. The ALIGN Page is then displayed after the successful completion of the CDU STARTUP BIT TEST. you will need to select NAV from the Navigation / Align Sub-page. Position Information Page    Present Position Latitude. this field displays 7 asterisks. Upon startup. this field displays 11 asterisks.
Figure 134.

L9. you may manually select the displayed speed to be displayed as IAS. XXXXX is easting value. L10. Displays present position area. The default mode on startup is IAS. Steerpoint Information Page  Steerpoint Line Select Key. L7.9 Gs. IAS will indicate 50 KIAS. R5. Northings.1. B is row letter. R7.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 177
. L3. Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Line Select Key. This rotary line select key allows selection of either OAT in °C (default) or °F. MV for region. If not aligned. then a specific MSN or NAV waypoint is assumed. Speed Line Select Key. and GS will indicate 0. TAS or GS. Using the rotary LSK. this field displays three asterisks for the speed. this field displays 14 asterisks. R3. Magnetic Variation (MV). This field displays the present altitude in feet. Eastings. A is column letter.09 and 0. When the aircraft is stationary. Pressing the Steerpoint LSK selects that waypoint. When the aircraft is stationary. G Level. MACH indicates between 0. Scratchpad. R9. this field displays four asterisks. If not aligned. R4. eastings. If not aligned. This field displays the G level experienced by you. MACH Number. true airspeed (TAS) or ground speed (GS). This field displays the aircraft speed as a value of Mach. and northings. Allows you to select the steerpoint database and number/letter in one of three ways: o When the AAP STEER PT switch is set to MISSION and a numeric string (from 0 to 2050) is entered into scratchpad. and YYYYY is northing value. The page displays current steerpoint information. This rotary line select key allows you to step through and display indicated airspeed (IAS).
Figure 136.9 to +9. from -9.


    
S TE E R IN F O P a ge
The STEER INFO page is displayed when the AAP Page Select Switch is in STEER. TAS will indicate 70 KTAS.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Present Position Area. GPS Altitude (G ALT).

When AAP STEER PT switch is set to MISSION or MARK. Line Select Key. L9.
o 
Steerpoint Identifier Entry Line Select Key. Displays distance to steerpoint in nautical miles. displays 5 asterisks for elevation. then a specific markpoint is assumed. up to 12 letter characters. This field indicates the selected speed in knots. minutes and seconds (in selected time mode. Elevation (EL) of Steerpoint. the WAYPT Page will display the information for the current steerpoint. This field indicates the selected speed required to arrive at the steerpoint at the desired time. TTG will display 8 asterisks. The default mode on startup is IAS. TOT will display 8 asterisks. IAS will indicate 50 KIAS. minutes.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
o When the AAP STEER PT switch is set to MARK and a single alpha character is entered into scratchpad. R3. Required Speed Rotary Line Select Key. L6. R5. true airspeed (TAS) or ground speed (GS). GMT or local). Bearing/Radial Rotary. Allows selection of bearing (BRG) (default) to steerpoint or radial (RAD) from steerpoint for display. L4. this field will be blank. When ground speed is less than 3 knots. Allows you to go to WAYPT Page P1/2. This rotary line select key allows you to step through and display indicated airspeed (IAS). R6. allows you to select either the required indicated airspeed (RIAS). Desired Magnetic Heading (DMH). When the WAYPT Page is selected from this page. When the distance is equal to or greater than 100 nautical miles. R7. Distance (DIS) to Steerpoint. R9. Displays current wind direction in degrees (magnetic) and speed in knots. L7. When the distance is less than 100 miles. and seconds). only whole nautical miles are displayed which are rounded off to the nearest nautical mile. When ground speed is less than 3 knots. Speed Rotary Line Select Key. Displays time to steerpoint at current ground speed (shown in hours. Displays time of arrival at steerpoint at current ground speed in hours. The ± rocker switch on the CDU can be used to change the number/letter within the displayed waypoint database without using the LSK. Wind (WND) Direction/Speed. when active. If no elevation present. allows entry from scratchpad of steerpoint identifier. This line select key. tenths of a nautical mile are displayed. required true airspeed (RTAS) or required ground speed (RGS) in knots. When the aircraft is stationary. Time on Target (TOT). If not aligned. This line select key is only active (up and down arrow display) when a desired time on target (DTOT) has been uploaded or entered on the WAYPT Pages or a desired time to go (DTTG) has been entered using WAYPT Page 2/2. R8. Time to Go (TTG). this field will display 3 asterisks for the speed. Pressing the Steerpoint LSK selects that markpoint. L5. When a DTOT or DTTG has not been assigned. Displays wind corrected magnetic heading to steerpoint in degrees. TAS will display 70 KTAS and GS will indicate 0. WAYPOINT Branch Line Select Key.
 
  





178 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Displays elevation of steerpoint.

Waypoint Information Page  Waypoint Line Select Key. distance and time-to-go information for three different points: selected waypoint. or a markpoint for display as follows: o If a number from 0 to 2050 is entered in the scratchpad (a mission or navigation waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key pressed.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Scratchpad. minutes. this field will display 8 asterisks. Displays time to go to selected waypoint at current ground speed (shown in hours. tenths of a nautical mile are displayed. When ground speed is less than 3 knots.
o

Waypoint Identifier Line Select Key. Allows you to select a waypoint by using the scratchpad (Waypoint ID Database Search Procedure) and then pressing this line select key. only whole nautical miles are displayed which are rounded off to the nearest nautical mile. When the distance is less than 100 miles.
Figure 137. When the distance is equal to or greater than 100 miles. the distance field will display ―9999. Magnetic Heading/Distance to Selected Waypoint. R3. Displays magnetic heading in degrees and distance in nautical miles to selected waypoint. L10. and anchor point. Time to Go to Waypoint. The page displays bearing. steerpoint. L3. When the distance exceeds 9998. R4. R5. the markpoint with the alphabetical character displayed in the scratchpad becomes the displayed waypoint. Allows you to select a mission or navigation waypoint. and seconds). the waypoint with the number displayed in the scratchpad becomes the displayed waypoint.5 nautical miles. If an alphabetical character is entered in the scratchpad (a markpoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed.‖


EAGLE DYNAMICS 179
.
WP I N FO P a g e
The WP INFO page is displayed when the AAP Page Select Switch is in WAYPT.

shown in hours. Scratchpad. and seconds. Time to Go to Anchor Point. When ground speed is less than 3 knots. minutes. Displays magnetic heading in degrees and distance in nautical miles to steerpoint. Time to Go to Steerpoint. When the distance is equal to or greater than 100 nautical miles. and other related navigation-input systems. Allows you to go to ANCHOR Page. L5. When the distance is less than 100 nautical miles. When an anchor has not been selected using the ANCHOR Page. only whole nautical miles are displayed which are rounded off to the nearest nautical mile. When the distance exceeds 9998. FR is the default. tenths of a nautical mile are displayed. Displays time to go to anchor point at current ground speed. L8. the distance field will display ―9999. When an anchor has not been selected using the ANCHOR Page.5 nautical miles. L9. Allows you to go to WAYPT Page P1/2. the SYS page initialization data will be displayed. the WAYPT Page displays the information for the last waypoint that was displayed. LASTE. minutes. tenths of a nautical mile are displayed.‖ Anchor Point to (TO)/from (FR) Rotary Line Select Key. Displays time to go to steerpoint at current ground speed.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 WAYPT Page Branch Line Select Key. When the distance is less than 100 nautical miles. only whole nautical miles are displayed which are rounded off to the nearest nautical mile. L10. When the distance is equal to or greater than 100 nautical miles. Allows you to toggle between a display of magnetic heading/distance to (TO) or from (FR) the anchor point. R7. Magnetic Heading/Distance to Steerpoint.‖ ANCHOR Page (ANCHOR PT) Branch Line Select Key. this field will display 8 asterisks. HARS. This page and its sub-pages are used to check status of the GPS and INS navigation systems as well as related systems such as the CADC. and seconds. R9.5 nautical miles. When the WAYPT Page is selected from this page. When ground speed is less than 3 knots. Magnetic Heading/Distance to Anchor Point. R9. this field will display 8 asterisks. this field will display 8 asterisks. shown in hours. If the SYS page is selected after completion of the CDU start up Built In Test (BIT). When in the SYS page you can branch to the following sub-pages:    EGI INS GPS
180 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. When the distance exceeds 9998. Displays magnetic heading in degrees (1 to 360) and ground distance in nautical miles (0 to 9999) to or from the anchor point as selected by the to (TO)/from (FR) anchor point line select key. CDU. R8.


 



S Y S P ag e
The System (SYS) page is displayed when the AAP Page Select switch is in OTHER and the SYS FSK is depressed. the distance field will display ―9999. this field will display 8 asterisks.

This can be selected from the NAV page. You will generally set this to BLENDED unless either the INS or GPS systems become inoperative. If inoperative, you would want to select only the operating system (INS or GPS).  EGI INS Figure of Merit (FOM), L8. FOM indicates the quality performance of a device. In this case, it is used to indicate the accuracy of INS derived navigation data. This can range from 1 to 9 and represents accuracy of 26 m to 5,000 m. As such, the lower the FOM, the greater the accuracy of the INS derived data. An asterisk (*) symbol indicates that the FOM is unknown. GPS Figure of Merit (FOM), Center 8. Identifies current EGI GPS figure of merit. This can range from 1 to 9 and represents accuracy of 26 m to 5,000 m. As such, the lower the FOM, the greater the accuracy of the GPS derived data. An asterisk (*) symbol indicates that the FOM is unknown. EGI Blended (BLD) Figure of Merit (FOM). R8. Identifies current EGI BLENDED figure of merit. This can range from 1 to 9 and represents accuracy of 26 m to 5,000 m. As such, the lower the FOM, the greater the accuracy of the EGI derived data. An asterisk (*) symbol indicates that the FOM is unknown. Page Number, R10. Page 1 of 4. Scratchpad, L10.





  Page 2

The second page of the SYS/EGI sub-page displays the status of several EGI Shop Replaceable Units (SRU) and Operational Flight Programs (OFP).

Page 3 and 4 The third and fourth EGI pages are information only, and they display EGI BIT results. These are static and not functional in this simulation of the CDU.

Figure 142. System / EGI Sub-Page 3

186 COCKPIT CONTROLS

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Figure 143. System / EGI Sub-Page 4

S ys te m / INS S u b-P ag e
The INS page is displayed from the SYS page or when the TIME LSK is selected from either the NAV or GPS pages. From the INS sub-pages you can control and monitor the alignment of the INS navigation package, view current INS position, and update the INS. You will most often use these sub-pages when aligning the INS or to help diagnose an INS failure. Note that when you start the EGI, the INS will automatically start its alignment. This page allows you to branch to other Inertial Navigation System sub-pages:       ALIGN ALT ALIGN POS MISC INSSTAT UPDATE

Figure 145. System / INS / ALIGN Sub-Page This page has the following important functions:    Position Source (POS SOURCE), L4. This will indicate AUTO (DTC) because the loaded data from the DTC is being used to derive the alignment position. Coordinate Format Select (L/L or UTM), L5. Press this LSK to display the initial aircraft position (INIT POSIT) in either Lat / Long or UTM coordinates. Latitude / Grid and Spheroid of initial position, L7. Depending on the coordinate format, this will either display the latitude (L/L) of the initial position or the grid and spheroid (UTM). Alignment Time and Status, L8. The left numeric displays the time that the INS has been in alignment mode and the right numeric displays the alignment status. Status indications include INIT (initialization mode), ATTD (attitude information available), ATTD+HDG (attitude and heading information available). GROUND Alignment, R3. When first starting the aircraft and aligning it on the ground, GROUND will be selected by default. This results in a full gyrocompass alignment. The average ground alignment time is 5 minutes and is automatically started when the EGI switch is set to ON. The aircraft must not be moving for correct alignment. INFLT (In Flight) Alignment, R5. If the INS alignment needs to be re-aligned while the aircraft is in flight or moving on the ground, this option is used. This alignment process uses current position and velocity measurements from the INS. Before starting an in flight alignment, EGI, STR PT and ANCHR should be deselected from the Navigation Mode Select Panel or select HARS. The EGI GPS will then be used to align the EGI INS. This process can take between 5 and 10 minutes. NAV (Navigation), R7. After alignment is complete, indicated by the flashing INS NAV RDY annunciation, you can press the NAV LSK to place the INS out of alignment mode and into navigation mode. INS, R9. Press the INS LSK to return to the main INS page. Scratchpad, L10. Scratchpad field.









 

188 COCKPIT CONTROLS

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
SYSTEM / INS / ALT ALIGN Alternate Align (ALTALGN) Page Branch Line Select Key, L5. Allows the selection and display of the ALTALGN Page. This page is the same as the ALIGN page but provides the ability to do a FAST alignment along with manual entry of magnetic heading. Ground and In Flight alignment options are not available on this page. Use a FAST alignment when EGI GPS is not available or a quick / less accurate alignment is needed.

Figure 146. System / INS / ALTALGN Sub-Page This page has the following important functions:    Position Source (POS SOURCE), L4. This will indicate AUTO (DTC) because the loaded data from the DTC is being used to derive the alignment position. Coordinate Format Select (L/L or UTM), L5. Press this LSK to display the initial aircraft position (INIT POSIT) in either Lat / Long or UTM coordinates. Latitude / Grid and Spheroid of initial position, L7. Depending on the coordinate format, this will either display the latitude (L/L) of the initial position or the grid and spheroid (UTM). Alignment Time and Status, L8. The left numeric displays the time that the INS has been in alignment mode and the right numeric displays the alignment status. Status indications include INIT (initialization mode), ATTD (attitude information available), ATTD+HDG (attitude and heading information available). FAST Alignment, R3. This alignment mode is significantly degraded from a GROUND or INFLT alignment but requires much less time. A FAST alignment is based on stored heading data and Best Available True Heading (BATH). This mode would generally be used when EGI GPS data is not available or if a faster alignment that sacrifices accuracy is needed. MH (Magnetic Heading), R5. This field displays the magnetic heading. If the data is not accurate, you can enter the MH in degrees (XX.X) in the scratchpad and then press the LSK to enter it. NAV (Navigation), R7. After alignment is complete, indicated by the flashing INS NAV RDY annunciation, you can press the NAV LSK to place the INS out of alignment mode and into navigation mode. INS, R9. Press the INS LSK to return to the main INS page.











EAGLE DYNAMICS 189

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Scratchpad, L10. Scratchpad field.

SYSTEM / INS / POSITION Position (POS) Page Branch Line Select Key, R7. Allows the selection and display of the POS Page. The position page displays your current L/L and UTM coordinates as well as the projected cross track deviation. Elements of the page include:

Figure 147. System / INS / POS Sub-Page    L/L Coordinate, L3 and L4. These two lines list the latitude and longitude of the current position. UTM Coordinate, L6 and L7. These two lines list the current UTM coordinate of the present position. Cross Track Deviation, L8. Displays the cross track deviation in miles left (L) or right (R) of the selected course line (as indicated on the HSI). This is pegged at 9.9 NM when in BLENDED or INS and 5.4 NM when in GPS. GPS ALT, L9. This field displays the mean sea level (MSL) as calculated by EGI GPS. Position Source, R3. Select how present position is determined using this LSK. Options include BLENDED, GPS, AND INS. Scratchpad, L10. Scratchpad field.

  

SYSTEM / INS / INSSTAT INS Status (INSSTAT) Page Branch Line Select Key, R3. Allows the selection and display of the INS status (INSSTAT) Page. This page shows the EGI INS display mode, status of INS data sent to various systems, and the selection of Attitude (ATT) mode.

The status for each of these can either be V (Valid) or F (Failed). NAV RDY can also indicate D (degraded navigation only).

EAGLE DYNAMICS 191

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Scratchpad, L10. Scratchpad field.

SYSTEM / INS / UPDATE UPDATE Page Branch Line Select Key, R5. Allows the selection and display of the UPDATE Page. This page allows you to select a waypoint and provide an overhead INS update when flying over it. The basic procedure is to select a waypoint in the fly-to data base, press the PROCEED LSK, overfly the waypoint's known location (such as a prominent landmark) and press the MK (Markpoint) button on the CDU. You can then choose to accept or reject the INS update data.

Figure 149. System / INS / UPDATE Sub-Page      Update Waypoint, L3. This will be the waypoint to fly-over that you will base the INS update on. You can cycle the selected waypoint with the STEER switch on the AAP. DIS (Distance) to Update Waypoint, L4. This line displays the distance (X.X) in NM to the selected update waypoint. Update Waypoint Name, L5. The database name of the selected update waypoint is displayed here. Time To Go (TTG) to reach Update Waypoint, L6. The estimated time to reach the entered update waypoint is displayed here. Update Waypoint Coordinates, L7 and L9. Depending on the selected coordinate format selection, either the L/L or UTM coordinates of the selected update waypoint are displayed on these two lines. Coordinate Format, R3. Press this LSK to cycle the coordinate format between L/L and UTM. Magnetic Variation (MV), R5. Displays the magnetic variation of the update waypoint in degrees and tenths. PROCEED, R7. When pressed, you can now press the MK button on the CDU to take the INS update. You will want to be over the selected update waypoint location when pressing MK. Elevation (EL), R9. Elevation of selected update waypoint. Scratchpad, L10. Scratchpad field.

  

 

192 COCKPIT CONTROLS

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Once the MK button has been pressed, the below screen is shown. From this screen you can confirm expected coordinates and elevation and decide to reject or accept the update.

Figure 150. System / INS / UPDATE AC / REJ Sub-Page     Coordinate Format, R3. Press this LSK to cycle the coordinate format between L/L and UTM. ACCEPT INS update. Press this LSK to accept the INS overhead update at this location. REJECT INS update. Press this LSK to reject the INS overhead update at this location. Update Waypoint Coordinates, L7 and L9. Depending on the selected coordinate format selection, either the L/L or UTM coordinates of the selected update waypoint are displayed on these two lines. North/South Position Error, L6. Provides the North/South position error in nautical miles and tenths. East/West Position Error, R6. Provides the East/West position error in nautical miles and tenths. Magnetic Heading (MHD) Error, R7 and Distance (DIS) Error, R8. Provides EGI INS position update error in magnetic heading in degrees and distance in nautical miles. Elevation (EL), R9. Displays current steerpoint elevation. Scratchpad, L10. Scratchpad field.

    

EAGLE DYNAMICS 193

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
S Y S TE M / GP S S u b - P ag e
The GPS page is displayed when the GPS LSK is selected from the SYS page. This page displays GPS navigation status and additional sub-page branches. You will most often use these sub-pages to monitor GPS tracking accuracy (FOM), Built In Test (BIT) results, and setting the GPS key.

Figure 151. System / GPS Sub-page  Initialization (INIT) Mode Action Line Select Key, L3. Allows the selection of GPS INIT mode. Asterisk indicates GPS is in INIT mode. You will see this when the EGI GPS system is first starting up or after being re-started mid-mission in case of failure. Navigation (NAV) Mode Line Select Key, L5. Allows the selection of GPS NAV mode. Asterisk indicates GPS is in NAV mode. This is the normal operating mode of the EGI GPS after initialization has been completed. GPS FOM (Figure of Merit), Center 6. Displays GPS figure of merit (FOM) number between 1 and 9. 1 equals less than 26 m and 9 equals greater than 5,000 m. The lower this value equates to greater GPS data accuracy. EHE (Expected Horizontal Error), Center 4. Displays GPS expected horizontal error (EHE) in feet. This data is only valid when in NAV mode. EVE (Expected Vertical Error), Center 5. Displays GPS expected vertical error (EVE) in feet. This data is only valid when in NAV mode. STS (Satellite Tracking States), Center 6 and 7. Displays number of satellites (0 to 4) being used to calculate the navigation solution in state 5 (ST5) and in state 3 (ST3). The sum of the ST5 and ST3 fields are a number from 0 to 4. State 5 is preferable and provides the best GPS FOMs. When the EGI GPS is receiving both position and velocity information from a satellite, this satellite is in state 5. When the EGI GPS is receiving only position information from a satellite, this satellite is in state 3. Usually state 3 occurs only briefly during initial satellite acquisition or during periods of jamming or noise. GPSSTAT Page Branch Line Select Key, R7. Allows selection and display of GPS status (GPSSTAT) Page. GPSBIT Page Branch Line Select Key, R5. Allows the selection and display of the GPSBIT Page. This line select key is inactive (no arrow displayed) if GPS BIT data is unavailable.

SYSTEM / GPS STATUS / GPSSTAT Sub-Pages This sub-page and its nested sub-page allow you to view the status of various EGI GPS systems. These two pages are information-only and provide you V (valid) / F (failed) or (Y) yes / N (no) indications. The following status elements on the two pages consist of the following: Page 1

Figure 152. System / GPS / GPSSTAT Sub-Page 1       Navigation Data (NAV DATA) status, L4. This indicates the status of the GPS navigation data and can be either V (valid) or F (failed). BIT In Progress (BIT INPR) status, L5. This indicates the status of the GPS BIT progress. This can be either N (not in progress) or Y (in progress). Initialization Required (INIT REQ) status, L6. If the GPS requires time, position or almanacs, this will indicate either N (not in progress) or Y (initialization required). UTC (time) status, L7. This indicates the status of the GPS time and can be either V (UTC time is valid) or F (UTC time is not valid). Almanac Required (ALM REQ) status, L8. If the data almanac is required, this will indicate Y (almanac required). If not, it will indicate N (almanac not required). FILTER status, L9. Indicates the type of Kalman filter being used for the GPS filter. This field can return either INS (inertial navigation system mode) or PVA (position velocity acceleration mode). GPS status, R3. This indicates the global status of the GPS and can have the following indications: o N (not communicating)



EAGLE DYNAMICS 195

L3. Press this LSK will return you to the main GPS page. GPS page return. KEY 2HR status. This result can either be V (valid for next two hours) or F (will expire in next two hours). R9. System / GPS / GPSSTAT Sub-Page 2  BATTERY status. Scratchpad field. The parity status of the loaded key can either be V (valid) or F (invalid).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
o o o o  V (valid) F (failed) I (initializing) T (test)
KEY USED status. This indicates the status of the current GPS key. Key Parity (PAR) status. R7. Possible key status can be: o o o o N (no key in use) U (key is unverified) I (incorrect key) V (verified key)
  
GUK USER status. R6. R8. Scratchpad. R5. L10. This indicates the status of the GPS receiver battery and can be either V (working) or F (failed). This line indicates if the loaded key will be valid for the next two hours.
  Page 2
Figure 153. Identified the status of the yearly key and can be either Y (yearly key in use) or N (yearly key is not in use).
196 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.

L8. L3. The BIT result elements on these pages consist of the following: Page 1
Figure 154. this line will indicate Y. L7. Sufficient Keys (SUFKEYS) status.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 197
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Four Satellites (4 SAT) status. R5. Scratchpad field. L10. YES indicates they were not loaded and NO indicates they were loaded. The number left of the slash indicates the number of days the GPS key will be valid for and the number to the right of the slash indicates the number of days remaining that the GPS key will be valid for. This can be either V (at least four satellites being tracked) or F (fewer than four satellites being tracked). If the last key erase completed successfully. If not loaded it will indicate N. Scratchpad. After a GPS key has been loaded. it will indicate N. This indicates the status of the EGI GPS key circuitry. R4. KEYLOAD FAILED status. L4. If not. This indicates the status of the EGI GPS processing unit. This indicates if four or more GPS satellites are being tracked for optimal navigation. It can either be V (working) or N (failed). If the EGI has been loaded with a key. you can check this line to see if it was loaded successfully. System / GPS / GPSBIT Sub-Page 1  KYK status. ERASEFAIL status. Mission Duration (MSN DUR) status. Y will be indicated. HAS KEYS status. this field will indicate Y. R3. BIT result can either be P (pass) or F (fail). These five pages are information-only. it will indicate N. L5. If the key has not be defined.
 

  

SYSTEM / GPS STATUS / GPSBIT Sub -Pages This sub-page and its nested sub-page allow you to view the Built In Test (BIT) results of the GPS systems and any code word failures . this field will indicate U. If the loaded key will be valid for the duration of the mission. If unsuccessful. Receiver Processing Unit (RPU) status.

Scratchpad field. This is only used by ground crew. GPS. The number of days the key is valid for is left of the slash and the number of remaining days is indicated to the right. Duration (DUR).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 158. Return to main GPS page. R9. L10. L3.   GPS. Scratchpad field. L9.
Figure 159. the EGI only uses encrypted military GPS signals when performing navigation. Press this LSK to erase the current key.
SYSTEM / GPS / GPSKEYS Sub-Page The GPS Keys page allows you to turn on and off GPS signal encryption and set the duration that the GPS key will be valid for. R9.
200 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. L10. Return to the main GPS page. Scratchpad. ZEROIZE. System / GPS / GPKEYS Sub-Page      ANTI-SPOOFING. Scratchpad. System / GPS / GPSBIT Sub-Page 5 The 5th page displays EGI GPS information identifiers and words and the ability to cycle between block failures. When set to ON. L7.

the DTOT for each waypoint that has a DTOT assigned.
Figure 160. R9. R7. If the LCL ADJUST field displays any value other than + or -00:00.P a ge
The TIME sub-page allows you to set current date and time and adjust Desired Time on Target (DTOT) and adjust for local time.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
S YS TE M / GP S / T IM E S u b. L10
S YS TE M / R ei ni t ia liz e ( RE IN IT ) S u b-P ag e
The REINIT sub-page allows you to reset the primary navigation and flight control systems in case of malfunction.00:00. This mission adjustment time is added to. GMT Time Display. you can view its LRU status according to its code:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 201
. R3. System / TIME Sub-Page 1  Desired Time On Target (DTOT) ADJUST Entry Line Select Key. Displays two digits for the current GMT month (system date). Before reinitializing a system though. Allows local time adjustment (+1200 to 1200 hours) to be entered as HHMM where: o o     HH = hours MM = minutes

YEAR Display. Displays last two digits of the current GMT year (system date). GMT or local time as HH:MM:SS depending on the following: o o If the LCL ADJUST field displays + or . Local (LCL) ADJUST Line Select Key. or subtracted from. this field displays local (LCL) time. MONTH Display. L3. DAY Display.

Scratchpad. L7. R5. this field displays GMT time. This causes the DTTG for each waypoint that has a DTOT assigned to be changed to reflect this mission adjustment time. Displays two digits of the current GMT day (system date).

These actions can include: o o o o o o o o o o o NONE OFFSET MARK LASTE EVENT GCAS EVENT RDY FOR OFP RDY INIT PREP OFF UPDT HOT ELEVATION LOAD PASS LOAD FAIL HACK TIME

Weapons (WPN) EVENTS. L6. This can be: NOT ATTEMPTED. SERVICE action last performed.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 162. SUCCESSFUL. Initialization (INIT) load status. or FAILED. this can be: NOT ATTEMPTED. L3. Displays status of LASTE through the following codes: o o o    N = not communicating I = initializing V = valid
Operational Flight Program (OFP) load status. Total number of weapons events that have occurred and been transferred to the DTS. L8. LASTE Status. System / LASTE Sub-Page   READY Discrete.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 203
. This field displays the LASTE initialization status. Depending on the status of the LASTE. The last task that was performed will be listed in this field. L5. Identifies if LASTE is ready: YES or NO. SUCCESSFUL. or FAILED. L7. IN PROGRESS. R3. IN PROGRESS.

First enter the magnetic wind direction as three digits and then the wind speed in knots as two digits. After wind direction and speed have been entered. WIND. Pages 1 and 2 of the Wind sub-page provides the ability to enter wind data for seven different MSL altitudes. R9. This LSK allows you to select between BOTH. Model Mode option. and NONE. and temperature. Allows the selection and display of the WIND Page. L10
 

  
To summarize. Each of these altitudes can be assigned a unique wind direction. enter the desired altitude in thousands of feet MSL (00 to 99). Prior to pressing the LSK. and 9 on page 1 and LSK 3. LASTE. TEMP. press the LSK again next to the selected altitude field. System / LASTE / WIND Sub-Page  LSK 5. press the CLR LSK. R7. Scratchpad. Displays total number of GCAS (DTSAS and HUD) messages that have occurred and been transferred to the DTS. WIND Page Branch Line Select Key. Press any of these LSK to enter wind data into the field. Clear (CLR) data. To erase all the wind data. Once the five digits are entered in the scratchpad. This data field displays the IFFCC calculated current wind direction / wind speed and air temperature. wind speed. After one of the altitude fields has been selected (enter altitude in scratchpad and then press LSK). The selection will be used by the IFFCC to determine which data is used for ballistic calculations. Current Wind and Air Temperature. L9. 5.

Figure 163. Return to the main LASTE page. 7. Press it a second time after the CONFIRM message. Wind Edit (WNEDIT). R9. 7 and 9 on page 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Ground Collision Avoidance System Messages (GCAS MSG). you will then press the WNEDIT LSK to input the wind and temperature data. R5. R2. you will perform the following steps to create an altitude field and set the data for it:
204 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. R3. enter air temperature in Celsius on the scratchpad and then press the TEMP LSK.

3. This field provides a YES or NO indication of the HARS providing valid data. PITCH. you can select between DTSAS or Coordinate Ranging (CR) modes from this page.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1. V indicates valid data and F indicates failed.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 205
. it will show NO. Most importantly. 2. Enter wind temperature for altitude in Celsius as two digits in scratchpad and then press WIND TEMP LSK.
Figure 164. this field will show YES but if it is operating normally and providing valid data. V indicates valid data and F indicates failed. L9. This page allows you to view and configure the digital elevation navigation support. If the data is invalid. L3. 4. V indicates valid data and F indicates failed. Scratchpad. System / HARS Sub-Page  INVALID status. HARS heading in degrees and data validity code. Press the WNDEDIT LSK Enter three digit wind direction and two digit speed as a single five digit number string on the scratchpad and press the LSK left of the altitude you are editing. L7. MAG HEAD. ROLL. HARS pitch in degrees and data validity code. Enter altitude in thousands of feet (00 . L10
   
S YS TE M / DTS A S S u b-P ag e
The Digital Terrain System Application Software (DTSAS) page is displayed when the DTSAS LSK is selected from the SYS page.99) on the scratchpad and press an available altitude LSK. HARS roll in degrees and data validity code. L5.
S YS TE M / H ARS S u b -P ag e
The Heading Attitude Reference System (HARS) can be monitored from this page for valid operation and data output.

Look Aside Ranging (LAR) Sub-function Status. You would only use CR to find the elevation of a coordinate that is entered on the CDU waypoint page. Indicates validity of OWC sub-function. This can have a status of either V (valid) or F (failed). Indicates validity of PGCAS subfunction. Systems that can be reset from this page include:  EGI
206 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Vertical Position Uncertainty (VPU). When this field indicates OFF. Indicates validity of LAR subfunction. L5. If DTSAS is OFF or failed. This can have a status of either V (valid) or F (failed). Displays DTSAS calculated HPU (0 to 3346 feet). this field will display three asterisks. Obstacle Warning Cue (OWC) Avoidance Height Entry Line Select Key. If DTSAS is OFF or failed. Coordinate Ranging (CR) Sub-function Action Line Select Key. This can have a status of either V (valid) or F (failed). This can have a status of either V (valid) or F (failed). Horizontal Position Uncertainty (HPU). Passive Ranging (PR) Sub-function Status. To change this value. Obstacle Warning Cue (OWC) Sub-function Status. L10

      

S Y S TE M / R ES E T S u b-P ag e
If a fault is discovered with one of the following systems (indicated by an N or F status indication). this field will display asterisks. the DTSAS function is disabled. Enables or disables the coordinate ranging sub-function of DTSAS. Pressing this line select key alternately toggles the DTSAS function between ON and OFF. System / DTSAS Sub-Page  DTSAS Function Action Line Select Key. Allows the DTSAS function to be enabled/disabled. Allows Obstacle Warning Caution (OWC) avoidance height (0 to 9999 feet) to be entered by entering desired height in scratchpad and then pressing this line select key. R4. R5. L8. Scratchpad. L3. Indicates validity of PR sub-function. R3. you may wish to reset the system. Displays DTSAS calculated VPU (0 to 207 feet). Predictive GCAS (PGCAS) Sub-function Status. R6.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 165. R8. L7. enter a new value on the scratchpad and then press the LSK.

R7. R3. System / DTS Sub-Page  DTS status. If the DTS is able to read the data. an asterisk will flash next to the DTSUPLD page title until the upload is complete. DTSSTAT branch. There are three selections. Once complete. L10
S Y S TE M / DTS Up l oa d (D TS UP L D) P a g e
To upload data from a mission to the DTS. a DTC UPLOAD COMPLETE annunciation will appear. Press this LSK to view the DTS Upload page. this field will indicate YES. you can use this page. DTSDNLD branch.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 167. This field displays the status of the DTS according to the following codes: o o o o      N (not communicating) I (initializing) V (valid) F (failed)
DTS ready status. it will indicate NO. DTSUPLD branch. Scratchpad.
208 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. L3. L5. Press this LSK to view the DTS Status page. If unable. and once you select one. Press this LSK to view the DTS Download page. R5.

EGI Missionization (MSN) test. or GO (passed test). Inertial Navigation System (INS) test. L3. System / LRU Test Sub-Page  EGI TEST branch. you can press the RECORD LSK at R8. or GO (passed test). or GO (passed test). System / INS / EGITEST Sub-Page o Global Positioning System (GPS) test. IP (test in progress). This field can have one of three indications: UN (untested). Press this LSK to run a test of the EGI INS LRU. IP (test in progress).
Figure 171. L5. you may wish to run an LRU test.
o
o
o o
EAGLE DYNAMICS 211
. This field can have one of three indications: UN (untested). These include the CADC. This field can have one of three indications: UN (untested). Press to return to the LRU Test page.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
S YS TE M / L R U T es t (L R UT ES T ) S u b -P a g e
The LRU Test page allows you to run tests on several of the primary Line Replaceable Units (LRU). R7. L9. STOP MSN. To cease a test of the EGI MSN LRU. Press this LSK to view the EGI Test page. IP (test in progress). CDU and DTS. Press this LSK to run a test of the EGI MSN LRU. If you encounter a problem with one of these LRU systems. LRUTEST. press this LSK.
Figure 172. Press this LSK to run a test of the EGI GPS LRU. L3. To record the BIT results. R9.

or GO (passed test).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
o  Scratchpad. L10
Central Air Data Computer (CADC) test. R7. or GO (passed test). IP (test in progress). Scratchpad. IP (test in progress). Upon doing so. Control Display Unit (CDU) test. press the EXIT TESTING LSK field. L7. This will perform a WARM START of the CDU. you can press the RECORD LSK at R8. To end the test. This field can have one of three indications: UN (untested). Press this LSK to run a test of the CADC LRU. This field can have one of three indications: UN (untested). This field can have one of three indications: UN (untested). L10



 
212 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Data Transfer System (DTS) test. L5. Press this LSK to run a test of the DTS LRU. you must first press this LSK. or GO (passed test). RECORD. R3. you can press LSK L7 to start the CDU LRU test. TEST MODE. L9. Press this LSK to run a test of the CDU LRU. To test the CDU though. IP (test in progress). To run a test of the CDU LRU. you may press this LSK to record the BIT results. you must first press the TEST MODE LSK and confirm the selection. If you press Y on the CDU keypad. To record the BIT results. If the DTS LRU is being tested. you will be prompted to select either Y (yes) or N (no).

This displays the status of the CADC and can have one of the following status states: o o o o   N (not communicating) V (valid) F (failed) T (test)
Pressure Altitude (P ALT). Indicated Air Speed (IAS). The outside air temperature (OAT) in degrees of Celsius and can either have a V (valid) or F (failed) status indication. Barometric Altitude (B ALT). This displays the current aircraft altitude in feet according to barometric pressure and can either have a V (valid) or F (failed) status indication. R3. This displays the current aircraft airspeed as a value of Mach and can either have a V (valid) or F (failed) status indication. This displays the current aircraft true airspeed in knots and can either have a V (valid) or F (failed) status indication. This displays the current aircraft altitude in feet according to pressure and can either have a V (valid) or F (failed) status indication. System / CADC Sub-Page   FAULT status. L7.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Scratchpad. Air Temperature (TEMP). L3.
   
214 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.
Figure 175. L8. L9. L10
S Y S TE M / C e n tra l Ai r Da ta C om p u t er ( C AD C) P a g e
The CADC page allows you to view flight and flight environment data as being processed by the Central Air Data Computer. This will either indicate YES or NO depending on a fault being detected in the CADC system. L5. L6. This displays the current aircraft indicated airspeed and can either have a V (valid) or F (failed) status indication. CADC status. L4. True Air Speed (TAS). MACH.

FPP (CDU floating point processor) status. R4. HARS I/F (Heading Attitude Reference Systems Interface) status. each of the items will be tested and its status result will be listed as either P (pass) or F (failed). L9. EEPROM (CDU programmable memory) status . This can either be P (pass) or F (failed). R9. Press this LSK to branch to the Bitball control page. DATA PUMP. Status of the CDU 1553 bus.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Scratchpad. L5. Status of the CDU FPP. This can either be P (pass) or F (failed). Bitball Control (BB CTL) page branch. Press this LSK to branch to the LRUTEST page. This can either be P (pass) or F (failed). R3. you will press the START LSK. Status of the CDU EEPROM. START. Upon pressing START. LRUTEST page branch. L4. This can either be P (pass) or F (failed). This will normally be set to OFF and would only be used for maintenance tests. Status of the CDU keyboard indication. RAM (CDU Random Access Memory) status. Page 1
Figure 176. 1553 RAM (1553 bus Random Access Memory). System / CDU Test Sub-Page 1        DKI (CDU keyboard panel) status. To test the status of the above items. Status of the HARS interface to the CDU. R7. This can either be P (pass) or F (failed). Status of the CDU RAM. L10
   
EAGLE DYNAMICS 215
. R5. Scratchpad. L6. You would use this page to help diagnose any CDU failure indications. A Bitball alerts the ground crew of CDU failure. This can either be P (pass) or F (failed). L10
S YS TE M / C DU Te s t (C DU TE S T) S u b -P a g e
The CDU Test sub-pages allow you to run status tests of the various CDU sub-systems. L3.

ERASE LOG. WRITE LOG. R3. MXOPT. R7. Used to erase all maintenance logs. Press this LSK to cycle back to the previous log. L3. For ground crew only to view log data. Press this LSK to cycle forward to the next recorded log file. Create a maintenance log when the aircraft is on the ground and moving less than 75 knots. System / MXLOG Test Sub-Page        INCR.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 179. The data and time of the log entry is listed here.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 217
. L10. L7. MISSION DATE TIME. DECR. L9. Scratchpad. L4.

indicated by the flashing INS NAV RDY annunciation. GROUND Alignment. R3. L7. NAV / ALIGN Sub-Page This page has the following important functions:    Position Source (POS SOURCE). GROUND will be selected by default. Depending on the coordinate format. This will indicate AUTO(DTC) because the loaded data from the DTC is being used to derive the alignment position.





EAGLE DYNAMICS 219
. you can press the NAV LSK to place the INS out of alignment mode and into navigation mode. this option is used. L10
NAV / ALIGN Sub-Page
Figure 181. R5. When first starting the aircraft and aligning it on the ground. Latitude / Grid and Spheroid of initial position. The left numeric displays the time that the INS has been in alignment mode and the right numeric displays the alignment status. L5. R7. This results in a full gyrocompass alignment. After alignment is complete. L8. Press this LSK to display the initial aircraft position (INIT POSIT) in either Lat / Long or UTM coordinates. If the INS needs to be re-aligned while the aircraft is in flight or moving on the ground.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Scratchpad. The EGI GPS will then be used to align the EGI INS. R9. Before starting an in flight alignment. Status indications include INIT (initialization mode). The aircraft must not be moving for correct alignment. INFLT (In Flight) Alignment. ATTD+HDG (attitude and heading information available). L4. Alignment Time and Status. This process can take between 5 and 10 minutes. NAV (Navigation). Press the INS LSK to return to the main INS page. Coordinate Format Select (L/L or UTM). The average ground alignment time is 5 minutes and is automatically started when the EGI switch is set to ON. this will either display the latitude (L/L) of the initial position or the grid and spheroid (UTM). STR PT and ANCHR should be deselected from the Navigation Mode Select Panel or HARS should be selected. This alignment process uses current position and velocity measurements from the INS. EGI. ATTD (attitude information available). INS.

Allows local time adjustment (+1200 to 1200 hours) to be entered as HHMM where: o o HH = hours MM = minutes
   
YEAR Display. L10
220 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.
Figure 182. DAY Display. this field displays GMT time. R5. R7. GMT Time Display. MONTH Display. Scratchpad field. R3. NAV / TIME Sub-Page  Desired Time On Target (DTOT ADJUST) Entry Line Select Key. L3. this field displays local (LCL) time.00:00. Allows a mission adjustment time for the steerpoint to be entered as HHMMSS where: o o o  HH = hours MM = minutes SS = seconds
Local (LCL ADJUST) Line Select Key. Displays two digits of the current GMT day (system date). R9. L10.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Scratchpad. L7. Displays two digits for the current GMT month (system date). If the LCL ADJUST field displays any value other than + or -00:00. GMT or local time as HH:MM:SS depending on the following: o o If the LCL ADJUST field displays + or .
NAV / TIME Sub-Page The TIME sub-page allows you to set current date and time and adjust Desired Time on Target (DTOT) and adjust for local time. Displays last two digits of the current GMT year (system date).

Scratchpad.

You can cycle the selected waypoint with the STEER switch on the AAP. This page allows you to select a waypoint and provide an overhead INS update when flying over it.
Figure 183. From this screen you can confirm expected coordinates and elevation and decide to reject or accept the update. PROCEED. Coordinate Format. You can then choose to accept or reject the INS update data. Scratchpad. L5. DIS (Distance) to Update Waypoint. Press this LSK to cycle the coordinate format between L/L and UTM. Update Waypoint Name.
  
 
Once the MK button has been pressed. Time To Go (TTG) to reach Update Waypoint. L7 and L8. R9. Scratchpad field. you can now press the MK button on the CDU to take the INS update. Update Waypoint Coordinates. R5. This line displays the distance (X. overfly the waypoint's known location (such as a prominent landmark) and press the MK (Markpoint) button on the CDU. L6.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 221
. Elevation of selected update waypoint. The database name of the selected update waypoint is displayed here. press the PROCEED LSK.X) in NM to the selected update waypoint. NAV / UPDATE Sub-Page      Update Waypoint. L4. This will be the waypoint to fly-over that you will base the INS update on.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
NAV / UPDATE SUB-PAGE Allows the selection and display of the UPDATE Page. R7. The estimated time to reach the entered update waypoint is displayed here. The basic procedure is to select a waypoint in the fly-to data base. Magnetic Variation (MV). R3. the below screen is shown. You will want to be over the selected update waypoint location when pressing MK. L10. Displays the magnetic variation of the update waypoint in degrees and tenths. L3. either the L/L or UTM coordinates of the selected update waypoint are displayed on these two lines. When pressed. Depending on the selected coordinate format selection. Elevation (EL).

R5. Displays current steerpoint elevation. R8. R3. L6. Scratchpad. East/West Position Error.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 184. Provides the East/West position error in nautical miles and tenths. L7 and L8. you can use this page. an asterisk will flash next to the DTSUPLD page title until the upload is complete. L10.
222 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. a DTC UPLOAD COMPLETE annunciation will appear. either the L/L or UTM coordinates of the selected update waypoint are displayed on these two lines. Update Waypoint Coordinates. There are three selections. Press this LSK to cycle the coordinate format between L/L and UTM. Scratchpad field. Press this LSK to reject the INS overhead update at this location. REJECT INS update. R7 and Distance (DIS) Error. and once you select one. L5. Once complete. ACCEPT INS update. Elevation (EL). R6. Provides EGI INS position update error in magnetic heading in degrees and distance in nautical miles. Press this LSK to accept the INS overhead update at this location.
    
NAV / DTS Upload (DTSUPLD) Page To upload data from a mission to the DTS. R9. Provides the North/South position error in nautical miles and tenths. North/South Position Error. NAV / UPDATE / AC/REJ Sub-Page     Coordinate Format. Magnetic Heading (MH) Error. Depending on the selected coordinate format selection.

Flight Plan Specific Attributes. a waypoint's attributes are:    Scale: Enroute Steer: TO FROM Vertical Navigation Mode: 2D
There are two classes of attributes. Upload Original Navigation Data (ORIG NAV DATA). NAV / DTS Upload Sub-Page       Upload All Original Data (ALL ORIG DATA). Scratchpad. L10
NAV / Attributes Sub-Page Each waypoint in the CDU database can be assigned unique attributes. R9. These are used when the AAP STEER PT dial is set to MISSION or MARK. By default. flight plans. L5. R3. L3. DTS. those for a specific waypoint and those for a specific flight plan: Waypoint Specific Attributes. Upload all original waypoints. L9. Upload CDU and LASTE Preferences (CDU/LASTE PREFERENCES). CDU preferences. These are used when the AAP STEER PT dial is set to MISSION or MARK. Upload user-created CDU and LASTE setting preferences.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 223
. Upload Recent Navigation Data (RECENT NAV DATA). Press this LSK to return to the main DTS page. These can be uploaded from the DTS or entered from the Waypoint page (new or modified). These can also be uploaded from the DTS or created/modified from the Waypoint Attributes (WPTATT) page.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 185. Upload all original navigation data. Upload only recent original navigation data. and LASTE settings.

The sensitivity is measured by the dots on the HSI and ADI.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 186. NAV / ATTRIB Sub-Page This page has the following important functions:  SCALE. L5 and L6. Use the Scale setting to determine the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and glide slope indicator sensitivity.
Glide Slope dots
CDI dots
224 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.

for a consistent HSI course deviation indicator. and SCS. L7 and L8. and CDU POS Page cross track deviation (CROSS TRK DEV) indications. If the SCS steer mode has been selected and then ANCHR is selected on the NMSP. In the DIRECT and TO TO steer modes. each time a new steerpoint is selected. 1).the commanded course is manually selected course away from the point where the aircraft was located at the time SCS is selected. the SCS steer mode cannot be selected on the ATTRIB Page (SCS LSK is inactive).g. The CDU provides four steer modes: TO FROM.
Note:

The TO FROM and SCS steer modes require that a selected course be entered using the COURSE SET knob on the HSI if you want consistent HSI course deviation indicator.. • SCS . DIRECT. When ANCHR is selected.the commanded course is the great circle path from the designated From point. • TO TO . TO TO. and can only be selected/deselected on the ATTRIB Page. displayed on the CDU FROM Page. DIRECT.the commanded course is the great circle path along the course entered via the HSI COURSE SET knob to/from the selected steerpoint. and TO TO modes. DIRECT. the course arrow on the HSI should be set to the course indicated on the ATTRIB Page. ADI bank steering bar. These steering cues are determined by the attributes of the waypoint that is the anchor point. the SCS mode is automatically deselected and steering cues are provided to the anchor point.
Note:
 
When ANCHR is selected.the commanded course is the great circle path from the aircraft position at the time the DIRECT mode is selected to the selected steerpoint. the TO steerpoint is shown in the upper right corner of the CDU as the waypoint (e. the SCS steer mode cannot be selected on the ATTRIB Page (SCS LSK is inactive). The steer attribute displayed on the Attributes (ATTRIB) Page or Waypoint (WAYPT) Page 2/2 is waypoint specific. In the TO FROM. The waypoint specific steer attribute is entered/changed using the ATTRIB Page or WAYPT Page 2/2. to the selected steerpoint. using the COURSE SET knob on the HSI. The TO FROM. this is replaced by SCS. and TO TO steer modes are waypoint and/or flight plan specific attributes.

 
226 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Subsequently.
• TO FROM .DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
STEER. The steer attribute displayed on the Waypoint Attributes (WPTATT) Page is flight plan specific. In the SCS mode. and CDU Position (POS) Page cross track deviation (CROSS TRKDEV) indications. a course is computed from the aircraft’s position at that instant to the new steerpoint. The flight plan specific steer attribute is entered/changed using the WPTATT Page. • DIRECT . ADI bank steering bar. The SCS mode is not an attribute.

The CDU provides four scale modes: ENROUTE. The SCS steermode is not an attribute and can only be selected or deselected on the ATTRIB Page. Scratchpad field. Vertical Navigation Mode. R8 and R9. the SCS mode is automatically deselected and steering cues are provided to the anchor point. SCS appears on line 1 of the CDU display and indicates the navigation point. R5. vertical steering will be automatically computed between the TO and FROM points. When in ENTERED mode. R3. TERMINAL. When in 3D navigation. The HSI SET AT CRS field will display digitally the entered course steering on the HSI. use the scratchpad to enter the desired angle and then press the LSK to enter the value.
Selected Course Steering (SCS). HSI data. Press this LSK to select between COMPUTED and ENTERED.
 
EAGLE DYNAMICS 227
. The EGI can provide navigation in both 2D and 3D modes and this in turn drives the HSI and ADI. Press this LSK to cycle between 2D and 3D navigation. When on. high accuracy (HIGH ACC). vertical angle input may be selected. and APPROACH. L10. a vertical angle can be automatically computed or you can enter one manually. These steering cues are determined by the attributes of the waypoint that is the anchor point. ○ 3D Mode: When in 3D mode. Scratchpad. L9. When COMPUTED is selected. Press this LSK to cycle SCS ON and OFF. 2D Mode: Only horizontal heading data is passed to the HSI and ADI.
   

○
Figure 187. NAV / ATTRIB / VNAV Entry Sub-Page  Selected Vertical Angle. SCALE and 2D or 3D can be selected to provide the desired steering cues.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

If the SCS steer mode has been selected and then ANCHR is selected on the NMSP. When the SCS steer mode is selected. This will then drive the ADI steering indications in the vertical according to the VNAV setting.

The information pertaining to these airfields is obtained from the navigation waypoint database.
Figure 190. Time To Go (TTG). mark. the target symbol to the right of the line select key of the selected diversion airfield will not be visible (line select key inactive). regardless of the selection of the AAP steer switch causes the selected diversion airfield to become the current steerpoint.9 NM) to the diversion waypoint identified in line above this field. steerpoint. R10. L3. This page allows you branch access to the following sub-pages:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 229
. In addition. anchor and the from point data. If this Page is returned to (via the NAV Page) after a diversion airfield is selected. R8. L7 and L9. These divert airfields are listed in descending order. or flight plan) as the steerpoint. L4. L8 and L10. Selected Steerpoint (SP) Indicator. the steerpoint indicator (SP) will be visible to the right of the waypoint identifier of the selected diversion airfield. L5. R6.
 
WP ME N U P a ge
The WP MENU page is displayed when the AAP Page Select Switch is in OTHER and the WP FSK is depressed. L6. R4. Displays magnetic heading (1 to 360 degrees) and range (0 to 999. Pressing this line select key. Displays waypoint number and identifier of the 4 closest diversion waypoints listed in descending order with the closest airfield listed at the top. From the sub-pages of this menu you can view and set waypoint. L8 and L10. changing the selection of the AAP steerpoint switch will deselect the diversion airfield as the steerpoint and set the appropriate point from the selected database (mission. L4. with the closest divert airfield (with respect to TTG at present speed) listed first. The line select keys allow selection of the diversion waypoint identified in the fields to the right of the pressed line select key as the steerpoint. L6. Indicates that the displayed diversion waypoint is the current selected steerpoint. ○ Once a diversion field has been selected as a steerpoint.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
(TTG) for the 4 closest divert airfields. NAV / DIVERT Sub-page  Divert Field Waypoint Number And Identifier Action Line Select Keys.
○

Magnetic Heading/Range. Displays TTG (hours:minutes:seconds) at current speed to the diversion airfield identified in line above this field.

the first actuation displays the first waypoint in the database (not 0). L5. Waypoint Menu Page    STEERPOINT Page Branch Line Select Key. Allows you to set the From Point navigation point. Spheroid Data Entry Line Select Key. Allows the selection and display of the STEERPT sub-page for the steerpoint. Allows the selection and display of the WAYPT Page for the last waypoint displayed. L10
  
WP / STEERPOINT Sub-Page The WAYPOINT page is displayed when the steerpoint Page line select key is depressed within the WP MENU Page. ANCHOR Page Branch Line Select Key. L3. Indication of the current spheroid being used for navigation. From the second page you can set the attributes of the steerpoint. This page provides you detailed information about the steerpoint and it allows you to change it.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
    STEERPOINT ANCHOR PT WAYPOINT FROM PT
Figure 191. Page 1
230 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. WAYPOINT Branch Line Select Key. FROM PT Page Branch Line Select Key. Allows the selection and display of the ANCHOR PT sub-page. R3. R5. R9. Scratchpad.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 192. When the waypoint displayed is also the current steerpoint. a search through the Waypoint ID database search is assumed as described in the Standard Line 10 Display previously. L3. ○ Pressing this LSK when a mission waypoint (0 through 50) or a markpoint (A through Z) is displayed and the identifier entered in the scratchpad is not present in the waypoint database will rename the displayed waypoint with the identifier displayed in the scratchpad. If this line select key is pressed when a navigation waypoint (51 through 2050) is displayed and the entered waypoint identifier is not present in the Waypoint ID database. FROM and the waypoint acting as the navigation point to be navigated from is indicated. Steerpoint Line Select Key.
○
EAGLE DYNAMICS 231
. Allows entry from scratchpad of steerpoint identifier. Allows you to select a mission or navigation waypoint or a markpoint for display as follows: ○ ○ ○ If a number from 0 to 2050 is entered in the scratchpad (a mission or navigation waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key pressed. This FROM point can be edited in the FROM PT sub-page. R2. WP / STEERPOINT Sub-Page 1  FROM Point.

If an invalid waypoint number or markpoint letter is entered. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. an ―SP‖ will be displayed after the waypoint ID number. When TO TO is selected as the STEER mode. the operator can also use the ± rocker switch on the CDU to select the waypoint within the displayed waypoint database without using the line select key. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. If two or more characters are entered (with the first an alpha character). up to 12 alphanumeric characters. If an alphabetical character from A to Z is entered in the scratchpad (a markpoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed. R3.   Steerpoint Indicator. When the AAP STEER PT rotary select knob is set to MISSION or MARK. Once the desired waypoint identifier is in the scratchpad. Steerpoint Identifier Line Select Key. L3. pressing this LSK will display that waypoint information.

. and N is the grid zone letter. minutes and thousandths of a minute. the next available location is displayed next to the target symbol. Allows waypoint data to be copied to the next available mission waypoint when line select key is pressed. this field and the DTOT and DTTG fields on Page 2/2 will display 8 asterisks.
UTM FORMAT ○ L7. Copy Action Line Select Key. Allows entry of waypoint latitude in degrees.

 
L/L FORMAT ○ ○ L7.e. CR is set to OFF on the DTSAS Page. R9.

○
This flag is only displayed when a Mission waypoint position is modified. Allows rotary selection of either ―L/L‖ for Latitude Longitude format or ―UTM‖ for Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates. L5. latitude and longitude) could not be determined by the DTSAS Coordinate Ranging function (e. Indicates the waypoint type as defined in the Waypoint ID Database. off the digital map). Waypoint Grid and Spheroid Entry Line Select Key. Pressing the line select key a second time changes the sign of elevation.. NO CR is displayed when: ○ CR is set to ON on the DTSAS Page and the elevation for the entered waypoint position (i. Allows entry of waypoint longitude in degrees. (The DTSAS option will remain permanently on). R4. Coordinate Ranging (CR) Flag. Waypoint Longitude Entry Line Select Key. L/L is the default setting.
232 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The range of elevation that can be entered is from -1000 feet to +9999 feet. Elevation (EL) Entry Line Select Key. The flag is not displayed (i.  Desired Time On Target (DTOT) Line Select Key. L9. L6. R5. This field displays CR when CR is set to ON on the DTSAS Page and the displayed mission waypoint elevation has been determined by DTSAS coordinate ranging. Allows desired time of arrival at selected waypoint to be entered from scratchpad in hours. Waypoint Latitude Entry Line Select Key.. When a DTOT or DTTG has not been entered or assigned (uploaded from DTS) to the waypoint. When the DTOT is entered. Wind (WND) Direction/Speed.g. The Spheroid will always be WGS84. where ## is the grid zone number. minutes and thousandths of a minute. R7. Allows entry of waypoint UTM grid zone of up to two numeric characters and one alpha character.e. minutes and seconds. blank) for Navigation and Markpoint waypoints. The allowable DTOT entry range is from 1 to 240000.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
  Waypoint Classification Indicator. Leading zeroes do not have to be entered. Alternate Coordinate Format Rotary Line Select Key. Entering an elevation value and pressing the line select key enters a positive value. Displays current wind direction in degrees (magnetic) and speed in knots. R8. the desired time to go (DTTG) is automatically updated to reflect the new DTOT. Allows entry of elevation [in feet above mean sea level (MSL)] of mission waypoints from scratchpad.

and TO TO modes. high accuracy (HIGH ACC). R5. displayed on the CDU FROM Page. When ANCHR is selected.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
• DIRECT . • TO TO .

  
  

EAGLE DYNAMICS 235
. to the selected steerpoint. ADI bank steering bar. ○ 3D Mode: When in 3D mode. TERMINAL. In the TO FROM.the commanded course is the great circle path from the designated From point.
Note:

The TO FROM and SCS steer modes require that a selected course be entered using the COURSE SET knob on the HSI if you want consistent HSI course deviation indicator. each time a new steerpoint is selected.the commanded course is the great circle path from the aircraft position at the time the DIRECT mode is selected to the selected steerpoint. a course is computed from the aircraft’s position at that instant to the new steerpoint. 1).the commanded course is manually selected course away from the point where the aircraft was located at the time SCS is selected. When in 3D navigation.. using the COURSE SET knob on the HSI. the course arrow on the HSI should be set to the course indicated on the ATTRIB Page. These steering cues are determined by the attributes of the waypoint that is the anchor point. and APPROACH.
Vertical Navigation Mode. If the SCS steer mode has been selected and then ANCHR is selected on the NMSP. and CDU POS Page cross track deviation (CROSS TRK DEV) indications. This will then drive the ADI steering indications in the vertical according to the VNAV setting. The SCS steermode is not an attribute and can only be selected or deselected on the ATTRIB Page. this is replaced by SCS. SCALE and 2D or 3D can be selected to provide the desired steering cues. In the SCS mode. vertical angle input may be selected. a vertical angle can be automatically computed or you can enter one manually. the SCS steer mode cannot be selected on the ATTRIB Page (SCS LSK is inactive). • SCS . and CDU Position (POS) Page cross track deviation (CROSS TRKDEV) indications. Subsequently. the SCS mode is automatically deselected and steering cues are provided to the anchor point. In the DIRECT and TO TO steer modes. the TO steerpoint is shown in the upper right corner of the CDU as the waypoint (e.g. ADI bank steering bar. Press this LSK to cycle between 2D and 3D navigation. DIRECT. for a consistent HSI course deviation indicator. When the SCS steer mode is selected. The CDU provides four scale modes: ENROUTE.

and seconds (1 to 24000). minutes.
Selected Vertical Angle. Scratchpad.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
○  2D Mode: Only horizontal heading data is passed to the HSI and ADI. R4. Clearing DTTG (scratchpad empty and pressing this line select key) will cause both DTOT and DTTG fields to display 8 asterisks. Page 1
Figure 194. this field and the DTOT field will display 8 asterisks. When a DTOT or DTTG has not been entered or uploaded from DTS. Scratchpad field. When COMPUTED is selected. use the scratchpad to enter the desired angle and then press the LSK to enter the value. When the DTOT is entered.



WAYPOINT Sub-Page The WAYPOINT page is displayed when the WAYPOINT Page line select key is depressed within the WP MENU Page. This page provides you detailed information about the currently selected waypoint. Press this LSK to select between COMPUTED and ENTERED when in 3D vertical navigation mode. WP / Waypoint Menu Sub-Page 1
236 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Allows desired time of arrival at selected waypoint to be entered from scratchpad in hours. vertical steering will be automatically computed between the TO and FROM points.When the DTTG is entered. the DTTG is automatically updated to reflect the new DTOT. Clearing DTOT (scratchpad empty and pressing this line select key) will cause both DTTG and DTOT fields to display 8 asterisks. and seconds (1 to 24000). minutes. STEER INFO Page or WP INFO Page. From the second page you can set the attributes of the waypoint. L10. Allows desired time to go to selected waypoint to be entered from scratchpad in hours. When a DTOT or DTTG has not been entered or uploaded from DTS. Desired Time On Target (DTOT) Entry Line Select Key. this field and the DTTG field will display 8 asterisks. When in ENTERED mode. the DTOT is automatically updated to reflect the new DTTG. Desired Time To Go (DTTG) Entry Line Select Key. L7. L9.

If this line select key is pressed when a navigation waypoint (51 through 2050) is displayed and the entered waypoint identifier is not present in the Waypoint ID database. FROM and the waypoint acting as the navigation point to be navigated from is indicated. Waypoint Identifier Line Select Key. up to 12 alphanumeric characters. If an alphabetical character from A to Z is entered in the scratchpad (a markpoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed. the operator can also use the ± rocker switch on the CDU to select the waypoint within the displayed waypoint database without using the line select key. pressing this LSK will display that waypoint information. ○ Pressing this LSK when a mission waypoint (0 through 50) or a markpoint (A through Z) is displayed and the identifier entered in the scratchpad is not present in the waypoint database will rename the displayed waypoint with the identifier displayed in the scratchpad. Allows entry from scratchpad of steerpoint identifier. Waypoint Line Select Key. Once the desired waypoint identifier is in the scratchpad.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 195.   Steerpoint Indicator. L3. If two or more characters are entered (with the first an alpha character). L3.
○
EAGLE DYNAMICS 237
. Allows you to select a mission or navigation waypoint or a markpoint for display as follows: o o o If a number from 0 to 2050 is entered in the scratchpad (a mission or navigation waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key pressed. When the AAP STEER PT rotary select knob is set to MISSION or MARK. R2. an ―SP‖ will be displayed after the waypoint ID number. R3. When TO TO is selected as the STEER mode. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. When the waypoint displayed is also the current steerpoint. a search through the Waypoint ID database search is assumed as described in the Standard Line 10 Display previously. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button.

If an invalid waypoint number or markpoint letter is entered. Waypoint Menu Sub-Page using TO TO Steering  FROM Point. This FROM point can be edited in the FROM PT sub-page.

L6. L9. and N is the grid zone letter. Waypoint Longitude Entry Line Select Key. blank) for Navigation and Markpoint waypoints. R9.  Desired Time On Target (DTOT) Line Select Key. Entering an elevation value and pressing the line select key enters a positive value. Allows entry of waypoint longitude in degrees. CR is set to OFF on the DTSAS Page. R7. The allowable DTOT entry range is from 1 to 240000. off the digital map). Copy Action Line Select Key. Waypoint Latitude Entry Line Select Key.e. Allows desired time of arrival at selected waypoint to be entered from scratchpad in hours. L5. Indicates the waypoint type as defined in the Waypoint ID Database. Allows waypoint data to be copied to the next available mission waypoint when line select key is pressed. Pressing the line select key a second time changes the sign of elevation. L/L is the default setting.

o

 
UTM FORMAT ○ L7.g. R5. minutes and seconds. latitude and longitude) could not be determined by the DTSAS Coordinate Ranging function (e. Allows entry of waypoint latitude in degrees. Wind (WND) Direction/Speed. Elevation (EL) Entry Line Select Key. R8. Waypoint Grid and Spheroid Entry Line Select Key. minutes and thousandths of a minute. This field displays CR when CR is set to ON on the DTSAS Page and the displayed mission waypoint elevation has been determined by DTSAS coordinate ranging. Leading zeroes do not have to be entered. The flag is not displayed (i. R4. minutes and thousandths of a minute. Allows entry of waypoint UTM grid zone of up to two numeric characters and one alpha character.. Allows entry of elevation [in feet above mean sea level (MSL)] of mission waypoints from scratchpad.. NO CR is displayed when: o CR is set to ON on the DTSAS Page and the elevation for the entered waypoint position (i. The Spheroid will always be WGS84. where ## is the grid zone letter. (The DTSAS option will remain permanently on). Coordinate Ranging (CR) Flag. Allows rotary selection of either ―L/L‖ for Latitude Longitude format or ―UTM‖ for Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates. this field and the DTOT and DTTG fields on Page 2/2 will display 8 asterisks.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
  Waypoint Classification Indicator. L/L FORMAT ○ ○ L7.
238 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The range of elevation that can be entered is from -1000 feet to +9999 feet. the next available location is displayed next to the target symbol. Displays current wind direction in degrees (magnetic) and speed in knots.. the desired time to go (DTTG) is automatically updated to reflect the new DTOT. When the DTOT is entered. This flag is only displayed when a Mission waypoint position is modified. When a DTOT or DTTG has not been entered or assigned (uploaded from DTS) to the waypoint. Alternate Coordinate Format Rotary Line Select Key.e.

• TO FROM . The CDU provides four steer modes: TO FROM.70 DEG
STEER. and SCS. The waypoint specific steer attribute is entered/changed using the ATTRIB Page or WAYPT Page 2/2.the commanded course is the great circle path along the course entered via the HSI COURSE SET knob to/from the selected steerpoint. The TO FROM. a course is computed from the aircraft’s position at that instant to the new steerpoint.70 feet
APPROACH: CDI Deviation Indication ○ ○ 1 Dot = 1.0 DEG
Glide Slope Sensitivity ○ ○ 1 Dot = 0. • DIRECT . the SCS steer mode cannot be selected on the ATTRIB Page (SCS LSK is inactive). DIRECT. Subsequently. each time a new steerpoint is selected.the commanded course is the great circle path from the aircraft position at the time the DIRECT mode is selected to the selected steerpoint.35 DEG 2 Dots = 0.5 DEG 2 Dots = 3. These steering cues are determined by the attributes of the waypoint that is the anchor point. TO TO. The steer attribute displayed on the Attributes (ATTRIB) Page or Waypoint (WAYPT) Page 2/2 is waypoint specific.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
○ 2 Dots = 500 feet
HIGH ACC: CDI Deviation Indication ○ ○ 1 Dot = 0. The flight plan specific steer attribute is entered/changed using the WPTATT Page.
240 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The SCS mode is not an attribute.10 nm
Glide Slope Sensitivity ○ ○ 1 Dot = 100 feet 2 Dots = 0. and TO TO steer modes are waypoint and/or flight plan specific attributes. DIRECT. The steer attribute displayed on the Waypoint Attributes (WPTATT) Page is flight plan specific. and can only be selected/deselected on the ATTRIB Page. If the SCS steer mode has been selected and then ANCHR is selected on the NMSP. the SCS mode is automatically deselected and steering cues are provided to the anchor point.50 nm 2 Dots = 0. L5 and L6.
Note:
 
When ANCHR is selected.

ADI bank steering bar. using the COURSE SET knob on the HSI. displayed on the CDU FROM Page. vertical angle input may be selected. DIRECT. and CDU Position (POS) Page cross track deviation (CROSS TRKDEV) indications. The SCS steermode is not an attribute and can only be selected or deselected on the ATTRIB Page.

  
  

o
EAGLE DYNAMICS 241
. and APPROACH. the SCS mode is automatically deselected and steering cues are provided to the anchor point. and CDU POS Page cross track deviation (CROSS TRK DEV) indications. TERMINAL. In the SCS mode. a vertical angle can be automatically computed or you can enter one manually. In the DIRECT and TO TO steer modes.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
• TO TO . this is replaced by SCS. Press this LSK to cycle between 2D and 3D navigation. 1). R5. SCALE and 2D or 3D can be selected to provide the desired steering cues. If the SCS steer mode has been selected and then ANCHR is selected on the NMSP.g. When ANCHR is selected. 2D Mode: Only horizontal heading data is passed to the HSI and ADI. In the TO FROM. When in 3D navigation. • SCS .
Vertical Navigation Mode. o 3D Mode: When in 3D mode. the SCS steer mode cannot be selected on the ATTRIB Page (SCS LSK is inactive). These steering cues are determined by the attributes of the waypoint that is the anchor point. The CDU provides four scale modes: ENROUTE. and TO TO modes. for a consistent HSI course deviation indicator. ADI bank steering bar.the commanded course is the great circle path from the designated From point.the commanded course is manually selected course away from the point where the aircraft was located at the time SCS is selected.
Note:

The TO FROM and SCS steer modes require that a selected course be entered using the COURSE SET knob on the HSI if you want consistent HSI course deviation indicator. the TO steerpoint is shown in the upper right corner of the CDU as the waypoint (e. high accuracy (HIGH ACC). When the SCS steer mode is selected. This will then drive the ADI steering indications in the vertical according to the VNAV setting. to the selected steerpoint. the course arrow on the HSI should be set to the course indicated on the ATTRIB Page..

the DTOT is automatically updated to reflect the new DTTG. vertical steering will be automatically computed between the TO and FROM points.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Selected Vertical Angle. When a DTOT or DTTG has not been entered or uploaded from DTS.
○
242 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. L3. L7. Scratchpad field. Press this LSK to select between COMPUTED and ENTERED when in 3D vertical navigation mode. this field and the DTOT field will display 8 asterisks. this field and the DTTG field will display 8 asterisks. and seconds (1 to 225959). minutes.When the DTTG is entered. Allows desired time to go to selected waypoint to be entered from scratchpad in hours. the waypoint with the number displayed in the scratchpad becomes the anchor point. R4. Allows desired time of arrival at selected waypoint to be entered from scratchpad in hours. L9. the DTTG is automatically updated to reflect the new DTOT.



WP / ANCHOR Sub-Page The ANCHOR page is displayed when the ANCHOR PT Page line select key is depressed within the WP MENU Page. When the DTOT is entered. Clearing DTTG (scratchpad empty and pressing this line select key) will cause both DTOT and DTTG fields to display 8 asterisks. and seconds (1 to 24000). Also referred to as a ―Bullseye‖. Clearing DTOT (scratchpad empty and pressing this line select key) will cause both DTTG and DTOT fields to display 8 asterisks. Desired Time On Target (DTOT) Entry Line Select Key. Scratchpad. use the scratchpad to enter the desired angle and then press the LSK to enter the value. minutes. Desired Time To Go (DTTG) Entry Line Select Key. WP / Anchor Sub-Page  Anchor Point Entry Line Select Key.
Figure 197. When in ENTERED mode. The anchor point may be displayed on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD) and as data on the HUD. the anchor point is an arbitrary geographic location that is used as a common reference for units operating in the same general area. the markpoint with the alphabetical character displayed in the scratchpad becomes the anchor point. When a DTOT or DTTG has not been entered or uploaded from DTS. Allows you to select and enter an anchor point from the scratchpad as follows: ○ If a number from 0 to 2050 is entered in the scratchpad (a mission or navigation waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key pressed. When COMPUTED is selected. If an alphabetical character from A to Z is entered in the scratchpad (a markpoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed. L10.

Allows entry from scratchpad of anchor point identifier. Desired Magnetic Heading (DMH) to Anchor Point. tenths of a nautical mile are displayed. Displays time to anchor point at current ground speed in hours. Once the desired waypoint identifier is in the scratchpad. shown in hours. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. When the distance is equal to or greater than 100 nautical miles.
○ 
Time To Go (TTG) to Anchor Point. Displays time to steerpoint at current ground speed. Displays ground distance to anchor point in nautical miles (0 to 9999). minutes. minutes. When the distance exceeds 9998. Displays wind corrected magnetic heading to anchor point in degrees. When ground speed is less than 3 knots.5 nautical miles.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 243
. and seconds. L5. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. If this line select key is pressed when the identifier in the scratchpad is not present in the Waypoint ID database. this line select key is inactive (no brackets symbol displayed) and the field displays the identifier of the selected steerpoint. If no anchor point has been entered or uploaded from DTS. the distance field will display ―9999. If two or more characters are entered (with the first an alpha character). only whole nautical miles are displayed which are rounded off to the nearest nautical mile. If no anchor point has been entered or uploaded from DTS. Distance (DIS) to Anchor Point. R6. Steerpoint Identifier Entry Line Select Key. this field will display 12 asterisks. L6. a search through the Waypoint ID database search is assumed as described in the Standard Line 10 Display previously. L7. When ground speed is less than 3 knots or when an anchor point has not been entered or uploaded from DTS. When AAP STEER PT switch is set to MISSION or MARK. When the distance is less than 100 nautical miles. up to 12 alphanumeric characters.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
You can also use the ± rocker switch on the CDU to select the anchor point within the displayed waypoint database without using the line select key. and seconds. TTG to anchor point will display 8 asterisks. DMH will display 3 asterisks. When an anchor point has not been entered or uploaded from DTS. ○ If this line select key is pressed when the identifier in the scratchpad is not present in the Waypoint ID database.




Time to Go (TTG) to Steerpoint. L8.‖ When an anchor point has not been entered or uploaded from DTS this field displays 3 asterisks. When AAP STEER PT switch is set to FLT PLAN. this field will display 5 asterisks. pressing this LSK will designate that waypoint as the anchor point and the remaining anchor point information will be calculated/displayed. If an invalid waypoint number or markpoint letter is entered.  Anchor Point Identifier Line Select Key. R3. and the steerpoint can only be changed by using the STEER toggle switch on the AAP or UFC. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. TTG to steerpoint will display 8 asterisks. it allows the operator to select a steerpoint by using the scratchpad (Waypoint Search Procedure as described above) and then pressing this line select key.

the distance field will display ―9999. only whole nautical miles are displayed which are rounded off to the nearest nautical mile. When the distance exceeds 9998.
o
244 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. L10
WP / From point (FROM PT) sub-page When a waypoint is in TO TO steering mode. Displays ground distance to steerpoint in nautical miles. When the distance is equal to or greater than 100 nautical miles. the waypoint with the number displayed in the scratchpad becomes the initial point. If an alphabetical character from A to Z is entered in the scratchpad (a markpoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed. WP Info Display: The ANCHOR point information is displayed and updated on the WP INFO Page Display. L3.‖ Anchor data on HUD.5 nautical miles.
 
Scratchpad. R8. Displays wind corrected magnetic heading to steerpoint in degrees. Setting or changing an anchor point affects the following pages: o o  HUD Display: The upper right-hand corner of the HUD displays the ANCHOR point identifier and the bearing/distance from that point to the aircraft.
Figure 198.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
  Desired Magnetic Heading (DMH) to Steerpoint. WP / From Point Sub-Page  FROM Point Entry Line Select Key. you can manually set the waypoint that the navigation is based FROM. tenths of a nautical mile are displayed. Other Displays Affected by Anchor Page. Allows you to select and enter the FROM point from the scratchpad as follows: o If a number from 0 to 2050 is entered in the scratchpad (a mission or navigation waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key pressed. the markpoint with the alphabetical character displayed in the scratchpad becomes the initial point. L9. Press this LSK to turn the anchor point data block on the HUD OFF and ON. Distance (DIS) to Steerpoint. When the distance is less than 100 nautical miles. R7.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
You can also use the ± rocker switch on the CDU to select the anchor point within the displayed waypoint database without using the line select key. o If this line select key is pressed when the identifier in the scratchpad is not present in the Waypoint ID database. Allows entry of waypoint UTM grid zone of up to two numeric characters and one alpha character.
o 
FROM Point Identifier Line Select Key. The Spheroid will always be WGS84. where ## is the grid zone letter. XXXXX is easting value. pressing this LSK will designate that waypoint as the anchor point and the remaining anchor point information will be calculated/displayed. Waypoint Longitude Entry Line Select Key. Allows entry of area in two alpha characters and eastings and northings in up to 10 digits. Waypoint Grid and Spheroid Entry Line Select Key. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. o If an invalid waypoint number or markpoint letter is entered. Once the desired waypoint identifier is in the scratchpad. and YYYYY is northing value.
UTM FORMAT o L7. Eastings. minutes and thousandths of a minute. Waypoint Latitude Entry Line Select Key. Northings Entry Line Select Key. If no anchor point has been entered or uploaded from DTS. This line select key is inactive (no brackets symbol displayed) for navigation waypoints (51 through 2050) and markpoints (A through Z). and N is the grid zone letter. Allows entry from scratchpad of the FROM point identifier. L9. B is row letter. up to 12 alphanumeric characters. If no anchor point has been entered or uploaded from DTS. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. a search through the Waypoint ID database search is assumed as described in the Standard Line 10 Display previously.
o 
Alternate Coordinate Format Rotary Line Select Key. Allows entry of waypoint latitude in degrees. this field will display 12 asterisks. A is column letter. If two or more characters are entered (with the first an alpha character). L/L FORMAT o o L7. L10
EAGLE DYNAMICS 245
. Allows rotary selection of either ―L/L‖ for Latitude Longitude format or ―UTM‖ for Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates. Allows entry of waypoint longitude in degrees. R3. this field will display six asterisks. Waypoint Area.
o

Scratchpad. L5. minutes and thousandths of a minute. L/L is the default setting. L9.

The offset magnetic heading and distance will then be displayed (R6).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
OF FS ET P a g e
The OFFSET page is displayed when the AAP Page Select Switch is in OTHER and the OSET FSK is depressed. Offset Page  Initial Waypoint Entry Line Select Key. Select the offset waypoint (LSK R9). or (3) a point defined a heading/distance from the initial point. L3. If an alphabetical character from A to Z is entered in the scratchpad (a markpoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed. Allows you to select and enter an initial waypoint from the scratchpad as follows: o If a number from 0 to 2050 is entered in the scratchpad (a mission or navigation waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key pressed.  Initial Waypoint Identifier Line Select Key. 3.
o
You can also use the ± rocker switch on the CDU to select the anchor point within the displayed waypoint database without using the line select key. The OFFSET Page allows calculations from an initial point to (1) another waypoint. up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Allows entry from scratchpad of waypoint identifier. The process is as follows: 1. the markpoint with the alphabetical character displayed in the scratchpad becomes the initial point. If two or more characters are entered (with the first an alpha character). Select the initial waypoint. If an invalid waypoint number or markpoint letter is entered. (2) a set of coordinates. 2. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. L5. or entered heading and distance (LSK R5). a search through the Waypoint ID database search is assumed as described in the Standard Line 10 Display previously. you can compute displacements between two points.
246 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. coordinate (LSK L7 and L9). Once the desired waypoint identifier is in the scratchpad.
Figure 199. pressing this LSK will designate that waypoint as the initial waypoint. In this way. the waypoint with the number displayed in the scratchpad becomes the initial point. The default initial waypoint is 0 (zero).

T when the distance is less than 100 NM. minutes and thousandths of a minute. Waypoint Longitude Entry Line Select Key. where ## is the grid zone letter. The Spheroid will always be WGS84. R5 and R6.T when the distance is 100 NM or more but less than 1000 NM. Allows entry of waypoint UTM grid zone of up to two numeric characters and one alpha character. Magnetic heading and distance are entered as HHHDD. B is row letter. if tenths of an NM were entered. this field will display NM and tenths of an NM. L7. and offset waypoint database and number field will be asterisks. XXXXX is easting value. Allows rotary selection of either ―L/L‖ for Latitude Longitude format or ―UTM‖ for Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates.9 NM.T when the distance is 1000 NM or more and equal to or less than 9999. Magnetic Heading/Distance (MH/DIS) Entry Line Select Key. minutes and thousandths of a minute. and YYYYY is northing value This line select key is inactive (no brackets symbol displayed) for navigation waypoints (51 through 2050) and markpoints (A through Z). When the entered distance is equal to or more than 100 NM. and N is the grid zone letter. This field also displays the magnetic heading and distance (up to 9999 NM) for a computed offset between waypoints and is entered as geographical coordinates. Allows entry of waypoint latitude in degrees.
UTM FORMAT o L7.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 247
. A is column letter. R7. L9.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
If this line select key is pressed when the identifier in the scratchpad is not present in the Waypoint ID database.
o

Copy Action Line Select Key. L7. Allows you to compute an offset from the initial waypoint. Waypoint Area. L/L is the default setting. Waypoint Latitude Entry Line Select Key. The created offset waypoint coordinates are displayed at lower left. The magnetic heading and distance are entered/displayed when this line select key is pressed. Eastings. this value will be used in calculating the offset position. Allows entry of waypoint longitude in degrees. this field will display only NM (no tenths). next available location is displayed next to the target symbol. When the entered distance is less than 100 NM. R3. Northings Entry Line Select Key. L9. L9. When a new offset waypoint number/letter is entered (as defined below) the MH/DIS field will be computed/displayed from the initial waypoint to the offset waypoint. HHHDDD.  Alternate Coordinate Format Rotary Line Select Key. however. Allows entry of area in two alpha characters and eastings and northings in up to 10 digits. ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. L/L FORMAT o o L7. and HHHDDDD. Allows operator to store offset coordinates as a mission waypoint by depressing copy line select key which stores the offset waypoint data at next available mission number. L9. Waypoint Grid and Spheroid Entry Line Select Key.

The default offset waypoint is 0 (zero). create a new one. each consisting of up to 40 waypoints. When the computed offset distance is less than 100 NM. this field will display NM (no tenths).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
o When a new latitude/longitude/UTM grid/area. and the MH/DIS field displays the magnetic heading and distance to the entered coordinates.
o
If an invalid waypoint number or markpoint letter is entered. If an alphabetical character is entered in the scratchpad (an offset waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed. this field will display NM and tenths of an NM.5 NM. L10.
FL I G HT P L A N ME N U (FP M) P a g e
The Flight Plan Menu page is displayed when the AAP Page Select Switch is in OTHER and the FPM FSK is depressed.  Offset Waypoint Entry Line Select Key. the MH/DIS field will be computed/displayed from the initial waypoint to the new coordinates. The tenths input is optional. eastings or northings are entered (as defined above). ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ is displayed on the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. If the computed offset distance is greater than 9998.
248 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. and the offset waypoint number display will be asterisks. This page allows you to select a flight plan.‖ Offset waypoint coordinates are displayed at lower left. If the magnetic heading/distance does not follow the input format described above and the LSK is pressed. the offset waypoint number changes to 4 asterisks. the offset magnetic heading/distance is computed and displayed below the MH/DIS field. When the computed offset distance is equal to or more than 100 NM.
o
The default heading and distance shown is from the initial point to the offset waypoint described below. It also causes the waypoint coordinates to be displayed at the lower left in the applicable format. a ―CDU INPUT ERR‖ will be displayed in the scratchpad and will remain until cleared by pushing the CLR Button. this field will display ―9999. It also causes the offset waypoint coordinates to be displayed at the lower left in the applicable format. You can have up to 20 flight plans. the offset magnetic heading/distance is computed and displayed below the MH/DIS field. Allows the operator to select and enter an offset waypoint from the scratchpad as follows: o If a number from 0 to 2050 is entered in the scratchpad (an offset waypoint is assumed) and then this line select key is pressed. R9. If new latitude/longitude or UTM coordinates are entered from scratchpad.  Scratchpad. or edit an existing one.

Name New Flight Plan Line Select Key. L9. L5 and L7. L3. These fields are displayed on line 9 on all FPMENU Pages. Pressing the activate flight plan (target symbol) line select key next to a flight number and name: o o o o o Deactivates the flight plan that was active. and (NEW FP) which is constant and informs that this is the line select key used to create new flight plans. Causes the target symbol of the flight plan that was selected to change to the sequencing mode (up and down arrow) symbol. causes the Flight Plan Build (FPBUILD) sub-page associated with the flight plan whose number and name appear to the left of the line select key that was pressed to be displayed.

Active Flight Plan Indicator. The flight plan sequencing mode indicator indicates the selected flight plan sequencing mode for the active flight plan (MAN or AUTO). For the active flight plan to provide steering cues. With the rotary symbol displayed. The line select key next to the active flight plan is used to toggle between the MAN and AUTO modes. L3. R5. R3. Activates the flight plan that was selected. Default mode is manual (MAN). the sequencing mode can be toggled between automatic (AUTO) and manual (MAN) sequencing. L5 and L7. When a new flight plan


EAGLE DYNAMICS 249
. Manual (MAN) is the default flight plan sequencing mode. This subpage allows you to edit and create new flight plans. Causes the active flight plan indicator (*) to be displayed to the right of the selected flight plan. or R7. When pressed. The fields associated with this line select key display the number to be assigned to the flight plan to be created.

Flight Plan Sequencing Mode Indicator. An asterisk (*) is displayed to the right of the flight plan name that is active. Flight Plan Menu Page  Activate Flight Plan (Target Symbol)/Sequencing Mode (Rotary Symbol) Line Select Keys. the STEER PT switch on the AAP must be set to FLT PLAN.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 200. Branch to Flight Plan Build (FPBUILD) Page. Causes the flight plan sequencing mode indicator to indicate the selected sequencing mode.

If this line select key is pressed with the scratchpad empty. L10.
FPM / FLIGHT PLAN BUILD (FPBUILD) Sub -Page The FPBUILD pages are displayed when the FPBUILD LSK is depressed in the FP MENU Page.
To create a new flight plan: 1. L4. press the LSK left of the active flight plan. Displays ―F‖ and the number of the flight plan being displayed. o o Waypoint sequence numbers. R7 and R9. 3. INSERT mode. 4. R5.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
name is entered in the scratchpad and then this line select key is pressed.
Figure 201. Used to delete or overwrite flight plan waypoints. Waypoints. R5. R7 and R9: Indicates the sequence of the associated waypoint in the displayed flight plan: Waypoint identifiers
250 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. FPM / Flight Plan Build Sub-Page     Flight plan name (NM:). Allows insertion of addition waypoints into existing flight plan. If the flight plan database is full (maximum of 20 flight plans). To set the flight plan to manual next waypoint selection or automatic next waypoint selection. Press LSK at L9 (NEW FP). Name of the flight plan. (NEW FP) field will display (FULL) and this line select key will be inactive (brackets symbol and flight plan number will be blank).  Scratchpad. 2. A new FP with the entered name will now be displayed on the flight plan list. the Flight Plan Build (FPBUILD) Page for the new flight plan is displayed. L3. R3. This page allows you to add or remove waypoints from a flight plan. Enter unique name of flight plan in scratchpad. Flight plan number. input error will be displayed in the scratchpad.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
o Active steerpoint indicator
For a detailed explanation of using this page to create and edit a flight plan. enter the desired waypoint number in the scratchpad and then press the LSK corresponding to the location you want the waypoint inserted (i. 01. 2. Note that when a flight plan is selected and HUD is SOI. Insert WP The active flight plan will then be displayed. please consult the Navigation chapter of this manual. To insert a waypoint.). HOTAS DMS switch up and down can be used to cycle the waypoints of the flight plan. 02.
Figure 202.e. etc. Enter number of desired waypoint in scratchpad Press LSK corresponding to (NEXT) waypoint field
To insert a waypoint between waypoints of an existing flight plan. To add a new waypoint in sequence to a flight plan: 1.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 251
. FPM / Flight Plan Build Sub-Page. Between each flight plan are open slots to insert a new waypoint. Note that you must set the STEER PT dial to FLT PLAN to have the flight plan displayed on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD). press the INSERT WPTATT LSK at R3.

2. Depressing the HACK key again returns the display to real-time mode. Reference the HUD section for more detail on the HACK function.5 seconds causes the entire scratchpad to clear. A fourth depression exits this function.
4. it can be adjusted using the DATA rocker switch or by entering a value in the scratchpad and depressing the ENT button. Depressing the Space (SPC) button inserts one space into the HUD and CDU scratchpads. Clear (CLR).
252 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. 5.e.. Mark (MK). Subsequent depressions cycle through the MSL Altitude Alert Value and MSL Ceiling Alert Value. Hack time may also be entered manually via the scratchpad and depressing ENT to accept. For many functions.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
UP FRONT CONTROLLER (UFC)
The UFC is a new addition to the A-10C and allows much easier entry of and searching for data compared to earlier the A-10A. Depressing the Clear (CLR) button removes one character from the HUD and CDU scratchpad (i. Depressing the MK button generates a new markpoint in the CDU at the current coordinates of the aircraft.
11 3 8 6 1 14 9 10
7
4
2
5
12
13
Figure 203. Space (SPC). Hack time can be adjusted by using the DATA rocker switch to adjust hack time and depressing the ENT key to accept. you have the option to use either the UFC or CDU.
3. These special purpose buttons are: 1. Reference the CDU section for more detail on creating markpoints. Up Front Controller Special Purpose Buttons The UFC has 10 alphanumeric buttons (0–9) located on the left side of the controller as well as six special purpose buttons. Depressing the HACK button enters the HACK mode and displays the Hack Time-To-Target value boxed on the lower right side of the HUD. While a value is displayed in the HUD. The Mark (MK) button is a repeater of the CDU MARK button. Time Hack (HACK). Depressing and holding the CLR button for greater than 0. performs a backspace function). The UFC consists of a combination of buttons and rocker switches that allow you to communicate with the CDU and MFCD data content while keeping your eyes out of cockpit. Altitude Alert (ALT ALRT). Depressing the Altitude Alert (ALT ALRT) button displays the current AGL Altitude Alert Value in the HUD.

the user may press the LTR button twice. Letter (LTR) Mode. an underlined ―L‖ will be displayed right justified on the HUD scratchpad. To keep Letter mode always on and only enter letters. To select a function. When in this Letter mode. To return to non-Letter mode. an underlined ―F‖ is displayed right justified on the HUD scratchpad. Letter mode allows you to enter letter characters on the HUD and CDU scratchpads. After a 1-second delay with no further switch actuations. a letter is added to the next space. In Letter mode. the function selection mode is deselected automatically and button presses respond normally. Subsequent depressions of the same number key cycles through the letter string (like a cell phone). depression of the number key causes the first letter in the multi-letter string to be displayed. an ―L‖ is displayed right justified on the HUD scratchpad. the scratchpad cursor moves to the next space (blank character). When in function mode. allowing the remote selection of the CDU and AAP functions listed underneath the 14 buttons.       SYS – same as CDU system function select key NAV – same as CDU navigation function select key WP – same as CDU waypoint function select key OSET – same as CDU offset function select key FPM – same as CDU flight plan manager function select key PREV – same as CDU previous function select key
EAGLE DYNAMICS 253
. Also. an ―F‖ is displayed right justified on the HUD scratchpad. Enter (ENT). and the next desired letter is entered by depressing another key in a similar manner. The function that is assigned to a button is listed in white underneath the button.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
6. the user presses the LTR button a third time. Function (FUNC) Mode. However. two consecutive presses of the FUNC key will set the function mode to on until it is pressed a third time. Letter mode is active whenever the LTR button is pressed. if a different number key is depressed before the 1-second timeout. you will first click the FUNC button and then the desired function listed below. The FUNC key is used to engage the Function Mode. the UFC also contains two round buttons that place the UFC in a modal type: 7. When in this always-on mode. Upon doing so. 8. After a function has been selected. The nonfunction action of the button is listed on the button/switch. The Enter (ENT) button has several functions based on the current UFC operating mode:      Selects the Menu/Submenu item indicated by the HUD cursor position in HUD Test Mode Performs actions in menus and submenus Enters a target elevation update for the current steerpoint Accepts time-to-target selected by the DATA rocker switch in HACK Mode Accepts boresight adjustments in Maverick HUD Boresight Mode
UFC Operating Mode Buttons In addition to the square and rectangular buttons that perform a specific action.

Rocker Switches The UFC contains 5 rocker switches that allow you to cycle/select information. and AIR-to-AIR Modes When toggled in NAV. CCRP. The rocker located on the right side of the UFC has ―PG‖ listed to the left of it with up and down arrows. Numeric Mode (Default). CDU actions. The five rockers include: 9. DATA. and CCRP modes. In Numeric mode.    FPLAN – same as FLT PLAN from left AAP dial MARK – same as MARK from left AAP dial MSN – same as MISSION from left AAP dial
The above three functions act as left AAP dial repeaters.   MALF – Clear HUD Malfunction (Not Functional) UPDT – HUD Update (Not Functional)
When in function mode.rocker switches are repeaters of the corresponding CDU rocker switches. depression of the desired numeric character causes that number to be displayed in both the HUD and CDU scratchpads. GUNS. The DATA rocker has different functions based on operating mode:     The rocker alters data in menus and displays in HUD TEST. NAV. the Page (PG) up/down and SEL +/. the switch will cause target elevation to flash on the HUD display to indicate elevation can be changed The switch will increment/decrement displayed HACK time interval displayed in HUD HACK TIME Mode The switch performs the same function as the CDU PG rocker switch in FUNC Mode
254 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The STEER +/.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
The above six functions act as CDU repeaters. ―DATA‖ is displayed. page navigations and waypoint selection overrides whatever the AAP dial is set to. When in Function Mode. In the center of the rocker.rocker switch is a repeater of the CDU Left/Right rocker switch used in conjunction with the Waypoint ID Search Engine. CCIP. GUNS.    POS – same as POSITION setting from right AAP dial STEER – same as STEER setting from right AAP dial WAYPT – same as WAYPT setting from right AAP dial
The above three functions act as right AAP dial repeaters. CCIP. AAP settings regain control if they are set from the AAP panel. Numeric mode is active whenever the UFC is not in either Letter (LTR) or Function (FUNC) mode and is the default state upon power up of the UFC.

Master Caution . Located horizontally along the lower right portion of the UFC. 13. you may reset a light on the caution panel. This function does not clear Warnings.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 255
. The STEER rocker switch repeats the function of the STEER Toggle Switch on the Avionics Auxiliary Panel (AAP). The Intensity (INTEN) rocker switch controls HUD display brightness. 14. The Depression (DEPR) rocker switch enables the depressible pipper on the HUD to be manually depressed over a range of +10 to -300 mils referenced to Zero Sight Line (ZSL). The Master Caution light will illuminate when a new light has been illuminated on the caution panel. Clicking the MASTER CAUTION button will cause a flashing light on the caution panel to go steady and the MASTER CAUTION light will go off. which is used to toggle through the Waypoint ID database in conjunction with the Waypoint ID Search Engine. this rocker has ―STEER‖ displayed vertically to the right of the rocker and + and – symbols above and below it. STEER. Located on the right edge of the UFC. In the center of the rocker. Momentary depressions of the rocker switch move the applicable pipper up or down one milliradian. the rocker has ―DEPR‖ displayed vertically to the left. In FUNC Mode. ―SEL‖ is displayed. Located on the left side of the UFC. This rocker has different functions based on operating mode:     Navigates menus in HUD TEST Mode Changes weapon profiles in CCIP/CCRP Mode Changes gun reticles in GUNS Mode Changes selected air-to-air threat in AIR-to-AIR Mode
11. Cautions and Notes (WCNs) on the HUD or MFCDs. INTEN. ―INTEN‖ is displayed above the rocker. By clicking on this button. 12.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
10. SEL. the STEER switch functions as a repeater of the CDU LEFT/RIGHT Rocker switch. The MASTER CAUTION light is located in the upper right portion of the UFC and has ―MASTER CAUTION‖ displayed in its center in two lines. The Select (SEL) rocker is located on the right side of the UFC and has a + and symbols to the left of it. DEPR.

All labels pertaining to the left AAP dial will be colored orange.
The above graphic illustrates this colored label relationship. AAP and UFC. a system of color coding will be used on labels of similar functions.    All labels pertaining to right AAP dial will be colored yellow.
256 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.
Figure 204. All labels pertaining to the CDU function select keys will be colored blue.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
CDU/AAP Relation to UFC Most of the functions of the UFC have corresponding functionality on the AAP and CDU. The images below use like-colors to illustrate these relationships. CDU/AAP Relation to UFC To better illustrate the functional relationship between the CDU.

View the CDU screen display on an MFCD. Send and receive text messages with other units on SADL datalink network. This has streamlined the data-flow to the pilot and made much more information readily accessible. Maverick (MAV) Page. Review status of A-10C sub-systems. Please consult the Cockpit Controls chapter of this manual regarding more information about the MFCD units. Tactical Awareness Display (TAD) Page. Manage the stores of the aircraft. this would be done with a Data Transfer Cartridge that loads data from the Mission Planning Software onto the aircraft. targeting. Load navigation and weapon data from the mission planner into the aircraft. moving map for navigation. Display Program (DP) Page. Targeting Pod (TGP) Page. In the real-world. The primary MFCD pages of the A-10C include:  Data Transfer System (DTS) Page. and datalink purposes. The primary purpose of the MFCDs is to display a wealth of data over a variety of pages.
       
EAGLE DYNAMICS 257
. Digital Stores Management System (DSMS) Page.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
MULTIFUNCTION COLOR DISPLAY (MFCD) PAGES
An important improvement between the older A-10A and the A-10C was the inclusion of two 5x5 inch MFCD. Configure which page-links are to be displayed on the bottom of each MFCD. Use the digital. Status (STAT) Page. Employ various models of the AGM-65 Maverick air-to-surface missile. Control Data Unit (CDU) Repeater Page. Message (MSG) Page. Use the Litening AT targeting pod.

you cannot initiate any new actions on the DTS Upload page for 15 seconds while the load takes place. This will be the first page you will configure and it allows you to load both navigation and weapons data created in the Mission Planner to the aircraft EGI and DSMS systems. DTS Upload Page When the AHCP CICU switch is set to ON and both MFCD have been turned on.
Once a DTS load has been initiated by pressing the system action OSB. both MFCDs will activate and display the DTS page. In the real world. The pilot then takes the cartridge to the jet and loads it prior to flight via the DTS page.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Da ta Tr an sf er S ys t e m (D TS ) U p l oa d P ag e
Figure 205. all system action characters except for the load option selected
258 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. you may select any of the five upload options:      Display Program Page Selections (LOAD PAGE) TAD Profiles (LOAD TAD) DSMS Inventory and Profile Data (LOAD DSMS) Targeting Pod Configuration (LOAD TGP) All DTS Data (LOAD ALL). this data is loaded onto a cartridge the pilot writes from their mission planning software. During the 15 seconds that the DTS data is being uploaded. From the DTS Upload page. This is the recommended choice. You will generally always want to do a LOAD ALL at the start of every mission starting from the parking ramp.

select one of the 12 through 15 OSB. When the load is complete after 15 seconds.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 259
. all system action characters will return. Once you have selected the display page. both MFCD will have pages assigned to OSB 12 through 15. Select an OSB from OSB 7 through 9 or OSB 16 through 20. This will assign the selected OSB display page to that OSB. Next to each of these OSB is a label regarding display page function. By default. Once the Display Program Page is displayed and you wish to assign a display page to one of the bottom OSB. can be changed using the Display Program Page. these default settings. If another OSB display page is selected.
Dis pl ay P r o gr am ( D P ) P a g e
Figure 206. the previous one unhighlights. Selecting one of these OSB highlights the adjacent label in reverse video.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
are removed from the DTS page on both MFCDs. Upon doing so. however. the selected 12 through
2. By pressing and holding any of these four OSB for more than 1 second the Display Program Page will appear. Display Program Page Along the bottom of both MFCD are four OSB (12 through 15) that can be assigned to directly link to any of the main MFCD pages. you need to do the following: 1.

Left button mouse clicking on OSB 1 will direct to the second page of STATUS.
5 1
4
2 3
Figure 207. Status Page 1 1. press the Clear (CLR) OSB 10. To exit the Display Program Page. which will direct the user to the OSB specified page. Next Page (NEXT). press any of the 12 through 15 OSB. the label above the selected OSB is removed.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
15 OSB will change its label to match the selected OSB page. Upon selection of STAT as a page select OSB. The OSB 19 and 20 navigation functions allow the user to scroll between LRU/SRU items. Then press the 12 through 15 OSB to be cleared. To remove a page assignment from OSB 12 through 15. branch OSB 1. then the older one is cleared. The selected OSB program page will be un-highlighted. the below page is displayed. Upon doing so.
260 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. If more than one 12 through 15 OSB is assigned the same OSB program page.
S ta t us (S TAT ) P ag e
System Status (STAT) consists of two pages that allow you to view the status of multiple avionics units (LRU and SRU). OSB 1 will allow the user to cycle between page 1 and page 2 of the STAT page.

These labels are listed above the table in-line with the column. navigation OSB 19 and 20. like the CICU. LRU/SRU Information.
Weapon Station Check (WS CHK). Maintenance Fault Log of Previous Flight (MFL FLT-1).
4. When the arrow reaches the top or bottom of the table. Pressing the Up arrow next to OSB 20 will cycle the arrow left of the table up. Select LRU/SRU (LRU/SRU item name). Items colored white are non-applicable. a TEST OSB will run a BIT of the selected unit. and pressing the Down arrow next to OSB 19 will cycle the arrow down the table. LRU/SRU In the center of the page is a table that lists each of the LRU/SRU items. the following items will be listed:          ALL CICU WP MP GVM ALM 1760-3 1760-4 1760-5
EAGLE DYNAMICS 261
. STAT and TEST. The LRU/SRU that the arrow is pointed towards is the selected item (name displayed between OSB 19 and 20) and the information on the display may vary according to the LRU/SRU. No function. They are colored red when a fault has been detected. The table is divided into three columns: LRU.
5. Label displayed as: MFL FLT-1 3. additional information about the selected item can be displayed centrally below the table. rotary OSB 10. When an SRU/LRU line on the table is selected. When pressed. All LRU/SRU lines/columns are colored green when on and operating normally. Some LRU/SRU items will also have a TEST OSB option when selected.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
2. it will wrap. The information displayed here may vary according to the selected item.
STAT Page 1 In the LRU column. This performs a system check of the selected LRU/SRU (no function).

page 2 also contains a 3-column table for LRU.
STAT Page 2
1
2
Figure 208. "TEST". STAT and TEST. "DEGR". The TEST column displays the following information for the LRU/SRU along the same line:   UN -
Note: If an IAM 1760 station has failed. you will need to cycle POWER OSB to clear the FAIL status. "NC" and ―OFF‖ depending on the state of the item. Status Page 2 As with page 1.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
   1760-7 1760-8 1760-9
The STAT column may list ―VALID‖. Items in the LRU column include:   TGP LTMFCD
262 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 263
. Enter Slew Value (SLEW 30). data entry OSB 8. Adjusting this value allows you to adjust the slew speeds of the cursors. Return to Page 1 of STAT (PREVIOUS).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
         RTMFCD HOTAS STICK THRTL. AHCP EGI IFFCC CDU EPLRS
Except for two exceptions. Left mouse button clicking OSB 1 will return the user to page 1 of STAT. Adjust the slew function here to control slew rate of cursor on TAD. TGP and HUD. The exceptions are: 1. all OSB functions are the same between the two pages. branch OSB 1. This is only displayed when the throttle LRU is selected.

launcher. The DSMS also contains a separate page that provides you the ability to view. select. power. and control of the various types of armament are now handled using the DSMS pages on an MFCD. Each of these combinations is called a profile. DSMS also has a set of pages used to control settings mode. DSMS Sub-Pages List The following are the sub-pages that make up the DSMS:  Status Page o o o o  Profile Main Page Profile Control Page Profile Settings Page Inventory Main Page
Inventory Select Page o o o Inventory Class Page Inventory Store Type Page Inventory Store Select
 
Selective Jettison Page Missile Control Page
S ta t us P a g e
This is the primary page of the DSMS and is the page displayed when you first select DSMS as a page select option (OSB 12 through 15). which stations are selected.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Di gi ta l S to r es M an a g em e n t S ys t e m (DS MS ) P a g e
The DSMS replaces the old A-10A Armament Control Panel (ACP). The DSMS provides you with an overall display of weapons status. and control profiles and delivery parameters such as interval and ripple settings for appropriate weapon types. rack. and what profile is currently selected for each weapon. inventory of each station on the aircraft. These weapon profiles can either be selected from the DSMS page or selected as a rotary HUD selection from the HOTAS. All of the settings for weapons. status of the GAU-8 gun. the arm state. The DSMS provides selective jettison options and parameters for each weapon. or station. The Status Page allows you to quickly view the following:    Weapon inventory and status for each of the 11 stations (weapon station boxes) Release settings for the active profile Gun status and ammunition remaining
264 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. release parameters. and boresighting functions for AGM-65 and AIM-9 missiles.

CCRP. RIP SGL. DSMS Status Page In the center of the page. Small Text: Fuze Setting (NOSE. Depending on the store associated with the active profile. NAV. Large Text Underlined: Profile Name Third Line. GBU. Small Text: HUD Mode (GUNS. Selective Jettison. CCIP. PRS. the content of this information may vary: If BOMB profile: All bombs including BDU. MK. information about the active profile is displayed. then quantity and interval lines are not displayed. If MAVERICK profile:  Top Line. or AIR-TO-AIR) Second Line. CCRP. Small Text: Quantity (value entered in Control page: QTY #) Sixth Line. TAIL or N/T) Fifth Line. or RIP PRS) Fourth Line. Small Text: HUD Mode (GUNS. CBU and any other bomb type:       Top Line. and Inventory sub-pages
Figure 209. NAV. Small Text: Interval in feet (value entered in Control page)
If Release Mode is set to either SGL or PRS. Small Text: Release Mode (SGL.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
  EO power timer (if Maverick is active) Access to Missile. or AIR-TO-AIR)
EAGLE DYNAMICS 265
. CCIP.

Regarding FUEL TANK/TRAVEL POD/LITENING POD/ALQ-131/184: These are not weapons and thus do not have profiles. or AIR-TO-AIR) Second Line. Large Text Underlined: Profile Name Third Line. Large Text Underlined: Profile Name Third Line. WPNS OFF is displayed in white reverse video with the HUD mode displayed above it. Small Text: Release Mode (SGL. Large Text Underlined: Profile Name
If ROCKETS profile:       Top Line. NAV. Small Text: Release Mode (SGL or PRS) The above information is derived from the DSMS Control page. RIP SGL.
266 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. CCIP. live profile (Master Arm switch set to ARM). If the profile is set to Weapons Off (WPNS OFF) as the active. CCRP. If the profile is set to Weapons Off is selected as the active profile and Master Arm switch set to SAFE. or RIP PRS) Fourth Line: line is blank Fifth Line. CCIP. Small Text: Quantity (value entered in Control page: QTY #) Quantity is only displayed if release mode is RIP SGL or RIP PRS
If Illumination Flare profile:     Top Line. WPNS OFF is displayed in green reverse video with the HUD mode displayed above it. You cannot select these stations manually in DSMS—the magenta box highlights the OSB when pressed. NAV. PRS.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Second Line. but the station does not select. Small Text: HUD Mode (GUNS. or AIR-TO-AIR) Second Line. Small Text: HUD Mode (GUNS. CCRP.

CCIP. Training
EAGLE DYNAMICS 267
. GUNS. CCRP and AIR-TO-AIR. If Weapons Off is selected as a Training Profile (Master Arm switch set to TRAIN).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 210. then the WPNS OFF message will be displayed in reverse blue video.
Figure 211. the HUD mode will be displayed above this message. SAFE HUD modes include NAV. Weapons Off. Weapons Off. and TRAINING will be displayed in blue in a blue box below the station six station box.

For example. I. branch OSB 5. though.
268 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. P. or F). this will be replaced by an letter failure code (H. If a Manual profile is selected. Store Configuration. OSB 6 will have a ―7‖ between it and the station details box. For station 6. If the station has an error. branch OSB 1. The status of the weapon loaded to the station is listed. The type of launcher attached to the station is listed. you can access:        Profile (PROF) page. This is the configuration that has been set for releasing a weapon from the station. Between the OSB and the box is a numeric of the station number. Launcher. Weapon Station Box Fields Station. branch OSB 2. Inventory (INV) main page. Selective Jettison (SJET) page. branch OSB 4. Weapon Status/Laser Code. the format of information may vary. Left clicking OSB 2 directs to the Missile Control page.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
OSB Functions From the Status Page. Quantity. OSB 3 selects station 6 OSB 6 through 10 selects stations 7 through 11 OSB 16 through 20 selects stations 1 through 5
Weapon Station Box Next to each OSB that represents a station. this numeric is displayed above the box. Store Type. OSB 1 will direct to the Profile Control page. On the opposite side of the box from the OSB (towards the inner portion of the display). The name of the store loaded on the station is listed on the top line. Depending on what is loaded on the station. This is generally displayed on the lower line. Missile Control (MSL) page. Left clicking OSB 1 directs to the Profile Main page. Each such box can provide the following information depending on what is loaded on the station:
Store Type Quantity
Station
Weapon Status
Launcher/Config
Figure 212. This is removed if the station is depleted of stores or only carries a pod. a smaller box is drawn that displays the quantity remaining of the weapon loaded on the station. a box representing what is loaded on the station is displayed. rack or launcher. This is generally displayed on the lower line.

OFF. White.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 269
. Master Arm is set to SAFE. Additionally. Multiple stations can be color-filled if a profile is selected that includes a weapon-type loaded on multiple stations.) cannot be selected together
Failure Codes In place of the Station indicator numeric between an OSB and Weapon Station Box. etc. a letter code may be used to indicate a failure in the station. the station may be red if the weapon profile for that station has invalid settings. Possible colors include:  White. However. a color coding system is used for the stations and the gun. if Maverick is selected. Blue and Green would be mutually exclusive. no video is shown. Green. For Maverick and AIM-9. and ALIGN for Maverick or COOL for AIM-9) Color Coding Weapon Stations and Gun To allow you to quickly determine the status of a weapon station. Exceptions to this are:    Maverick stations are only active one at a time Bombs with different fuze settings or types cannot be selected together Ordnance loaded on different types of launchers (pylon.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
A blank box indicates that no inventory has been loaded to the station. Blue. These include: H I P F This would indicate a hung store.

 
The example image shows examples of each color for design purposes only. the lower line will display weapon status (RDY. TER. Master Arm is set to TRAIN. A red indication means that the profile and the inventory have conflicting information for what is loaded on the station. Red. TRAIN profiles will not show any mismatch errors from what is in the profile and what is detected as loaded on the aircraft. The station boxes will only become color-filled when a profile has been made active that includes a weapon loaded on that station(s). When is SAFE mode. Master Arm is set to ARM. This would indicate a mismatch between what is specified in the profile and what is set in the inventory There is no profile that contains the weapon loaded on the indicated station. This is a simulated mode in which ―virtual‖ weapons can be loaded on the aircraft. all systems behave as if in ARM mode but no weapons or flares will be released. This would indicate a station fault.

the timer will be reset and the Maverick will require realignment the next time it is selected.150 rounds and when the gun is fired. setting the Master Arm to:
270 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. This timer will also be present in the following DSMS pages:    Missile Control Inventory Main Selective Jettison
Gun Status
GUN SAFE Green or Red (gun unsafe) text
GUN ARMED = REVERSE VIDEO Master Arm = SAFE (White reverse video) GUN ARMED = REVERSE VIDEO Master Arm = ARM (Green reverse video)
GUN ARMED = REVERSE VIDEO Master Arm = TRAIN (Blue reverse video)
Figure 214. The status lists the number of rounds remaining in the left portion of the display and the selected ammunition type to the right. the color and reverse video status varies. Note: When in TRAIN mode. If EO power is deactivated. the gun status is displayed. there is no way to reset the gun. This timer will be removed if no Mavericks are active or EO power is set to OFF. Depending on the settings of the GUN/PAC switch on the AHCP and the Master Arm switch on the AHCP. If the GUN/PAC switch is set to other than SAFE. Gun Status Indications Located below the Weapon Mode Summary on the Status page. the ammunition count decrements in 10s.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
EO Power Timer
EO Power Elapsed Time
Figure 213. the EO Power Timer will automatically be displayed in the bottom right corner of the display. The gun defaults to a load of 1. EO Power Timer When EO power has been activated for Mavericks. This timer will mark elapsed time in hours : minutes : seconds since the most recent Maverick activation. This is true for ARM and TRAIN modes.

P ro fi le P a g e
Figure 215. The profile that is active in regards to weapon release is termed the ―active profile. the gun field on the Status page will be green text (no reverse video).
If however the GUN/PAC switch is in SAFE. with each profile having different release parameters. TRAIN results in blue reverse video.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 271
. DSMS Main Profile Page Profile Main Page Rather than cycling through individual weapon types. the A-10C uses the concept of defined weapon profiles. SAFE results in white reverse video.. so. Additionally. you may use the HOTAS to rotary cycle through profiles.‖ Note: You can create multiple profiles for a single weapon type. release mode. fuzing. when the profile is selected. etc. you do not have to adjust the many release parameters manually (like the ACP in the A-10A). if the profile has been assigned to the HUD rotary.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
   ARM results in green reverse video. Each profile is assigned a unique name and the user may cycle through these profile names on the Profile Main page. Each profile contains entries for weapon type.

Depending on the setting of the Master Arm switch. CCRP. If the prior mode was MANUAL. is commanded. If another station with a different weapon type is selected. MANUAL mode is not available as a HUD rotary nor is it listed on the Profile Main list. manually select a weapon station by pressing the OSB next to it (MANUAL) The Air-to-Air profile is automatically selected when Air-to-Air HUD mode is selected: o o o If GUNS. Any changes though result in the SAVE OSB being displayed and flashing. On the Control page. select the Activate Profile (ACT PRO) OSB From the Status Page. the profiles will change. you can do so in five ways:      HUD rotary selection from the HOTAS Select (SEL) +/. TER. changes to the default parameters can be made. the profile would revert to WPNS OFF profile. the OSB 19 and 20 Navigation functions are disabled and removed. the profile name changes to ―M/store type‖ of that weapon and the default parameters for the selected store type are loaded as the active release profile. then the NEW OSB is removed from the Manual Profile display. If you select a different profile from the profile list.
272 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. all weapon stations that have the weapon specified in the profile are selected. The MANUAL profile can be invoked by selecting a weapon station on the Status page. the navigation OSBs will be displayed again. The previous profile will be reverted to if AIM-9 mode is set to OFF. this station is added as a selected station. CCIP.
In addition to these 40 profiles. or NAV. You must press the SAVE OSB to make any changes active.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
When a profile is selected. you can access/create up to 20 active (ARM/SAFE) profiles and 20 (TRAIN) profiles. Exceptions to this rule are:   Maverick stations are only active one at a time Bombs with different fuze settings or types cannot be selected together
Ordnance loaded on different types of launchers (pylon. If there are already 20 active profiles. The profile name then becomes ―M/store type‖ and the default parameters for the selected store type are loaded as the active release profile. If the name of the MANUAL profile is changed with the NEW OSB and then saved with the SAVE OSB. To select a profile for weapon delivery use. three other profile options are available: MANUAL Profile The MANUAL profile provides a quick way of selecting a weapon and generating a profile. a new profile is created and added to the profile list. depressing the PROF OSB on the Status page will instead go to the Control page. When a MANUAL profile is active.rocker switch on the UFC From the Profile Main page. If another weapon station with matching weapon type is selected. From the Control page. etc) cannot be selected together From the Profile Main page. the previous profile will be reverted to from Air-to-Air.

You must then press OSB 5 a second time within 3 seconds to confirm the deletion. Clear profile (CLR PRO) page. system action OSB 5. a confirmation prompt is displayed. Left clicking OSB 5 deletes the selected profile. branch OSB 1. Left clicking these two navigation OSBs allows you to re-order the selected profile in the profile list. you can access:   Return to DSMS Status (STAT) page. the control page of the selected profile will be displayed. navigation OSBs 6 and 7.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Profile Main Page OSB Functions
Figure 216. Move profile in list (MOVE). the confirmation window will be removed and the profile will be unchanged. Left clicking OSB 3 directs to the Profile Control nested page. system action OSB 3. Upon doing so. o Clicking the UP navigation arrow swaps the selected profile with the one above it.


EAGLE DYNAMICS 273
. If not. Left clicking OSB 1 returns to the DSMS status page. View profile control page (VIEW PRO) page. Upon doing so. Profile Delete Confirmation From the Profile Main page. If the selected profile is at the top of the list the UP navigation will have no effect.

this OSB function will be set to ON (PRO ON).

Make selected profile active (ACT PRO). activate them.

Profile Table Dominating the center of the Profile Main page is the profile table. The profile that the arrow is pointing to is the selected profile. and remove them. select them. If the profile requires a weapon that is not in the loaded inventory. the profile name between the two navigation arrows will cycle through the profile list as arranged on the Profile Main page. this will not be displayed until a new profile is selected.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
o Clicking the DOWN navigation arrow swaps the selected profile with the one under it. this function is not displayed and the OSB is inactive. If the selected profile is already the active profile. rotary OSB 9.
The active profile will be listed in reverse video and the color will depend on the Master Arm setting. ―---‖ is indicated. This function will not make the selected profile active unless the profile is set as a HUD rotary selection. By default. o o o If the profile has been set to be a HUD rotary selection (indicated as ON in the profile table list). the active profile is first selected.
274 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. if not. If profile is assigned to the HUD rotary it is indicated as ON. this OSB function will be set to OFF (PRO OFF).

Place profile On/Off HUD (PRO ON/OFF). Each profile in the table is assigned a row and each contains the following information:    Profile name Name of associated weapon Rotary status. system action OSB 17. navigation OSBs 19 and 20. however. Left clicking OSB 17 makes the selected profile active. it will be listed above the table and according to the color specification of the Master Arm switch. Left clicking rotary OSB 9 enables the selected profile to be added or removed from the HUD rotary. it is indicated as OFF. If the weapon in the profile is not in the loaded inventory. If the profile has not been set to be a HUD rotary selection (indicated as OFF in the profile table list). the HUD rotary and the OSB 9 label is replaced with ―---‖. However. MANUAL or AIR-AIR is selected as the active profile. Left clicking on these two OSBs moves the arrow to the left of the profile list up and down. Additionally. It is here that all profiles are listed and you may re-order them. all from the table. If the selected profile is at the bottom of the list the DOWN navigation will have no effect. Scroll profiles (Profile Name).    ARM = Green TRAIN = Blue SAFE = White
If.

Profile Parameters Table and Station Chart In the center of the Profile Control and Profile Settings pages is a table that lists release parameters for the active profile weapon (both pages show the same table). Parameters that are not underlined can only be adjusted from the Inventory Page. The top line indicates the weapon associated with the selected profile and on the second line ―PROFILE CONTROL‖ is listed. the profile entry will be listed in red reverse video. the weapon station number is indicated as a numeric.
If the listed profile name (OSB 19 and 20) is also the active profile. Inside each of these sections. then the name will be listed in reverse video. If a weapon specified in a profile is not present in the loaded inventory. Each of these sections represents one of the aircraft’s weapon stations (1 to 11 from left to right). This is true for ARM and SAFE modes but not TRAIN mode. If the Master Arm switch is set to TRAIN. all weapon stations that share the same weapon or store in the profile will be selected/highlighted. ―TRAIN‖ will be listed in blue within a blue box centered on top of the table. This can be done with the OSBs along the right and left sides of the display. The color of the reverse video will depend on the setting of the Master Arm switch: Green= ARM. you will be directed to the Profile Control page. In the center of the display the profile table is displayed but data within the table cannot be modified from this page. and White = SAFE. Below the table is a horizontal chart of 11 equal sections. This page provides you the ability to adjust the weapon settings associated with the selected profile. In the top portion of the table are two lines. then all parameters in the table will be listed as ―---‖. Blue = TRAIN. When a profile is selected. the fields within the table will vary.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 275
. Depending on the store type selected.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
If an invalid profile is selected (such as the weapon in the profile not matching the loaded inventory).
P ro fi le C on t r ol P a g e
After a profile has been selected to be viewed from the VIEW PRO OSB 3. an error indication will be shown in two ways:   The active profile name (OSB 19 and 20) will have its label shown in red reverse video Invalid parameters within the Parameter Table will be displayed in red reverse video. If a data value is entered that is invalid for the weapon.

branch OSB 16. the scratchpad will display an error message of ―CICU INPUT ERROR. This function will only be available if a setting to the profile has been modified or the name (using the NEW function) has been changed. If there are


276 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Change Profile Settings page. New Profile Name (NEW). the SAVE OSB label flashes.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 217. If you enter a profile name that already exists or is longer than 8 characters. When active. Using either the UFC or CDU keypads. you may enter an alphanumeric name for the profile prior to saving. Return to Profile Main (PROF MAIN) page. it will replace the ―NEW‖ label until the SAVE function is activated. Left clicking this OSB will direct back to the Profile Main page. Selecting this OSB displays the Change Profile Settings page. Save (SAVE) profile parameter settings.‖ If a new profile name is a duplicate of an existing one. OSB 2. it will be colored red and the SAVE function will be disabled. this branch OSB will not be displayed. When the new name is entered. DSMS Profile Control Page Profile Control Page OSB Functions From the Profile Control page. Left clicking this OSB will save the Profile Control and Settings parameters of the currently displayed profile. data entry OSB 18. system action OSB 3. branch OSB 1. Left clicking OSB 1 returns to the DSMS status page. you can access the following functions:    Return to DSMS Status page (STAT) page. if the active profile does not have a Profile Settings page. However.

2.
The active profile name is displayed on the HUD when the profile is selected. the profile name between the two navigation arrows will cycle through the profile list as arranged on the Profile Main page. the SAVE OSB label flashes. manually select a Mk-82AIR station. The WPNS OFF profile cannot be selected and will be skipped over. fuze must be set to TAIL or N/T for high-drag delivery. From DSMS Status page. Create a new profile name and select NEW from the DSMS Profile page. Note: if using Mk-82AIR in high drag mode (fuze set to N/T or TAIL). Tail and Nose/Tail. the NEW OSB is displayed so the profile name can be changed (but not add a new profile). 3. Additionally. Once any changes have been made to a profile. the active profile is first selected. the CONFIG should be set to FIXED HI. the CONFIG should be set to FIXED LO. The CONFIG is set in the DSMS Inventory pages. Modifying and Creating a Profile Whether you are modifying a profile or creating a new one. A new profile will need to be created for a new CONFIG. you may change settings data and save it under the same name (modifying a profile) or saving the modified profile under a new name (creating a profile). For MK82AIR bomb. From DSMS Inventory. the SAVE function (OSB 3) becomes active.      MODE. Pairs. Setting fuze to NOSE will deliver bomb in low drag configuration. Left clicking on these two OSBs moves the arrow to the left of the profile list up and down. the SAVE function will save all changes made on
EAGLE DYNAMICS 277
. When active. If activated. set Mk-82AIR to FIXED LO. navigation OSBs 19 and 20. Release spacing interval NOSE/TAIL/N/T. If you wish to release a Mk-82AIR in low drag mode (fuze set to nose). To create a Mk-82AIR low drag delivery profile: 1. 4. the first step is to select an existing profile. Fuze settings of Nose. The profile that the arrow is pointing to is the selected profile. From either the Profile Control page or the Profile Settings page. Select HUD mode of CCIP or CCRP QTY. Set this profile for NOSE fuze. Quantity per release SGL/PRS/RIP SGL/RIP PRS. Ripple Singles. the functions OSB 6 through 10 can vary according to the selected store profile.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
already 20 active profiles when viewing a current profile. In addition to these default OSB functions that are displayed on the Profile Control page regardless of the selected store profile. Release modes of Single. and Ripple Pairs FT. This setting is particularly important for the MK82AIR as it determines high or low drag release. By default.  Scroll profiles (Profile Name).

These page variants include:    AUTO LS.
Figure 218. the OSB settings will vary between stores. As discussed above. DSMS Profile Settings Page Within the table. Please consult the Combat Employment chapter for additional details. several items are underlined. the user must delete an existing profile to create a new one. If the newly saved profile is also the active profile. 2. the changes will take effect immediately and be reflected on the HUD and MFCD. OSB functions other than 1.
P ro fi le S e t ti n gs P a g e
The Profile Settings page is very similar to the Profile Control page but allows you to edit table settings.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
both the Control and Settings Profile pages. These indicate items that may be adjusted from the Profile Settings page. 3 and 20 may vary according to the store selected from the Store Cycle 20 OSB. The same holds true for training profiles. Desired time of fall DRAG. Because different weapons will have different setting requirements. Allows the laser to automatically fire according to the LS TIME value DES TOF. No function
278 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. If all 20 live profiles are occupied.

OSB 2.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 279
. the SAVE OSB label flashes at 1 Hz. Height of function that a cluster bomb will open
 
 
     
Please consult the Combat Employment chapter for additional details. When set to 0. no MRS is displayed. This value determines the behavior of the Desired Release Cue (DRC) on the HUD for CCIP and CCRP bomb delivery. High drag time of fall in seconds. RACK. Low drag time of fall in seconds. HOT. This function will only be available if a setting to the profile has been modified or the name (using the NEW function) has been changed. Vertical offset in Mils HOF. no DRC is displayed. AUTO LS must be set to ON. TRN or TLT SOLN. When set to 0. Desired height over target at mid-burn LD TOF. no DRC is displayed. This value determines the behavior of the Minimum Range Staple (MRS) on the HUD for CCIP and CCRP bomb delivery. Minimum altitude in feet. Return to Profile Control Page (RET) page. Left clicking this OSB will direct back to the Profile Control page. Release maneuver of NONE. the following OSBs are located:    Return to DSMS Status page (STAT) page. The time in seconds before bomb impact that the laser will turn on. Ejection velocity in ft/second HD TOF. LGB solution UP. MIN ALT. Left clicking OSB 1 directs to the DSMS Status page. When set to 0.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
  EJECT. Save (SAVE) profile parameter settings. CLM. Left clicking this OSB will save the Control and Settings parameters of the currently displayed profile. Lateral offset in Mils SEM. Profile Settings Page OSB Functions At the top of the page. This value determines the behavior of the Desired Release Cue (DRC) on the HUD for CCIP and CCRP bomb delivery. branch OSB 1. Rack delay in seconds RT. system action OSB 3. When active. LS TIME.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
In v en t o ry S u b -P a g e
The primary function of the Inventory page is to allow you to assign a particular weapon to a specified weapon station.
280 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. and other pertinent information. which progressively narrow the allowable selections based on stores sensed.‖ After a weapon station is selected from the Inventory Main page by selecting the OSB next to the station. the Inventory Select page is displayed. The profile information and gun status information in the center of the display is removed and replaced with ―INVENTORY.
Figure 219. The Inventory page is accessed by pressing OSB 5 (INV) on the Status page. the EO Power Timer will be displayed in the bottom right of the display. It also allows you to create ―virtual‖ payloads in training mode. The page progression order is Inventory Main  Store Class  Store Type  Store Settings. Inventory Main Page The Inventory Main page displays the same inventory as shown on the Status page for each weapon station.  If Maverick has had its EO power activated. allowable configurations. Selections are made on successive pages. This allows you to correct an error when the weapon type does not match the one specified in the profile and it allows you to set additional weapon settings not available in the Profile Settings page. DSMS Main Inventory Page The Inventory function provides a logical progression through the loading of weapons onto the aircraft.

Left clicking OSB 1 directs to the DSMS Status page. Below is a chart showing possible store loading:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 281
. The available classes of stores listed will depend on the station selected (not all stations can be loaded with all classes of stores). ―TRAINING‖ will be blue boxed below the INVENTORY page title. the Inventory Store Class page is displayed. branch OSB 1.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 If in Training mode. Because not all stores within a store class may be loaded onto to a specified station. This page allows you to select the class of store that is to be loaded on the selected weapon station. DSMS Inventory Page – Empty Inventory Main Page OSB Functions     Return to DSMS Status page (STAT) page.
Figure 220. OSB 3 selects station 6 OSB 6 through 10 selects stations 7 through 11 OSB 16 through 20 selects stations 1 through 5
Inventory Store Class Page After a weapon station has been selected from the Inventory Main page. the list of stores within a class may vary as well.

Possible detected inventory messages include: Detected Inventory Message LITENING POD DETECTED MAVERICK DETECTED MAV LAU DETECTED TER DETECTED Condition Litening target pod detected on station Maverick missile detected on station LAU-88 or LAU-117 detected. if invalid inventory settings are created for the selected station. but no Maverick loaded.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 221. then the detected inventory will be listed in red reverse video and underneath it ―CHECK SETTINGS‖ will be displayed in red reverse video. Or. When the displayed data does not match the current inventory information listed above it.) Triple Ejector Rack detected. the detected inventory text is displayed in red reverse video and ―CHECK LOADOUT‖ is displayed underneath it in red reverse video.)
284 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. (Not possible in Phase 1. If in Training mode. ―TRAINING‖ will be blue boxed below the INVENTORY SELECT page title. DSMS Inventory Store Class Page Below the current inventory information. station selected and selective jettison in STR mode. Message only shown when Master Arm set to ARM and station selected. (Not possible in Phase 1. the type of inventory that has been detected is displayed. Additionally.

Left clicking this OSB will direct to the Misc. system action OSB 4. CBU. branch OSB 8. Left clicking this OSB will direct to the Flare Select page. This will also be shown for AIM-9 and ECM pods. 6 and 7 with or without BDU33 loaded. The following table lists allowable store classes and specific stores allowed for each of the 11 stations. POD.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 285
. TER Re-Homing (HOME TER). Left clicking this OSB directs to the Rack Select page. branch OSB 16. branch OSB 1. Left clicking this OSB displays the Store Inventory page for the selected store currently selected for the active station. Left clicking this OSB will direct to the Bomb Select page. branch OSB 19. This bypasses the steps for selecting class and store type. system action OSB 5. only certain store class types will be available from the Inventory Class Select page. branch OSB 20. Left clicking this OSB directs to the POD Select page. Classes that are not available for a selected station will be unavailable (OSB will have no function and label will be removed). branch OSB 18. ROCKET. BOMB. If no TER is on the selected station this label does not appear and the OSB is non-functional. Left clicking this OSB will direct to the CBU Select page. Left clicking on this OSB will remove all store assignments to the selected station. Inventory Status (INV STAT).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
EMPTY STORE DETECTED No store detected on station. Stores page. Will also be shown if TER is detected while Master Arm is set to SAFE. GBU. branch OSB 2. Left clicking this OSB will direct to the Missile Select page. system action OSB 3. Stations 5 and 7 must be empty to load station 6. This action will also automatically direct to the Inventory Main page. branch OSB 17. Station 6 must be empty to load stores on stations 5 and 7. RACK. this will also be displayed. Left clicking this OSB will direct to the GBU Select page. Displayed if any store or launcher is detected that is not listed above. this function is not available (OSB does not function and label is not shown). Return to Inventory Main (RET) page. A TER can be loaded on stations 5. If no store is loaded on the selected station.
 
        
Depending on the station. Left clicking this OSB returns the display to the Inventory Main page. MISSILE. MISC. FLARE. branch OSB 7. Station Clearing (CLR STA). If no station is selected. branch OSB 6. Left clicking this OSB will direct to the Rocket Select page. Left clicking OSB 1 directs to the DSMS Status page.
Inventory Select Page OSB Functions    Return to DSMS Status (STAT) page. branch OSB 9.

CBU. MISC. MISSILE. CBU. RACK BOMB. CBU. only the store classes listed to the right will be displayed on the Inventory Select page. CBU. GBU. MISC. CBU. CBU. GBU. RACK BOMB. FLARE. the store types of each class may vary. RACK BOMB. RACK BOMB. MISSILE. ROCKET. GBU. RACK BOMB. and even the specific stores within a class may vary. GBU. FLARE. What follows is a listing of the classes of each station and the store types possible for each of the classes: Class BOMB Station 1 and 11 MK-82 MK-82AIR BDU-50 Station 2 and 10 MK-82 MK-82AIR BDU-50 Station 3 and 9 MK-82 MK-82AIR MK-84 BDU-33 Station 4 and 8 MK-82 MK-82AIR MK-84 BDU-33 Station 5 and 7 MK-82 MK-82AIR MK-84 BDU-33 Station 6 MK-82 MK-82AIR MK-84 BDU-33
286 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. MISC. According to the station selected. When a class of weapon is selected for a station. MISC. the below tables provides a guide to what is allowable per station. ROCKET. GBU. Weapon Station 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Compatible Store Classes BOMB. MISC. CBU. Store Class to Station Because each station may have variation of the store classes that can be loaded. FLARE. MISSILE. GBU. RACK BOMB. RACK
Table. POD. GBU. RACK BOMB. POD. RACK BOMB. CBU. CBU. GBU. GBU. you will be directed to the Inventory Store Type page that lists all the store types of the selected class that can be loaded on the selected station. GBU. ROCKET. When the listed Weapon Station is selected. RACK BOMB. the page title will change to reflect the store class. ROCKET. MISC. FLARE. MISSILE.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Another means to visualize the compatibility between a store class and a station is shown in the table below. RACK BOMB. CBU. ROCKET. POD. MISC. POD. For example: BOMB INVENTORY
IN VE NT O RY S to r e T yp e P a g e
Once a Store Class has been selected for a station. ROCKET. GBU. CBU.

the SAVE OSB label flashes at 1 Hz. Save (SAVE) profile parameter settings. the Store page is displayed. Left clicking OSB 1 directs to the DSMS Status page. system action OSB 3.
288 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Left clicking this OSB will save the parameters of the currently displayed station. When active. Left clicking this OSB returns the display to the Inventory Select page. However. This function will only be available if a setting to the station has been modified. these setting parameters will vary. branch OSB 2. all Store pages have the following functions in common:    Return to DSMS Status (STAT) page. setting parameters may be set using the OSB controls. Return to Class Select (RET) page.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
RACK LAU-105 LAU-68 LAU-131 SUU-25 LAU-68 LAU-131 SUU-25 LAU-117 LAU-88 MISC CTU-2A CTU-2A TK600 CTU-2A TK600 CTU-2A TK600 LAU-68 LAU-131 TER TER TER
In v en t o ry S to r e P a g e
After you have selected an available store from the Inventory Type page. Depending on the selected store. branch OSB 1. After the store has been selected.

Select the number of store of the type on the station. If the Master Arm is set to TRAIN. ARM will be boxed in green.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 289
. For example: ROCKET INVENTORY If the Master Arm is set to ARM. The first line is the store class name and the second reading INVENTORY. Return to the main DSMS Status page. DSMS Inventory Store Page In the center of the display. Return to the previous page. but the general rules apply: OSB 1 to OSB 5    OSB 1. OSB 2. SAFE will be boxed in white. The selected station number will be listed underlined as STA (station number). TRAINING will be boxed in blue. and if the Master Arm is set to SAFE. STAT. several items are listed. From top to bottom: The name of the store inventory is listed as two lines.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 222. QTY. For example: STA 9 The name of the store currently assigned to the station. RET. OSB 5. The specific store options vary between store types.

LOAD SYM.
290 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the laser code for the store is entered here. have multiple series.
OSB 16 to OSB 20 Nose and tail fuze types and nose and tail fuze settings are listed on between OSB 16 and 20 generally. it will be highlighted in yellow. LOAD. Some bombs like the Mk-82AIR and BDU-50HD have the option for both high-drag and low-drag delivery. OSB 17 and 18 allow setting of spin RPM and Height of Function (HOF). MNT. OSB 10. For laser-guided bombs. CONFIG. particularly laser-guided bombs. FIXED HI should be used. and for low drag mode. When a rocket store is selected. These settings allow different fuze configurations to be used depending on the selected CONFIG option (FIXED HI. FIXED LO. If a fuze setting or choice is invalid.). Some bombs. For high drag mode. OSB 20 allows you to select the warhead type. You will want to ensure that this code matches the laser code from the TGP A-G Control Page. LSR CODE. For rockets. OSB 4 allows selection of the number of launchers. For CBU weapons. This can either be TER or PYLON.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
  OSB 6. FIXED LO should be used. OSB 7. etc. and the specific series can be set from OSB 16. Loads the selected and configured store to the corresponding station on the other wing. Saves and loads the store selection to the station. OSB 8. This field generally controls how the store is mounted on the station. Possible CONFIG options include: o o o o o o o LDGP FLB FIXED HI FIXED LO PLT OPT PLT OPT1 PLT OPT2

Given that individual fuze effects are not modeled. this setting serves no actual function in this simulation. OSB 6 to OSB 10   OSB 9.

The higher the HOF altitude and RPM spin results in a larger bomblet footprint. 8.11) that corresponds to the hung station. From the Inventory pages. the greater the dispersal.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 291
. select the desired burst altitude. From the HOF (Height of Function) OSB 18 . On the store page.11) that corresponds to the CBU station you want to set. you can also set area that you want the CBU bomblets to cover (aka the footprint). Press DSMS INV (OSB 5) Press the OSB (1 . 6. 7.
CBU Dispersal Area. 3. 5. Selection of stations for jettison is independent of station selection on the Weapon Status page. Press STAT (OSB 1) to return to the main DSMS page. The greater the value. Press DSMS INV (OSB 5) Press the OSB (1 . but allows you to select a weapons station with the associated OSB and jettison it. Clear Hung Station. Press the OSB that corresponds to the type of CBU that you wish to adjust. press LOAD (OSB 9) to reload the station. From the RPM OSB 17. 5. Press STAT (OSB 1) to return to the main DSMS page. select the desired spin setting. Weapon release is accomplished by depressing the weapon release button. and this store will be highlighted (depending on the jettison mode) according to the Master Arm setting and fuze setting. Press the CBU OSB. 3.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
In v en t o ry P a g e C o m m on Us es
In addition to using DSMS Inventory to create virtual Training payloads. press LOAD (OSB 9) to save your changes. this page is similar in appearance to the Inventory Main page. 6. This is a common error when the pilot does not hold down the weapon release button long enough when dropping a bomb. Press the OSB that corresponds to the type of hung weapon. the other two most common uses for these pages are to clear hung station errors and setting the burst height for cluster bombs. Each station lists the store assigned to it.
S el e ct i ve J e t ti so n S u b -P a g e
Accessed from OSB 4 on the Status page. This warning and ability to use the weapon is resolved by reloading the hung station. The steps to set this are: 1. On the store page. 4. but less dense coverage. The greater the value. 2.
Note: After clearing a hung IAM loaded store. This is done by: 1. 2. you will then need to reset the power to the station in the STAT page and then reload ALL from the DTS page to make the weapon functional again. 4. Press the OSB that corresponds to the store class of the hung weapon. the greater the dispersal.

rotary OSB 5. the user left clicks on the OSB next to the station to be jettisoned. Stores are released in pairs mode. Left clicking this OSB cycles through the jettison modes and the selected mode is displayed as the OSB label. In this mode. Mavericks will be launched in pairs. then they are released in paired mode. a textual indication is provided regarding the fuze setting:     SAFE is displayed in green if the Safe fuze setting is selected NOSE ARM is displayed in red if the Nose fuze setting is selected TAIL ARM is displayed in red if the Tail fuze setting is selected ARMED is displayed in red if the N/T fuze setting is selected
Jettison Mode (XXXX). When in RACK mode. RACK (station rack). Below the SELECTIVE JETTISON page title. MSL (missile).
Note: The Targeting Pod and ECM pod cannot be jettisoned. Modes include:   STR (store). only the station number will be displayed in reverse video. If set to other than STR.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 293
.

To select a station to jettison. In the lower right corner of the display. When in STR mode. the user can select one or multiple stations that have racks assigned to them and jettison them along with any stores attached to them. its store name is displayed in reverse video. If both TERs are selected. the fuze select will be set to SAFE and cannot be altered. is jettisoned with each press of the weapon release button. When a station is selected. the EO Power timer is displayed when EO power has been applied to Maverick. If a station is selected that is not loaded with LAU-88 and Maverick. or pair of racks. A rack. any Maverick assigned to a LAU-88 TER will be launched in an unguided/unarmed mode with each depression of the weapon release button. Multiple stations can be selected simultaneously. MSL jettison is not available for LAU-117.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
These fuze options are only available when the Jettison Mode is set to STR (stores). the user can jettison stores from one or more selected stations. If more than one station is selected that is assigned a rack.

P ag e
Accessed from (MSL) OSB 2 of the Weapon Status page. Left clicking on this OSB cycles between the ON and OFF settings. the timer is removed from the page. branch OSB 1. including: Location (LOC). This OSB allows you to manually apply power to all Mavericks loaded on the aircraft. EO power will be activated when the aircraft reaches specified range (OSB 8) and bearing (OSB 7) from a defined waypoint (OSB 9). If EO power is set to OFF. all Mavericks are powered down. See diagram. Upon setting EO power to ON. A five mile radius line expands from this point perpendicular to the defined waypoint and crossing this line will activate EO power. rotary OSB 4. If OFF is selected.

294 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Mis si le C o n tr ol S u b . EO power can also be automatically activated according to the setting of the automatic EO power function accessed from OSB 5. Automatic EO Power Function (XXX). this page controls the settings for the AIM-9 and AGM/TGM-65. EO Power (EO). rotary OSB 5. Using the OSB 5 rotary function. the EO Power timer will be displayed. Left clicking OSB 1 directs to the DSMS Status page. The system will activate EO power to the Maverick(s) when the aircraft crosses the defined point. you can cycle through the automatic EO power functions. DSMS Missile Control Page Missile Control Page OSB Functions:   Return to DSMS Status (STAT) page.
Figure 224.

The range value can range from 0 to 9999 and can be incremented by 1. SEL. If the Automatic function is set to other than TIME. This data entry OSB function allows you to enter the hour: minute: second that EO power will be applied to the Maverick if Automatic EO Power Function has been set to TIME. you can cycle through waypoint numbers. you may enter the range to the EO activation point from a defined waypoint. using the UFC or CDU keypad.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
North
Bearing
EO Power applied if aircraft crosses anywhere on this line in location mode (10 nm or 25% of range)
EO Power on location WP Range
o o 
Time (TIME). Auto EO Power Bearing (BRG). The bearing value can range from 0 to 360 and can be incremented by 1. you may enter the bearing to the EO activation point from a defined waypoint. plus/minus waypoint OSB 9. The time is related to the aircraft system time. the range is indicated using three numbers. data entry OSB 10. AIM-9 Control (AIM9). Auto EO Power Range (RNG). Additionally. COOL. you may enter the waypoint number to select it. this label is not displayed and the OSB has no data entry function. Settings include ON and OFF. The selected rotary setting is displayed beneath the AIM9 label. Auto EO Power Waypoint (WYPT). The selected waypoint’s number will be displayed below the WYPT label. This rotary is used to boresight the Maverick HUD reticle. Manual (MAN).





EAGLE DYNAMICS 295
. Please see Maverick section of this document for details. Using this OSB. data entry OSB 8. Using the plus and minus waypoint function. data entry OSB 7. the bearing is indicated using three numbers. Below the RNG label. the user can turn EO power ON and OFF manually by cycling this rotary when MAN is selected. Using OSB 4. Selecting SEL places HUD in air-to-air mode. There are no other functions. rotary OSB 19. Time EO Power (TIME). Rotary selections include OFF. When OSB 5 is set to the TIME function. EO power will automatically be applied when the time specified by OSB 10 is reached.
Maverick Boresight Adjust (MAV ADJ). Below the BRG label. Using this OSB. rotary OSB 6.

There are no other functions. In the top center of the page. rotary OSB 20.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 AIM-9 Boresight (AIM9 ADJ). Rotary selections include ON and OFF. the page title is displayed as: MISSILE CONTROL
296 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The selected rotary setting is displayed beneath the AIM9 ADJ label.

datalink symbols. This map has multiple scales with each scale using a different air navigation chart type. TAD Basic Symbols In the interior of the display are several symbols that can be displayed. this zooms the moving map in one level while retaining the current air navigation chart type. ADJ rocker down (-): When in manual map mode (MAN). this zooms the moving map out one level while retaining the current air navigation chart type. The cursor is your means to select objects/symbols on the TAD. a slewable cursor is displayed that can be commanded with the HOTAS slew functions when the TAD page is the SOI. MFCD Commands:   ADJ rocker up (+): When in manual map mode (MAN).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Tac ti cal A wa re n ess Dis pl ay (T AD) P a g e
The TAD displays a plan-view of your current tactical situation with the symbols representing your aircraft position (Ownship). the Anchor Point/ Bullseye. the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI). On the TAD. current steerpoint. These include:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 297
. A moving map with different scales can also be displayed. and range rings. active markpoint. or active flight plan with waypoints. The TAD page is accessed by either pressing a page select OSB with the TAD label or using the HOTAS to cycle MFCD pages. The TAD can be a Sensor Of Interest (SOI) which can be used to designate the SPI using a cursor that is controlled by the HOTAS allowing the pilot to hook symbols on the display.
Basic TAD Symbology
7
2
3 5
6 4
1
Figure 225.

its label will be displayed in green if the waypoint label option is set to ON. the SPI will be located on the active steerpoint. This symbol can always be found on the TAD. Using the HOTAS slew function. When it is a waypoint.
Waypoint/Steerpoint symbol.
3. it is colored yellow.
298 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1. This symbol represents the location of the Bullseye (Anchor Point as set from CDU EGI) on the TAD. This square symbol represents either a waypoint or steerpoint.
4. Bullseye symbol. The TAD cursor consists of two perpendicular green lines. only the selected waypoint is displayed. The SPI symbol on the TAD represents the current SPI that the system is using. By default. To the right of the symbol. all waypoints in the flight plan will be displayed and a green line will connect each waypoint in the order in which the waypoints are listed in the flight plan. when it is the steerpoint. If FLIGHT PLAN is selected.
TAD Cursor symbol. although you may have to zoom the TAD scale out to locate it. it is colored green. you may slew the cross-shaped cursor anywhere within the TAD when the TAD is the SOI.
Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) symbol. the only difference will be the color of the symbol.
2. Note that Bullseye data can also be displayed on the HUD. The SPI symbol has the appearance of a ―wedding cake‖ that includes three steps. If the CDU is set to MISSION or MARKER. The symbol consists of concentric rings that are centered on a filled circle.

The outside range ring represents the range set on the TAD scale. This symbol is located either at the center of the display when in CEN mode or 27. the range rings are not displayed. or 50% of the display width when in CEN mode. When the ownship symbol is displayed in the center of the display and the range rings are centered on it. The tick that always points towards magnetic north is actually a filled. from ownship symbol to outside range ring.
Symbol Arcs Mag Heading
Symbol Ring
North Reference
Symbol Region
Cardinal Tie
If the TAD is in EXP1 or EXP2 mode. south. The arcs have equal spacing and the outside arc represents the scale setting. a 20 scale setting equates to 20 nautical miles between the ownship symbol and the outside range ring. and west.
Symbol Rings
Mag Heading
Symbol Region
North Reference
Cardinal Tie
The inner range ring has four tick marks that align with cardinal compass directions. However. These range rings/arcs are not displayed when the TAD is in EXP1 or EXP2 mode. the diameter of this ring is 90% of the display width. the outside range ring is replaced with two partial arcs. This is called Depressed (DEP) mode. Outer and Inner Range Rings. 6. When in CEN mode. the TAD can also display the ownship symbol 27. While the inner range ring acts as it does when in CEN mode (just repositioned lower on the display). The ownship symbol
EAGLE DYNAMICS 299
.5% from the bottom of the display when in DEP mode. These two arcs are 130° and are concentric with the inner range ring and centered on the ownship symbol.5% from the bottom of the display. this is Centered (CEN) mode. equilateral triangle.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
5. The other three tick marks are 90° apart and represent east. The inner arc is twice the diameter of the inner range ring and the outer arc is three times the diameter of the inner range ring. Ownship symbol. The inner range ring represents half the distance of the set scale. The range rings are centered on the ownship symbol and provide you a quick means to judge ranges on the TAD. For example.

When the targeting pod (TGP) is on. a green diamond is displayed on the TAD that represents the line of sight point that the TGP is pointed towards. The symbol is green and colored solid.
7.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
represents your aircraft from a plan form perspective.
TGP Diamond.
300 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.

where XX is the scale setting) and Moving Map scale. 80 and 160. Field of View Scale (XX. 2. 60. the following fields and functions are displayed around the periphery of the display. When the display is in depressed mode (DEP). The range is defined as the distance between the ownship symbol and the outer range ring in nautical miles. Using the increase and decrease field of view HOTAS functions. 20. 120. you may alter the range being displayed on the TAD in discrete increments.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Mai n T AD P a g e
5 2
1
3
6
4
8
7
9 10
Figure 226. valid range scale values include 5. 40. where XXX is profile name). Go to TAD Profile Control page (CNTL). 3.5. 30. valid range scale values include 7. OSB 2.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 301
. Selecting one of the four profile OSBs will filter the TAD page to only show information specified in the profile. 10. These include: 1. and 240
3. Pressing OSB 1 will direct you to the TAD Profile Control page. 4. Main TAD Page Functions From the main TAD page. Select TAD Profile (XXX. 15. branch OSB 1. Profile assignment of OSBs and information to be shown in each profile is defined in the Profile Control page.   When the displayed is in centered mode (CEN). and 5.

to a corresponding digital map format. AUTO). etc. This OSB allows you to determine if the moving map is displayed as a background image on the TAD and if the changing of map scales is manual or automatic. OFF: When set to OFF. AUTO: The moving map display is in automatic mode. or to the bottom of the display (decrease scale). In AUTO mode.
302 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the digital map scale will automatically be changed to 1:1M (the appropriate digital map scale for the now 20 NM TAD range scale). TAD Range Scale CEN Ownship Position 5 NM 10 NM 20 NM 40 NM 80 NM 160 NM DEP Ownship Position 7.5 NM 15 NM 30 NM 60 NM 120 NM 240 NM Corresponding Digital Map Format JOG TPC ONC JNC GNC GNC (1:250K) (1:500K) (1:1M) (1:2M) (1:5M) (1:5M)
If the currently displayed TAD range scale is either increased by using DMS Forward Short (or by driving the cursor off of the TAD FOV via the slew control) or is decreased by using DMS Aft Short. each TAD range scale for both the CEN and DEP ownship positions are automatically assigned to a corresponding map scale and. therefore. For example: if the TAD range scale is initially at 10 NM. the moving map air navigation chart is not displayed as a TAD background. Similarly. rotary OSB 20. Selecting between CEN and DEP mode is accomplished with the CEN/DEP HOTAS function. The rotary selections are OFF  AUTO  MAN  OFF. MAN. the selected moving map scale is displayed. Available scales include (1 : (x)K or M):      4. the digital map scale will be 1:500K. 1:250K 1:500K 1:1M 1:2M 1:5M
Moving Map Display Mode (OFF. the digital map format displayed on the TAD for the former TAD range scale will automatically change to the appropriate digital map format to be displayed on the TAD for the latter TAD range scale. Below the FOV scale numeric.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
The range scale can also be adjusted by moving the TAD cursor to the very top of the display (increase scale). each map chart format is automatically assigned to its corresponding default map scale. If the TAD range scale is then increased to 20 NM.

or a ―No Map‖ TAD range scale/digital map format combination 10 NM 1:500K. For any given TAD range scale. Two possible situations are given below as examples of this functionality: MAP = OFF TAD Range Scale Digital Map Scale = = 10 NM Undefined. it will ―widen‖ back to 1:2M (the initial digital map scale) once NORM mode is reentered. the following functionalities will occur: First Press: TAD FOV changes from NORM mode to EXP1 mode. it will ―narrow‖ to 1:500K once EXP2 mode is entered. Last Press: TAD FOV changes from EXP2 mode back to NORM mode. For any given TAD range scale. regardless of the TAD range scale that was displayed in NORM mode to begin with. Next Press: TAD FOV changes from EXP1 mode to EXP2 mode. it will ―narrow‖ to 1:1M once EXP1 mode is entered.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
In addition. as this is the default digital map format for the 10 NM TAD range scale
OFFAUTO
TAD Range Scale Digital Map Format Scale
= =
MAP = MAN
TAD Range Scale Digital Map Scale
= =
MANAUTO
TAD Range Scale Digital Map Scale
= =
If the currently displayed TAD FOV is changed by using Missile Reject/Uncage Switch (China Hat Switch Forward). as this is the default digital map scale for the 10 NM TAD range scale 10 NM 1:2M. this causes the current digital map format to ―narrow‖ by one more increment. switching to AUTO mode from either OFF mode or MAN mode will cause the TAD to automatically display the digital map format appropriate for the currently displayed TAD range scale. if the current digital map scale in EXP2 mode was 1:500K (as is the case in the previous paragraph). In other words. this causes the current digital map format to ―narrow‖ by one increment. if the current digital map scale in NORM mode was 1:2M. as the digital map display feature is unavailable in OFF Mode 10 NM 1:500K. if the current digital map scale in EXP1 mode was 1:1M (as is the case in the previous paragraph). For any given TAD range scale.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 303
. this causes the current digital map format to ―widen‖ by two increments back to the digital map format that was originally being used in NORM mode. In other words. regardless of the TAD range scale that was initially displayed in NORM mode. regardless of the TAD range scale that was initially displayed in NORM mode. In other words.

the default digital map format for each TAD range scale is exactly the same as when in AUTO mode. In MAN mode. therefore. increasing or decreasing the TAD range scale will result in the ―NO MAP‖ readout to continue to be displayed until AUTO mode is entered. the digital map format displayed on the TAD after changing from OFF mode to MAN mode for a given TAD range scale is the same digital map format that would have been displayed on the TAD after having changed from OFF mode to AUTO mode (for the same TAD range scale). In other words. Similarly. the main functionality of MAN mode is to give complete control over the TAD range scale and the digital map format that are currently being displayed on the TAD.e. The only way for the digital map format to be changed in MAN mode is by using the ADJ rocker switch (located in the upper left corner of the MFCD). no digital map display will be overlaid on the TAD background. and the same digital map format will be refreshed to the TAD. These occurrences produce the same result as was mentioned earlier for a ―NO MAP‖ readout adjacent to OSB-06 on the TAD. the currently displayed digital map format will remain unchanged. In addition. the TAD can display any TAD range scale and any digital map format at the same time. change from 1:1M to 1:2M).e. ADJ (+) is used to ―widen‖ the current digital map format by one increment (i. irrespective of what value each parameter holds.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
MAN: The digital map display is in manual mode. any given TAD range scale/digital map format combination can be achieved. the appropriate digital map format for the currently displayed TAD range scale will be overlaid on the TAD background. In other words. while ADJ (-) is used to ―narrow‖ the current digital map format by one increment (i. There are two points of interest with regard to changing the current digital map format (irrespective of the current TAD range scale) while in MAN mode: The digital map format can only be ―widened‖ or ―narrowed‖ by one increment at a time in the following sequential order (from the ―widest‖ digital map format to the ―narrowest‖ digital map format when moving from left to right.. as well as when changing between the 1:250K and 1:100K digital map scale. If two consecutive
304 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Both of these functions can be performed regardless of the currently displayed TAD range scale. Consequently. At that point. There is an exception to this functionality in the lowest TAD range scale for both the CEN and DEP ownship positions: Changing from OFF mode to MAN mode while in either of these TAD range scales will result in a ―NO MAP‖ readout to be displayed in the Map Scale Display field. If an attempt is made to ―widen‖ or ―narrow‖ the currently displayed digital map format when it is already at its respective ―widest‖ or ―narrowest‖ value. then the attempt will be stored.. the resulting digital map format displayed on the TAD is the same digital map format that was previously being displayed on the TAD in AUTO mode. respectively): 1:5M1:2M1:1M1:500KNO MAP1:250K NO MAP1:100K1:50K Notice that there are ―NO MAP‖ readouts that occur when changing between the 1:500K and 1:250K digital map scales. if the current TAD range scale is increased or decreased. change from 1:2M to 1:1M). When changing from AUTO mode to MAN mode at any given TAD range scale. In general.

This field consists of two lines.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 305
. then both of the attempts will be stored. When TAD is the SOI and the Moving Map mode is in manual (MAN). As discussed before. Located in the top left corner of the display. ―BULL‖ is displayed. On the top line. For any given TAD range scale. The digital map scale that was previously displayed in EXP2 mode remains the digital map scale that is now displayed in NORM mode. The digital map scale that was previously displayed in NORM mode remains the digital map scale that is now displayed in EXP1 mode. pressing ADJ (+) in an attempt to ―widen‖ it further will result in the TAD refreshing with 1:5M again. and the same digital map format will be refreshed to the TAD. However. this causes the TAD FOV to ―zoom in‖ by a factor of two when compared with the TAD FOV in EXP1 mode. and so on. Next Press: TAD FOV changes from EXP1 mode to EXP2 mode. The digital map scale that was previously displayed in EXP1 mode remains the digital map scale that is now displayed in EXP2 mode. this causes the TAD FOV to ―zoom in‖ by a factor of two when compared with the TAD FOV in NORM mode. the digital map format in EXP1 mode can be ―widened‖ or ―narrowed‖ by use of the ADJ rocker switch. if the current digital map scale on the TAD is 1:5M. This rocker has an up (+) toggle and a down (-) toggle. For any given TAD range scale.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
attempts are made. this rocker is used to cycle the Moving Map scale up and down. this causes the TAD FOV to ―zoom out‖ by a factor of four when compared with the TAD FOV in EXP2 mode. As in NORM mode. For example. because there is no ―wider‖ digital map format than 1:5M for the TAD to refresh to. For any given TAD range scale. because the initial (and unsuccessful) attempt to further ―widen‖ the digital map scale past 1:5M had been stored. Pressing the ―+‖ end of the rocker will cycle to lower scale maps and pressing the ―-‖ will cycle to higher scale maps. the following functionalities will occur: First Press: TAD FOV changes from NORM mode to EXP1 mode.
6. Adjust MFCD rocker switch. As in NORM mode. Only after a second press of ADJ (-) will the TAD properly refresh with and display 1:2M. to ―narrow‖ it from 1:5M to 1:2M). the digital map format in NORM mode can be ―widened‖ or ―narrowed‖ by use of the ADJ rocker switch. Bullseye Bearing and Range. if ADJ (-) is pressed afterwards in an attempt to ―narrow‖ the current digital map format by one increment (or in this case. they both depend on which digital map formats have been loaded. the desired digital map scale. the TAD will again refresh with 1:5M rather than 1:2M. the bearing and range to the selected bullseye/anchor point is displayed.) The ―widest‖ digital map format and the ―narrowest‖ digital map format are relative terms. Last Press: TAD FOV changes from EXP2 mode back to NORM mode. (This functionality also applies when more than one attempt is made to further ―widen‖ the ―widest‖ digital map format and equally when one or more attempts are made to further ―narrow‖ the ―narrowest‖ digital map format. 5. If the currently displayed TAD FOV is changed by using Missile Reject/Uncage Switch (China Hat Switch Forward). the digital map format in EXP2 mode can be ―widened‖ or ―narrowed‖ by use of the ADJ rocker switch.

Selecting LL or MGRS will determine which coordinate system will be used to display the symbols location.  When the OSB 6 rotary is set to ―LL‖. The field consists of two lines. rotary OSB 9. This is listed as ―XXXX (for example. range and elevation are displayed in the lower right corner of the TAD. the coordinate will not be displayed. if the coordinate display setting is set to OFF. 7. ―YYYYY‖ is easting value. the SPI symbol is placed over it and a dashed.  If OWN is selected. where ―XX‖ is zone number.186 W086 07. no coordinate will be displayed.

 8.
Hook Mode (TAG: OWN. This setting selects either Lat/Long coordinates or Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates to be displayed at the bottom of the page on a black background when a symbol is tagged. ―350°/015‖). Coordinate Display (LL. OFF). TAD symbols can include the SPI. ―A‖ is zone letter. waypoint/steerpoint. The top line will be in ―XX A BC YYYYY ZZZZZ. yellow line leads from the SPI symbol to the rotary selection. and ―ZZZZZ‖ is northing value. When a symbol is hooked. The top line displays the bearing from the selected tag mode (OWN. BULL.
306 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.‖ depending on the rotary selection.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
On the bottom line. Lat/Long coordinates are displayed.074‖). TGP diamond. MGRS. or bullseye. This OSB function is only displayed when you have hooked a TAD symbol with the cursor. from left to right: ―(XXX)°)/(YYY)‖ where (XXX) is the bearing to the ownship from the bullseye/anchor point (001 to 360) and (YYY) is the range is nautical miles between the ownship and the bullseye/anchor point.XXX E/W XXX XX. ―6900‖). rotary OSB 18. a ―/‖. followed by the range between the two as ―XXX‖ in nautical miles (for example. The top line of the label displays ―HOOK‖ and the bottom line of the label displays either ―OWN.‖ ―BULL‖ or ―CURS. its bearing. For example: HOOK BULL When a symbol is hooked. its geographic coordinate may be displayed in the lower center of the TAD. or CURS). ―C‖ is row letter. The second line is justified to the right side of the display and lists the altitude at the location of the hooked symbol. CURS) source to the hooked symbol in ―XXX°‖. For example: BULL 122°/024 This would indicate that the ownship is at a bearing of 122° from the bullseye at a range of 24 nautical miles. However.XXX‖ format (for example: ―N31 17. The top line will be in ―N/SXX XX. the hook line will run between the SPI symbol and the ownship symbol. Also when a symbol is hooked. MGRS coordinates are displayed. If OFF is selected. BULL. ―B‖ is column letter. When the OSB 6 rotary is set to ―MGRS‖.

Left-click on its corresponding OSB to select the profile in green reverse video. Each profile is listed as a system action. database full is indicated by the label:
DB FULL
10. All OSB functions still work. the number of the available waypoint will be listed with a ―?‖ mark next to it (for example.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
9. the hooked symbol will be created as a new mission waypoint in the CDU. 2 through 5. TAD Profile Program Page This function allows you to decide which profiles are assigned to the Profile Selection OSBs. ―30?‖). TAD Copy. If an open mission waypoint is available. system action OSB 17. If no mission waypoints are available in the CDU. This page lists all the possible profiles to assign to the Profile Select OSBs. Hold down any of the Profile Selection OSBs for more than one second to display the TAD Profile Program page (much like displaying the Display Program Page). TAD Profile Programs Page
Figure 230. OSB 11 removes labels except page select. This function is only displayed if a symbol has first been hooked. however. Pressing the same OSB again will de-
EAGLE DYNAMICS 309
. and they are listed on OSBs 6 through 9 and 16 through 20. If a symbol is hooked and OSB 17 is pressed. Declutter.


In both Expand 1 and Expand 2 modes. With the profile selected. the display will center on the current location of the TAD cursor and zoom in 2x field of view scale. the map scale can be set from 1:5M down to 1:50K. you may cycle between 3 view modes. the map scale can be set from 1:5M down to 1:50K. To remove a profile from a Profile Select OSB. the user may press any of the assigned Profile Select OSBs. This is the default presentation as described above. When in this mode. however. press the Profile Select OSB that they wish to assign the profile to. Expand 2 (EXP 2). TAD Expand Mode1
310 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.
Ex pa n d M o d es
When the TAD is the SOI. the slewing function will now move the map background. Upon doing so. the user may press the CLR system action OSB 10 button and then the Profile Select OSB they wish to clear.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
select it. Expand 1 (EXP 1).
Figure 231. the display will center on the current location of the TAD cursor and zoom in 4x field of view scale. The cursor will be stationary in this mode and cannot be slewed. When in this mode.   Normal Mode. however. the range rings and the bullseye information in the top left corner of the display are removed. The cursor will be stationary in this mode and cannot be slewed. When in Expand 2 mode. the label of the profile will appear under the selected Profile Select OSB. the slewing function will now move the map background. To return to the TAD. When in Expand 1 mode.

Pressing OSB 2 will reset all TAD profiles to their default values. The TAD Profile page consists of the following unique elements: 1. This includes the TAD profiles displayed on the TAD page and their individual names and settings. Save/Delete Profile (SAVE or DEL). system action OSB 3. Selecting profiles is done with OSB 2 through 5 from the TAD page. branch OSB 1. 2. Pressing OSB 1 will return the display back to the TAD page. Reset TAD Settings to Default (RSET). TAD Profile Control Page To access the TAD Control page. this is how to modify an existing profile. Pressing OSB 3 in this event will save the profile with the current settings. system action OSB 2.
312 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. you may modify or create TAD profiles. Each TAD profile may be named and the settings customized.
3. select the branch (CNTL) OSB 1 from the main TAD page. the OSB label will display ―SAVE‖.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
TAD Profile Control Page
1
3
2
6
5
4
Figure 233. If any changes have been made to the selected Profile’s settings. Default values sets all profile settings to ON. From this page. Return to TAD page (TAD). If a new name has not been entered with the New function.

the OSB 3 label will read ―DEL. Go to TAD Profile Settings (CHG SET). a delete confirmation message will be displayed in white reverse video in the bottom center of the display.‖ Pressing this OSB under this circumstance will delete the profile. After deletion. To enter a new name of the selected profile. TAD Delete Profile If the selected profile has not been modified. In this way. Upon pressing the OSB. you must delete or rename existing profile(s) to create new ones. If the deleted profile is the only profile.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 234. Pressing OSB 11 will direct the display to the TAD Profile Settings page. 5. you can create new profiles. data entry OSB 18. Create Profile Name (NEW).
EAGLE DYNAMICS 313
. branch OSB 16. however. If there are 9 profiles. the NEW label will be replaced with: DB FULL In such a situation. The maximum number of profiles is 9. Upon pressing enter/return. Pressing the OSB again will delete the profile and remove the message. ―NEW‖ will be replaced by the entered name. press OSB 18 and use the data entry scratchpad to enter a new name up to 4 characters long. the next profile is automatically selected. then ―DFLT‖ is displayed as the profile name. 4.

the message ―TAD DUP PROF‖ is displayed and the name entry is not taken (―NEW‖ remains). if you attempt to enter a name that is already being used. navigation OSBs 19 and 20. OSB 19 and OSB 20 are navigation OSBs that cycle profiles (OSB 19 cycles backwards and OSB 20 cycles forwards). TAD Profile Settings Page
2 3
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 235. the profile must first be selected from the TAD page. select CHG SET branch OSB 16. From this page. 6.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
No two profiles may have the same name. The TAD Profile Settings page consists of the following unique elements:
314 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. saving and deletion. For TAD Profile Settings to take effect. The profile displayed is considered the active profile for editing. those setting changes will be lost. To cycle profile selection. you can select unique symbol settings for the selected TAD profile. If settings are changed to a profile and a new profile is cycled to without first saving. OSB 2 through 5. The name of the profile is displayed between the two navigation arrows. TAD Profile Settings Page To access the TAD Profile Settings page. Select Profile [profile name].

5. a delete confirmation message will be displayed in white reverse video in the bottom center of the display. both Passive and Active Hooking are enabled.‖ Pressing the OSB 3 label in this event will save the profile with the current settings. Save/Delete Profile (SAVE or DEL). After deletion. and coordinates). 4. HOOK INFO(ON. Pressing the OSB again will delete the profile and remove the message. When the TAD cursor is moved off the symbol. WAYPOINT LINES (ON or OFF). bypassing the TAD Profile Control page. Return to TAD page (TAD). WAYPOINT LABEL (ON or OFF). 2. the next profile is automatically selected. 3. the OSB label will display ―SAVE. the TAD cursor must be placed over a symbol and the Hook Symbol HOTAS function initiated (TMS Forward Short). This option allows the display of flight plan steerpoint names next to the steerpoint symbols. RANGE RINGS (ON or OFF). There are 3 options: ON: When in ON mode. In the center of the page is the TDL SYMBOLOGY table. the symbol will stay hooked if the cursor is moved off the symbol.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 315
. branch OSB 1. ACT or OFF). system action OSB 3. This table lists all the possible symbols that can be displayed on the TAD according to the selected profile. In essence. BULLSEYE On/Off (ON or OFF). ACT: To Active hook a symbol. the information is automatically removed. Pressing OSB 2 will return you to the TAD Profile Control page. Each of the seven options have different arguments that can be selected by moving the arrow to the left of the table using OSB 19 and 20 and then pressing OSB 18 SYM to cycle the argument of that option. Pressing this OSB under this circumstance will delete the profile. This option allows the display of flight plan waypoints on the TAD. Passive hooking is disabled if a symbol is already tagged. WAYPOINTS (ON or OFF). bullseye bearing and range. This option allows the display of the range rings when not in EXP1 or EXP2 on the TAD. branch OSB 2. 8. you simply need to move the TAD cursor over the symbol to see the hook information (hook line. If the selected profile has not been modified. 9. This option allows the display of the bullseye (anchor point) symbol on the TAD. This option allows the display of lines connecting waypoints when the CDU is in Flight Plan mode. This option determines how the TAD cursor will behave when hooking a TAD symbol. With Passive Hooking. Pressing OSB 1. Once hooked in this Active manner. If any changes have been made to the selected Profile (as selected from the Profile Control page) settings.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1. the OSB 3 label will read DEL. it acts as a ―mouse over‖ function. Upon pressing the OSB. Return to TAD Profile Control page (RET). 7. OFF: This will disable both Passive and Active hooking and no data is displayed when hooking a symbol. 6. you will be returned directly to the TAD page.

TAD Datalink Symbols
Flight Members. This option allows you to display just your own SPI symbol (OWN).
5 1
6
7
4
2
3
Figure 236. SPI DISPLAY (ALL. Below the circle. including flight members (ALL).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
10. These are members of the A-10C flight you are assigned to according to your set network configuration page settings.
Da tal i nk
The A-10C is equipped with the Situational Awareness Datalink (SADL) such that it can communicate with friendly forces and be more aware of hostile forces in the operating area. or OWN). the numeric indicates the aircraft’s altitude in thousands of feet. In the center of the circle is the number of the aircraft within the flight as determined by your OWN ID setting.
316 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the following symbols can be displayed on the TAD. or all SPI symbols. When enabled with the JTRS switch on the AHCP and the OWN and GROUP network (NET) identification is set up properly.

A dot is in the center of the circle and the aircraft’s altitude in thousands of feet is below. Using either the UFC or CDU keypads.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 317
. other TAD SADL graphics are visible in relation to datalink operations: 1. the entered callsign will appear. Green crosses indicate friendly ground forces.
3. On the right side is the OWN ID. Valid entry is 1 to 99. These are other aircraft on the SADL network but on a separate GROUP ID number. Once pressed. In addition to the unit symbols. This allows you to select the network group that your selected ownship will be part of.
Friendly Ground Forces. If you are flying in a multiplayer mission and wish to send your SPI to other friendly aircraft. When broadcasting your SPI to friendly forces. SPI Broadcast. This number will default to the lowest number available in the selected group network.
2. Connecting this symbol to the broadcast aircraft is a blue line. it will appear to other SADL equipped units as a Mini-SPI symbol. if you enter an ID already used.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Friendly SADL Networked Members. When broadcasting your SPI. When a SADL equipped unit is broadcasting its SPI across the SADL network. However. Valid entry is 1 to 99. NET. You can also manually enter their ownship ID. This symbol looks like the standard SPI symbol but with one less tier. Mini-SPI. On the left side of the page is the OSB to enter your callsign. Here you can enter your ownship ID in the selected group for your aircraft. you must set SPI to ON using the DMS Left Long HOTAS command. this field will be lit in reverse video. other SADL equipped units will see your SPI on their displays as a Mini-SPI and a blue line connecting your aircraft icon to your Mini-SPI. you will get a CICU error. Also on the right side is the GROUP (GRP) ID. Pressing OSB 10 will display the SADL Network Configuration page that will allow you to set your OWN and GROUP numbers. enter a four digit call sign and then press OSB 17.

you may hook it for detailed data about the target. If you cannot comply (CNTCO) with the target assignment. To remove the message. At the same time.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Return to TAD Page
OWN ID Number
GROUP ID Number Enter Callsign
Figure 237. After you receive the "Point" message from the JTAC. pressing OSB 7 will clear the Assigned Target symbol and ATTACK message from the TAD. When you receive a new tasking assignment. Cannot Comply Response to Tasking. or press CNTCO (OSB 7) to decline. If you accept the tasking. you can view the Message (MSG) page to view the 9-line and a red triangle will be on the TAD at the location of the target. Wilco Response to Tasking. you will get a New Tasking message on the two MFCDs. The appearance of this symbol will coincide with the ATTACK message at the top of the screen.
5. The following displays and symbols are in regards to such tasking.
You can receive multiple Target Assignments in this manner. press TMS Left Short.
7. Once responded to. you can either reply with a CNTCO or WILCO response. a NEW TASKING message will appear on both MFCD regardless of the current page. A new tasking will be from the JTAC in the form of a digital 9-lne briefing. the ATTACK message will appear and flash at the top of the screen until you respond with a CNTCO or WILCO response. Assigned Target. When you receive a target assignment. Upon receiving a JTAC target assignment. Attack Tasking Message Received. Because this is a TAD object. 4. The symbol with flash until you respond. press OSB 19 and the Assigned Target symbol will stop flashing and become solid and the ATTACK message will be removed. press WILCO (OSB 19). the message will disappear. this red triangle symbol with a dot in the center will appear at the location of the assigned target on the TAD.
318 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Once received. If you decide to accept the Target Assignment. TAD Network Configuration Page During the course of a mission. As with other symbols. you may get mission tasking from a Joint Terminal Attack Controller (JTAC) or another SADL-equipped aircraft that will provide you tasking against a ground target. it can be hooked and be made your SPI.
6.

New Tasking Message Tasking targets to other SADL Aircraft. Using the TAD cursor. you can either passively or actively hook a datalink symbol. Upon doing so. press the SEND OSB a second time to send the Target Assignment. Friendly Units. When you do so. information about that unit will be displayed at the bottom of the TAD. Set the SPI to the location of the TAD symbol that you wish to assign as the target. To create a Target Assignment:  Actively hook the SADL-equipped aircraft you wish to send the Target Assignment to and press the SEND OSB. You do not need to be broadcasting SPI to do this. The following information is displayed when you hook a friendly unit:     SADL Network Configuration Identification number as ―XX-XX‖ Callsign Coordinates Active Profile
Hostile Units. the network identification (XX-XX) of the hooked aircraft appears below the SEND label. In addition to receiving Target Assignments from JTAC and other SADL-equipped aircraft. you can also assign targets to other SADL-equipped aircraft.


Hooking Datalink Symbols.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
New Tasking Message
Figure 238. This will set the target location and be visible on the recipient aircraft’s TAD. This is done through a combination of using the SPI and active hooking. With the recipient and target set. The following information is displayed when you hook a hostile unit:   Coordinates Unit type
EAGLE DYNAMICS 319
.

Air-to-Air (A-A) and Standby (STBY).         TGP OFF TGP NOT TIMED OUT A-G Page A-G Control Page STBY Page STBY Control Page A-A Page A-A Control Page
320 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.Control function).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Tar g e ti n g P o d (T GP ) P a g e
The targeting pod provides you the ability to view. Each of these modes also has a Control Page that provides you with the ability to configure TGP features (CNTL . there are 8 distinct TGP pages. or designate targets day or night. The main function modes for the TGP include Air-to-Ground (A-G). track. There are three live video modes: Charge Coupled Device (CCD) (similar to a TV display) and Forward Looking Infrared (FLIR) in both Black Hot and White Hot modes. As such. All actual TGP symbology and fields are displayed as white on the display.

the zoom level/field of view will be displayed in the upper left corner. and the sensor type/radar altitude will be displayed in the upper right corner (these fields will be described in detail later in this document). the Standby page will be displayed and a ―NOT TIMED OUT‖ message will be displayed in the upper center portion of the display for 60 seconds.
Figure 239. When the TGP is initially activated. In this state.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 321
. If you select TGP without first setting TGP power to ON from the AHCP. No TGP sensor video will be displayed. video will appear. you must select ON from the TGP switch on the AHCP.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Ac ti va ti n g th e T GP
To access the TGP page. and the Standby mode page will be selected. the message will be removed. This is the time needed for the FLIR sensor to cool down. a ―TGP OFF‖ message will be displayed on the TGP MFCD page. A ―FLIR HOT‖ message is displayed in white text on a black background with half the text height as the ―NOT TIMED OUT‖ message. TGP No Power Page To fully activate the TGP. After 60 seconds. you may select TGP from the Page Select OSBs (OSB 12 through 15).

5-degrees Narrow Field Of View (NFOV) is 1-degree by 1-degree
TGP mode.5-degrees x 3. the Page Selects and Declutter (DCLT). these include: 1.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 323
. TGP Common Elements Several TGP pages share a set of common elements that share the same page locations and functions. FLIR field of view:   Wide Field Of View (WFOV) is 4-degrees x 4-degrees Narrow Field Of View (NFOV) is 1-degree x 1-degree
CCD field of view:   2. The FOV can either be in Narrow Field of View (NFOV) or Wide Field of View (WFOV) and these views can vary between the CCD and FLIR sensors in the TGP. this text field indicates which field of view (FOV) that the TGP is currently in. Displayed in the upper left corner of each page. Wide Field Of View (WFOV) is 3. Selecting OSB 2 will direct you to the Air-to-Ground (A-G) TGP page. Field of View (FOV). A-G.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
TGP Page Common Elements
2
5
1 6 8 7
4
3 9
Figure 241. In addition to the Attitude Reference Symbol (ARS).

WHOT. this value indicates how accurate or inaccurate the INS data is.
324 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the aircraft’s AGL altitude is displayed and rounded to the nearest 10 feet. 5. Selecting OSB 4 will direct you to the Air-to-Air (A-A) TGP page. with no arrowhead. Selecting the OSB 3 will direct you to the TGP Standby page. The three options include:    6. Sensor Type. hot objects appear lighter than a cooler background. This is a static field in this simulation. A North arrow indicator is displayed in the upper right corner of the display. standby page (STBY). All lines are always normalized to the ground plane. Using the FLIR camera. BHOT.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
3. Using the FLIR camera. Depending on the loading of the aircraft. this text field indicates the current video mode that the TGP is collecting in. This is indicated by "M(Selected Shape Letter)". TGP mode. CCD. The Charge Coupled Device camera displays this image.
8. This is a static field in this simulation. 4. When using INS for targeting pod pointing. This is a daytime. Displayed in the upper right corner. North Arrow.
9. 7. Selected Mask Shape. A second line. This indicator consists of a static ―N‖ and an arrow line that overlays it and always points towards North. the predicted masked zones can be pre-set. TGP mode.
Altitude (RADALT). INS Performance Rating. Below the sensor type field. represents East-West. electro-optical camera. hot objects appear darker than a cooler background. A-A.

the standby control page. Zoom factor. The level of zoom is indicated in the upper left corner of the display. Upon activation of the TGP. LSR. This function allows servicing of the TGP but is nonfunctional. Both laser and IR pointer function simultaneously
TGP service (SVC). you will be directed to the Standby Control page. Go to STBY Control (CNTL) page. This rotary allows you to determine what will act as the designator. Laser IR. the mode may be exited from by selecting one of the other two TGP modes. 2. Designator Selection (LSR/IR/BTH). this will be the first TGP mode screen displayed. After the ―NOT TIMED OUT‖ message has been removed (after 60 seconds). By left clicking OSB 1. TGP Standby Page From the TGP mode STBY OSB. branch OSB 1.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 325
. Objects within the TGP field of view double in size from 0 to 9 zoom. system action OSB 18. Infrared pointer BTH. you may additionally adjust the zoom-factor by zooming in and out. you may access the Standby page. The following OSB functions may be displayed: 1. The zoom range goes from 0Z (no zoom) to 9Z (highest level of zoom within FOV). rotary OSB 7. 4.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Standby (STBY) Page
4
1
2
3
Figure 242. or a page select OSB. Rotary choices include:    3. Within an FOV selection.

Return to STBY Mode page (RTN). system action OSB 19. rotary OSB 20. this function is not functional. TGP Standby Control Page Upon selecting OSB 1 from the STBY mode page. This function would initiate a self calibration of the TGP. This provides an additional set of setting options. OSB 1. INIT COLD
Start Calibration (START CAL). 4.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Standby Control Page
1
4
3
2
Figure 243. Left clicking OSB 1 will direct you back to the Standby mode page. 2. However. FLIR integration (INT HOT/COLD). This function allows you to select between Hot and Cold FLIR integration settings. The rotary can select between: CAL SHORT and CAL LONG
326 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The rotary can be used to select between: INIT HOT 3. This function determines if the calibration will be a long or short method. rotary OSB 16. you are directed to the STBY control page. Calibration method (CAL SHORT/LONG). 1.

the TGP will be searching for a laser designation to track. Test display (TST). this option is disabled (label removed and OSB inactive) if CCD camera is active. When the LSS operation starts. Activate LSS mode (LSS). Selecting this OSB 1 will direct you to the Control page of A-G mode. Go to A-G Control page (CNTL). 2. When A-G mode is first entered. the FOV indicator field displays ―WSCH‖ instead of ―WIDE‖ and ―NSCH‖ instead of ―NARO. However. directly forward. the TGP will boresight at 150 mils below the zero sight line of the aircraft. system action OSB 6. When the TGP has
3. TGP A-G Page When the A-G mode page is selected after an OSB 2 click. the following elements may be displayed in addition to the common elements. system action OSB 5. As such. the TGP automatically enters Laser Spot Search (LSS) mode. ―LSRCH‖ will be displayed in the lower center of the display.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 327
. 1.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Air-to-Ground (A-G) Page
1
2
15
3
11
4
10
12
9
17
7
13
16
8
18
5
14
6
Figure 244. branch OSB 1.‖ When in LSS mode. When OSB 6 is commanded. This is a toggle OSB that allows the display of the gray-scale test bar near the bottom of the display. When in this mode. the crosshairs lengthen to stretch to four sides of the display with an open tracking gate in the center.

The TGP line of sight will then automatically slew to the detected laser reflection. ―DETECT‖ will replace ―LSRCH‖ on the display.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
detected a laser energy reflection.
Figure 245. TGP in LSS Detect Mode
Figure 246. After 1 second. ―DETECT‖ will be replaced with ―LTRACK‖ and a box (container) measuring the size of the tracking gate will overlay the laser energy spot. TGP in LSS Tracking Mode
328 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. and the OSB label will change from ―LSS‖ to ―LST‖ to indicate Laser Spot Track.

―L‖ for laser (Laser switch on AHCP = ARM) ―TL‖ for training laser (Laser switch on AHCP = TRAIN) ―P‖ for IR pointer (Laser switch on AHCP = ARM) ―TP‖ for IR pointer (Laser switch on AHCP = TRAIN) ―B‖ for both laser and IR pointer (Laser switch on AHCP = ARM) ―TB‖ for both laser and IR pointer (Laser switch on AHCP = TRAIN) These same indications are present on the HUD..e. However. Right of the Track Mode field and next to the crosshairs. This rotary allows you to determine what will act as the designator. Designator Selection (LSR/IR/BTH). the following conditions must be met:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 329
. the TGP diamond will mark the position of the LST. To fire the selected designator: LSR To fire the laser only. you may:    Select OSB 6 Command a TGP track Select laser or IR pointer
On the HUD. the ―T‖ is never present (i. the FOV will be set to NSCH. it will flash at 2 Hz. If already in a Track mode and commanded to LSS. Rotary choices include:    LSR. When the designator is firing. rotary OSB 7. Laser IR. When in LSS/LST mode. Infrared Pointer BTH. the selected designator type is displayed. If the track is lost. the FOV setting will be set to WSCH. OSB 7 is disabled and the Laser Status field is removed. an ―L‖ is displayed with LSR selected and the Laser switch on the AHCP in either ARM or TRAIN). 4.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
―LTRACK‖ will continue to be displayed until you exit LSS mode or the TGP loses tracking on the laser energy spot. ―NO LSR‖ will be displayed at item area [A and D] for one second and then the system will revert back to LSRCH mode. If in LSS mode and the TGP is slaved. Both laser and IR pointer function simultaneously
This rotary can also be changed using the Laser Mode Toggle HOTAS function as long as the TGP is the SOI. To exit LSS/LST mode.

Manual.
330 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the following conditions must be met:       The TGP switch on the AHCP must be set to ON BTH must be selected from OSB 7 Aircraft must be airborne The Laser switch on the AHCP must be set to ARM or TRAIN TGP is not masked by own aircraft Laser code entered The TGP switch on the AHCP must be set to ON The Laser switch on the AHCP must be set to ARM or TRAIN TGP is set to A-G mode IR must be selected from OSB 7 Aircraft must be airborne TGP is not masked by own aircraft The TGP switch on the AHCP must be set to ON The Laser switch on the AHCP must be set to ARM or TRAIN Aircraft must be airborne Laser code is entered TGP is not masked by own aircraft LSR must be selected from OSB 7
Manual Lase and Auto Lase. the laser can be fired in either manual or automatic modes. The following is true when the laser is in either ARM or TRAIN mode on the Laser AHCP switch. If auto-lasing parameters are set in a laser guided bombs profile. signaled by the flashing ―L. signaled by the flashing ―L‖. the laser will automatically fire to guide the bomb. the laser will fire. When the laser control is depressed and Latch is set to ON. Automatic. Automatic mode has two sub-settings in the profile:
ON. When required laser fire conditions are met.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
      IR To fire the IR pointer only. As long as the laser fire control is depressed and Latch is set to OFF. The laser will activate when the bomb is in the autolase window and will continue to fire until 4 seconds after computed weapon impact.‖ Latched. the laser will fire until the laser fire control is depressed again. the following conditions must be met:       BTH To fire both the IR pointer and the laser.

It will continue tracking even if the target is moving. When tracking in POINT mode. The TGP has established a track on a specific object/target and is stabilized on it. Track mode. If laser ranging is not available and the TGP is tracking a target. The laser will activate from the time the bomb is released until 4 seconds after computed weapon impact. 7. If masked.


6. What is displayed in this field is determined by the setting of the laser switch on the AHCP. then the field will be displayed as ―T (x)‖ where ―x‖ is the slant range to the TGP line of sight point. a box is drawn around the edge of the object being tracked.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
CONTINUOUS. This field displays the slant range from the aircraft to the TGP line of sight and is an indication of how that range is being derived. The TGP has been space stabilized on an overall scene. but is not tracking a specified object. When it is not firing. If AREA track cannot be maintained due to aircraft masking. then the field will be displayed as ―E (x)‖ where ―x‖ is the slant range to the TGP line of sight point. In such a situation. ―M‖ is displayed in this field to the right of the laser type. If the TGP is in a track mode.  All ranges will be computed by the laser if the laser is active and OSB 7 is set to LSR or BTH and the Laser switch on the AHCP is set to ARM.
Laser status. Types include:  AREA. POINT. The object need

EAGLE DYNAMICS 331
. it reverts to INR-A mode and will return to the AREA track location if track can be reestablished by unmasking. it returns to steady. If laser ranging is not available and the TGP is slewing and not tracking a target. Range and source. If the TGP line of sight is masked by the aircraft. the laser will be unable to fire. AHCP Laser Setting ARM TRAIN ARM TRAIN ARM TRAIN Display Field Result L TL P TP B TB
Designator LASER LASER IR POINTER IR POINTER BOTH BOTH
When the active designation device is firing.
5. the display field on the TGP display and on the HUD will flash at 2 Hz. this field will indicate the track mode it is in. the field will read ―L (x)‖ where ―x‖ is slant range to the target in nautical miles.

When IR Pointer is selected as the designation source. this OSB function is not included on the display. this crosshair will be displayed. If the TGP is tracking in AREA mode and is masked. Inertial Area (INR-A) is displayed. If the CCD is the active sensor. When the FLIR is selected as the sensor. Crosshair.
10. this crosshair will also include a box at the center of the TGP LOS.
Field of View (FOV) Indicators. rotary OSB 18. The various crosshairs that can be displayed on the A-G TGP mode allow the user to visualize the center of the TGP’s line of sight. Area Track.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
not be bounded and the box will not expand to encompass the entire object—it remains a fixed size. CCD NFOV

Point Track. This is similar to the AREA track crosshair but adds small perpendicular lines to each end of the crosshair. INR.

 8. These four corner brackets are only shown when WIDE FOV is enabled and indicate the portion of the image that will be displayed if NARO FOV is enabled. Similar to an AREA track cross hair. Gain and Level Select (GAIN or LVL). this simple crosshair will be displayed. it will revert to INR-P mode but will return to the POINT track if track can be reestablished by unmasking. When in Inertial (INR) mode. INR-P. If the TGP is tracking in POINT mode and is masked. Dimensions of this crosshair are: o o o  WFOV. this rotary has two selections: GAIN and LVL.
9. If the object cannot be tracked due to aircraft masking.
332 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. A-G crosshairs include:  Laser Marker Reticle. Inertial Point (INR-P) is displayed. The TGP will attempt to re-track the point lost when the mask constraint has been eliminated.  INR-A. The TGP will attempt to re-track the area lost when the mask constraint has been eliminated. the TGP will remain fixed on a geographic reference point. FLIR WFOV. This crosshair forms the basis for the other two types. When an AREA track has been initiated.

The cue is represented as a small square that can move to any spot within the circle of the diagram. 11. which is coincidental with the aircraft longitudinal axis.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
LST tracking Indicator Both Reticule Wide FOV indicators
Laser Marker Reticle Both Reticule
Area Track Laser Designator Reticule
Figure 247. o If the Gain Level Select OSB 18 is set to Gain. The SA cue provides you a reference to indicate the TGP’s current line of sight in reference to the pod’s longitudinal (boresight) axis. Depending on the Gain and Level selection on OSB 18.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 333
. navigation OSBs 19 and 20.
12. Gain and Level Schedule Control (XXX). ―G3‖). TGP Crosshair Types A crosshair will flash at 1 Hz when the TGP line of sight is within 5° of being masked by the aircraft. then the value will be preceded by a ―G‖ (for example. the up and down navigation OSBs will increase or decrease the Gain or Level. The position of the SA square represents the current TGP line of sight. Situational Awareness Cue. The range goes from 1 to 8. This field is displayed between OSBs 19 and 20.

If the cue is located directly below the center of the display.    If the cue is centered in the display. TGP Situational Awareness Cue The elevation angle of the line of sight is indicated by the distance of the SA cue from the center of the display. and the SA cue position relative to it indicates the direction the TGP is looking. the elevation angle is 0° or level If the cue is halfway between the center of the display and the edge of the circle displayed in the diagram. the TGP is pointed 90° right of the aircraft.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
A AZ=0º EL=0º
D AZ=0º EL=-90 º
B AZ=-90º EL=0º
C AZ=90º EL=0º
E AZ=-180º EL=-25º
Figure 248.
334 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.   If the cue is located 90° right from the center of the display. the elevation angle is 45° down
The azimuth angle is represented as picturing the aircraft in the center of the display. B or C). the TGP is pointed directly behind the aircraft. the elevation angle is 90° down If the cue is located at the edge of the circle displayed in the lower diagram above (positions A.

Coordinate Display. 15. 16. If POINT track is lost. This function is only available when FLIR is the active sensor of the TGP. Focus. When the TGP is in POINT track mode and it has detected enough thermal or visual contrast to track an object/target. when visible.
13. When OSB 5 is pressed a second time. Above the crosshairs. the box will be removed. Either Lat/Long coordinates or Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates may be displayed at the bottom of the A-G Mode page. 18. A-G Control Page
1 2
10
3
4 9 5 8 6 7
Figure 249. This timer field above the Attitude Reference Symbol indicates Zulu time. Gray Scale Strip. Point Track Box. the focus value is displayed when the TGP is the SOI and the gray scale strip is active (OSB 5). A box (container) will be centered on the object/target being tracked.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 If the cue is located above the center of the display. the test strip is removed. TGP A-G Control Page
EAGLE DYNAMICS 335
. displays the relative ground distance covered by the right half of the crosshair. Timer. Yardstick. When OSB 5 is selected. This numeric. a gray scale test strip is displayed in the lower center portion of the display. 17. the TGP is pointed directly in front of the aircraft. 14. The type of coordinate is selected from the A-G Control page.

rotary OSB 10. Focus Reset (FOCUS RESET). B is column letter.186 W086 07. USA. ―8FT‖). If OFF is selected. rotary OSB 7. 4. rotary OSB 9. though. OFF). Lat/Long coordinates are displayed for the spot at the center of the crosshair.
Yardstick Metric (METRIC. selecting the designator fire action once will fire the selected designator(s) and a second press of the action will discontinue it. This function allows you to select between manual and automatic gain control. and ZZZZZ is northing value. C is row letter.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
To access the A-G Control page. rotary OSB 16.
6. ―N31 17. The A-G Control page provides additional control and display functions to the A-G Mode page. no coordinate or height will be displayed. When enabled to METRIC or USA.074‖). Coordinate Display (LL. the distance will be in feet (for example. The top line will be in ―N/SXX XX. The top line will be in ―XX A BC YYYYY ZZZZZ.XXX E/W XXX XX.   5.XXX‖ format (for example. These include: 1. The rotary. If OFF is selected. can be used to select between: INT HOT INT COLD
336 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the relative ground distance covered by the right half of the crosshair is indicated. Selection of this action will adjust focal length. MGRS coordinates are displayed for the spot at the center of the crosshairs. rotary OSB 8. MGRS. system action OSB 6. ―3M‖). OSB 1. the distance will be in meters (for example. the selected designator(s) will only fire as long as the designator fire action is held down. A is zone letter. When set to OFF. this function will not be functional. 2. When set to ON. No function. FLIR integration (INT HOT/COLD). select OSB 1 from the TGP A-G Mode page. However. no Yardstick will be displayed. Latch (LATCH ON or LATCH OFF). Selecting this OSB 1 will direct you back to the A-G Mode page. If USA is selected.‖ where XX is zone number. When the OSB 7 rotary is set to LL. Either Lat/Long coordinates or Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates may be displayed at the bottom of the A-G Mode page on a black background. OFF). YYYYY is easting value. When the OSB 7 rotary is set to MGRS. 3. 7. a text field is displayed right of the right side of the crosshair.
Gain control (MGC or AGC). The latch function allows the laser to be fired as long as the laser fire action is enabled or as a toggle. This function allows you to select between Hot and Cold FLIR integration settings. Return to A-G Mode page (RTN). The lower line indicates altitude in hundreds of feet in the format of ―HXXXXX‖ and indicates the above sea level altitude at the center of the crosshairs. In this field.    If METRIC is selected.

you may enter the Altitude Advisory value in feet. data entry OSB 17. If an invalid number is inputted. The default setting is 10. Using the scratchpad. Using the scratchpad. Using the scratchpad. The entered value can range from 1111 to 1788. The entered value is displayed below the TAAF OSB label. TAAF (TAAF). The entered value can range from 1111 to 1788. this function will be disabled (label removed and OSB inactive). data entry OSB 18. you may enter the laser code that will be searched for when in laser spot search (LSS) mode. you may enter the laser designation code. Valid values range from 0 to 65000.000 feet.
10. The TAAF warning will be triggered if the aircraft is below the set altitude and its bank angle is greater than 75° with a pitch less than 0°. but the first digit of the series must be a 1 and the last three digits must be between 1 and 8. The warning is automatically removed when advisory warning conditions no longer exist. Laser Designation Code (L). If 0 is entered.
9. If an invalid number is inputted. The inputted number is displayed below the LSS OSB label. TAAF is disabled. The warning consists of a ―CHECK ATTITUDE‖ in red reverse video on both MFCDs. and/or pitch angle is less than -20°. LSS Code (LSS). but the first digit of the series must be a 1 and the last three digits must be between 1 and 8. 8. an ―INPUT ERROR‖ WCN is displayed in the center of the display. The inputted number is displayed below the L OSB label. an ―INPUT ERROR‖ WCN is displayed in the center of the display. data entry OSB 20.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 337
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
If CCD is selected as the active sensor.

select OSB 1. This is a notification field and cannot be altered and is set on the A-A Control page. 2. directly forward. branch OSB 1. TGP A-A Page To access the A-A mode. the TGP will boresight at 41 mils below its longitudinal axis. If the Laser switch on the AHCP is set to ARM. Laser Mode. OSB 7.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 250. you may select OSB 4 (A-A). 1. When A-A mode is first entered. then ―TRNG‖ will appear on the top line of the label. To access the nested A-A Control page. then ―CMBT‖ will appear on the top line of the label. TGP TAAF WCN
Air-to-Air (A-A) Page
1
2
4
3
Figure 251. The A-A mode is especially configured for air-to-air operations. Go to A-A Control Page (CNTL).   If the Laser switch on the AHCP is set to TRAIN. Laser Mode (CMBT ON/OFF and TRNG ON/OFF).
338 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. This will direct you to the A-A mode page.

Depending on the Gain and Level selection on OSB 18. Gain and Level Select (GAIN or LVL).
EAGLE DYNAMICS 339
. this rotary has two selections: GAIN and LVL. you may slew the TGP crosshair using the slew switch. TGP A-A Default From the boresight mode. When in this slewed mode. These controls are only displayed if FLIR is the active sensor. ―G3‖). navigation OSBs 19 and 20. After being slewed. represented by the elongated crosshairs. This field is displayed between OSBs 19 and 20. but not tracking a target. the value will be preceded by a ―G‖ (for example. the TGP will enter A-A boresight mode. Gain and Level Select. this OSB function is not included on the display. ―RATES‖ is indicated on the display. When slewing. Gain and Level Schedule Control. rotary OSB 18. The range goes from 1 to 8.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
3. Gain and Level Schedule Control (XXX). If OSB 18 is set to Gain. the TGP camera moves in a space stabilized manner.
Figure 252. the crosshairs will be reduced to halfsize.
4. If the CCD is the active sensor. When the FLIR is selected as the sensor. A-A Modes When A-A is first entered. the up and down navigation OSBs will increase or decrease the Gain or Level.

the cross will disappear. the TGP will attempt to track the target and place a cross ―+‖ on it. TGP A-A Slew Rates If the valid air target passes within the narrow field of view area (represented by the four corner markers).
Figure 254. If the target flies outside the narrow field of view area. TGP A-A Target Detect
340 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 253.

the TGP will automatically enter RATES mode (indicated in the tracking-type field). The TGP will attempt to re-track the point lost when the mask constraint has been eliminated. ―POINT‖ will be displayed as well as the tracking cross. Upon slew release. the target will be centered in the crosshair and a box will be drawn around the target to conform to its size.
 
EAGLE DYNAMICS 341
.
Figure 255. INR-P. POINT. the TGP line of sight will continue drifting in the direction of the slew before it was released. As with A-G mode. the user may command INR track and return to RATES mode. If the TGP is tracking in POINT mode and is masked. TGP A-A Target Tracking  RATES. the user may command a Point track over an object. When in A-A mode and the slew function is released. To exit POINT track.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
If you then command TMS Forward Short HOTAS command (command point track). When in this mode. INR-P is displayed.

Gain control (MGC or AGC). system action OSB 7. The rotary can be used to select between: INT HOT INT COLD
342 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. If the Laser switch on the AHCP is set to ARM.

2. the user may create additional settings for the A-A mode. Return to A-A Mode (RTN) page. The system action OSB can be used to cycle the lower line of the label to ON and OFF. Return to A-A Mode. FLIR integration (INT HOT/COLD). then ―TRNG‖ will appear on the top line of the label. This function allows you to select between Hot and Cold FLIR integration settings. Laser Mode (CMBT ON/OFF and TRNG ON/OFF). branch OSB 1. 3. you may select branch OSB 1 (CNTL) from the A-A Mode page. 1. From this page. the laser will be unable to fire. TGP A-A Control Page To access the A-A Mode Control page.  If the Laser switch on the AHCP is set to TRAIN.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
A-A Control Page
1
3
2
Figure 256. rotary OSB 10. If set to OFF. The system action OSB can be used to cycle the lower line of the label to ON and OFF. Selecting OSB 1 will return the user to the A-A Mode page. This function allows you to select between manual and automatic gain control. If set to OFF. then ―CMBT‖ will appear on the top line of the label. rotary OSB 16. the laser will be unable to fire.

These include:        TAAF When a TAAF advisory is made due to the following conditions. HUD When the TGP is in operation. Laser Designation Indication (L) IR Pointer Designation Indication (P) Laser and IR Pointer being used simultaneously (B) TGP Seeker Head Position Symbol (diamond symbol) SOI Indication (asterisk) SPI Indication (SPI locator line) Target Mask Indication (M)
EAGLE DYNAMICS 343
. and/or pitch angle is less than -20°. TGP Indicators on Other Pages TAD When the TGP is in operation. this function will be disabled (label removed and OSB inactive). provided the coordinates are within the current TAD scale range. aspects of its operation may be displayed on the HUD. a ―WARNING‖ message is displayed on the lower center of the HUD. The warning is automatically removed when advisory warning conditions no longer exist. The TAAF warning will be triggered if the aircraft is below the set TAAF altitude and its bank angle is greater than 75° with a pitch less than 0°.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
If CCD is selected as the active sensor. the TAD includes a diamond symbol indicating the current position of the TGP seeker head.

With station 3 selected. Using the missile reject function. Mavericks can be loaded on two types of launcher: the LAU-88 (up to three missiles per launcher) and the LAU-117 (single missile per launcher). this is the order in which Maverick is cycled as well. you can go directly to the Maverick page. LAU-117 can only carry a single Maverick on either station 9 or 3. Mavericks can be accessed as follows:  Page Select OSB. When the HUD is the SOI. TGM-65D/GH. The Maverick has several variants that differ in warhead size and type of seeker (CCD or Infrared). ALIGN is displayed in the center of the display. but the user can use the missile reject function to select station 3 instead. video will not be displayed until 3 minutes have elapsed since activation. Alignment starts when EO power is applied to a Maverick. Anytime EO power is set to off. Maverick Operational Times. station 9 will have priority over station 3 by default. By pressing an OSB (12 through 15) that has the MAV legend over it. the priority missile will automatically be activated. then center. then the center rail. Maverick Launchers. alignment must be restarted when EO power is re-applied. station 9 is the priority station. Time of alignment is 3 minutes.
HOTAS select. Maverick will be cycled the same way: outboard. and last the inboard rail. Only after all missiles have been expended from the station will selection automatically transfer to station 3. If Maverick is loaded on LAU-117. However.
Maverick Selection/Activation. The Maverick is a precision-guided air-to-ground missile that can be used against armored vehicles and fortifications. Maverick priority is determined by:  If Maverick is loaded on LAU-88. station 9 is the priority station.   LAU-88 can carry up to three Mavericks on either station 9 or 3. This automatically displays the Maverick page and assigns it as the SOI. this will represent gyro spin-up for the missile. the LAU-117 is the only option. For video to be displayed. During this time. the HOTAS can be used to select a Maverick profile from the HUD rotary. you can use it as a sensor or a weapon (assuming a Maverick profile has not already been selected). then inboard. the following requirements must be met:   Master Arm set to ARM A Maverick must be loaded on the aircraft
344 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. For the heavier versions of the Maverick like the G and K versions.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Ma ve ri ck ( MA V) P a g e
AGM-65D/G/H/K. All types of Maverick though use a gyro-stabilization system that must be aligned before use.When the Maverick has been selected. and CATM-65K Maverick control in the A-10C is similar to the A-10A with the exception that the Maverick video from the sensor is displayed on either MFCD rather than a dedicated TV Monitor.

Once a Maverick is selected. Selecting the Maverick this way. the Maverick on station 9 will be the priority. The outboard rail will be first selected. Maverick will be used as a weapon when selected this way. the seeker video will be displayed on the MFCD. Maverick will automatically be set to Standby mode (no seeker video is displayed) if it is not displayed on either MFCD and has not been slaved or ground stabilized.

Maverick has EO power applied and will require a 3-minute spin-up period before video will be displayed. Align. If no lock is achieved it will not be stabilized. During this 3-minute period. ―ALIGN‖ is displayed. each reject will cycle to the next Maverick in priority on the station before cycling to the next station.‖ Using the slew switch. the next missile in priority is automatically selected and its video is displayed on the Maverick page.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 345
. After a Maverick has been launched from a LAU-88. If the aircraft is using LAU-117 (which carries a single Maverick) stations. but not a mix of the two. Cycling Maverick Stations When a Maverick is launched.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
  EO Power set to ON (from Maverick page or DSMS Missile Control page) The 3-minute align time has been satisfied
Maverick Launch Inhibits To launch a Maverick. this is the fixed starting position of the seeker and HUD reticle. Maverick EO power is on but no video is displayed. each reject of the selected Maverick will cycle to the next station. To cycle between the two stations. it is considered in a ―slew state. Maverick Modes    Standby. the next Maverick in priority will be selected and its seeker will be slewed to the prior Maverick’s aim point (rapid fire mode / Quick Draw). Boresight. When the Maverick seeker is being moved within its field of regard. the following conditions must be met:       LAU-88 or LAU-117 is present Store quantity must be greater than zero A Maverick DSMS profile must be active The weapon station must be ARM through the Master Arm setting Not in align mode Flaps must be in the full-up position
Maverick can be launched even if the Maverick page is not the SOI. After a Maverick has been launched from a LAU-117. the seeker will attempt to track a target under or near the gate. When the Maverick seeker is re-caged. this is the position it will return to from a track or stabilized ground track. if there is another station (not the next missile on the same station). you may move the seeker’s field of view center within its gimbal limits. When the targeting gate is slewed and released. both have to be selected as Weapon or Sensor. the next Maverick in priority will be selected and its seeker will be slewed to boresight. After a Maverick has been activated. If the aircraft is using LAU-88 (carries up to three Mavericks) stations. Slew. it is 150 mils from sight line by default.

When slewed off. the Maverick seeker can be made to track a designated point on the ground. the Maverick acts as if in a ground stabilize mode but will not automatically start tracking.


Maverick Page Display In addition to seeker video.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Slave. the seeker will no longer be stabilized unless commanded with TMS Aft or Left Short. This green text overlays the seeker video and symbols and provides information regarding seeker status:
Figure 257. Ground Stabilize. text can be displayed 1/3 from the top of the display. the seeker will automatically attempt to acquire and track a target within the tracking gate by using the tracking polarity of the target. Track. Using the slave to SPI function. These overlays can be removed with the Declutter (DCLT) OSB. Seeker Status Messages To provide information on the state of the selected Maverick. Note that this will not track a target. Using the ground stabilize function. the Maverick seeker position can be automatically slewed to the SPI. When slaved to a SPI. Maverick Alignment
346 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. additional information is overlaid on the Maverick page display. At the end of slew command. it will automatically go into break lock mode (expanded crosshairs). If tracking fails.

FLAPS. you must ensure that:     Master is set to either ARM or TRAIN on the AHCP EO power is set to ON (OSB 6) Maverick gyro has been aligned No Maverick profile selected
This can be set even if a non-Maverick profile is active and regardless of other weapon settings. Master Arm switch is set to SAFE on the AHCP. Flap position is down and Maverick may not be launched. This is indicated by ―SENSOR‖ being displayed vertically along the left side of the page. Maverick EO power has been set to OFF. select the Maverick profile and set the profile to Active (ACT PRO) Manual. press the OSB corresponding to a loaded Maverick. This will create a manual profile (MAN/Maverick)
EAGLE DYNAMICS 347
. With HUD as SOI. The Maverick seeker has reached its gimbal limits. this message will be displayed. POWERING OFF.
Maverick as Sensor To use the Maverick in such a manner. From the Main Profile page.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
        NO MAVERICK. OFF. Power-off process takes 2 seconds. NO TRACK LAUNCH IHBT. Maverick as Weapon To employ the Maverick as a weapon. ALIGN. GIMBAL LIMITS. you may use two methods:       Master is set to either ARM on the AHCP EO power is set to ON (OSB 6) Maverick gyro has been aligned From HUD. it will act as a sensor. EO power to the Maverick is set to OFF. From the DSMS Status page. This process takes 3 minutes after missile activation. cycle rotary profiles until Maverick profile is selected. If the Maverick is in a non-track state and launch of the weapon is attempted. MASTER ARM SAFE. As long as the Maverick is unarmed from the DSMS. The Maverick is aligning its gyros. A Maverick has not been detected on the station according to the DSMS profile. From DSMS Profile.

The ADJ OSB allows you to adjust the boresight position of the Maverick. range caret and attached digital range. the DLZ is displayed along the left side of the page. Dynamic Launch Zone (DLZ).
4. it will automatically cage to the set position. allows you to manually apply power to all Maverick stations. EO Power Timer. Maverick Display Fields 1. this will also reset the alignment time. the EO Timer is automatically displayed and started. The DLZ consists of a compilation of symbols that indicate Maverick maximum and minimum range.
2. a dynamic launch zone (DLZ) will be shown along the left side of the display. When EO power is set to OFF. slew the Maverick to the desired boresight position and then press OSB 7.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Once the Maverick is selected as weapon. The default setting is OFF.
Ma ve ri ck D is pl ay F i e lds
6 1
5
2
7
4
3
Figure 258.
348 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The next time you cage the missile to boresight. allowable launch window. When the Maverick is active as a weapon. and a missile time of flight indicator. Adjust Boresight. To do so. When the EO Power function has been set to ON. this timer is automatically displayed and started.
3. When EO Power is set to ON. the timer is removed from the display and reset. EO Power. The OSB is a rotary with two settings: ON and OFF. The EO Power function (OSB 6). This timer displays the elapsed time since EO power was applied and counts up in hours:minutes:seconds.

When the reticle is outside the staple. ―XXX‖ is displayed in this field.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 349
. Time of Flight Numeric. ―SENSOR‖ will be indicated vertically if a Maverick profile has not been selected. The staple will not be displayed if the Maverick gimbal limit exceeds 30° laterally. The name of the selected Maverick profile is listed in this field. the timer will count down to zero and then flash for 5 seconds before being blank. This area represents the dynamic minimum and maximum range of the selected Maverick and will adjust according to speed and altitude. The caret can move between the upper and lower ticks. 6. This indicator will show ―3‖ if the active Maverick station is station 3. This range numeric is only displayed when the caret is within the top and lower ends of the staple. Attached to the caret is the range numeric.




Upper Tick
Occultation Zone
Staple Top
Range Caret
Staple Line
Range Numeric
Staple Bottom
Lower Tick
Time of Flight Numeric
Symbol Region
 5. The distance between the two is approximately 15 nautical miles. After the Maverick has been launched. Staple.
Active Maverick Station. These display the maximum and minimum possible ranges of the selected Maverick. When outside of maximum range. the Maverick time of flight to reach the area under the reticle is displayed in seconds. this field will display ―9. This caret represents the range from the aircraft to the ground point which the Maverick HUD reticle is over. Range Caret and Numeric. Maximum tracking distance is generally around 7 nm. These ticks are static and do not move dynamically. Note. When the designated area/target under the reticle is within the top and bottom of the staple. the caret is fixed to the upper tick mark.‖ Profile Name. The maximum range of the Maverick is most often limited to sensor tracking than physical distance the missile can fly.
Maverick as Sensor. If the active Maverick station is 9.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Upper and Lower Ticks. In place of the DLZ.

any polarity change will not take effect until the Maverick is re-caged or has reentered slew mode. Crosshairs. These corner markers represent the field of view if the display is changed to Narrow Field of View (NFOV) mode.
2.
3. This central gap marks the tracking gate you need to place over a target to command a track on it. the symbols are colored black.
Ma ve ri ck D is pl ay S y m b ols
When the Maverick display is set to Black Hot. However. four corner markers are present on the display.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
7. Maverick Display Symbols 1. FOV Corner Markers. FOV corner markers are not displayed when in NFOV mode. The three marks represent 5°. The SLEW data field allows you to adjust the Maverick slew rate according to the value entered. three static marks are located to represent angular depression. if the Maverick is tracking a target (in track mode). 10° and 15° depression from the center of the crosshairs. enter the rate in either the UFC or CDU keypad and press OSB 8.
350 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The size of this gap can vary according to the Maverick type and what field of view setting the missile is in.
1 3
5 4
2
Figure 259. Depression Markers. When the Maverick is in Wide Field of View (WFOV) mode. To adjust the rate. Along the lower axis of the crosshairs. SLEW. These horizontal and vertical lines span the horizontal width and vertical height (44 x 44 mils) of the display and have an open gap in the center. when set to White Hot or Auto. the symbols are colored white.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
4. you can also press TMS Forward Short to manually command a lock. When you designate a lock (released slew over the intended target) with no viable target under the tracking gate. The center of the cross designates the missile impact point. To enter force correlate mode. The pointing cross will flash when the seeker is tracking a target. it will attempt to lock the tracking gate on an object with sufficient visual or thermal contrast within the tracking gate. If you wish. The area within the tracking gate will conform to the size and shape of the target being tracked. please reference the Combat Employment chapter. the crosshairs will have a gap. but when slew is released and a lock/track is commanded. its seeker will be commanded to its default boresight location.
5. Pointing Cross. The seeker is essentially locking onto and centering its lock on the center of the target. If in centroid track. If it cannot find a target to lock on to. the horizontal and vertical crosshairs line elements will expand to the dimensions of the target. Aided Target Acquisition (ATA) can be used. If the target is centered in the tracking gate and within range. you can change this location by:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 351
. For a more detailed discussion on Maverick use. The tracking gate is located at the intersection of the horizontal and vertical crosshairs elements. The tracking gate may grow in size if locked on to a target larger than the dimensions of the default tracking gate.
Maverick Tracking Types Centroid Tracking When the Maverick is in centroid track mode. If not locked though. bunker or ship. The pointing cross indicates the relative direction that the Maverick seeker is looking in reference to the longitudinal axis of the aircraft. Force correlate is always displayed with white symbols. All Maverick versions except AGM/TGM-65H have force correlate mode. the Boat Switch must be in the center position and held there for greater than 1 second while no target is locked. The tracking gate represents where the seeker will attempt to lock/track a target. ATA mode will automatically search the area around the gate for a target and automatically lock the closest. it will go into break lock mode and the crosshairs will expand out.
Force Correlate Tracking When in force correlate mode. the Maverick seeker is not tracking the actual object but rather a fixed position according to an image of a scene it builds.
Maverick Boresight Types Set Default Boresight Location When the Maverick is first selected or it is commanded to boresight. Tracking Gate. This allows the Maverick to target a specified section of a larger object such as a building. the gap will collapse to form a perfect cross with no gate. it will be steady. When locked. When slewing.

Left. Move the Boat Switch out of the center (AUTO) position.
Boresight Symbol to Maverick Line of Sight To further refine the boresight you can: 1. 4. 3. 4. 2. the SEEKER BORESIGHT message will switch to reverse video. Move the Maverick symbol by pressing the DMS switch Up. 2. Set MAV to SENSOR mode Lock a ground or air target with the Maverick Set the Boat Switch to the center (AUTO) position. When you do so. 5. SEEKER BORESIGHT will display on the MAV page Place the Depressible Pipper over the locked target and press TMS Forward Short. and Right) until it is over the target Press the ENT button on the UFC
352 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. When you do so. 3. Set MAV page as SOI Lock an air or ground target with the Maverick Press OSB 6 on the MAV page and ADJ OFF to change to ADJ ON. Down.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1. 5.

In many ways. you can enter up to ten lines of text with 24 characters each. you will receive a notice on both MFCDs regardless of their operating page. When you receive a text message. This appears as a text box in the lower right corner of the screen reading NEW MSG. Such messages could range from detailed Close Air Support (CAS) tasking messages to dinner plans! Using either the CDU or UFC keypads.
New Message Indication
Figure 260. You can clear the note with a TMS Left Short press. you can send and receive text messages from other SADL-equipped units (air and ground).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
M essa g e ( MS G) P a g e
When linked into the Situational Awareness Datalink (SADL) network. New Message Indication
R ec ei v ed M essa g es P ag e
If you now select the MSG page (OSB 11 – 15) you will be directed to the Received (RCVD) Messages Page. it can be like Instant Messaging (IM) online. This page allows you to cycle through and read all received messages.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 353
.

will delete the currently viewed message from the received text message data base. Next to the MSG label is an indication of the current message / total number of messages in message data base. The reverse video RCVD label indicates that you are in the Received Messages Page. This page allows you to receive and delete text messages from other SADL-equipped units. 5. Below the FRM label is the network ID of the sender of the viewed message (Unit ID – Group ID).
4. Received Messages Page 1. and when pressed. OSB 3 will be labeled DEL. OSB 18. This page allows you to create and send a text message to a SADL-equipped unit.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
2 3
1
4
5
6
Figure 261.
3. OSB 20 cycles to more recent messages and OSB 19 cycles to older messages. Message From (FRM). 2.
6. You can also access this page from the Received Messages Page by pressing the NEW OSB 1. OSB 2. OSB 1. Delete Message (DEL). OSB 19 and OSB 20. Cycle / Select Message (MSG X/X). When in the Received Messages Page. you can cycle through your received messages.
S e nd M essa g e P a g e
If you select the Message (MSG) page from OSB 11-15 without an incoming message notification first. New Message (NEW). You can read more about network configuration in the SADL datalink chapter. Pressing OSB 19 and 20. Received Messages (RCVD). Each received message can be up to 10 lines in length with 24 characters each. you will be directed to the Send Message Page.
354 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Received Message. OSB 3. Pressing OSB 1 will direct you to the Send Message Page and will allow you to send messages to other SADL-equipped units.

5. you would enter 00 for the ID and then the two-digit group ID. Press OSB 17 to send the message to the selected recipient(s). Here you will determine who the message will be sent to. OSB 18. OSB 1. will cycle through the lines of the pending message.
6.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1 3
2
4
5
6
7
Figure 262. Send Message Page 1.
3. Pressing the RCVD OSB 2 label directs you to the Received Messages Page. Left of each line of text is an arrow that can be moved up and down using OSB 19 and 20. 4. If you are writing a message and wish to discard it. you can press OSB 3 and erase all contents of your pending message. OSB 17. For example: if you wanted to send a message to all aircraft in SADL network group 12. This ID will be saved until it is over-written with a new ID. Once a valid network identification has been entered. OSB 19 and OSB 20. 2. OSB 3. The reverse video NEW label indicates that you are in the Send Message Page and that you can send messages to other SADL-equipped units. Cycle / Select Line (LINE). enter the network identification in the scratchpad using the CDU or UFC keypads and then press OSB 18. New Message (NEW). you would enter 0012. the SEND MSG label by OSB 17 will be visible. OSB 2. Send Message (SEND). Cancel Message (CAN).
7. Each message you compose can be up to 10 lines in length with 24 characters each. Received Messages (RCVD). Message Recipient (TO). If you wish to send a message to an entire group. Pending Message. To do so. This page allows you to receive and delete text messages from other SADL-equipped units.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 355
. OSB 20 moves the line select arrow up and OSB 19 moves the line select arrow down. The entered network identification will then be listed below the TO label. This is done by entering the SADL network identification. The line selected is the one that can be edited. Pressing OSB 19 and 20.

The pipper must pass through the small 5 mil solution cue. No release constraint. The Air-to-Air Submenu (AAS) allows you set the air-to-air gun funnel according to 10 pre-set aircraft or create parameters for two aircraft manually. MAINT BIT statement. the Main Menu page is displayed.  To select one of the pre-set parameters. CCIP CONSENT OPT.    SEL + and – moves the line selection DATA cycles a line selection ENTER selects the line option selected
When the IFFCC switch is placed in the ON position though. The Built In Test (BIT) submenu provides several selection to test IFFCC systems that include:        GCAS BIT. This runs a test of the SAS. 5 MIL. EXIT. BIT FAULT DISPLAY. This runs a test of the Ground Collision Alert System (GCAS). Returns to main Test menu.
AAS. 3/9.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 357
. sensor and weapon information is displayed on the HUD. move the selection caret to the left of the entry and then press ENTER on the UFC.
IFFCC TEST Menu
When the IFFCC Test option is first selected. VMU BIT. Thus will perform a test of Line Replaceable Units (LRU). When the IFFCC switch is in the TEST position. and GCAS MESSAGES systems. The release 5 mil solution cue must pass through the large bombing reticle. MANUAL RADAR ALTIMETER SWITCH setting. PREFLIGHT BIT. You may cycle between three options:    OFF. the HUD displays a series of menus that allow you to configure the IFFCC system.
BIT. When CCIP weapon delivery mode is selected. LASTE. These menus are navigated through using the UFC.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Heads Up Display (HUD)
The HUD of the A-10C is used for two primary functions. This menu allows you access to the four primary selections. navigation. you may select a consent to weapon release constraint (CR) or none at all. This runs a test of the Voice Message Unit (Betty).

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 To create a manual entry. RNDS RESET. This can be cycled between OLIN. Enable or disable PAC1.
WEAPONS. This submode allows you to configure how elements of the HUD are displayed. Indication of number of 30mm rounds loaded. and weapon aiming offsets. HEI (High Explosive Incendiary). STORE. Select Y to briefly display release data on the HUD or N to not display this data. Once selected you have the option to manly set values for: o o o  Wingspan Length Target Speed
Once you have made your changes. CCIP GUN CROSS OCCULT. This value can be set in increments of 100 feet and determines the elevation to the reference the Gun Minimum Range Cue (MRC) on the HUD. If YES is selected all of the passes will be automatically scrolled through at a rapid rate for recording on the VTR. Resets gun round indication to 1150.
358 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. EXIT. This submenu allows you to select attributes of the 30 mm cannon. Select Y to display HUD data values in Metric.    AUTO SCROLL. This can be cycled between TP (Training Practice). PAC1 POS MODE. After the data pages have been recorded. select STORE from the list or select CANCEL.
WPN REL DATA. Set this option to Y to display speed and altitude tapes instead of digital values. the first data page will be displayed. 30MM. This allows the option to occult the TVV behind the CCIP gun cross in CCIP mode by selecting YES. AMMO MFG (Ammunition Manufacturer). and CM (Combat Mix). RNDS.     AUTO DATA DISP. The 30 mm gun submenu allows you to select parameters for the GAU-8A gun. If NO is selected. Select N to display in imperial values. ALLT and AVE. TAPES. the first data page will be Displayed and can be manually scrolled using the UFC ENT key. select the entry and press the ENTER button on the UFC. you can either set a fixed wing entry or a rotary wing entry (MAN-FXD or MAN-RTY). loaded. MIN ALT. you have the option to display briefing on the HUD the release data parameters. Not implemented. Save edits and return to main TEST menu. METRIC. Return to the main TEST menu. Like the pre-sets. When a weapon is released. Options include:        AMMO TYPE (Ammunition type).
DISPLAY MODES.

Set GPS delta altitude. Options are TRUE (true airspeed). Save entered data.500 feet AGL.

  
MAINTENANCE. When enabled to Y. The MAINTENANCE submenu is used to verify software version. Select either GPS or RDR (radar) to set delta calibration for. Enable ability to manually set HUD symbology boresight on HUD. RT BORESIGHT.
GCAS TRAINING. Return to main TEST menu. If BORESIGHT is set to Y. UP BORESIGHT.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 RDRALT TAPE. The DELTA CAL submenu allows verification of and adjustments to the delta calibration data. the tape is removed. The tape ranges from 0 feet at the bottom to 1.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 359
.500 feet at the top. Select Y to display a vertical velocity scale on the left side of the HUD. When above 1. VERT VEL. No function. BORESIGHT. EXIT. AIRSPEED. CHK SUM.       SW VERSION. Selecting this line allows you to cycle between how airspeed is displayed on the HUD. Set GPS MSL altitude. Set radar altitude delta. verify software integrity with a software checksum. If BORESIGHT is set to Y. STORE. SELECTED MODE.  RDR DELTA ALT. EXIT. The small horizontal line on the tape indicates the set Altitude Alert Floor setting. Set radar altitude shifted to MSL.       RDR MSL CAL. GPS MSL CAL. Indicates the Operational Flight Program (OFP) that the aircraft is using. Maintenance adjustments must be done on the ground. MACH/IAS (MACH and indicated airspeed). CANCEL. GPS DELTA ALT. IFF ALERT. Cancel entered data and exit to main TEST menu. The GCAS TRAINING mode allows the selection and storage of a false ground plane for GCAS training. and IAS (indicated airspeed). and allow ±15 mils maintenance boresight adjustments to align all dynamic symbols on the HUD. this value can be adjusted right. Return to main TEST menu. The Checksum (CHK SUM) is a fixed-size data computed from an arbitrary block of digital data for the purpose of detection errors. this value can be adjusted up.
DELTA CAL. a vertical tape is displayed that indicates the aircraft’s radar altitude. GS (ground speed).

an arrowhead is displayed at the end of the horizontal line that points toward the computed TVV position.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
NA V H U D
9 1
2
13
8
12
10
6
5
7
19
14
11
15
20
16
3
17
4
18
Figure 264. The flight path ladder consists of three or four ladder lines that indicate the aircraft flight path angle over a range of ±90º. The TVV consists of a circle with three lines extending outward from the circumference at the 12. Dashed lines indicate negative flight path angles. The TVV indicates the aircraft inertial velocity vector. The flight path ladder also indicates aircraft roll angles of 0º .
EAGLE DYNAMICS 361
. 3. the gun cross will occult
2. The ladder lines are labeled in 5º increments of flight path angle and have tabs at each end pointing toward the horizon line. The ladder is a tape scale without minor increment marks that moves past the TVV and uses the entire FOV of the HUD for display. Basic Navigation HUD Symbology 1. Flight Path Ladder. and 9 o’clock positions. and solid lines indicate positive flight path angles. At the horizontal limit in the HUD. In CCIP mode.360º by rotating around the TVV. Total Velocity Vector (TVV). You would most often see this in windy conditions.

Individual. G-Meter. It indicates the desired magnetic heading to the selected steerpoint. The altitude display is in feet and is displayed up to 5 digits. Airspeed is displayed as a 3-digit numeric. Airspeed. the display is the uncorrected CADC barometric altitude. the desired heading numeric and an arrow are displayed on the side of the shortest turn to the desired magnetic heading. momentary depressions of the rocker switch move the applicable pipper up or down one milliradian. and non-standard pressures. and ranges from +9. If the desired heading is off the scale. the displayed value is clamped at the limit. The airspeed numeric will flash when the master caution light is activated. The G value is displayed to the nearest tenth of a G. A minus sign is displayed for negative values.9 G’s. CCIP.
8. 3. The DEPR rocker switch on the UFC enables the depressible pipper/reticle o be manually depressed over a range of +10 to -300 mils referenced to Zero Sight Line (ZSL). If the aircraft load factor exceeds this limit. Depressible Pipper. and positive values are unsigned.
362 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. and a 2-digit label is provided at each 10º interval. The Digital G Meter provides a HUD indication of aircraft load factor and is displayed at a fixed point in the top left corner of the HUD. The flight path angle has a range of -90º to +90º. A ―T‖ is displayed to the right of the displayed value for true airspeed.9 to -9. Display options are changed from indicated to true to ground via the IFFCC Test menu. The flight path angle is displayed below the altitude numeric. Each mark on the tape represents 5º of magnetic heading. a ―G‖ for ground speed. and CCRP Modes. The circle consists of eight equally spaced dashes and gaps. The airspeed range is 50 to 500 knots. Desired Magnetic Heading.
9. A fixed index pointer indicates the magnetic heading. The Depressible Pipper/Reticle is a dot at the center of a dashed circle. or no letter for indicated airspeed. The power-on default is indicated airspeed.
7. Heading Tape / Scratchpad. the pipper can be positioned vertically from +10 to -300 mils with respect to the zero sight line. The displayed altitude in these modes should be the same as the cockpit altimeter. 4. non-standard temperatures. the scratchpad appears in this area and replaces the heading tape and desired magnetic heading. The barometric altitude range is -2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
the Total Velocity Vector if Y is selected for CCIP GUN OCCULT in the DISPLAY MODES submenu. When text or numeric data is entered on the UFC or CDU. The heading tape scale is a tape of increment marks and numerics indicating magnetic heading. Using the manual depression control on the UFC. Flight Path Angle.000 to 38. 6. The desired magnetic heading is displayed as 2 vertical lines under the tape at the magnetic heading. Barometric Altitude.000 feet and is displayed to the nearest 10 feet. In NAV and Air-to-Air modes.
5. the displayed altitude is corrected by LASTE for installation errors. and it is fixed horizontally on the HUD center line and not wind-corrected. In GUNS.

the TDC will attempt to compute a position on the ground (latitude. this command will attempt to ground stabilize the TDC. The following HOTAS functions apply when HUD is SOI:  Ground Stabilize (TMS Forward Short). 10. Initially. the TDC is clamped to the HUD FOV and horizontally stabilized to the TVV. If unsuccessful (location > 13nm away). the TDC remains ground stabilized at its current location. Ground stabilize happens automatically after slewing as long as a position on the ground can be calculated. The PAVE-PENNY Cue Index is displayed as a dotted line extending from the TVV to the TISL Spider when the Spider is outside the HUD FOV. Make SPI (TMS Forward Long). If successful. This will make the current TDC location the SPI. the TDC cannot become the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI). When slew is released. Create Markpoint at TDC line of sight intersection point with ground. if unsuccessful.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
The mil depression of the depressible pipper is displayed over the HUD displayed FOM values while adjusting the pipper and for 3 seconds afterward. If the position is outside the HUD FOV and outside of 60 degrees of the aircraft nose. while the TDC is still caged within the TVV. the TDC will appear caged within the TVV. The TDC remains slaved until the SPI changes or until the HUD becomes SOI and the Slew Control switch is used to move the TDC. If successful. When the position designated by a ground stabilized TDC is outside the HUD FOV. Markpoint (TMS Right Short). commanding slave to SPI will slave the TDC to the position of the current SPI. Recages the TDC to TVV. the TDC will again attempt to establish a position on the ground. additionally. If successful. In this condition. the TDC will ground stabilize on that point.

  
11. Reset SPI (TMS Aft Long). the TDC symbol is clamped to the HUD FOV on the appropriate side of the HUD. The TDC can then be slewed to any location within the HUD Field of View (FOV). If unsuccessful (location > 13nm away) an ―X‖ will be drawn over the TDC and the TDC will be HUD stabilized with an ―X‖ indicating an invalid designation. If unsuccessful (location > 13nm away) an ―X‖ will be drawn over the TDC and the TDC will be HUD stabilized with an ―X‖ indicating an invalid designation. the TDC will ground stabilize on that point. Target Designation Cue (TDC). The TDC is always displayed when the HUD is the Sensor of Interest (SOI). the TDC will ground stabilize and become the SPI. Even if HUD is not SOI. If TMS Forward Long is selected while the TDC is HUD stabilized with an ―X‖ drawn over it. the TDC will remain HUD stabilized. with an ―X‖ drawn over the TDC. with an ―X‖ drawn over the TDC and the TDC will not be made SPI. the TDC will remain HUD stabilized. This only functions with a valid TDC (no ―X‖ indication). the SPI will change to default for the current HUD Mode. longitude and elevation). Recage (China Hat Aft Short). the TDC will attempt to establish a position on the ground. If successful. If TMS Forward Short is selected while the TDC is HUD stabilized with an ―X‖ drawn over it. When the SPI is reset (HUD Mode or Steerpoint). but within 60 degrees of the aircraft nose. the TDC will ground stabilize. The
EAGLE DYNAMICS 363
. Pave-Penny Cue Index. If the TDC was the SPI.

The Steerpoint Distance-to-Go Numeric shows the ground distance to the current steerpoint. The steerpoint number consists of up to four characters. In addition to the TTG/TOT functionality. 17.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
dotted line is removed once the target enters the HUD FOV. Destination Index (Tadpole). 14. select HACK from the UFC and use the keypad to
364 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. The second line displays two items separated by a slash (/):   Magnetic bearing from the Anchor Point to the aircraft (3 characters from 001 to 360). this field also serves to display the Hack time. It is displayed when the selected steerpoint is outside the HUD FOV and the steerpoint is not the current SPI. To do so. The first line displays the Waypoint ID of the selected Anchor Point. Current Time / HACK. Time to Go (TTG) and Time on Target Delta (TOT). If no Anchor Point is selected. These values are used when a set Time On Target (TOT) is created in the CDU and it allows you to better reach your target steerpoint on time. Ground range from the aircraft to the Anchor Point. This indicates the time in hours:minutes:seconds in regards to GMT. a decimal point and a tenths digit are displayed. the PAVE-PENNY Cue Index appears for 2 seconds and then removed. The destination index is a circle with a double radial line (strobe) extending out from the circumference. 18. no HUD Anchor Point is displayed.‖ 15. The display consists of up to a 4-digit number followed by ―M‖. Radar Altitude. and all Markpoints are designated A–Z. the display is ―XXXXR. Steerpoint Number and ID. All Mission waypoints are designated 0–50. The steerpoint database number and ID are displayed at a fixed position on the lower right side of the HUD FOV. The delta value can be negative or positive. The TTG indicates the estimated time it will take to reach the steerpoint and the TOT estimates the time difference between when you will reach the steerpoint and the TTG. If the tadpole is not clamped to the HUD FOV limit. as provided by the CDU. Anchor Point Display. when the distance-to-go is less than 10. Anchor Point data is displayed in the upper right corner of the HUD anytime an Anchor Point is selected from the Navigation Mode Select Panel. The radar altitude numerics consist of 4 digits followed by an ―R‖ and are located on the lower right of the HUD below the altitude. the position of the tadpole represents the relative bearing to the selected steerpoint. all Navigation waypoints are designated 51–2050. If the Radar Altitude is invalid or above 5000’ AGL. 16. Hack time is a handy way for you to input a time duration on the UFC and then have that time countdown in this field.
13. The numerics display altitude to the nearest 10 feet. If the TISL Spider is within the HUD FOV when lock on occurs. The strobe indicates relative bearing to the selected steerpoint over a range of 0-360 relative to the 12 o’clock position. The HUD Anchor Point display has two lines. The selected Steerpoint ID consists of up to 12 alphanumeric characters. The second half of the line indicates the target elevation at the location of the CCRP reticle. Steerpoint Distance to Go and Target Elevation. The HUD Anchor Point display indicates the position of the aircraft relative to the preselected Anchor Point (selected via the CDU Anchor Page). The purpose of the index is to provide a method for acquiring the TISL Spider and distinguishing it from the TD Box during maneuvering. 12.

you enable the HUD for exclusive use of the gun with multiple gun aiming sights. 20. When complete. Gun HUD Symbology
EAGLE DYNAMICS 365
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
enter a time duration in minutes:seconds (XX:XX). This field displays the DTSAS mode and FOM message as set on the EGI CDU. this numeric below the airspeed will indicate the airspeed you need to be flying at to reach your steerpoint at the defined time. To return to current GMT time. press the HACK button again. press the UFC ENTER button and the inputted time will appear in this field and begin counting down. DTSAS Mode and FOM Message. Symbology and functionality of this HUD includes:
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
Figure 265.
GU NS H UD
When selecting GUNS mode. When a Time on Target has been set. 19. This field can also display the airspeed Mach value when the IAS/MACH airspeed option is selected from the IFFCC Test Menu. Required Airspeed.

A Gun Minimum Range Cue (MRC) is a triangle used to calculate a minimum recovery altitude using the minimum altitude from IFFCC 30 MM IFFCC Test Submenu setting. 6.9. Gun CCIP Reticle An Analog Range Bar extends around the inside of the reticle clockwise from the 12 o’clock position to a clock position that indicates the range (to the CCIP) in thousands of feet (for example. This cross represents the longitudinal axis of the 30 mm gun. The 2-digit numeric displays the Range in nautical miles beginning at 0. CCIP Gun Reticle. you may cycle between four different gunsights. and the reticle will be clamped at a maximum range solution.000 feet. Radial hash marks extend outward from the reticle at the 3. These can be cycled using DMS Left or Right Short when the HUD is SOI. no range numeric will be shown. 9.000 feet (12 o’clock position).1 and increasing to 9. the range bar is clamped at 12. 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1. An ―X‖ in the middle of the reticle indicates no solution due to lack of an altitude source or the solution is below HUD FOV. The CCIP gun reticle consists of a pipper centered in a reticle. The Moving Target Indices are roll stabilized such that an imaginary line between the vertical lines passing through the pipper remains parallel to the horizon. the analog range bar will not be present. It will still be roll stabilized and wind-corrected. For ranges greater than 12. The reticle contains Moving Target Indices that consist of vertical lines on either side of the pipper. In this case.000 feet). Gun Bore Line (GBL) Cross. 5 o’clock = 5. The numeric then changes to an integer beginning at 10 and increasing to 99.
366 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. A tick marks the end of the analog range bar. The position represents the lead required for a target moving at 20 knots perpendicular to the LOS.
Minimum Range Cue
Pipper
Analog Range Bar Moving Target Index Range
Figure 266. and 12 o’clock positions. When in GUNS mode.

An ―X‖ in the middle of the cross indicates no solution due to lack of an altitude source or the solution is below HUD FOV.9. The numeric then changes to an integer beginning at 10 and increasing to 99. A Gun Minimum Range Cue (MRC) is a side triangle used to calculate a minimum recovery altitude using the minimum altitude from IFFCC 30 MM Submenu. the horizontal bar will not be present. using more compact symbology. A 2-digit numeric displays the range in nautical miles beginning at 0. This caret also provides the time-to-go indication before aircraft recovery from the gun pass must begin.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 367
. no range numeric will be shown.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
a) Clamped at 5 seconds or more above minimum recovery altitude
b) Aircraft <5 seconds above the minimum recovery altitude
c) Aircraft at the minimum recovery altitude
b) Aircraft <5 seconds below the minimum recovery altitude
a) Clamped at 5 seconds or more below minimum recovery altitude
The three other gunsights include: CCIP Gun Cross
The CCIP gun cross displays the same computed impact point as the CCIP gun reticle. In this case. It will still be roll stabilized and wind-corrected.1 and increasing to 9. and the cross will be clamped at a maximum range solution.

if SAFE or TRAIN are selected on the AHCP. these are also indicated on the HUD field. Round Type and Remaining Number. This image shows an example of the field in HACK mode. The remaining rounds decrement in increments of 10. Current Time / HACK. This image shows an example of the field in Scratchpad mode. Heading Tape / Scratchpad. Weapon Status Indicator. This field is set according the position of the Master Arm switch on the AHCP.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
3. Bullets at Target Altitude (BATA) Circle. 7. When set to ARM.
4.
5. However. This small circle on the HUD is calculated using CCIP gun ballistics and represents the estimated impact of gun rounds based on time of flight. HEI or CM) and the number of rounds remaining.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 369
.
6. This field indicates the type of gun round loaded (TP. ARM is indicated in the field.

There are three main ways to release a weapon using CCIP mode and they depend on the setting of the CCIP Consent Option IFFCC Menu item. you are provided symbology and functions to deliver unguided bombs. rockets and the Maverick. For unguided bombs and rockets.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
C C IP H U D
When in the CCIP master mode. CCIP HUD
370 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. you have the option of manual release and Consent to Release (CR). Manual Release (MAN REL) Bombing Mode
11
1
3
2 10
4 9
8 12
7
6
5
Figure 267. They are Manual Release. and 5 Mil Release. 3/9 Release. Bombs CCIP mode is perhaps the most intuitive means to put a bomb on target and mostly involves placing the ―death dot‖ of the CCIP bombing reticle over the target and releasing the bomb… put the thing on the thing.

If the MRS falls down the PBIL and reaches the CCIP bomb reticle. The CCIP bombing reticle consists of a pipper centered in a reticle. Desired Release Cue (DRC). If the aircraft is maneuvered to track the target down the PBIL. 6. 3. The DRC may be below the MRS during instances when the aircraft flight parameters vary widely from the desired weapons event. CCIP Bomb Reticle. the CCIP reticle should always be below the MRS. Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL).
4. G-load. This staple on the PBIL indicates the set minimum escape range of the selected profile as set in DSMS. the DRC indicates the release point. An X is displayed over the DRC when current parameters indicate the CCIP will not appear on the HUD prior to desired time of fall. For ripple deliveries.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1. The DRC is a small line on the PBIL and represents the desired time of fall as entered in the DSMS weapon profile (DES TOF). This staple will indicate the minimum release range according to altitude (MIN ALT). fuze setting. The aircraft should be maneuvered to place the DRC on the target. and the CCIP will be coincident with the target just as the weapon time of fall matches the menu entry. The PBIL is displayed as a line directed outward from the center of the CCIP Reticle. the DRC will move down the PBIL at the same rate as the actual target. the pipper can be guided directly to the target even at high bank angles. 2. and 12 o’clock positions. If an even number of bombs are selected the center bombs will bracket the target. DRC will not be displayed until aircraft flight path is -3 degrees and below. If the DRC is on the target. 9. and a constant bank angle and load factor are maintained. This will most likely occur when the dive angle is much greater than the planned event. the bomb stick will fall along the PBIL and the displayed CCIP solution is for the center of the bomb stick length. so that the middle bomb of a stick falls at the point of desired impact. It is based upon the assumption that the aircraft will maintain present airspeed. a large X will be displayed in the center of the reticle to indicate an invalid release. Radial hash marks extend outward from the reticle at the 3. Be mindful of erratic roll changes in CCIP or the PBIL can move from side to side on the HUD in a ―windshield wiper effect‖. and bank angle. If a ripple release is selected. or Height Of Function (HOF) for cluster bombs. Minimum Range Staple (MRS).
Pipper
Analog Range Bar
Minimum Range Caret (MRC)
EAGLE DYNAMICS 371
. The DRC serves as a guide in setting up proper aim off distance for the subsequent delivery. The PBIL is a linear prediction of where the CCIP will track across the ground. In order to release the weapon above the minimum set altitude.

and ARM. Weapon Status Indicator. This gives you the option of wings-level bombing and toss bombing depending on the attitude of the aircraft at weapon release. Once the weapon has been released. Display Airspeed option is set to MACH/IAS. but with the following changes: Pre-Designate. TRAIN. When the IFFCC Test Menu. Selected Stations. This caret will indicate the minimum release range according to altitude (MIN ALT). 5 o’clock = 5. or Height Of Function (HOF) for cluster bombs. The only difference between the two is how accurately you must have the pipper pass through the solution cue to release the bomb. 8. After reaching 0. When in Manual release mode. 3/9 and 5 MIL. This field is set according to the position of the Master Arm switch on the AHCP. Name of the active profile. Minimum Range Caret (MRC). the numeric will flash. the weapon stations with the associated profile store are indicated in this field as a number string. Much of the HUD remains the same as the Manual Release mode. this numeric will count down in seconds until weapon impact at time 0. or SAFE will be indicated on the HUD field accordingly. Release Mode.
372 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Mach Airspeed Indication. Selected weapon release mode. The advantage of using CR is that you may designate a target point and then pull-up and release the bomb in a non-diving attack. An ―X‖ in the middle of the reticle indicates the aircraft is below the set Minimum Range (MRS/MRC) altitude.
10. Manual release is selected by default but can be changed in the IFFCC Test Menu.000 feet).
7.000 feet. This is how the HUD will generally look in CCIP CR bombing mode prior to designating the target point. In addition to the CCIP bombing reticle. Note that you can create multiple profiles for the same weapon type with different release parameters. this field will indicate MAN REL. 5. CCIP Bombing Reticle An Analog Range Bar extends around the inside of the reticle clockwise from the 12 o’clock position to a clock position that indicates the range (to the CCIP) in thousands of feet (for example. CCIP Consent menu between OFF (Manual). the range bar is clamped at 12. the CCIP gun cross is also displayed and acts as described in the GUNS Mode section of this chapter.
6. Time-Of-Fall Display. When a profile is selected. Profile Name.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 268. 4. CCIP Gun Cross.000 feet (12 o’clock position). 12. This caret placed on the analog range bar indicates the set minimum escape range of the selected profile. 11. For ranges greater than 12. fuze setting. the Mach number will be displayed in this field. 7 and 5. 3/9 Release and 5 Mil Consent to Release (CR) Bombing Modes Both the 3/9 and 5 Mil options use what is termed Consent to Release (CR). A tick marks the end of the analog range bar.
9. For example: 8475 indicates that bombs are hung on weapon stations 8.

CCIP CR HUD. The PBIL is a linear prediction of where the CCIP will track across the ground. you can use the center pipper to designate the target spot for a CR delivery.
2. If a ripple release is selected. it will be dashed like the PBIL. the pipper can be guided directly to the target even at high bank angles. However. maneuver the aircraft to place the pipper over the target and then hold down the weapon release button.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 373
. Pre-Designate HUD 1.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1
4
2 3
Figure 269. and bank angle. This will put the HUD into the post-designate mode. It is based upon the assumption that the aircraft will maintain present airspeed. CCIP Bomb Reticle. The PBIL is a dashed line because the CCIP Bomb Reticle is outside of the HUD FOV. If the aircraft is maneuvered to track the target down the PBIL. The PBIL is displayed as a line directed outward from the center of the CCIP Reticle. G-load. Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL). and changes to a solid line when the CCIP Bomb Reticle enters the HUD FOV. To do so. with the CCIP Bomb Reticle clamped to the bottom of the HUD FOV. When the CCIP reticle is outside the HUD FOV. the bomb stick will fall along the PBIL and the displayed CCIP solution is for the center of the bomb stick length.

374 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Designate HUD 1. CCIP Consent menu. Pre-designate TTRN. With the target designated. CCIP CR HUD.
Post-Designate. This will indicate either 3/9 or 5 MIL when you select one of these two CR modes from the IFFCC Test Menu.
4
5
1 2
3
Figure 270. Selected weapon release mode.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
3. Release Mode.
4. the PBIL will turn from dashed to solid. This is how the HUD will generally look in CCIP CR bombing mode after designating the target point by placing the pipper over the target and then holding down the weapon release button. Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL). The Time To Release Numeric (TTRN) in the CCIP bomb reticle indicates the time in seconds it would take to release the bomb in post-designate mode if you were to designate the location under the pipper now.

While still holding down the weapon release button. an X will be drawn in the solution cue to indicate an invalid release condition.
Pipper
Analog Range Bar Minimum Range Caret (MRC)
Figure 271. the ASL will appear on the HUD and provide you azimuth steering towards the designated target. This is a 5 mil circle with a dot in the center placed on the ASL and indicates when the weapon will be released. If done correctly and still holding down the weapon release button. the weapon will drop automatically on the designated target location. Once you have designated the target. Solution Cue. Below is an example of a successful 5 MIL CR with the solution cue and CCIP bomb pipper overlaid correctly.000 feet). the range bar is clamped at 12. the CCIP bomb reticle will turn from dashed to solid and provide additional information.000 feet (12 o’clock position). 4. For ranges greater than 12. you must maneuver the aircraft to place the CCIP bomb reticle pipper inside the solution cue (5 Mil) or place the solution cue anywhere within the CCIP bomb reticle (3/9). A tick marks the end of the analog range bar. 3.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 375
. Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). CCIP CR Reticle An Analog Range Bar extends around the inside of the reticle clockwise from the 12 o’clock position to a clock position that indicates the range (to the CCIP) in thousands of feet (for example. An ―X‖ in the middle of the reticle indicates the aircraft is below the set Minimum Range (MRS/MRC) altitude. If the azimuth steering error becomes too great. Once designated.000 feet. 5 o’clock = 5.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
2. CCIP Bomb Reticle.

376 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the weapon release process will be cancelled. CCIP CR Release Sight Picture 5. If you release the weapon release button early.
For further details regarding CCIP Bomb delivery. please consult the Combat Employment chapter. Time To Release Numeric (TTRN). The TTRN is a timer that counts down in seconds to the moment of weapon release.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 272.

For further details regarding CCIP rocket delivery. please consult the Combat Employment chapter.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 377
. Below the reticle are two text fields.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Rockets Launching unguided rockets in CCIP uses a combination of GUNS and CCIP bomb functions. The top field always displays RKT (rocket) and the lower field indicates the slant range along the pipper line of sight.
1
Figure 273. Rocket CCIP Reticle. CCIP Rocket HUD 1. When in CCIP mode. rockets can only be fired in Manual release mode and not in CR mode. This CCIP reticle is much like the Guns CCIP reticle but minus the Gun Minimum Range Cue (MRC) and Moving Target Indices.

the reticle will be clamped to the side of the HUD in the direction of the line of sight point and flashing.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Maverick In conjunction with the MFCD Maverick page. an X will be overlaid on the reticle and a launch will be inhibited.
2
4 1 5
3
6
7
Figure 274. Maverick Reticle. This tick mark at the top of the DLZ staple represents the Maverick’s maximum range. CCIP Maverick HUD 1. It is fixed at 15 nm.
2. the CCIP Maverick HUD mode provides cuing for all versions of the AGM-65. When line of sight range is less than the minimum range. The Maverick ―Wagon Wheel‖ reticle displays the missile’s line of sight and will match the Maverick video displayed on the Maverick MFCD page.
378 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Much of the Maverick HUD uses symbology of other CCIP HUD modes with the exception of the Dynamic Launch Zone (DLZ) and Maverick reticle. Below the reticle is displayed the line of sight range. When the Maverick is slewed or locked to a target outside the HUD field of view. Upper Tick Mark.

This tick mark at the bottom of the DLZ staple represents the Maverick’s minimum range. the station number that the active Maverick is loaded on will be displayed on the left side of this field. DLZ Range Staple.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
3. When the Target Range Caret reaches this tick. All Mavericks of the selected profile have been expended. The Target Range Caret will move vertically along the staple to indicate range and range will be dynamic according to factors such as altitude and airspeed. There are three possibilities:    ALN. The Maverick is in the process of its three minute gyro alignment. When a Maverick has been locked onto a target. please consult the Combat Employment chapter and Maverick Chapter. RDY. On the right side of the field the status of the Maverick is displayed. the Maverick Reticle will have an X overlaid.
7. The Dynamic Launch Zone (DLZ) staple displays the dynamic inner portion of the launch zone. This caret and range numeric to the left moves vertically up and down the DLZ and indicates slant range from the aircraft to the line of sight point of the Maverick.
6. Target Range Caret and Numeric. the Time of Flight counter will appear at the bottom of the DLZ and will count down in seconds to estimated missile impact. Weapon Status.
4. Once the Maverick has been launched. EMPTY. After reaching 0. The DLZ will be visible as long as the active Maverick is locked to a target within 30-degrees off the nose of the aircraft.
For further details regarding Maverick delivery and background. Lower Tick Mark. Missile Time of Flight.
5. the numeric will flash.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 379
. The Maverick has been aligned and ready for use.

CCRP HUD
380 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the release mode will only allow 3/9 mode. When releasing laser-guided bombs. Unlike CCIP. the Continuously Calculated Release Point (CCRP) mode allows you to set an aimpoint other than placing the pipper directly on the target first. In addition to releasing free-fall bombs and illumination flares.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
C C RP H UD
Unlike CCIP manual and CR modes. For example: using the TDC. TGP or Maverick you can create a SPI and use CCRP mode to drop a bomb or rocket on the designated SPI-located target. CCRP can also be used to deliver rockets in a lofting manner.
7 1
6
2
4
8
3
5 13
12
11
10
9
Figure 275. Much of the CCRP symbolgy is identical to CCIP in CR mode but you will generally have much longer TTRN times. depending on the distance to the designated target SPI point. CCRP mode does not include the CCIP gun cross.

DRC will not be displayed until aircraft flight path is -3 degrees and below.
3. or Height Of Function (HOF) for cluster bombs. the CCRP reticle should always be below the MRS. the pipper can be guided directly to the target even at high bank angles. and the CCRP will be coincident with the target just as the weapon time of fall matches the menu entry. Minimum Range Staple (MRS). CCRP Reticle
EAGLE DYNAMICS 381
.
2. The DRC serves as a guide in setting up proper aim off distance for the subsequent delivery.
Pipper
Minimum Range Caret (MRC) Analog Range Bar
Figure 276. Desired Release Cue (DRC). The PBRL is displayed as a line directed outward from the center of the CCRP reticle. If a ripple release is selected. Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL). The PBRL is a linear prediction of where the CCRP will track across the ground. and bank angle.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
1. so that the middle bomb of a stick falls at the point of desired impact. the bomb stick will fall along the PBRL and the displayed CCRP solution is for the center of the bomb stick length. fuze setting. An X is displayed over the DRC when current parameters indicate the CCRP will not appear on the HUD prior to desired time of fall. The CCRP reticle acts much like the CCIP reticle but is used in conjunction with the Solution Cue to indicate the release point (CCRP bomb reticle and Solution Cue coincide). The DRC is a small line on the PBIL and represents the desired time of fall as entered in the DSMS weapon profile (DES TOF). It is based upon the assumption that the aircraft will maintain present airspeed. CCRP Bomb Reticle. a large X will be displayed in the center of the reticle to indicate an invalid release. This staple will indicate the minimum release range according to altitude (MIN ALT). If an even number of bombs are selected the center bombs will bracket the target. The DRC may be below the MRS during instances when the aircraft flight parameters vary widely from the desired weapons event. The aircraft should be maneuvered to place the DRC on the target. and a constant bank angle and load factor are maintained. If the aircraft is maneuvered to track the target down the PBRL. the DRC will move down the PBIL at the same rate as the actual target. This staple on the PBIL indicates the minimum escape range of the selected profile. G-load. If the MRS falls down the PBIL and reaches the CCRP bomb reticle. 4. For ripple deliveries. In order to release the weapon above the minimum set altitude. This will most likely occur when the dive angle is much greater than the planned event. the DRC indicates the release point. If the DRC is on the target.

5 o’clock = 5. or Height Of Function (HOF) for cluster bombs. Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). Solution Cue. If the azimuth steering error becomes too great though. Once you have designated the target.
382 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. This is a 5 mil circle with a dot in the center placed on the ASL and indicates when the weapon will be released. 7. the ASL will appear on the HUD and provide you azimuth steering directions towards the designated target. 5. If done correctly and still holding down the weapon release button. An ―X‖ in the middle of the reticle indicates the aircraft is below the set Minium Range (MRS/MRC) altitude.000 feet). fuze setting. This caret will indicate the minimum release range according to altitude (MIN ALT). Minimum Range Caret (MRC). Below is an example of a successful 5 MIL CR with the solution cue and CCRP bomb pipper overlaid correctly. For ranges greater than 12.000 feet. This caret placed on the analog range bar indicates the set minimum escape range of the selected profile. the weapon will drop automatically on the designated target location. you must maneuver the aircraft to place the CCRP bomb reticle pipper inside the solution cue (5 Mil) or place the solution cue anywhere within the CCRP bomb reticle (3/9). A tick marks the end of the analog range bar. While still holding down the weapon release button. the range bar is clamped at 12. an X will be drawn in the solution cue to indicate an invalid release condition.
6.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
An Analog Range Bar extends around the inside of the reticle clockwise from the 12 o’clock position to a clock position that indicates the range (to the CCRP) in thousands of feet (for example.000 feet (12 o’clock position).

the weapon stations with the profile store are indicated in this field as a number string. CCRP HUD Release Sight Picture 8. 4.
10. Time-Of-Fall Display. the numeric will flash. This field is set according to the position of the Master Arm switch on the AHCP. This will indicate either 3/9 or 5 MIL when you select one of these two CR modes from the IFFCC Test. Release Mode. Selected Stations. When a profile is selected. Weapon Status Indicator. TRAIN.
9. 13. Once the weapon has been released. Note that you can create multiple profiles for the same weapon type with different release parameters. Name of the active profile. Time To Release Numeric (TTRN). Profile Name.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 277. or SAFE will be indicated on the HUD field accordingly. this numeric will count down in seconds until weapon impact at time 0. The TTRN is a timer that counts down in seconds to the moment of weapon release.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 383
. After reaching 0. If you release the weapon release button early. For example: 8402 indicates that bombs are hung on weapon stations 8. Selected weapon release mode. CCIP Consent menu. the weapon release process will be cancelled. 12. and ARM. 11. 10 and 2.

CCRP IAM HUD 1. you need to fly the aircraft to align the reticle over the ASL line.
2. the CCRP HUD will display a sub-version that allows you to release IAM weapons such as Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM) GBU-31 and GBU-38 and CBU-103 Wind Corrected Munition Dispenser (WCMD).and INSguidance to accurately hit their targets and require no guidance support from the aircraft once they are dropped.
384 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. CCRP Reticle. this vertical line is centered on the heading you need to fly to reach the SPI.
1
2
4
3
5
Figure 278. In the CCRP IAM submode. the reticle remains ―attached‖ below the TVV and moves with the TVV according to aircraft maneuvering. As with the standard CCRP ASL.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
C C RP I n er t ial Ai d ed Mu n i ti o n ( IA M) H U D
When an IAM weapon profile has been called up. Azimuth Steering Line (ASL). unlike the standard CCRP ASL. IAM weapons target the SPI. In order to deliver an IAM weapon. there is no solution cue. These weapons rely on GPS. However.

Aircraft altitude and speed will determine the maximum range of the weapon. Maximum Range Caret. please refer to the Combat Employment chapter here and here. Within the reticle is the minimum range caret. This indicates the maximum range at which you may release the IAM weapon and still hit the target / SPI location. When in range. Minimum Range Caret. Release Cue.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 385
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
3. you may release the weapon. MAN REL is displayed in the weapon status field on the HUD. This indicates the minimum range at which you may release the weapon and still hit the target. Within the reticle is the maximum range caret. Within the reticle is a line that indicates the weapon release cue. Aircraft altitude and speed will determine the maximum range of the weapon.
5.
For more details on CCRP bomb delivery. When the line is between the minimum and maximum range carets.
4.

you hold down the Master Mode Button to bring up the air-to-air HUD. Air-to-Air HUD Symbology 1. The FEDS display consists of 2 electronic tracer streams separated by target wingspan. unique components of the air-to-air HUD include the gun funnel and the AIM-9 seeker reticle. CCIP and CCRP which you access by cycling the Master Mode Button. The FEDS algorithm is inhibited while LAAP is engaged. FEDS projects out to a 2 second TOF.to -Ai r H UD
For air-to-air combat in the A-10C you can employ both the 30 mm cannon and the AIM-9M Sidewinder air-to-air missile with unique HUD symbology. The streams are displayed when the gun trigger is depressed to the second detent with the Master ARM in TRAIN and it continues as long as the trigger is depressed. Firing Evaluation Display System (FEDS). The two primary.
5 6 2
4
1
3
Figure 279.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Air . GUNS.
386 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. Unlike NAV.

Whenever aircraft flight parameters change. As this occurs. the funnel will move and shift as the IFFCC calculates and displays new targeting solutions.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
2. This results in placing the target higher in the HUD or. and requires extra lead. The size and depression of the MRGS is determined by the fuselage length and airspeed data entered into the IFFCC AAS submenu. The AMIL display is a vertical line which represents the lead angle due to trajectory shift and gravity drop of rounds from close range out to approximately 2 seconds time of flight. The funnel display uses stadiametric ranging based on preset target wingspan set in the IFFCC menu Air-to-Air Submenu (AAS) page. The MRGS is used by positioning the target parallel to one of the lines. the target is moving slower than anticipated and will require less lead. commands the seeker back to boresight. Multiple Reference Gunsight (MRGS). When using an MRGS line. the target size will increase. it is either out of range or moving faster than anticipated. The AIM-9 is employed by slewing the HUD AIM-9 symbol over a target or by maneuvering the aircraft to line up the target with the AIM-9 symbol.
3. The top of the AMIL shows where the bullets will be just after the firing burst and the distance they will fall towards the earth after 2 seconds due to deceleration and gravity drop. The MRGS sight is composed of a series of 5 line segments pointing toward the Gun Bore Line. The length of each line represents the preset target length and is used as a reference for target ranging. closer to the GBL which results in reduced lead for the reduced range. The lines are spaced at a distance from the GBL corresponding to ½ the input target velocity. If the target is larger than the MRGS line. Repeated presses toggle between scan mode and circular scan/consent to self track. you must place the target higher in the funnel in order to keep the target wingspan just touching the sides of the funnel. the attacker and target are co-airspeed. pointing towards the GBL cross and the surface of the earth. The IFFCC computer assumes the actual target wingspan is exactly what has been entered into the AAS submenu. As the range decreases. If the missile detects sufficient IR energy from the target. if the target is smaller than the line. The AMIL is displayed toward the top of the HUD.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 387
. The AIM-9 seeker circle is a small circle that indicates the position of the AIM-9 seeker head. Funnel Gunsight. and spaced in an arc near the bottom of the HUD. MRGS lines continually collapse to the aircraft plane of motion. Breaklock (TMS Aft Short): If the seeker is uncaged (whether tracking or not tracking a target). which activates a circular scan pattern and automatically grants tracking if a target of sufficient IR energy is detected. Air Mass Impact Line (AMIL). AIM-9 Seeker Reticle. it disappears and a new line is placed on the outside of the arc. As each line reaches the plane of motion. and the target angular tracking rate through the HUD is zero. 4. target detection is indicated by an audio missile detection tone (growling sound) and the symbol latches to the target. more importantly. The multiple lines represent multiple solutions for a target. 5. The next depression commands circular scan and consent to self track. The following HOTAS functions apply when HUD is SOI in Air-to-Air Mode with AIM-9 selected:  Track (TMS Forward Short): The first depression enters scan mode which allows AIM9 slewing.

Weapons Release (Weapon Release Button). This cross indicates the boresight line of sight of the longitudinal axis of the 30 mm gun. otherwise the seeker will start to drift and will need to be recaged. Fires AIM-9. If another AIM-9 is available and ready. Slave to TGP (China Hat Forward Long): Slaves missile to the TGP line of sight.
Gun Bore Line (GBL) Cross. This is a useful function to confirm a good lock.
388 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. This is a useful function when you have locked an air target in TGP air-to-air mode and want to slew the AIM-9 seeker to that target. please reference the Combat Employment chapter. a new seeker reappears after the first shot. If all missiles are rejected. the system will return them all to active status. Missile Reject (China Hat Aft Short): First HOTAS Reject command will recage the missile to boresight. Uncage Missile (China Hat Forward Short): Commands missile track if the seeker is caged.



6.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
  Slew (Slew Control): Slews the AIM-9 seeker.
For more details on air-to-air HUD. AIM-9 has consent to track target. The seeker will track if IR intensity is strong enough. Subsequent HOTAS Reject takes the missile out of service. AIM-9 seeker disappears after shot. When slew is released.

TAD cursor. If there symbol were a diamond. it is reversed. The active SPI point is indicated by a line extending from either the Total Velocity Vector (TVV) or line of sight symbol.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
SPI and Hookship Symbols
S P I H UD S y m b ols
At all times there will be a SPI.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 389
. The SPI point will be clamped to the side of the HUD nearest the direction of travel and the bearing towards the SPI will be marked above the symbol and the range to the SPI below the symbol. By default it will be your steerpoint. but you can also manually set it by use of the TDC. The symbol that is attached to the SPI line will depend on the sensor that was used to designate the SPI. a line will extend from the SPI point towards the TVV. gun reticle or Maverick LOS. The SPI symbology on the HUD helps you locate the SPI and bring it into your HUD field of view. TGP. For example: below is a case of the TDC designating the SPI. it would indicate the TGP set the SPI. when the SPI point lays outside the HUD field of view. When the SPI location is inside the HUD field of view. TDC as SPI within HUD FOV However.
Total Velocity Vector (TVV)
SPI Line
Figure 280. The SPI line will extend from the TVV towards the direction of the SPI point.

If the Hooked object is
390 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. a dashed box is displayed.7 nm away.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
SPI Line
TDC as SPI
Figure 281. At the location of the hooked symbol (may be a static location or attached to a moving unit). TDC as SPI outside HUD FOV In the above case. This hooks the symbol on the TAD but also on the HUD. you may hook a TAD symbol (object) with a TMS Forward Short command.
H o okS hi p H UD S y m b ols
Using the TAD. the SPI was set by the TGP and is 50 degrees to the right and 2.
SPI line attached to TVV
TGP diamond as SPI
Figure 282. TGP as SPI outside HUD FOV In the above case. the SPI was set by the TDC and is 90 degrees to the left and 19 nm away.

it will be clamped to the side of the HUD. Hookship within HUD FOV By setting SPI and Hookship to different objects/locations.
HookShip Locator Lines
HookShip location
Figure 283. Hookship within HUD FOV and SPI outside HUD FOV
EAGLE DYNAMICS 391
. Additionally.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
outside the HUD field of view. two parallel. dashed lines will extend from the TVV towards the Hookship box. You can also first hook an object and then set it as SPI and have both SPI and Hookship symbols attached to the object. you can display both SPI and Hookship symbols on the HUD at the same time.
HookShip Locator Lines
HookShip location
SPI Line Attached to TVV
Figure 284.

―INVALID FUZING‖ will be displayed in the HUD when the aircraft descends below the set HOF. in order to warn of a potential CBU-87 or CBU-103 release below the FZU-39 HOF entered in the inventory settings for the weapon. and GBU-12 when the FMU-139LD is selected as the tail fuze. ―CCIP INVALID‖ is displayed and CCIP gun symbology is removed. selecting NOSE fuzing with Configuration set to Fixed High.
IN VAL ID F UZI NG
The ―INVALID FUZING‖ message is displayed on the HUD when an invalid combination of fuze and bomb data for the munition is selected for CCIP and CCRP modes. M257.

 
392 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. It will remain until the aircraft climbs above the set HOF. under present flight parameters and radar altitude. The Break-X flashes for 2 seconds and is provided under 2 conditions:   When the aircraft descends below 90’ AGL with the landing gear handle UP When the system determines that.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
HUD Messages
In addition to the standard symbols and messages discussed in this chapter. selecting TAIL fuzing only will cause ―INVALID FUZING‖ to be displayed until corrected in the weapons profile. an immediately initiated maximum performance roll to wings level and maximum performance pullout will just clear the ground
This symbology is accompanied by a ―PULL UP PULL UP‖ VMU Warning. MK-84LD. you may receive other messages in special circumstances. For MK-82AIR.
C C IP I NV AL I D
This will occur when shooting ―uphill‖ in a CCIP GUNS mode and DTSAS target elevation exceeds aircraft elevation. These include:
GC AS B re ak X
A Break-X symbol is positioned in the center of the HUD and overwrites all other symbology. For MK-82LD.  When utilizing the radar function of the FZU-39 (Tail Fuzing enabled). Valid CCIP gun symbology is restored (and the ―CCIP INVALID‖ removed in GUNS mode) when:    The DTSAS target elevation goes below aircraft elevation A valid CCIP gun solution has been available for 1 second afterward Switch to either the 4000-ft or 4/8/12 gunsights
US E C C RP
―USE CCRP‖ is displayed when illumination flares are selected (LUU. GBU-10. selecting TAIL fuzing with an FMU-139 fuze and any configuration other than Fixed High. M278) in CCIP mode. For MK-82AIR.

Displayed as unsigned 5-digit numeric. While the altitude alert numeric is displayed. the ―ALTITUDE‖ VMU Warning will be annunciated. Whenever the aircraft ascends through the MSL ceiling altitude. toggling the SEL switch on the UFC in either direction rotates through AGL FLOOR (default).
Additionally. and in increments of 100 feet from 500 to 5000 feet. Whenever the aircraft descends below the AGL or MSL floor altitude. 2 values will appear in the HUD:  The first value is the difference between the true MSL altitude and the CADC pressure altitude. Value range 0–5000 feet.‖ Valid range is -9999 to 9999 in 1-foot increments. while the corresponding altitude alert numeric is displayed.‖
Al ti t u d e Al er t Nu m e rics
There are 3 altitude alerts available:    AGL Floor. Defaults to 0 feet MSL. Defaults to 0 feet MSL.
De l ta Ra dar /E GI GP S A l ti t u de Nu m e rics
The Delta Altitude Numerics are displayed when the UFC ENT key is depressed and remain displayed for 10 seconds unless terminated by one of the following:    Actuation of any other switch on the UFC Selection of a different HUD display mode or option A second depression of the UFC ENT key
When the ENT button is pressed on the UFC. and in increments of 100 feet from 500 to 45000 feet. Defaults to 500 feet AGL. Value range 0–45000 feet. the ―CEILING‖ VMU Warning will be annunciated. Example: ―10000 MSL FLOOR‖ MSL Ceiling. While the altitude alert numeric is displayed. MSL FLOOR/CEILING: ALT ALERT rocker adjusts altitude in increments of 10 feet from 0 to 500 feet.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 393
. Value range 0–45000 feet. It is displayed as a signed 4-digit numeric followed by a ―D. MSL FLOOR and MSL CEILING.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 For any LUU – any fuze setting other than SAFE will display ―INVALID FUZING. the ALT ALERT rocker can be used to change the alert value by pressing for greater than ½ second:   AGL FLOOR: ALT ALERT rocker adjusts altitude in increments of 10 feet from 0 to 500 feet. Displayed as unsigned 5-digit numeric. Example: ―12000 MSL CEILING‖
The altitude alert numeric is displayed without changing for 1/2 second when the ALT ALERT key on the UFC is activated. Example ―500 AGL FLOOR‖ MSL Floor. pressing the ENT button on the UFC will enter that value into the alert as long as it is in the range specified above. and remains displayed for 4 seconds after the switch is released. Displayed as unsigned 4-digit numeric. specific altitudes in 1-foot increments can be entered into the scratchpad (UFC or CDU).

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 The second value is the true MSL altitude computed by either adding radar altimeter altitude to steerpoint elevation or using GPS altitude. and distance fields will flash for approximately 5 seconds.‖ Valid range is -1000 to 32767 in 1foot increments. and either the trigger is depressed to second detent or weapon release button is depressed and release criteria is met. The position of the point over-flown is stored in the markpoint portion of the waypoint database in location A.) will be annunciated on the CDU for 10 seconds or until the FA pushbutton is depressed. If ENT is not depressed again within 10 seconds. Activation of the UFC SEL switch will toggle the display between the EGI GPS and radar based calibration levels. If ENT is depressed again within 10 seconds. with the EGI GPS based calibration values displayed first. but does not store them. etc. the steerpoint identifier. no new data will be stored and the previously stored Delta values will be used.
W ea p ons Ev e n t M ar ke r
The weapons event marker symbol is the letter ―W‖ and appears on the HUD when the Master Armament switch is out of SAFE. etc. On the HUD. number. and the markpoint elevation is displayed and flashes for approximately 10 seconds. The weapon event marker is displayed when the first weapon release occurs and stays displayed until the weapons release button is released. C. C. This display will flash for 10 seconds or until it is accepted by pressing the ENT button on the OSP. MARK A (B. ―XXXX R‖ will be displayed for the radar value if the ENT button is pressed above 5000 feet AGL. Markpoint elevation is determined by using the DTSAS elevation for the coordinates of the point over which the mark was taken.
394 COCKPIT CONTROLS
.
This feature is used to store local correction factor for barometric altitude in the IFFCC for optional use during subsequent weapon deliveries in delta mode. either by pressing the MK button on the UFC or by pressing the MK button on the CDU. It is displayed whenever an overhead mark is taken. Depressing the ENT button displays the Radar and EGI GPS Delta calibration values. It is displayed below the delta value as a signed 5-digit numeric followed by an ―R‖ or ―G.
Mar k p oi n t E le va t io n
Markpoint elevation is displayed as a 5-digit numeric (appended with the letter ―M‖ if displayed in meters). the values currently displayed will be automatically stored in the DELTA CAL IFFCC Submenu. The values are displayed in the center of the HUD for 10 seconds. B.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Understanding SOI and SPI
Sensor of Interest (SOI)
Given that the A-10C has three separate displays that can be controlled (two MFCD and the HUD). and MAV). Only one control display can be the SOI at a given time and at least one control will always be assigned as the SOI. TGP and Maverick.
Figure 285. For the other MFCD that may be set to a sensor. a ―NOT SOI‖ message is displayed. This is done by determining the Sensor of Interest (SOI). MFCD Page as SOI
EAGLE DYNAMICS 395
. TGP. The below examples apply to TAD. then a ―container‖ box is drawn around the interior MFCD display. To visually indicate which display is assigned as the SOI. you must have a way to determine which control display you are commanding. visual cues are provided:
M FC D S O I I n di ca ti o ns
If the SOI sensor is being displayed on an MFCD (TAD.

or use the Coolie Hat functions on the HOTAS:    Up. then an asterisk is displayed in the lower left portion of the HUD. When the asterisk is missing. Set Right MFCD as SOI
EAGLE DYNAMICS 397
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
H UD S OI In d ica t io n
If the HUD is the SOI. Set Left MFCD as SOI Right Long. Set HUD as SOI Left Long. you can either select the desired SOI page from OSB 9 – 15. HUD as SOI Indication To set SOI. the HUD is not the SOI.
HUD Asterisk
Figure 287.

waypoint. etc. you may either use the reset SPI to Steerpoint function or assign the SPI to another sensor. Tactical Awareness Page. the GUN and CCIP pippers act as the SPI (depending on the HUD Mode – if NAV or AIR-to-AIR mode this makes the steerpoint the SPI as well).
S P I Co m ma n d F u nc t io ns
  Set Sensor as SPI – This function allows the TGP. aim sensors and send over the datalink. the SPI will
398 COCKPIT CONTROLS
. the line of sight point at ground intersection marks the SPI with a TMS Forward Long. Target Pod (TGP). the SPI will move along with it. when the TGP is selected as the SOI and the selected sensor as SPI function is selected. Slave All to SPI – Upon command. it will either track the last know position or return to boresight. The default SPI is the steerpoint. the SOI can change without changing the SPI. To un-assign the SPI from the TGP.) is hooked. However. To designate the SPI from the TAD page. TAD. then cue weapons and slave sensors to it. HUD. TMS Forward Long. When the Maverick is SOI and the selected sensor as SPI function is selected.

S P I S ens o r D esi g na t ors
 Maverick.  Tactical Awareness Display (TAD). This is a key component of the A-10C and helps you to locate targets with onboard sensors (Targeting Pod. Once a SPI has been defined. SPI can be set by either TMS Forward Long or holding LCtrl + Up Arrow. TGP. This will be the same coordinates and elevation displayed in the TGP display. you may either use the reset SPI to Steerpoint function or assign the SPI to another sensor. bullseye. To un-assign the SPI from the TGP. Once a sensor has been set as the Sensor Of Interest (SOI). China Hat Aft Long. Like the Maverick. The exception is if the SPI is commanded to Steerpoint but there is no valid Steerpoint because the CDU is not available. and the selected sensor as SPI function is activated. all active sensors will track the current SPI.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Sensor Point of Interest (SPI)
A SPI is a 3D point in space that the systems use as a shared reference location to cue weapons. the line of sight point to the ground marks the SPI using TMS Forward Long. Once a symbol (TGP diamond. As the Maverick seeker slews. Maverick or HUD to define the SPI. a sensor can be set individually to track a different target/object but the remaining sensors will maintain track on the SPI. Maverick and AIM-9). TMS Aft Short. the sensor may designate the SPI. If a slaved sensor can no longer track the SPI. As the TGP crosshairs are slewed. Select HUD SPI submode – If the HUD is selected as the SOI (default) and this function is selected. This can happen if the SPI source is changed or a SPI tagged TAD symbol is changed. China Hat Forward Long. the SPI symbol on the TAD would move according to the movement of the Maverick seeker.

Note: In the two examples above. the SPI slews along with it. or HUD symbol if they are assigned as the SPI sensor. The system is always tracking a SPI with the current steerpoint being the default SPI (such as when the aircraft is powered). you must first hook a symbol (TMS Forward Short).

the line of sight from the center reticle pipper to the ground marks the SPI. When in CCIP mode. the SPI will revert to the steerpoint until there is a valid line of sight to ground again. As the gun pipper and aircraft move. When in CCRP mode. CCIP. GUNS. the SPI will revert to the steerpoint until there is a valid line of sight to ground again. HUD mode. the line of sight from the gun pipper to the ground marks the SPI. As the TDC slews around the HUD. o TDC mode. CCRP.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
overlay the tagged symbol with a TMS Forward Long.
o

 
When in Air to Air mode. the TDC line of sight intersection with the ground marks the SPI point. If there is no valid line of sight to ground. the SPI will slew with it. Using the set sensor as SPI function.  Head-Up Display (HUD).
The table below summarizes each of the possible SOI sensors that can determine the SPI and the method used to designate the SPI. To un-assign the SPI to the hooked symbol. the SPI is automatically assigned to the steerpoint. If there is no valid line of sight to ground. These types include:   NAV. the SPI will move accordingly. When in Navigation mode. When the HUD is assigned as the SOI. SOI TGP TAD MAVERICK HUD NAV GUNS CCIP D-CCIP CCRP A-A STPT (DEFAULT)/TDC GUN SOLUTION (DEFAULT)/TDC/STPT CCIP SOLUTION (DEFAULT) /TDC/STPT CCIP RETICLE (DEFAULT) STPT (DEFAULT)/TDC STPT (DEFAULT) DEFINABLE SPI TGP LOS TAD HOOKED SYMBOL MAVERICK LOS
EAGLE DYNAMICS 399
. the SPI is automatically assigned to the steerpoint. the SPI is automatically assigned to the steerpoint. As the pipper and aircraft move. When in Guns mode. the user may either use the reset SPI to Steerpoint function or assign the SPI to another sensor. the SPI will vary according to the HUD type selected. When in this mode. the SPI will move accordingly. the SPI can be assigned in two primary ways.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

Countermeasure Systems
The A-10C has a defensive system that helps alert and protect you against enemy weapon systems with radar and laser illumination. This includes support for Electronic Counter Measure (ECM) pods, chaff and flare dispensers, a radar warning receiver set, and a Missile Warning System (MWS). These systems are combined to form the CounterMeasures Set (CMS). The CMS has two primary panels: the Countermeasures Signal Processor (CMSP) panel and the Countermeasures Set Control (CMSC) panel.

Countermeasure Signal Processor (CMSP) Panel
The CMSP panel is located on the forward right console and is your primary means of selecting and programming the CMS system. The CMSP has the following functions:
3 5

6

4

8

7

2

1

Figure 288. CMSP Panel Test Mode 1. The Mode Select Dial. This is a rotary dial with 5 positions located on the right side of the panel. Positions include:   OFF: System power is set to off. When in this mode, the CMSP and CMSC displays are blank and none of the CMS systems are operational in any way. STBY: When the mode switch is set to standby, power is applied to the CMSP and CMSC and they are fully functional and can be adjusted, but dispensing chaff and flares is not possible and the ECM and MWS will not take any active measures.

400 COCKPIT CONTROLS

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 MAN: When set to Manual mode: o o o  You may manually run the selected chaff/flare program with the Countermeasure Switch on the HOTAS. You may manually select the ECM program and turn ECM on and off. You will receive MWS indications, but you must manually select the best program and release countermeasures.

SEMI: When in Semi-Automatic mode: o The system will automatically select the best chaff/flare program according to the detected radar. However, it is up to you to start and stop the countermeasure release program. The CMS will automatically select the best ECM program to counter the detected radar threat. However, you must consent the system to go active. You will receive MWS indications and the CMS will select the best chaff/flare program, but you must manually release countermeasures.

o

o 

AUTO: When in Automatic mode: o o o The system will automatically select the best chaff/flare program and initiate and stop the program. The CMS will select the best ECM program based on the radar detected. The MWS will detect threats, select the best program and automatically release countermeasures.

When the dial is set to any of these four positions (other than OFF), the result is the same in that the alphanumeric display will show the status of the four systems. Along the bottom of the display, from left to right, are listed:     MWS. Missile Warning System JMR. Electronic Countermeasure self-protection Jammer RWR. Radar Warning Receiver DISP. Chaff and Flare Dispenser

When each of the system select switches are in the OFF position, OFF will appear above these labels. If the DISP, RWR, JMR, or MWS switches are set to the ON position, then RDY will be displayed above the label for five seconds until displaying the dispenser status screen. 2. System Select Switches. There are four System Select switches, and each switch has 3 positions (up, middle, and down). When a switch is in the down OFF position, power is removed from that system. If the switch is set to the middle ON position, power is applied to the selected system. If the switch is toggled to the up MENU position, you enter the programming mode (DISP only).

EAGLE DYNAMICS 401

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
DISP Switch This DISP switch allows you to enable and program the chaff and flare dispensers. This is an important function to help you defeat both radar and infrared guided missiles.

Figure 289. CMSP Dispenser ON ON Position: When the DISP switch is in the ON position (after a 5 second RDY indication), the alphanumeric display will change to allow you to view remaining chaff and flare stores. When ON, CHAF, FLAR, OTR1 and PROG are displayed left to right across the bottom on the display window. Above each of these on the top line is a numeric that indicates how many of the expendables remain on the aircraft or the selected dispenser program. The numeric will flash when it is being dispensed. Pressing the NXT rocker will cycle between programs (also indicated on the CMSC). If the last program is selected and the NXT rocker is pressed up, a new program will be created (A-Z in sequence) that is a duplicate of the preceding one. You can use this process to create new programs. The next program can also be selected by pressing the CMS switch left or the previous program by pressing CMS switch right. MENU Position: When placed momentarily in the Up Menu position, you may program how the CMS releases chaff and flares for the selected program (A-Z). Along the bottom of the display are fields for CHAF, FLAR, INTV and CYCL.

402 COCKPIT CONTROLS

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Figure 290. CMSP Dispenser MENU  CHAF. The Chaff field allows you to determine the number of chaff bundles that will be released in the current program. To set, you will press the SET button underneath the CHAF label and the numeric will flash indicating it can be adjusted. You may then use the NXT button to increase or decrease the amount. FLAR. The Flare field allows you to determine the number of flares that will be released in the current program. To set, you will press the SET button underneath the FLAR label and the numeric will flash indicating it can be adjusted. You may then use the NXT button to increase or decrease the amount. INTV. The Interval field allows you to set the time between counter measure releases in the current program. This can be set the same way as chaff and flares but in increments of .25 seconds from .25 to 5. CYCL. The Cycle field allows you to set the number of times the program will repeat itself. This is set in the same way as the other fields. Valid range is from 1 to 99.







Pressing the RTN button saves the program and a second press returns the screen to the dispenser status screen. RWR Switch The radar warning receiver switch controls power to the RWR equipment. Placing the switch in Menu puts the RWR into TEST mode. JMR Switch The Jammer switch controls power to the ECM jammer loaded on the aircraft. Placing the switch in Menu has no function. MWS Switch

EAGLE DYNAMICS 403

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
The Missile Warning System (MWS) switch controls power to the MWS detectors. Placing the switch in Menu has no function. 3. Alphanumeric Display Window. The display window is a rectangular screen at the top of the CMSP. The top line consists of 16 characters and provides information on payload and system status. The second line consists of four- character displays in four data segments. It is here that you can view chaff and flare inventory and program release patterns. SET Option Select Buttons (OSB). Four OSB buttons are located directly below the display window, positioned horizontally; each has an upward pointed arrow on it. Use these buttons to select items on the Alphanumeric Display window. NXT (Next) Switch. Located right of the display window, the Next switch is a 2-position rocker switch. Pressing the rocker up or down cycles values of the selected field. Use the Set keys to select the field. It can also cycle programs. RTN (Return) Switch. Located to the right of the Next switch, the Return button will save a program. JTSN (Jettison) Switch. Located below the Next button, the Jettison switch is a twoposition switch: Up and Down. In the JTSN position, chaff and flares will be jettisoned from the aircraft. The down position labeled OFF, is the normal state. BRT (Brightness) Knob. The brightness knob, labeled BRT, can be rotated to increase or decrease the light intensity of the labels on the panel.

Edit a Program
     Using the NXT switch, select the program that you wish to edit. Right click on the DISP switch to toggle it to MENU. Press the SET button under the value you wish to edit (CHAF, FLAR, INTV, or CYCL). The current value will then flash. Use the NXT switch to edit the value. Press the RTN button to save your changes.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 405

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Press the RTN button again to exit MENU.

Countermeasures Set Control (CMSC)
3 4

5

7

6 2 8 1 9

Figure 291. CMSC Panel The CMSC panel is located centrally on the front dash above the ADI. This panel allows you to control some aspects of the azimuth indicator display, view chaff and flare status, and change electronic counter measure and MWS functions. Functions of the CMSC panel include: 1. 2. BRT (Brightness) Knob. The brightness knob, labeled BRT, can be rotated to increase or decrease the light intensity of the labels on the panel. AUD (Audio) Knob. The audio knob, labeled AUD, can be rotated to increase or decrease the RWR audio warning volume. Each detected radar signal has a unique audio tone based on its Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) signal. JMR (Jammer) Window. In this display window, up to eight characters can be displayed and indicate the selected jammer program and activity status. The left side of the jammer window indicates the status of the jammer. This can either be OFF, SBY (standby) or OPR (operating) depending on the position of the mode selector dial and if the aircraft is being locked by a radar. On the right side of the window is displayed the selected jammer program. These are pre-loaded and include:     AIR. Program to counter most air-to-air radars. SAM1. Program to counter older-generation SAM systems like SA-3, SA-6 and SA-8. SAM2. Program to counter newer-generation SAM systems like 2S6, SA-16, SA-11, SA-10, and SA-15. AAA. Program to counter radar-directed gun systems like ZSU-23-4 and ZU-23 / Dog Ear.

3.

An example may be: ―OPR SAM1‖. The button to the left of the window allows you to cycle through jammer programs when the Mode dial is set to Manual or Semi.

406 COCKPIT CONTROLS

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
When the jammer is in STBY (standby) and the aircraft is being illuminated in target search/acquisition mode by an enemy radar, the jammer will stay in STBY mode. However, if your aircraft is locked in target tracking mode, it will select the appropriate jammer program (when in Semi and Auto modes) and automatically go to OPR (operation) mode to attempt to jam the enemy radar and break the lock if in AUTO. This is termed a Self Protection Jammer (SPJ). The JMR field will also flash when in OPR mode. When no longer being locked, the jammer will return to STBY mode. This assumes SEMI and AUTO modes. When in MAN mode, you can use the button next to the JMR field to cycle between the jammer programs. On the HOTAS, you have the CMS switch to also select jammer programs and toggle between STBY and OPR modes. 4. CHAFF-FLARE Widow. This 8-character display window in the upper right portion of the panel indicates the number of remaining chaff and flares, dispenser activity, the CMS mode dial setting, and the active dispenser program. In the display field, under the CHAFF label, the number of remaining chaff bundles is listed and defaults to 240 bundles. Under the FLARE label, the number of remaining flares is listed and defaults to 120 flares. Between them and underlined is the CMS mode. The letter is underlined. Modes include: X – Standby M – Manual S – SEMI A - AUTO With each release of a chaff bundle or flare though, a diamond in the center of the display is shown momentarily. If continuous dispense is selected, the diamond will be shown as long as chaff or flares are being released. When the DISP selector switch is set to the OFF position, OFF is displayed instead of the chaff and flare counts. If either the chaff or flare inventory reaches or falls below 50, the number is replaced with a LOW indication. If either chaff or flares are completely expended, N/L will be displayed for that counter. Along the left portion of the display is a letter indicator that shows the current dispenser program (A-Z). 5. MWS (Missile Warning System) Window. When a missile launch has been detected by the MWS system, this window will indicate LAUNCH. When the MWS has power, it will display ACTIVE and with no power it will display OFF. SEP (Separate) Button. To expand groupings of symbols on the RWR display such that they can be more easily read, you may press the SEP button on the CMSC. Upon doing so, the symbols will be separated radially outwards from each other. PRI (Priority) Button. The Azimuth Indicator can display up to 16 symbols simultaneously; however, this can lead to a rather crowded display. By pressing the PRI button on the CMSC, you can toggle between OPEN mode that can display the 16 highest

6.

7.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 407

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
priority threats or PRI mode which will only show the five highest threats. When PRI is active, the green light above the button will be lit. 8. 9. UNK (Unknown) Button. No function. ML (Missile Launch) Light. This red light flashes when a missile has been launched near your aircraft. Missile launches can be detected by either the RWR or MWS. There will be an accompanying missile launch warning tone.

ALR-69(V) Radar Warning Receiver (RWR)

Figure 292. ALR-69(V) RWR The RWR is a circular-shaped display on the left of the front dash that provides you a visual representation of radar emitters, detected missile launches, and laser illumination around your aircraft. The display is in plan view with your aircraft in the center. As threats are displayed around the center of the display, the icons represent the azimuth direction to the threat. For example: an icon of the left side of the display would indicate an emitter located off your left. In addition to the icons, an audio system will alert you to the status of the radars detected (search, track, and launch). The locations of radar emitters and detected missile launches on the display do not necessarily correlate to emitter range from your aircraft. The distance of the threat icon from the center of the display indicates radar signal strength. The closer the icon is the center of the display generally indicates the closer the radar is to you.

A symbol can have three states on the display:   If a symbol is displayed with no circle around it, it indicates that the radar is in acquisition/search mode. When a new emitter is detected, a new threat tone will be heard. If a symbol has a steady circle around it, it indicates that the radar is tracking/locked on to your aircraft. When being tracked by an engagement radar, you will be provided a radar lock tone. If a symbol has a flashing circle around it, it indicates that the radar is supporting a missile that has been launched at you. When being launched on by a radar-guided missile, you will hear a missile launch tone. When a missile launch has occurred, the Missile Launch (ML) light on the CMSC will turn on. A detected missile will be displayed as an M symbol with a flashing circle around it.



When the Missile Warning System (MWS) is active and a missile launch has been detected by the sensors on the wings and tail, an ―M‖ is displayed along the azimuth the launch was detected. The symbol will continue to appear 10 seconds after the launch is no longer detected (missile motor has stopped burning). Note that the MWS cannot distinguish between enemy and friendly missiles or air launched missiles from ground launched missiles. As such, you may receive launch indications from both friendly and ground units. When a laser illumination on the aircraft is detected, an ―L‖ is displayed along the azimuth the laser was detected. The symbol will continue to appear as long as the laser illumination is detected.

410 COCKPIT CONTROLS

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES

EAGLE DYNAMICS 411

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
When starting a mission from the parking ramp with all systems shut down (cold aircraft), you will need to learn how to bring the aircraft to life using the startup procedures. Just like in the real aircraft, we suggest a ―flow‖ that allows you to set up your instruments and power-up other systems. The flow described below is the one we suggest, but just like real A-10 pilots, you may create your own that works for you. After you do this a few times, it will start to feel like second nature. In addition to manually starting up the aircraft, you can also use the automatic start.

Flight Preparation
When you first enter the aircraft, you will want to go through the following list of items to make sure all your switches, dials and indicators are set up correctly before starting things up. Go around the cockpit clockwise left to right and confirm that all switches are in their normal (or off) positions.

412 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Left Console
Fuel Systems Panel
Throttle Quadrant Area
Emergency Flight Control Panel
Communication Devices
Figure 293. Left Console Communication Devices: 1. You may wish to do so according to the frequency specified in the mission briefing. Set VHF radio 1 channel presets on VHF 1 Radio Panel (VHF AM).
EAGLE DYNAMICS 413
.

Set the radar altimeter to the NRM (normal) position.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Preset Channels
Figure 294.
Radar Altimeter Switch
Figure 296. You may wish to do so according to the frequency specified in the mission briefing. VHF Radio 1 Head 2. Set VHF radio 2 channel presets on VHF 2 Radio Panel (VHF FM). VHF Radio 2 Head
4.
Preset Channels
Figure 295. LASTE Panel
414 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
.

Set the Instrument Inverter Switch to the STBY position from the OFF position. When enabled. Before starting the APU. the INST INV caution light should extinguish. First ensure that the Battery Switch is set to PWR and the Inverter Switch to STBY.
Inverter Switch
Battery Switch
After doing so:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 425
. 1. you will need to enable electrical power.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Start
Electrical Power Start and APU
After completing your pre-flight check.
2. Set the Battery switch to the PWR position. This will allow DC power to be drawn from the battery and supply the DC essential and auxiliary buses. The APU will draw from the DC essential bus to start it. This will allow APU generated DC power to be inverted to the AC buses that supply power to many of the instruments. you will need to initiate electrical power to the aircraft and start the APU.

000
EAGLE DYNAMICS 427
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Do a final check of the cockpit of the following items:
Signal Lights Button
Landing Gear Lights
Digital Clock
Fuel Quantity Indicator
Figure 311. Lower Front Dash Area     Three green. Press the test button and the left and right pointers will indicate 3.000 and the totalizer will indicate 6. down landing gear lights Test the signal lights by pressing the Signal Lights button Set the clock if needed Test the fuel quantity indicator.

Main Boost Pump Switches
2.
428 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
. the generators will supply AC power to the AC buses once the engines are running and powering the generators. Set the APU Generator switch to the PWR position. Uncage the standby attitude indicator. This will allow the APU generator to power the aircraft.
4. APU Start Button
2.
2. Stabilized RPM operation of the APU will be at 100%. Make sure that both AC Generator switches are in the PWR position. Forward Cockpit 1.
3. APU Generator switch
1. Standby Attitude Indicator APU Exhaust Gas Temperature
3. the APU will now be capable of providing bleed air to start the engines and drive the APU generator. With these set. Make sure that the Left and Right main and wing boost pump switches are enabled. Press the APU Start button to start the APU using DC power. Wing Boost Pump Switches
4. AC Generator Switches
Figure 312. These DC powered pumps will start to supply fuel to the engines once they are started. The APU Exhaust Gas Temperature will briefly spike at 760-c when it feeds the engine starter but will normalize between 400 and 450-c when at idle. you will now begin the process to start the APU and engines:
5. Once stabilized.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
With these items set. 5.

Radios While it is up to you to decide exactly how you want to assign your radios. now is the time to do so. but if not. we suggest the following:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 429
.
VHF AM Radio 1
UHF Radio
VHF FM Radio 2
Figure 313. you will want to set up your UHF and VHF radios according to the mission briefing. Left Console. The last thing you will want to be doing when being shot at is configuring frequencies on the radios! Most often you will have configured the radios when starting the aircraft.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Radio Set Up
To best communicate with other friendly units involved with the mission. Mission frequencies will most often be listed in your mission briefing.

Set the Frequency Mode Dial to the Transmit/Receive (TR) position. Preset Channel Selector Wheel
2. To set up the radios. If the Frequency Selection Dial is set to PRE. use the Preset Channel Selector Wheel to select the preset frequency assigned to either the flight. other friendly flights. VHF Radio 1. 2. AWACS.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
V HF Ra di o 1 a n d 2
When getting ready for combat. AWACS or general mission frequency.
430 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
. VHF radios 1 and 2 are best assigned to other mission assets such as AWACS. or general mission frequency. Transmit on VHF radio 1 (AM) Mic Switch Aft. Set the Frequency Selection Dial to either Manual (MAN) or Preset (PRE) If the Frequency Selection Dial is set to MAN. Frequency Mode Dial
Figure 314. use the Frequency Selector Knobs to enter the desired frequency of either the flight. you may use the Mic Switch on the HOTAS throttle to send a radio message on the selected radio:   Mic Switch Forward. Frequency Selection Dial
1. JTAC. Transmit on VHF radio 2 (FM)
5. 3. you will want to do the following:
3. Frequency Selector Knobs
4. 4. etc. Once the correct channels are set.

use the Frequency Selector Knobs to enter the desired frequency of the mission participant. Transmit on UHF radio
2. Frequency Selector Knobs 2. If the Frequency Mode Dial is set to PRESET. you may use the Mic Switch on the HOTAS throttle to send a radio message on the selected radio:  Mic Switch Down. In this position. UHF Radio 1. 3. the UHF radio will allow you to send and receive communications and monitor (receive only) communications on the guard channel. 5. If the Frequency Mode Dial is set to MNL.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 431
. use the Preset Channel Selector to select the preset frequency assigned to mission participant. Set the Function Dial to the BOTH position. Function Dial
Figure 315. The UHF radio will most often be used to communicate with your wingmen. Set the Frequency Mode Dial to either Manual (MNL) or PRESET. you will want to make sure the UHF radio is set to the proper frequency.
4. Frequency Mode Dial 1. Preset Channel Selector Wheel
3.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
U H F Ra d i o
As with the VHF radios. Once the correct channels are set. 4.

This will provide power to the CDU panel located above the AAP. Move the Control Display Unit (CDU) switch to the ON position. Move the Embedded GPS/INS (EGI) switch to the ON position. CDU Switch
3.
432 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
. the CDU will display the Alignment page. 2.
3. PAGE Dial
Figure 316. Set Up Auxiliary Avionics Panel 1.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Set Up Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP)
This small panel below the CDU on the right console needs to be set up for the navigation system.
Auxiliary Avionics Panel
2. On the CDU display window. When complete. This will allow us to view the CDU Built In Test (BIT) and initialization check when the CDU is powered-up. the CDU stat up BIT Test will initiate. Rotate the PAGE dial to the OTHER setting. It’s a good idea to do this early as it gives the inertial navigation system time to align. This will initiate the inertial navigation system and global positioning system and start the alignment process that can take several minutes. EGI Switch
1.

Confirm that both Engine Operate switches are in the NORM position.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Left Engine Start
With APU and electrical systems running normally and the navigation system aligning. Engine Core Speed RPM Indicators 3.350 psi. When on the ground.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 433
. Once moved to idle. Left Throttle to Idle
1. we will start the left and right engines one at a time. Check flight control movements and monitor the left hydraulic system indicator on the Fuel Quantity and Hydraulic Indicator Panel. the DC fuel boost pumps will activate to feed that engine. Engine Operate Switches
Figure 317. 2. Both engines will use the APU to start them. This will automatically initiate a left engine start with the automatic ignition. you should not use one engine to start the other.
3.
2.800 and 3. Left Engine Start 1. Hydraulic System Indicators
2. Move the Left throttle from the OFF to the IDLE (56% core RPM) position. Normal pressure should be between 2.

Check the speed brakes by partially opening them and then halt them with the emergency retract switch. Note: When starting the engines. Once the Left engine has stabilized. Right Engine Start 1.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Right Engine Start
1. Hydraulic System Indicators
1. Close the speed brakes. The APU bleed air will also be used to start the second engine and not bleed air from the first engine as you might assume. move the Right throttle from the OFF to the IDLE position to start that engine. APU Generator Switch
Figure 318. Monitor the hydraulic system indicator. Engine Core Speed RPM Indicators 2. Cycle the flight controls to check for any bindings. With both engines running normally. and then continue to open to full. 3. Check the left hydraulic system by setting the flaps to the down (DN) position and then back to full up. Right Throttle to Idle
4. APU Power Switch
4. the Interstage Turbine Temperature will spike at 900-c but will stabilize between 275 and 865-c.
4. you may set the APU switch to OFF and the APU Generator switch to off as all needed power is now being supplied by the engines and AC generators. 2.
434 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
.

check movement only on the left side. place the switch back to the NORM position. Holding down the right brake. 2. check movement only on the right side.
436 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
. Press the paddle switch on the control stick to confirm all SAS and Anti-skid disengage.
Brake Check
1. 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
2. Use the trim hat on the control stick to check trim movement. Holding down the left brake.
Trim Check
Emergency Flight Control Panel
Pitch and Roll Override Controls
Figure 320. Trim Check 1. When complete. Engage all SAS for remainder of flight. From the Emergency Flight Control Panel. place the Pitch/Roll Trim switch to the Emergency Override position and use the hat to manually test trim. Engage all SAS and anti-skid.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 437
. Test Pitot Tube Heating Enable PITOT HEAT switch on the Environment Control Panel. Then turn off for taxi. Keeping pitot on too long when stationary on the ground can lead to overheating.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Test Pitot Tube Heating
Environment Control Panel
PITOT HEAT switch
Figure 321.

move the Integrated Flight and Fire Control Computer (IFFCC) switch from the OFF to the TEST position. From the Armament HUD Control Panel (AHCP) on the front dash. From the IFFCC Test Menu. This will allow navigation output in regards to the EGI and TACAN beacons rather than the default HARS navigation. Move the IFFCC switch to the ON position to enable the Heads Up Display (HUD).
EAGLE DYNAMICS 439
. if not already selected. and Display Modes as desired. 3. Enable IFCC 1. 2. 30 MM. select the EGI and TCN (TACAN) buttons. AAS.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
From the Navigation Mode Select Panel (NMSP) on the lower center front dash.
Enable IFFCC
Armament HUD Control Panel
IFFCC Switch
Figure 324. set up the CCIP Consent.

From here you can load flight and weapons data determined in mission planning. the load will be complete when the asterisk mark returns next to the other DTS upload options. move the Central Interface Control Unit (CICU) switch to the ON position.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Enable CICU
CICU Switch
Figure 325. Enable CICU From the AHCP. the DTS UPLOAD page will be displayed. Turn on the MFCD’s and Load Data Rotate the DAY (or night) knob from the OFF position on each MFCD. On both MFCD.
440 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
.
Turn on the MFCD’s and Load Data
Left MFCD Power Switch
Right MFCD Power Switch
Figure 326. Select the LOAD ALL option to load all needed mission data. After pressing the button.

CDU FPM Button
EAGLE DYNAMICS 441
. 2. Move the STEERPT dial on the AAP to the FLT PLAN position Make sure that the PAGE dial on the AAP is set to OTHER
Flight Plan Mode Button
Figure 328. To do so: 1. AAP Load Flight Plan With the navigation data loaded.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Load Flight Plan
Control Display Unit (CDU)
AAP
STEER PT Dial
PAGE Dial
Figure 327. you may load a flight plan.

Flight Plan Build Page 1. Once a flight plan is loaded. You may now enter a flight plan or select Flight Plan Build (FPBUILD) and create your own from Mission Waypoints created in the mission planner. If a flight plan has been loaded.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Select the Flight Plan Menu (FPM) page on the CDU
Figure 329. Select TAD Page 1. 2. From one of the MFCD.
442 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
. you will see the plan displayed on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD) when selected.
Select TAD Page
Tactical Awareness Display Page
Network (NET) Settings
Figure 330. 2. the waypoints and lines will be displayed. select the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD) page.

MFCD TGP Page
EAGLE DYNAMICS 443
. Confirm flight members and other friendly units appear on your TAD as datalink symbols. you will need to activate it and start the process to cool down its infrared camera.
Targeting Pod Page
Figure 332. 3.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Ownship ID
Group ID
Figure 331. enter your ownship ID and group ID in order to be linked into the datalink network. Datalink Network Configuration Page 1. 2. Confirm datalink by hooking a flight member. Select the Network (NET) OSB.
Enable the Targeting Pod (TGP)
If a targeting pod has been loaded on your aircraft.

444 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
.
Targeting Pod Switch
Figure 333. The TGP will be available for operation once the Standby (STBY) page is displayed. Select STAT Page From one of the MFCD. move the TGP switch to the ON position. select TGP and a TGP OFF message will be displayed. a NOT TIMED OUT message will display but after a few moments the TGP will start to power on and go through its Built In Test (BIT) with a FLIR HOT message.
3. From the AHCP. On an MFCD. Initially. AHCP TGP On 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1. select the Status (STAT) OSB to check status of aircraft systems and configure slew rates.
Select STAT Page
Status Page
Figure 334.

MFCD DSMS Page 1. You may also wish to manually adjust profile data. Check that all stores data and profile data was transferred from the Data Transfer System (DTS) correctly.
Select DSMS Page
Digital Stores Management (DSMS) page
Figure 336. STAT Page 2 On the second page of the STAT page. There should be no red indications. 2.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Slew Rate Adjust
Figure 335. 3. select the Digital Stores Management System (DSMS) display.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 445
. From one of the MFCD. scroll down to HOTAS/THRTL and adjust the SLEW rate for the cursors as desired.

Set Up Countermeasure Systems 1. From the Countermeasure Signal Processor (CMSP) panel on the right console.
446 AIRCRAFT STARTUP PROCEDURES
.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Set Up Countermeasure Systems
CMSP
Dispenser Switch Brightness Knob Radar Warning Receiver Switch
Jammer Switch
Mode Dial
Missile Warning System Switch
Figure 337. Move the Radar Warning Receiver (RWR). 4. select Standby (STBY) mode to power on the system. and Missile Warning System (MWS) switches to the ON position to power them on. 5. Adjust the brightness knob as needed. 3. Return the DISP switch to the ON position. Set the Dispenser (DISP) switch to Menu and review programs and add additional ones if desired. Jammer (JMR). 2.

Close Canopy 1.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Close Canopy
Canopy Switch
Figure 338. Confirm Canopy Unlocked light extinguishes.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 447
. 2. Press and hold the Canopy Switch in the down position to close the canopy.

the green triangle on the button will light. heading and range information is displayed on the HSI and ADI. Once entered and the station is within operative range.
Navigation Mode Select Panel (NMSP)
The primary means of selecting sources of navigation is the NMSP. TCN (TACAN). Additionally. raw azimuth and elevation data is displayed on the ADI to orient you to the laser-designated target. When the Pave Penny pod has detected laser energy at the inputted code. This and the HARS button cannot be active at the same time. heading and range information is displayed on the HSI and ADI. you may select the desired TACAN station to navigate to. you may select the desired ILS station to navigate to.


448 NAVIGATION
. From the TACAN control panel. This and the EGI button cannot be active at the same time. Navigation Mode Select Panel  TISL (Target Identification Set Laser). From the ILS control panel. you may use different navigation sources. Pressing one will deactivate the other.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
NAVIGATION
The A-10C uses a variety of navigation methods to direct you to mission locations. From here you can determine what navigation is displayed on the HUD or feeds data to your flight instruments like the ADI and HSI. When a selection is active. ADI and HSI. this Navigation chapter will review the practical application of these systems. Pressing one will deactivate the other. Once entered and the station is within operative range.
Figure 339. EGI (Embedded GPS INS). While we have reviewed many of the navigation systems in the Cockpit Controls chapter. Both of these systems provide data to the HUD. ILS (Instrumented Landing System). The two primary systems that can direct heading and attitude data are:    HARS (Heading Attitude Reference System). Depending on the mission or stage in the mission. the TISL will have priority over the FM light on the NMSP.

aka Bullseye). It also cannot provide a TVV on the HUD. FM Homing Light.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
  Note: TISL. In such a situation. STR PT (Steer Point).
  
In the following sections we will discuss each of these navigation and homing data sources. the CDI will center. it provides or removes the following data:        Pitch and roll signals to the ADI Heading data to the TACAN Heading data to the compass card on the HSI Bank angle to the SAS Pitch and roll angle on the HUD The Total Velocity Vector (TVV) will be removed from the HUD The HARS caution light on the Caution Panel will light
A HARS failure is indicated:   The ADI OFF Flag will appear HUD roll tabs will not be displayed
EAGLE DYNAMICS 449
. and ILS are all mutually exclusive. the HSI and ADI needles will point to the Anchor Point. When active. but there would be no good reason to do so. This can be a useful function when landing at night in combat at an airfield without an ILS glide slope. you can make the end of the runway the steerpoint and then set the EGI up for "3-D NAV" so you can also use both the CDI and the steering bars to give heading and a "GPS" type glide path to touchdown. EGI was added and HARS has become a back-up system to the Inertial Navigation System (INS) when the EGI is inoperative. HARS can provide good heading and attitude information. Only one of these three can be operating at one time because all three use the CDI on the HSI. Indication of UHF ADF navigation. UHF Homing Light. You can also select it manually when EGI is working. When HARS is active. HARS is selected automatically on the Navigation Mode Select Panel. The Anchor point is set on the CDU. As the A-10A evolved into later versions. Indication of TISL or VHF DR homing. When the INS of the EGI is not available. When you then set a course to the steerpoint. The STR PT function makes the CDI on the HSI operate in relation to the steerpoint. As a backup system. but it can become inaccurate with hard maneuvering or if taken out of Slave to compass mode.
Heading Attitude Reference System (HARS) Navigation
The Heading Attitude Reference Systems (HARS) is a gyro-platform navigation system that served as the initial. TCN. ANCHR (Anchor Point. primary navigation system of the A-10A.

you can push HDG knob on the HARS panel. This forces the Gyro to align (synchronize) with the compass much more quickly (10 to 100 times faster compared to normal Slaved operation). allows the HARS gyro to be fed by the compass signal. a Fast Erect should only be done when the aircraft is straight and level and not accelerating. If you want to immediately correct the heading indication (according to the immediate compass indication).

450 NAVIGATION
. However. the Gyro will accumulate errors and not have the self-correction like on Slave mode from the compass. HARS Panel  SLAVE mode. Over time and with changes to pitch and heading.
SYN/IND Synchronization Indication HARS Master Mode of Operation
Heading and Push to Sync Control
Latitude Correction Control
Hemisphere Select Magnetic Variation Select
Figure 340. Because of this. also called gyro-magnetic mode. the HARS gyro will accumulate errors and the HARS output and the remote compass transmitter will become out of synch. The compass shows heading immediately (may be very jerky under some maneuvers) and provides the Gyro constant updates and acts to dampen the HARS Gyro system.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
HARS Fast Erect
Located on the lower. hard maneuvering can cause errors in the compass data sent to the HARS Gyro. Pressing this switch will eliminate errors that have accumulated regarding HARS attitude display data (ADI and HUD). Due to this. left front dash is the HARS Fast Erect button. after a few minutes of straight and level flight. To properly perform this operation and avoid false attitude data. In DG mode the Gyro is uncoupled from the compass and works autonomously. you will see the following indications:    ADI Power Off flag will appear HSI Power Off flag will appear Pitch and roll bars on HUD will be removed
HARS Modes of Operation
HARS can operate in one of two master modes that are selected from the HARS Master Mode switch. DG mode. you must rotate the Heading and Push to Sync control knob until the HSI heading aligns with the standby compass. SLAVE mode. the DG (Directional Gyro) mode acts as a backup. prolonged. When the button is pressed. In this mode. If Slave mode fails. the errors will be corrected.

but can also be mirrored to an MFCD as the CDU Repeater Page.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Embedded GPS INS (EGI) Navigation
The EGI is the primary navigation system of the A-10C and provides accurate attitude. Much of the functionality and CDU page flow was discussed in the EGI chapter. navigation. Control Display Unit (CDU)
EAGLE DYNAMICS 451
. The Control Display Unit (CDU) is the primary interface device to the EGI. In this Navigation chapter we will discuss the practical application of using the CDU EGI for navigation purposes. and vertical and horizontal steering information. HARS can be used as a backup.
Line Select Keys (LSK)
Line Select Keys (LSK)
CDU Display Window
Function Select Keys (FSK) CDU Keypad
± Rocker Switch Page Up / Page Down
Figure 341. If EGI fails.

It is important to understand that any waypoint can be set as the current Steerpoint or Anchor Point. you will be provided waypoint number. Heading. you must set the Waypoint as the Steerpoint.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
AAP STEER PT Dial
AAP PAGE Dial
Figure 342.050. you have several choices depending on the settings of the AAP STEER PT and PAGE dials. magnetic heading. name. Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP)
Selecting a Waypoint
In this section we will discuss how to select a waypoint from the CDU data base. To provide such steering information. WAYPT Page
452 NAVIGATION
.
Waypoint Number
Branch to detailed Waypoint Data
Waypoint Name. or HSI. and distance to the selected waypoint. ADI. Each waypoint is assigned a numeric and a name and range from 0 (initial position) to 2.
W he n t he AAP P A GE dia l is s e t t o W AYP T :
When this is set on the AAP. A waypoint is an arbitrary geographic coordinate along with an elevation. and Distance
Steerpoint Data
Anchor Point Data
Figure 343. To select a waypoint. A selected waypoint in itself does not provide any flight direction data on the HUD. Time To Go (TTG). TTG.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
In the top right corner of the CDU Display Window will be shown basic navigation data of the selected waypoint. If you wish to change the waypoint. To select a new waypoint. This three-line data block from top to bottom includes: Name of waypoint. press the LSK next to the WAYPOINT label on the left side of the window. To view more detailed information about the selected waypoint. and magnetic heading / distance. Selecting Waypoints from HUD In addition to using the CDU to select Waypoints. you can cycle through the Mission waypoints using DMS Up or Down Short on the control stick.
Waypoint Name Waypoint Number Waypoint Desired Time on Target
Waypoint Elevation
Next Mission Point Coordinate Ranging Enabled Wind Data Waypoint Coordinates
Coordinate Type
Figure 344. you may also use the ± Rocker Switch on the CDU to cycle through waypoints in the order they are stored in the CDU data base.
W he n t he AAP P A GE dia l is s e t t o OT H E R :
When the AAP PAGE dial is set to OTHER and regardless of the position of the AAP STEER PT dial. Time To Go to waypoint. you can select the WAYPOINT details page by default and select a new Waypoint by either entering a new Waypoint number or entering a new Waypoint name. the waypoint data block will change to the selected waypoint. When the AAP STEER PT dial is set to MISSION and HUD is SOI. you can also use the HUD and HOTAS to cycle through waypoints. Waypoint Information Page In addition to manually entering the waypoint name or number. type in the name of the waypoint you want on the CDU keypad and then press the top right Line Select Key (LSK). you may also use the ± Rocker Switch on the CDU to cycle through waypoints in the order they are stored in the CDU data base. This assumes you do not have a Flight Plan loaded. Upon doing so. When the AAP STEER PT dial is set to either MARK or MISSION. In the top left corner of the CDU Window is displayed the number of the selected waypoint.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 453
. you may enter the new waypoint number on the CDU Keypad and then press the top left LSK.

Enter the latitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad and press the LSK next to the latitude field (N or S). Waypoint Information Page We now need to create the properties of the new waypoint: 1. This will copy the contents of the selected waypoint into an available mission point slot that is not currently being used (slot 6 in the case below).
Note: You can use either the UFC or CDU keypads to enter data into the scratchpad. select the Copy to available mission point LSK (?6 as shown in image below). Enter the longitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad and press the LSK next to the latitude field (E or W). Enter the elevation of the new waypoint in feet using the keypads/scratchpad and press the LSK next to the elevation field (EL). select the WAYPOINT branch from the WP MENU page
With the Waypoint page selected. 3. 4. 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Creating a New Waypoint
During a mission.
Waypoint Elevation
Waypoint Name
Waypoint Latitude Copy to Create New Mission Waypoint
Waypoint Longitude
Figure 345. Enter a unique name for the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad and press the LSK next to the name field.
454 NAVIGATION
. there may be occasions when you want to add a new Waypoint to the CDU database. you will have a new Mission Waypoint in the database. The easiest way to do this is to select the Waypoint page first:   Set the AAP PAGE dial to WAYPT and then select WAYPOINT branch from the WP INFO page Set the AAP PAGE dial to OTHER and from the WP Function Select Key. Once complete.

WAYPT Page To alter the Steerpoint. while you can view Steerpoint data. This will display the Steerpoint page and allow you to view more detailed Steerpoint data and alter which Waypoint is assigned as the Steerpoint. you can view current Steerpoint data in the lower left corner of the CDU window.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Set a Waypoint as a Steerpoint
As mentioned in the previous section.
Steerpoint TTG. you must set a selected waypoint as the Steerpoint. and distance
Figure 346. you must set the AAP PAGE dial to STEER. When the AAP PAGE dial is set to WAYPT.050 waypoints. it does not provide steering information on the HUD. but when a waypoint is selected. heading.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 455
. There can only ever be one Steerpoint at a time. you cannot change the Steerpoint from this page. the CDU database can hold up to 2. However. TAD or HSI. To do so.

When the Steerpoint is outside the HUD field of view and the Steerpoint is not SPI. With the HUD as SOI.

456 NAVIGATION
. the tadpole provides heading steering information to the Steerpoint. Fly in the direction the tadpole is clamped to on the HUD. Waypoint Information Page The default Steerpoint is the selected waypoint. but often you want to set the Steerpoint independent of current waypoint. To do so.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Waypoint Number Acting as Steerpoint Time To Go to Reach Steerpoint
Desired Magnetic Heading to Steerpoint
Time On Target Arrival Time at Steerpoint
Distance to Steerpoint
Wind Direction and Speed
Elevation at Steerpoint
Airspeed Select Rotary
Bearing Radial to Steerpoint
Figure 347.
H UD In d ica t io n
  Along the bottom of the HUD. you use the Steerpoint page to either enter a new Waypoint number or enter a new Waypoint name. you may also press DMS Forward and Aft to cycle through waypoints. Align the mark in the center of the heading tape. After being entered on this page. By default. the selected Waypoint will become the Steerpoint and you will be provided the following steering information to that location on the HUD and TAD. the Steerpoint is the SPI. the Desired Magnetic Heading mark will direct you to the Steerpoint. You may also use the ± Rocker Switch on the CDU to cycle through flight plan waypoints in the order they are stored in the CDU data base and assign one as the Steerpoint.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Tadpole Indicates Steerpoint Direction when SPI is not Steerpoint

Desired Magnetic Heading Symbol Provides Heading to Steerpoint

Figure 348. Navigation HUD

Tac ti cal A wa re n ess Dis pl ay (T AD) In d ic at io n
When there is an active Steerpoint, it will be displayed on the TAD as a yellow box. Next to the box is displayed the Waypoint number that is acting as the Steerpoint.

Steerpoint Yellow Box (SPI set at Steerpoint in this Example)

Figure 349. Steerpoint on TAD

EAGLE DYNAMICS 457

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

Creating / Reassigning an Anchor Point
Also referred to as a ―Bullseye‖, an Anchor point serves as a common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly forces. In the EGI CDU, you can assign an existing Waypoint as the Anchor point, or create a new Waypoint as described previously. To assign an Anchor point, the quickest and easiest way is to start with the AAP PAGE dial set to the WAYPT position. This will then display the current Anchor point data in the lower right corner of the page. To set the Anchor point, press the LSK next to the ANCHOR PT label.

Anchor Point Data (None set in this Example)

Figure 350. WAYPT Page When the Anchor point page is first displayed and no Anchor point has been assigned, it will appear as seen in the image below. To create the Anchor point, you will need to enter the Waypoint number that you wish to serve as the Anchor point and then press the LSK next to the Anchor point number field.

Current Waypoint Anchor Number Field

Figure 351. Navigation / Anchor Sub-page (blank)

458 NAVIGATION

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Once you have set the Anchor point to a Waypoint in the CDU database, the rest of the page data will be filled in.
Anchor Number Waypoint TTG

Anchor Name

Waypoint Desired Magnetic Heading

Anchor Time to Go (TTG)

Waypoint Distance

Anchor Desired Magnetic heading

Anchor Distance

Figure 352. Navigation / Anchor Sub-page With Anchor point created, you will have indications of its location on both your HUD.     Anchor point Waypoint Name Time-to-Go to (TTG) reach Anchor Point Desired Magnetic Heading (DMH) to reach Anchor Point Distance (DIS) to Anchor Point

H UD In d ica t io n
If you have ANCHR selected on the Navigation Mode Select Panel, the Anchor Point Display will appear in the top right corner of the HUD. This display will show the name of the Waypoint assigned as the Anchor point and the magnetic bearing / ground range distance to that point.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 459

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

Anchor Point Display

Figure 353. Navigation HUD

Tac ti cal A wa re n ess Dis pl ay (T AD) In d ic at io n
With an Anchor point set, an Anchor point data block will be displayed in the top left corner of the TAD. Marked ―BULL‖ for Bullseye, the bearing and range to the Anchor point is provided. The Anchor point symbol, a dot with two concentric circles, is displayed on the TAD moving map at the Anchor point location. Because it is a symbol on the map, it can be hooked with the TAD cursor.

460 NAVIGATION

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Anchor Point Data Block Anchor Point Symbol

Figure 354. TAD Page with Anchor Data

Setting a Mark Point
In addition to the 2,050 waypoints that can be stored in the CDU database, you may also create Mark Points (A-Z). There are three ways you can create a Mark Point:  Overhead Mark Point. If you press the MK (Mark Point) button on the CDU, a new Mark Point will be created at the aircraft location. Each time you press the MK button, a new Mark Point will be created in A-Y order (Z is reserved for a weapon release markpoint). Designated Mark Point. A point on the ground can be set as a Mark Point as determined by the line of sight of an aircraft designation source. These sources include the HUD TDC, the Targeting Pod, Maverick Seeker, or TAD Cursor. To create a Mark Point in this fashion, place the designation point at the desired location and then perform a TMS Right Short press on the control stick. Each TMS right short press will create a new Mark Point in order (A-Y). Weapon Event. Each time a weapon is released, a Z Mark Point is created. Each subsequent weapon release replaces the last Z Mark Point.

Figure 355. Waypoint Information Page Once you have created one or more Mark Points, you must set the AAP STEER PT dial to the MARK position in order to select and cycle through the Mark Points you’ve created. With MARK selected on the STEER PT dial, you may use the ± Rocker Switch on the CDU to select the desired Mark Point. If you have HUD set as SOI and the AAP set up to MARK, you may also use DMS Up and Down to cycle through Mark points. When cycling through Mark points in such a manner, the selected Mark Point becomes the Steerpoint and SPI by default.

Create a Flight Plan
While we have shown how you can select and display a single Waypoint/Steerpoint, the Flight Plan function of the EGI CDU allows you to create Flight Plans of up to 40 Waypoints. The advantage of the Flight Plan is that it allows you to:     View all Waypoints of interest at once Drawing of lines between Waypoints on the TAD (route) Ability to cycle through each Waypoint in the Flight Plan and the selected Flight Plan Waypoint becomes the Steerpoint Create multiple Flight Plans

When flying a mission, displaying the Flight Plan will prove most useful in its ability to display the entire route of the mission at once and the ability to hook any of the Waypoints displayed on the TAD. To create a Flight Plan, you will first need to set the AAP PAGE dial to OTHER and set the AAP STEER PT dial to FLT PLAN. After setting up the AAP, select the Flight Plan Mode (FPM) Function Select Key on the CDU. When you open the FPM page, you will see any Flight Plans already created for the mission listed on the left side. They will be listed in order: 01, 02, 03, etc. and may have a name assigned. If there are more than three Flight Plans, you will have to Page Down to the next page.

462 NAVIGATION

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Flight Plan 01

Next Flight Plan Number

Figure 356. Flight Plan Page At the bottom of the page is listed the next possible number for a Flight Plan (02 in the case above) and <NEW FP> is written in parentheses to the right. Using the CDU or UFC keypad, type the name you want to give to the next Flight Plan (02 in this case).

Name of New Flight Plan in Scratchpad

Figure 357. Name of New Flight Plan Once entered, press the lowest left LSK (next to the 02 text) to create the Flight Plan. The new Flight Plan (02 TEST PLN) will now be displayed on the Flight Plan list.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 463

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

New Flight Plan Created Add Waypoints to Flight Plan

Figure 358. New Flight Plan Created If you now select the new Flight Plan by selecting the left LSK for this Flight Plan entry, you can toggle between MAN (manual) and AUTO (automatic). This will regulate if the next waypoint in the Flight Plan is manually or automatically selected after the preceding one is reached. With the new Flight Plan selected, press the FPBUILD LSK to add Waypoints to the Flight Plan.

Flight Plan Name

Waypoints

Figure 359. Add Waypoints to the Flight Plan To add a Waypoint to the opened Flight Plan, enter the number of the Waypoint you wish to add to the Flight Plan on the CDU or UFC keypads, and then press an LSK on the left side that does not already have a Waypoint assigned. After you have added three Waypoints, you will need to press the Page Down rocker on the CDU to go to the next page. Enter all of the Waypoints you wish to comprise the Flight Plan. Note: Waypoint 0 denotes your starting position. With the Flight Plan created, you will see the entire Flight Plan (Waypoints and connecting lines) on the TAD as long as you have FLT PLAN selected on the AAP.

464 NAVIGATION

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Steerpoint as SPI Flight Plan Waypoints and Lines

Figure 360. New Flight Plan on TAD With a Flight Plan active, you can cycle through the Waypoints of the Flight Plan using the ± Rocker Switch on the CDU to set the steerpoint. If the HUD is SOI, you can cycle through the Flight Plan waypoints using DMS Up and Down. Note: The selected Waypoint becomes your Steerpoint automatically.

Setting Desired Time on Target (DTOT)
For each waypoint you can set a Desired Time on Target (DTOT) such that you will be given cues to help you reach a waypoint exactly on time. This can be important when de-conflicting with other forces and coordinating your attacks with your flight. When you view the WAYPOINT page for any Waypoint, the DTOT field is on the right side. By using the CDU or UFC keypads you can enter the hour/minute/second (xx-xx-xx) that you want to reach the Waypoint and then press the LSK to the right of the DTOT label. This will set the DTOT for that waypoint.

Desired Time On Target Setting

Figure 361. Waypoint Information Page

EAGLE DYNAMICS 465

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Once a DTOT is set, you will be provided the required speed you need to fly at to reach the Waypoint at the set DTOT. When the DTOT Waypoint is also the Steerpoint, you can view the STEER page to view the required airspeed. This is located on the right side of the page and can be displayed according to airspeed type:    RIAS. Required Indicated Air Speed. RTAS. Required True Air Speed. RGS. Required Ground Speed.

By adjusting your airspeed to match this value, you should reach the Steerpoint at the desired time.

Required Air Speed for DTOT

Figure 362. Steerpoint Information In addition to the required air speed indication on the CDU, the required airspeed will also be displayed on the HUD, directly below the airspeed numeric.

Required Air Speed for DTOT

Figure 363. Navigation HUD with RIAS

466 NAVIGATION

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

TACAN (TCN) Navigation
The Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN) system is a world-wide array of omni-directional beacons with unique frequency codes used primarily by military aircraft. Civilian aircraft use a similar system called VOR’s (VHF omni-direction Beacon) on a different frequency range. Many VOR stations are collocated with a TACAN. These stations broadcast both signals so they can be used by military and/or civilian aircraft. These stations are known as ―VORTACS‖. TACAN beacons can not only be set on the ground, but they can also be attached to aircraft and even ships (aircraft carriers). TACAN serves as a useful means to quickly navigate to a defined location… often an airfield in this case.
Test TACAN Mode Dial

Channel Select XY Channel Select

Figure 364. TACAN Panel

TA CA Ns a nd IL S s i n t he ga m e
TACAN and ILS data look the Airdromes Data table in the Supplements chapter. Often KC-135 tankers will also be assigned a TACAN. Please consult the mission briefing for the frequency. You can also view TACAN codes on the CDU DIVERT page. Before starting a TACAN approach though, you will want to do the following:

S el e ct TA CA N S ta ti o n
1. On the TACAN Operation and Control Panel, dial in the channel of the desired TACAN station (co-located with the airfield you want to land at). With the Channel Select knob, rotate it to select the first digit channel code number. With the XY Channel Select knob, right click to select between selection of the second digit or X or Y. Set the panel Mode Dial accordingly to REC, T/R, A/A REC, or A/A T/R. a. b. REC. Your TACAN operates in receive mode only and provides bearing, course deviation, and station identification. T/R. The TACAN acts in a transceiver mode (send and receive) and provides bearing, range, deviation and station identification. This will be your most common selection.

2.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 467

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
c. d. A/A REC. TACAN operates in Air-to-Air mode and can only receive bearing, course deviation and station identification for a TACAN-equipped aircraft. A/A T/R. TACAN operates in Air-to-Air transceiver mode and provides bearing, range, deviation, and station identification with a TACAN-equipped aircraft.

In most cases, you will keep the TACAN set to the T/R mode. 3. From the Navigation Mode Select Panel, press the TCN button.

Nav i ga t e t o S el ec t e d TA C AN S ta t io n
Once a valid TACAN station has been entered on the TACAN panel, the station is within operative range, and TCN is selected on the Navigation Mode Select panel, you will be provided steering information on the HSI to the selected station. TACAN HSI Indication:
1 2

Figure 365. HSI Displaying TACAN Steering 1. Range Indicator. When TCN is selected from the Navigation Mode Select Panel, and the selected TACAN station is within operative range, this indicator will display range in nautical miles (000 to 9999) to the station. If the range is not reliable, a warning flag is placed over the indicator. Note: TACANS are considered reliable for only 130 nm, so the maximum distance between TACANS is generally 260 nm. 2. Bearing Pointer 1. The head of this pointer (marked with a ―1‖ on the head), points to the magnetic bearing of the selected TACAN station when TCN is selected from the Navigation Mode Select Panel. To fly the correct heading to reach the selected TACAN station, maneuver the aircraft such that Bearing Pointer 1 is pointed towards the top of the HSI along the lubber line.

468 NAVIGATION

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

ILS Navigation
The landing approach using the Instrumented Landing System (ILS) is generally used under Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) conditions due to night or bad weather. When used, the ILS provides vertical and horizontal steering information to help you fly down the correct glide slope and heading to a safe landing. The ILS consists of an AN/ARN-108 receiver and the ILS control panel on the right console. Steering information is then presented on the ADI and HSI instruments. An ILS results in a straight in approach. In addition to the instrument indications, the ILS has a localizer audio signal. The ILS provides an audio cue when flying over either the outer or inner landing beacons. You can control the audio levels on the Intercom control panel. When flying over a beacon, the MARKER beacon signal light will also illuminate on the front dash. Most, but not all runways, allow landings from either direction but will depend on the direction of the wind (you land into the wind). The ILS system should be used for the appropriate landing runway as directed by ATC. Some runways, like Batumi, only have a single landing direction and no beacons. The ILS operates between 108.1 and 111.95 MHz and has 40 possible channels selected from the ILS control panel.

S el e ct IL S F r e qu e nc y
1. 2. 3. Turn on the ILS panel by left clicking on the OFF/PWR switch. On the ILS Control Panel, use the left and right dials to set the frequency of the ILS station you wish to receive from. You can view airfield ILS frequencies on the CDU DIVERT page. On the Navigation Mode Select panel, press the ILS button.

Nav i ga t e IL S G li d e S lo p e a n L oc al iz er
Once a valid ILS station has been entered on the ILS panel, the station is within operative range, and ILS is selected on the Navigation Mode Select Panel, you will be provided steering information on the ADI and HSI to the selected station (much like TACAN).

EAGLE DYNAMICS 469

this fixed scale and moving caret indicator displays the position of the glide slope in relation to the aircraft. the caret is the glide slope.
470 NAVIGATION
. you want to bars centered and forming a perfect cross on the ADI (aka ―center the bars‖). Glide Slope Warning Flag (not visible). it indicates that you are below glide slope and you need to increase altitude.
3. The common terminology would be ―you are 2 dots high‖. The term would be ―you are 1 dot low‖. ADI Displaying ILS Steering 1. If it is high. Conversely. When this horizontal bar is centered on the ADI. If the bar is right of ADI center. The vertical localizer bar indicates if you are left or right of runway alignment. For a proper glide slope approach. you are low.
2. Basically. you are flying down the glide slope projected by the ILS vertical steering component. For example: if the caret is on the bottom dot. Localizer and Glide Slope Bars. If the bar is above the center of the ADI. if the carat is on the first dot above middle you are below the glide slope. you are above the glide slope. It is a general rule that if you go more than 1 dot low or more than 2 dots high you go missed approach and try again. fly to the right to center it.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
ILS ADI indications:
2
1 3
Figure 366. Located along the left side of the ADI. Glide Slope Deviation Scale and Glide Slope Indicator. this indicates that there is a problem in receives adequate glide slope signal. When displayed.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
FLIGHT FUNDAMENTALS
EAGLE DYNAMICS 471
.

the greater the lifting force. The two engines generate forward thrust by exhausting air at high speed in the opposite direction. Though it is impossible to model every aspect of flight training. The more forward the throttles are. Fighter pilots of all countries practice for many years to achieve the skills necessary to get the maximum performance out of their aircraft. the fast you go. the wing generates less lift as altitude increases. Given that air over the wing generates lift. This results in a region of low pressure over the top of the wing that can increase or decrease according to airspeed. it is nevertheless important to understand some principles of combat aviation and how to max-perform the aircraft in both air-to-ground and air-to-air engagements. Counteracting this is the force of gravity. In the A-10C. the more fuel is being supplied and the greater the amount of thrust. In the A-10C. the density of air also dictates lift. thrust is generated by the two TF-34 engines.
Upper
Lower
Figure 367. As such. the thrust the engines are generating is governed by the amount of fuel being supplied to them as set by the engines throttles in the cockpit. Lift. but all combat aircraft. The amount of thrust generated is proportional to the mass of the airstream multiplied by the velocity of the airstream. Lifting Surface in Airstream
472 FLIGHT FUNDAMENTALS
.
Aerodynamic Forces
The most fundamental aspect of flight are the four main forces that act on an aircraft: Thrust. This not only applies to the A-10C.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
FLIGHT FUNDAMENTALS
To be successful in air combat is not an easy task. This is done as a result of Bernoulli‘s principle by which the wing moving through the airstream fast enough (using thrust) results in the airstream being faster over the top of the wing than the bottom of the wing. Lift is generated by the wings. Because air density decrease with altitude.

Ground Speed (GS) is the speed of the aircraft relative to the ground. e. The velocity vector indicates the actual flight direction of the aircraft. atmospheric density. Modern.
Total Velocity Vector (TVV)
The total velocity vector indicator is a common feature on western HUDs.
Air Speeds
The various systems and gauges of the A-10C use a variety of ways to express airspeed. the aircraft will fly directly into that point. the calibrated airspeed is further corrected for compressibility errors and becomes Equivalent Airspeed.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 473
. air density decreases the IAS value will decrease in relation to the Ground Speed. At high speeds and altitudes. highly maneuverable aircraft like the A-10C can fly at high angle-of-attack (AoA) .when the aircraft flies in one direction but the longitudinal axis is directed in another. When flying at sea level.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Drag.. you can think of it as the speed that the aircraft's shadow passes over the ground beneath you. or instrument error. and flaps. This indicator is an important tool for pilots and can be used for everything from combat maneuvering to landing approaches. it is also called the Flight Path Marker (FPM). However. drag is the resistance that a body moving through a fluid medium experiences and that counteracts thrust. True Airspeed is typically shortened to "TAS". Gravity is actually a force of acceleration on an object. Otherwise known as air resistance. The Earth exerts this natural force on all objects. As your altitude increases. Being a constant force. Calibrated airspeed (CAS) is the speed indicated by the pitot tube airspeed indicator after correction for instrument error. If you place the velocity vector on a point on the ground. when there is wind. and this most often takes the form of surfaces that are introduced into the airstream around the aircraft such as speed brakes. KTAS = knots true airspeed. temperature. Thrust creates lift to counteract gravity. Gravity. it always acts in the same direction: downward. Indicated Airspeed Speed (IAS). landing gear. Drag can be purposely used on aircraft in order to change flight characteristics. an estimation of the wind (wind data as entered in CDU) is used to make an adjusted calculation that computes an estimated ground speed from the True Air Speed. is an instrumented reading obtained from an air speed indicator (the pitot tube on the right wing) and is uncorrected for altitude. These include: True Airspeed (TS) is the actual speed of the aircraft through the air. In order for an aircraft to take off. eventually.g. Under zero wind conditions this is equal to the speed over the ground (Ground Speed). calibrated airspeed is the same as equivalent airspeed and True Air Speed (TS). If there is no wind it is also the same as Ground Speed. which may not correspond with where the nose of the jet is actually pointed. enough lift must be created to overcome the force of gravity pushing down on the aircraft. In other words.

One has to keep this in mind or the aircraft could depart controlled flight. one should reduce thrust. but be careful not to re-enter a spin. and keep the flight stick pushed forward. you’re an easy target for the enemy. the airflow becomes disrupted over the wing and the wing ceases to generate lift. It is especially dangerous to get into stalls when in air combat. When aircraft AoA is increased up to a critical value. The stall may happen when the pilot exceeds the allowed AoA. Increasing indicated airspeed at a constant AoA can also contribute to lifting forces.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Angle of Attack (AoA)
As described above. However. The control devices should be kept in this position until the aircraft stops spinning and enters a controllable. The angle between the velocity vector projection and the aircraft’s longitudinal axis is termed angle-ofattack. nose-down pitch angle. one needs to pull back on the stick and thereby increase AoA. induced airframe drag also increases when AoA and airspeed increase. When aircraft AoA is increased up to critical value. When in a spin. When in a spin. place the aircraft back into level flight. Some types of aircraft may also oscillate in pitch and roll. the aircraft may depart if the pilot exceeds AoA limits. As a general rule. AoA and IAS are connected with an aircraft’s lift characteristics. Altitude loss during a spin can reach several hundred meters. After recovering. the aircraft rotates about its vertical axis and constantly loses altitude. For example. he generally increases the aircraft angle-of-attack. Limitations are always indicated on the aircraft’s AoA indicator gauge. in a spin and out of control. When the pilot pulls the control stick back. There are many methods to recover various aircraft types from a spin. the pilot has to concentrate all his attention on recovering the aircraft. the velocity vector may not coincide with the longitudinal axis of the aircraft. aerodynamic lifting force also increases. the aircraft will start to lose altitude. deflect rudder pedals in the opposite direction of the spin.
474 FLIGHT FUNDAMENTALS
. If during a straight and level flight the pilot reduces the engine thrust. To continue level flight. Asymmetrical air-mass separation from the left and right wings can induce side movement (yaw) and stall the aircraft.

The higher the turn rate. As long as the force of gravity is balanced by the lifting force. When the aircraft’s bank angle changes the lift force projection on the vertical plane decreases.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Turn Rate and Radius of Turn
The aerodynamic lift force vector is oblique to the aircraft’s velocity vector. the aircraft maintains level flight. According to these values. Turn rate is measured in degrees per second. you must distinguish between sustained corner velocity (no speed loss) and instantaneous corner velocity (with speed loss) turn rates.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 475
. the quicker the aircraft can change its flight direction. To max-perform your aircraft. Important indicators of maneuvering capability are maximum turn rate in the horizontal plane and radius of turn. These values depend on the aircraft’s indicated air speed. the best aircraft should be characterized by a small turn radius and a high turn-rate over a broad range of altitudes and speeds. and its lifting characteristics. altitude.
Figure 368: Aircraft aerodynamic forces The amount of available lift influences the aircraft’s maneuvering characteristics.

The ―dog house‖ looking plot is the aircraft’s turn performance along this scale. corner speeds are in the 600-1000 km/h range. this speed will vary.2 degrees per second). the aircraft will slow down due the high-G excursion. By then entering a sustained G-loading turn. Airspeed is displayed along the X axis and degrees-per-second is displayed along the Y axis. The diagram below illustrates a turn rate vs.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 369: The forces acting at the aircraft maneuver
Turn Rate
When G-load increases: turn rate increases and radius of turn decreases. Such a diagram is often called an Energy and Maneuvering (EM) diagram. By keeping the aircraft AoA close to maximum you can hold this turn radius and maintain a sustained turn with a constant airspeed of 600 km/h. For typical fighters. the turn rate will increase up to 22 degrees per second with noticeably decreasing of turn radius. Though the maximum turn rate occurs at 950 km/h and has a maximum turn rate (18.
476 FLIGHT FUNDAMENTALS
. the speed to achieve a smaller turn radius is around 850-900 km/h. Doing this. KIAS (knots indicated airspeed) performance chart of a modern fighter at afterburner thrust. This simultaneously decreases turn radius. There is an optimal balance at which maximum possible turn rate is achieved with the smallest possible turn radius. The other lines represent G-loads and radius of turn. For example: performing a sustained turn at 900 km/h. can pull maximum G to increase turn rate to 20-degrees per second for a short time period. the pilot. if necessary. For other aircraft. Using such a maneuver will help either achieve a positional advantage or to break a bandit off your six.

In theory. The airspeed loss is due to the significant drag generated by the high G and AoA levels. the aircraft can perform a steady turn until it runs out of fuel. but is achieved without airspeed loss. AoA and G loading factors can often reach their maximum.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 477
. You may be in an energy-hole after doing so though. instantaneous turn. it is the fastest way to get your nose on a target. Although it will slow your aircraft down. The sustained turn rate of turn is lower than the instantaneous turn rate. When performing a sustained turn. drag and gravity are balanced by engine thrust. allowable values in a ―max-performance‖.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 370: Turn Rate of Modern Fighter
Sustained and Instantaneous Turns
An instantaneous turn is characterized by high turn rates and airspeed loss during maneuvering.

kinetic energy is determined by airspeed.
478 FLIGHT FUNDAMENTALS
. In close combat. Because thrust developed by the engines is limited. In this case you can say that the price for cheap turn rate was too high. If your airspeed reduces significantly. Standard Day. You should also try to maintain high altitude and not lose it without good reason (this is money in your energy bank). Suppose there is a constant replenishment (while the aircraft’s engines are running). Optimal control requires rational ―money‖ consumption for necessary maneuver purchases. However. Suppose that energy is equivalent to ―money‖ used to ―buy‖ maneuvers. try to fly the aircraft at speeds that maximize your sustained turn rate while minimizing your turn radius. The aircraft will lose energy. Maximum Thrust
Energy Management
In air combat. flying at a high AoA will cancel out the thrust. This will allow you to gain speed quickly. the pilot should keep his flight envelope such that he is maneuvering at the aircraft’s maximum sustained turn rate and minimizing turn radius simultaneously. You now have little money left in the bank and are an easy target for an enemy with a fist full of cash. you need time to do this unloading carefully or you will give an enemy an easy kill. To prevent this during combat. you should avoid high-G maneuvers that result in speed loss. you have to reduce AoA by pushing the stick forward and ―unloading‖ the aircraft. Therefore. Potential energy is determined by the aircraft’s altitude. The total energy of an aircraft can be represented as a sum of potential energy and kinetic energy. Performing high-G turns causes the aircraft to lose speed and consequently the energy supply (bank) lowers.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 371: A-10 Sustained Turn Performance. without a critical need. the pilot must control the aircraft’s energy state.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
FLIGHT SCHOOL
EAGLE DYNAMICS 479
.

Takeoff trim check. Set Flaps for takeoff (MVR 7 degrees). Check engine instruments for nominal indications from Engine Monitoring Instruments Panel.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
FLIGHT SCHOOL
General Requirements
The following Flight School chapter is here to provide you with the requirements and our recommendations for flying the A-10C after you have completed the Startup and have a good grasp of navigation and the principles of flight.
Taxi Preparation and Taxi
Check the instruments for any indications that engines.            Check core RPM. flights can be performed without SAS in case of systems failure or training purposes. from taxi prep to engine shut down. Verify that both EGI and TCN lights on Navigation Mode Select Panel are lit. Enable oxygen flow to NORMAL on Environment System Panel. and it assumes that all aircraft systems are working properly (no failures). Engage nosewheel steering. Make sure that there are no emergency indications on the caution light panel. RPM should not exceed 70%. Press T/O TRIM button on the SAS Panel. Ensure speed brakes are closed. The primary way to fly the A-10C is by using instrument flying with reference to the attitude direction indicator (ADI) and the head-up display (HUD) indication. this provides much greater stability in all flight regimes. Set exterior lights from Lighting Panel: o Taxi: Strobe is OFF and Nav Lights set to Dim Flash
480 FLIGHT SCHOOL
. Nevertheless.000 lbs. Move throttles from IDLE to MAX and back to IDLE within 2 seconds. Stabilize throttles at IDLE for at least 10 seconds. Maximum taxi weight is 46. hydraulics and electrical systems or components are not working properly. It is recommended that the aircraft always be flown with the Stability Augmentation System (SAS) engaged. All warning systems should indicate normal operations. Flight School will cover each phase of a sortie. The A-10C is still quite controllable without SAS assists.

Enable Pitot Heat from the Environment System Panel. Release the brakes and advance throttles to MAX (full forward). At approximately 10 knots prior to takeoff speed. Use the toe brakes to slow and stop the aircraft. wait 20 seconds. During takeoff roll. and Taxi Light ON as required
Move throttles forward slowly as required to start forward movement. Ensure anti-skid switch is set to ANTI-SKID on the Landing Gear and Flap Control Panel. If the aircraft is loaded with live ordnance. Rotation is generally around 135 knots with a combat load. While taxiing. Check engine instruments for proper indications on the Engine Monitoring Instruments Panel. Monitor engine instruments on the Engine Monitoring Instruments Panel. Use the rudder pedals to steer the aircraft left and right. Nose wheel steering off at 70KIAS. pull back on the control stick and establish a pitch angle of 10 degrees. let the aircraft fly itself off the runway. do not use differential braking to steer.
Runway Lineup Checks
Once lined up for takeoff on the directed runway. you will need to perform the final checks:       Final check of flight instruments for any abnormalities. wait 10 seconds after the aircraft starts its takeoff roll before you start yours. With pitch established at 10 degrees. Navigation Lights set to FLASH.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
o o      Flight: Strobe is ON and Navigation Lights set to STEADY Night Taxi: Strobe is OFF. Hold down the brakes and increase throttles to 90% core RPM to run up engines.
Normal Takeoff
     If an aircraft is taking off ahead of you. Taxi speed should be between 15 and 25 knots. the canopy should never be opened or closed while turning. Do not yank back on the stick to get the aircraft airborne!

EAGLE DYNAMICS 481
. maintain directional control using nosewheel steering until flight controls become effective. Make sure all warning and caution lights are off on the Caution Light Panel.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

Crosswind Takeoff
When taking off in a crosswind, the aircraft will want to weather-vane into the wind (turn into the wind). This will have the result of raising the upwind wing. To counteract, you want to use a slight amount of aileron into the wind direction will help keep the wing level. You will also want to use a little rudder input to keep a straight takeoff roll down the center of the runway. When reaching 70 knots, nosewheel steering should be disengaged if the crosswind is greater than 20 knots. After nosewheel steering is disengaged, use the rudders to maintain takeoff roll direction. During rotation, be careful to smoothly blend rudder input to establish a proper crab angle into the wind. With a proper crab angle, the Total Velocity Vector (TVV) should be aligned down the runway when becoming airborne.

Climb Out
After becoming airborne at a positive rate, maintain takeoff pitch of 10 degrees during acceleration to climb speed. Once established in the climb:     Retract the landing gear from the Landing Gear and Flap Control Panel. Retract flaps to the UP 0 degrees position. Adjust pitch and engine power to maintain climb to specified speed and altitude. Check oxygen regulator is on when passing over 13,000 feet from the Environment System Panel.

Basic Maneuvers
When flying the A-10C, you will need to understand the basics of flying the aircraft from one point to the next. This comes down to four basic aspects of flying the aircraft:     Adjust your airspeed to reach your destination and not stall the aircraft Changing the altitude of the aircraft from takeoff, to cruise, to landing Changing the heading (flight direction) of the aircraft to reach your destination Trimming the aircraft

Using a combination of these four basic points allows you to perform much more complex maneuvers. Note: When maneuvering the aircraft with the control stick (pitch and roll), it is important to remember to not over-control the aircraft. Although there will be exceptions when you need to, most often just gentle movements of the stick (not rapidly to its limits) is required to maneuver the

482 FLIGHT SCHOOL

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
aircraft. Large, rapid stick movements can lead to rapid high angle of attack onset, high G-loading on the aircraft, and rapid loss of speed. Use a light touch and do not over-control! If you start to hear the steady or chopped angle of attack tone, decrease the pitch input until the tone is silenced.

Changing Airspeed
After takeoff, your airspeed will be the area of 135 knots. While this is sufficient for flight with full flaps, you will not reach your destination very quickly and you will not be very maneuverable. As such, you will want to increase your speed. To increase and decrease your airspeed, you have several methods available to you:  Aircraft engine power. The more you advance your throttles, the more thrust the engines will produce. Generally, you will monitor engine power as a function of fan speed and Core RPM on the Engine Monitoring Instruments Panel. Normal maximum power is 98% for Core RPM, 82% for Fan RPM at takeoff. Aircraft pitch angle and pitch rate. Generally, when pointing the nose up in positive pitch, the aircraft will slow down. When pointing the nose down in negative pitch, the aircraft will speed up. The more rapid you make a pitch change can also affect speed. Whether it is a pitch change in the horizontal plane or in the vertical plane, the more rapid and greater the pitch change the greater the G-loading on the aircraft. The greater the Gloading the greater the negative effect on your speed. Speedbrakes. By opening the speed brakes you can slow down the aircraft due to drag. Landing Gear. The landing gear can also slow you down due to increased drag, but they should only be lowered when below 250 knots. Landing gear is controlled from the Landing Gear and Flap Control Panel. Flaps. Lowering the flaps causes drag and this too will slow you down. The more they are extended, the greater the induced drag and more it will reduce your airspeed. You can monitor flap position from the Landing Gear and Flap Control Panel. Note that at higher speeds, the flaps will automatically retract.



 



To view airspeed, monitor the airspeed numeric on the HUD or the airspeed gauge on the front dash.

Airspeed

Figure 372. Front Dash

EAGLE DYNAMICS 483

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

Airspeed

Figure 373. Navigation HUD

Changing Altitude
To increase or decrease your altitude, you will do so by changing the pitch of the aircraft.  To increase altitude, pull back on the stick to raise the nose of the aircraft. As you increase pitch though, you will start to lose airspeed. If the aircraft starts to stall, you will need to lower the nose or increase power. To decrease altitude, push the stick forward and lower the nose of the aircraft below the horizon. As you pitch down though, you will increase your airspeed. To maintain current airspeed, you can reduce throttles or open the speed brakes.



To monitor altitude, view the barometric and radar altimeters on the HUD and the altimeter gauge on the front dash. You can also view your positive or negative vertical velocity with the Vertical Velocity Indicator on the front dash. To maintain constant altitude, maneuver the aircraft in pitch to keep the Total Velocity Vector (TVV) on the Horizon line. In such a situation, the VVI will indicate zero. When the TVV is above the Horizon line and you have sufficient speed, you will increase altitude. When the TVV is below the Horizon line, you will always decrease altitude.

484 FLIGHT SCHOOL

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Not that if you do not have sufficient airspeed, your aircraft will lose altitude regardless of pitch. In such a stall situation, you risk entering departed flight.

Vertical Velocity Indicator

Altimeter

Figure 374: VVI and Altimeter

Horizon Line

Total Velocity Vector

Barometric Altitude

Radar Altitude

Figure 375. Navigation HUD

EAGLE DYNAMICS 485

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

Changing Heading
To turn the aircraft in the horizontal plane to a new heading, you need to move the stick to the right or left and gently pull back. By rolling the aircraft in the direction you wish to point the aircraft and then pulling back on the stick, the aircraft will pull its nose in that direction (you can think of it as a horizontal loop). When you have reached the new, desired heading, center the stick and roll the aircraft back in the opposite direction to level the wings. Note the following:   The greater the roll angle will equate to the greater amount you must pull back on the stick to keep from losing altitude (TVV on the HUD horizon line). The more you pull back on the stick to make a turn will generate a higher G-loading on the aircraft and slow you down. If you lose too much speed, the aircraft may become uncontrollable. To keep from changing altitude during a turn, keep the TVV on the Horizon Line and adjust pitch and roll input on the control stick to do so.



You can view your current heading on the bottom of the HUD. The heading scale shows your current magnetic heading indicated by the central caret. The desired magnetic heading indicator shows the heading to your steerpoint. If you turn the aircraft to align the heading caret with the desired magnetic heading indicator, you will be flying to your steerpoint. You can also view your current heading on the Horizontal Situational Indicator (HSI). The indicated heading at the top of instrument that is aligned with the top of the lubber line indicates your current heading.

Lubber Line

Figure 376: Horizontal Situational Indicator

486 FLIGHT SCHOOL

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Heading Scale

Desired Magnetic Heading

Figure 377. Navigation HUD

Trimming the Aircraft
Unlike some modern aircraft that offer automatic trimming capability, the A-10 series relies on manual trimming. The trim switch is used to move the control stick to a new "neutral "position. For example: if the nose wants to raise, you can input some nose down trim that will move the stick forward to a new neutral position. This relieves you from maintaining continuous pressure forward on the stick to maintain level flight when out of trim. When out of trim, you will notice the aircraft wanting to pitch, bank or yaw (pitch being the most common). The most common need for trim is when changing airspeeds. As the aircraft changes speed, the nose will want to raise and fall. You will be trimming-to-speed during different flight phases such as takeoff, cruise, and landing. The trim tabs on the control surfaces are electronically powered. In fact, with dual-hydraulic system loss, you will fly the aircraft in roll using the aileron trim tabs as a function of the Manual Reversion System. Setting trim, with practice, will soon feel like second nature!

_________________

EAGLE DYNAMICS 487

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

Aerial Refueling (Quick Flow)
For combat missions in particular, you may have an aerial refueling requirement. Although the A-10 can carry up to three TK600 external fuel tanks, these tanks are not combat-survivable and are never used on combat missions. The A-10C is equipped with a nose-mounted refueling receptacle that is fed from a boom-equipped tanker.

Preparation
When nearing the tanker location, you will want to place the flight in Echelon formation. 1. 2. 3. Radio contact tanker and inform of intent for refueling. At least one engine must be operating at 85% RPM. Safe the aircraft from AHCP:    4. Master Arm switch to SAFE GUN/PAC switch to SAFE LASER switch to SAFE

Safe aircraft from DSMS:  Set Maverick EO power to OFF

5.

Set up your Fuel System panel:  If you have a leak in any of the four internal fuel tanks, you should pull out the Fill Disable button for that tank. This will prevent the damaged fuel tank from being filled. Tank Gate switch to the closed position.

 6. 7.

Open the refueling receptacle slipway. Upon doing so, the READY light will illuminate. Fly the formation to the pre-contact position:    Wingman 2 takes observational position off flight lead wing (On Deck position). Second element takes observational position right of the On Deck position. Refueling order is FL  2  3  4

488 FLIGHT SCHOOL

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Precontact Position

Figure 378. Aerial Refueling, Start

Pre-Contact
Upon reaching the pre-contact position 1 nm behind the tanker in trail, you need to stabilize your position and establish a zero rate of closure on the tanker: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check you have sufficient fuel to complete process. Set IFF to Standby (STBY) Set CMSP to Standby (STBY) If at night or foul weather, enable the exterior lights from the Exterior Lighting Dial. If you cannot establish pre-contact, you must break away or risk an overrun. Request contact from tanker. If given permission, move forward and follow directions of the boom operator. Close to the tanker at 2-3 knots until reaching the contact position. Align the boom with the center longitudinal axis of the aircraft. Make constant reference between the boom and the tanker fuselage and avoid ―chasing‖ the boom.

Contact
1. 2. Once established in the contact position, the boom operator will ―fly‖ the boom into the receptacle. Once boom contact is made, confirm the LATCHED light on the canopy bow is illuminated. The READY light should extinguish.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 489

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
3. 4. Once both you and the tanker acknowledge contact, the refueling will start. For successive contacts, you must cycle the aerial refuel system by pressing the refuel/reset button (Nosewheel Steering button) or closing and opening the slipway door.

Disconnect
1. When the tanks are full, line pressure will automatically disconnect refueling. When this happens, the DISCONNECT light will illuminate. To manually disconnect, you can also press the nosewheel steering button on the control stick. Close the receptacle slipway door. Decrease power and drop back and down behind the tanker. Once you have pulled out of the contact position, you will establish yourself off the left wing of the tanker.

2. 3. 4.

Following your departure from the contact position, number 2 will move into the contact position and number 3 will move into the On Deck position. This pattern will continue until all aircraft are refueled. As each aircraft is refueled, they will reform with you off the tanker’s left wing.

On Deck Position

Precontact Position

Figure 379. Aerial Refueling, Mid

490 FLIGHT SCHOOL

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS

Landing Preparation
Prior to landing the aircraft, you should set up the aircraft in preparation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check that altimeter data is accurate Set Anti-skid switch to ANTI-SKID Turn on landing lights Check fuel quantity to confirm you have enough for planned approach Set HUD to Indicated Air Speed (IAS) Remove NVGs if your are already wearing them Turn EAC switch to OFF

Landing Traffic Pattern
After completing a sortie, perhaps the most challenging part may still await you… the landing. Depending on the time of day, weather conditions, and the amount of air traffic in the area, there are one of three landing methods you may need to use. 1. 2. 3. TACAN Approach. This approach is based on navigating to the selected Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN) station located on or near the airfield prior to landing. ILS Approach. This approach is based on flight direction from the Instrument Landing System (ILS). GCA Approach. A radar approach is based on directions provided by the Air Traffic Control (ATC) center.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 491

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]

TACAN Approach
4

1

2

3

Figure 380. TACAN Landing Pattern 1. Holding Pattern. You may be instructed by ATC to maintain a holding orbit at an assigned location and at the assigned altitude to de-conflict with other flights. Maintain airspeed between 200 and 350 KIAS. You will maintain this holding pattern until instructed by ATC to initiate your final approach fix. Penetration Descent. Once cleared to penetrate to the TACAN station, descend to the TACAN station location at a rate of approximately 1,200 to 1,500 ft/min on the ―VVI‖ indicator -300 feet for every mile traveled and maintain 200 – 250 KIAS. You may need to reduce throttle and use speed brakes to stay on-speed. Note that the TACAN station is most often located on the runway and your TACAN steering and distance indications will also be in regards to the selected airfield. As you descend to the level-off point, you will need to monitor your decent to make sure it is possible to reach our level-off point of 400 ft in a safe manner and not a at very steep dive angle. Level Off. Start to level off at 400 ft and fly a flat approach if you are performing a straight in approach or 600 ft if performing a circling approach. When reaching this point, your airspeed should be reduced to 150 KIAS at a minimum. You now need to put the

2.

3.

492 FLIGHT SCHOOL

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
aircraft into landing configuration (see later in this chapter). Visually spot the runway and land (straight in or circling). 4. Missed Approach. If during the final approach it appears you cannot safely land by the time you reach the Missed Approach Point (MAP), you must abort the approach, close the speed brakes, raise the landing gear, set flaps to UP, and increase airspeed to 200 – 220 KIAS.

ILS Approach
5

2

4

3 1

Figure 381. ILS Landing Pattern 1. ILS Approach. In ILS approach generally starts at 2,000 ft AGL with flaps UP and airspeed around 150 KIAS. With the ILS panel set to the desired airfield, the ILS needles on the ADI will provide localizer and glide slope steering. Maneuver the aircraft to center the bars and maintain CDI course steering. If on correct glide slope, the angle of attack indexer lights should show the green donut. Final Approach. On final approach and over the outer marker beacon (indicated by the Marker light and audio indication), open speed brakes to 40%, extend the landing gear,

2.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 493

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
lower flaps to the down (DN) setting and maintain landing glide slope angle of attack as indicated on ADI and AoA indexer lights. 3. 4. Outer ILS Marker. The outer maker beacon, when the ILS panel is set to the desired airfield, will be indicated by the Marker Light and audio marker tone when flown over. Inner ILS Marker. Once over the inner marker beacon, the Mark Light will illuminate again and the marker beacon audio tone will sound. The inner beacon is shortly before the runway threshold and a standard landing should then be performed. Missed Approach. If during the final approach it appears you cannot safely land by the time you reach the Missed Approach Point (MAP), you must abort the approach, close the speed brakes, raise the landing gear, set flaps to UP, and increase airspeed to 200 – 220 KIAS.

5.

Ground Control Approach (GCA)
Prior to approach, contact ATC and request approach and the ATC will provide you with heading, altitude and airspeed data at which to reach the pattern entry point. From there you will fly the following legs in communication with ATC. This could either be a straight in or circling approach to landing.

Circling Landing Approach
Depending on runway availability and wind direction, there are two general circular landing approach patterns:

494 FLIGHT SCHOOL

lower the landing gear. This will place you on the Base Leg at an altitude of 1. Maintain descent rate towards the runway at angle of attack on speed (AoA indexer light showing a green donut). you will initiate a 90-degree heading change with a 60-degree bank angle in the direction of the runway. If there are other aircraft in the flight. Base Leg.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
3
4
5
2
1
Figure 382.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 495
. When the end of the runway is 45-degrees behind you. Starting from 1. descend at a rate of -300 feet for every mile traveled and reduce speed to 150 KIAS. you should be at 300 ft and one mile from the runway. After reaching the pattern entry point according to ATC instruction. When the runway threshold is nearly off the wing and you are at the Perch Point. and lower the flaps to DN.
3.000 feet (offset from landing runway) with the gear up and flaps up and at 250 KIAS. you fly the downwind leg of the pattern starting at 2. Circling 180-degree Landing Approach 1. perform a 90-degree heading change towards the runway at a 60degree bank angle to enter final approach at around 300 feet. After rolling in on final. each aircraft will initiate the break into the base leg at 5 second intervals. You will gradually descend at a rate of -300 feet for every mile traveled.500 feet.500 feet. Maintain on-speed angle of attack. extend brakes to 40%. Before Glide Path Final Approach. Downwind Leg.
2.

500 feet. Base Leg. Starting from 1.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
4. descend at a rate of -300 feet for every mile traveled and reduce speed to 150 KIAS.
Initial Approach.
6
1
5
4 2
3
Figure 383. Missed Approach. you will initiate a 90-degree heading change with a 60-degree bank angle in the direction of the runway. perform
3. Circling 360-degree Landing Approach
1. Downwind Leg.000 feet (over the landing runway) with the gear up and flaps up and at a speed between 200 and 250 KIAS. After reaching the pattern entry point according to ATC instruction. When the end of the runway is 45degrees behind you. If the approach must be aborted. You will gradually descend at a rate of -300 feet for every mile traveled.000 feet between 250 and 300 KIAS. set flaps to UP. 2. close the speed brakes. This will place you on the Base Leg at an altitude of 1. you fly the downwind leg of the pattern starting at 2. When the runway threshold is nearly off the wing. raise the landing gear. On Glide Path Final Approach. 5. Enter and maintain the pattern at 2.500 feet.
496 FLIGHT SCHOOL
. Maintain glide slope at -500 FPM on the VVI and a green donut on the AoA indexer lights. and increase airspeed to 200 – 220 KIAS.

Straight In Landing Approach
From the landing approach point as directed by GCA. 4. and lower the flaps to DN.
Landing
After you have entered final approach from either a straight in approach or circling approach. On Glide Path Final Approach. This will allow you a way to access power quickly by retracting them. gently pitch back on the stick to flare the aircraft nose up and allow the main gear wheels to touch down gently first. and increase airspeed to 200 – 220 KIAS. speedbrakes open to 40%. raise the landing gear. set flaps to UP. note that more aft stick may be required to maintain proper attitude and the stick will be less responsive in pitch. begin an on glide slope descent directly to the runway to arrive one mile from the runway threshold at 300 ft AGL. Missed Approach. landing gear is down. close the speed brakes. If the approach must be aborted. Keep the airbrakes at 40% open. Once the main tires have touched down. Maintain on-speed angle of attack. This will keep you on the correct angle of attack approach. and flaps are set to the DN position. you need to land the aircraft.        You can also use the Total Velocity Vector (TVV) symbol on the HUD to best estimate your touchdown position. Keep the angle of attack index on the canopy frame centered on the blue "donut". Before Glide Path Final Approach. Maintain descent rate towards the runway at angle of attack on speed. 6. Allow the nose wheel to drop down gently and then use nose wheel steering to retain alignment down the runway.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
a 90-degree heading change towards the runway at a 60-degree bank angle to enter final approach at around 300 feet. Use gentle rudder input to maintain the crab angle. Carefully combine these to keep the flight path of the aircraft aligned down the runway. retard the throttles to IDLE and use the rudder pedals to keep you aligned down the runway during roll out. extend brakes to 40%. you should crab the aircraft into the wind and lower the wing in that direction.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 497
. Maintain glide slope at -500 FPM on the VVI.
5. Shortly before main wheel touchdown. If the aircraft center of gravity is forward of center.
Cr os sw in d L a n di n g
When landing in a crosswind. lower the landing year. It is important that you maintain on-speed angle of attack (indicated by AoA indexer). TACAN or ILS.

a slight crab angle is acceptable as long as you quickly correct with rudder to maintain alignment down the runway. use the rudders to yaw the aircraft to align with the runway and increase bank angle into the wind to maintain flight path.
Aircraft Shut Down
After clearing the runway and parking the aircraft. you can then shut down the aircraft doing the following: 1. Close the speed brakes Set wheel brakes Set Anti-Skid switch to OFF Open canopy as desired Turn TACAN panel OFF Turn ILS panel OFF Set IFFCC switch on AHCP to OFF Set CICU switch on AHCP to OFF Turn off left and right MFCDs
10. Turn TISL panel OFF if needed 19. 3. Turn off Anti-collision lights 15. 8. use nose wheel steering. After 5 minutes at IDLE. Set Pitot Tube heating switch to OFF 13. so you must compensate with rudder use.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Shortly before flaring the aircraft to land. Set EGI switch on AAP to OFF 17. Set CDU switch on AAP to OFF 18. Turn off Landing Gear / Taxi lights 11. 2. Retract flaps to UP 16. 6. After touchdown. the aircraft will want to weathervane into the wind. set left throttle to OFF and confirm core RPM reaches 5% and ITT is below 200c
498 FLIGHT SCHOOL
. 5. Do not exceed 10-degrees of crab angle at touchdown or it could lead to landing gear damage. 4. Set Position lights to Bright/Flash 14. 9. Set CMSP panel Mode dial to OFF 12. 7. Once your speed falls below 70 KIAS. When touching down.

Set Inverter switch to OFF 22. After 5 minutes at IDLE. set right throttle to OFF and confirm core RPM reaches 5% and ITT is below 200c 21.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
20. Turn off all radios
EAGLE DYNAMICS 499
. Set Battery switch of OFF 23.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
500 /
.

activate it. b. In the same manner.
System Select Switches
Mode Select Dial
Figure 384.
c. MAN. Automatic mode will automatically select the best Dispense and ECM programs and activate them. Manual mode requires you to manually select the Dispense program. but it will be up to you to place it in Standby mode. AUTO.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 501
. Semiautomatic mode will select the best Dispense program but it will be up to you to start and stop the program. SEMI mode will select the best ECM program according to the detected threat. Select the Mode of choice from the Mode Select Dial. Depending on the level of control and consent you wish to have. and select and initiate the ECM program. CMSP Panel From the Countermeasure Signal Processor (CMSP) panel: 1. it’s best to set up your countermeasure system ahead of time. When at a minimum of 40 nm from the target. you will want to configure several aircraft systems ahead of time so that you can most efficiently communicate and set up your attack. This will allow you to quickly select the needed countermeasure program and allow you to focus on the attack and less on setting up your defenses. you can select between the three options of: a.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
Target Area Ingress Preparations
Prior to reaching the target area and conducting your attack. you will want to take the following steps:
Set Up Countermeasures
Assuming enemy units will be shooting at you. SEMI.

When creating dispense programs. When entering a target area.
 
 
2. you probably want to have at least six general types:   Mix of chaff and flares released in a fast interval to defend against an incoming missile of unknown type (infrared or radar guided). The fastest way to do this is to set the Master Exterior light switch to the center position. Start selected program.
Armament HUD Control Panel (AHCP) Set Up
From the AHCP.
Turn Off Exterior Lights
The hostile artificial intelligence has a better chance of visually sighting you if you have external lights on. Select next DISP program. Chaff-only released at a low interval over a long period. CMS Right Short. RWR. This will turn off the position lights. When in MAN or SEMI Modes. you may wish to activate such a program to act as a preventative measure against infrared guided missile systems. you will want to enable the combat systems with enough time to spot any problem areas before rolling in on your target.
502 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. Mix of chaff and flares released at a low interval over a long period of time. Use this program to defend against an incoming infrared guided missile system.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Dispense Programs. Select previous DISP program. you can cycle DISP programs and start / stop the programs with the following HOTAS commands:     CMS Forward Short. When entering a target area. Chaff-only released at a fast interval. Cease active program. CMS Left Short. you may wish to activate such a program to act as a preventative measure against radar guided air defense systems. Use this program to defend against an incoming radar guided air defense system. you may wish to activate such a program to act as a preventative measure against both infrared and radar guided air defense systems. nose floodlights. formation lights. and anti-collision lights. CMS Aft Short. When entering a target area. and MWS System Select Switches to the ON position. so you will want to extinguish them when you ingress into the target area. JMR. nacelle floodlights. Flares-only released at a fast interval. Flares-only released at a low interval over a long period. 3.
Enable countermeasure systems by moving the DISP.

Note: Prior to target area ingress.
3. and enable power to the Mavericks if loaded. If GUNARM is selected. If ARM is selected. Set the GUN/PAC switch to either the ARM or GUNARM positions.
Review Digital Stores Management System (DSMS) Pages
Display the DSMS page on either MFCD to check for any red failure indications. review release profiles. PAC will be disabled. the Precision Attitude Correction (PAC) system will be used when employing the gun. Set the Master Arm switch to the ARM position. both the Targeting Pod (TGP) and Datalink (JTRS) switches should have been set to the ON position. Armament HUD Control Panel 1. 2.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Master Arm switch
GUN/PAC Switch
Laser Switch
Figure 385. If a Targeting Pod is loaded. move the Laser switch to the ARM position.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 503
.

This can be remedied by using DSMS Inventory to set the correct store or clear the station showing the error. We will review release settings for different weapon types later in this chapter. If a station is colored blue. you must reset the Master Arm switch from TRAIN to ARM.
504 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. This will happen if a loaded weapon profile includes a weapon that is not loaded on the aircraft. DSMS Status Page 1. To view profile settings: Select PROF (Profiles) from the DSMS Status page and this will display the Profile Main Page.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
View Profiles
Weapon Station in Training Mode
Figure 386.
Review weapon profiles and confirm correct weapon release settings. Review DSMS Status page. A red station generally indicates a profile and inventory conflict.
2. all 11 stations should show green (empty or solid). With the Master Arm switch set to ARM. A blue or red station requires the following actions:   BLUE station. RED station.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Select Profile
View details of selected profile
Make Active
Add or Remove Profile on HUD Rotary
Figure 387. To make the selected profile the active one. On the left side of the page is the Change Settings (CHG SET) OSB that will direct you to the Profile Settings Page where you can set additional release settings of the weapon assigned to the profile. press OSB 3. press OSB 17 (ACT PRO). DSMS Profile Control Page On the Profile Control Page. release settings are displayed on the right side of the page. This will display the Profile Control page. Add or remove a profile from the HUD Rotary by setting it to ON or OFF from OSB 9.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 505
. DSMS Main Profile Page Select a profile using OSB 19 and OSB 20 and the selected profile will have an arrow to the left.
Select New Profile
Profile Control Page Settings
Change Settings
Figure 388. VIEW PRO. To view details of the selected profile.

On the TAD. or the TAD cursor. you can also generate useful range and bearing data between the Hooked symbol and either you.
Hook Tactical Awareness Display (TAD) Objects
Prior to initiating the attack. DSMS Profile Settings Page As mentioned before.
H o ok in g T AD O b j ec t s
One of the more useful aspects of the hook function is to hook a TAD symbol and then have the Hookship box appear on the HUD.
Profile Settings Page Settings
Profile Settings Page Settings
Figure 389. bullseye. we will discuss specific control and settings options later in this chapter for each general weapon type. This can be done with a combination of joining the Situational Awareness Datalink (SADL) network and using the Hook function of the TAD to track navigation points and units with the Hookship symbol on the HUD.
506 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. you may wish to set up the TAD to better support your attack and provide yourself greater situational awareness.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
You can also use OSB 19 and 20 to cycle through Profiles.

To hook a symbol. Common and useful objects to hook when preparing for an attack include:      Your wingmen Egress waypoint Known enemy threat Offset waypoint Mission target assignment
HookShip Location
HookShip Locator Lines
Figure 391. or just keep the cursor over it to passive hook it. Navigation HUD with Hookship
EAGLE DYNAMICS 507
. place the TAD cursor over it and then press TMS Forward Short to active hook it. TAD Hooking Functions This can be particularly useful when having the Hookship symbol appear on the HUD and provide you a better cue of where the object is located out in the world.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
HookShip Mode
Hook Line
Hook Symbol Bearing. Range and Elevation
Figure 390.

Here is how you would do that: 1. Select TGP from one of the MFCD When the TGP page is first activated. The TGP will now be pointed at the SPI location. With the SPI now at the location you want the TGP to look. 2. The ―wedding cake‖ SPI symbol will now be shown over the TAD symbol. hold the China Hat on the throttle China Hat Forward Long. you can use the infrared and CCD cameras to search the target area for targets and threats. 4. On the TAD. slew the cursor over the TAD symbol nearest the intended target area. you can set it as your SPI and then do a TGP slave to SPI command (China Hat Aft Long). you may wish to slave the TGP line of sight to the target area.
508 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. it will be in Standby (STBY). 2. This sets the location as your SPI. you will need to do the following: 1. Press OSB 2 to select AG
Select A-G
Figure 392. If there is a waypoint at this area or some other type of TAD object. press and hold TMS Forward Long. To bring up the TGP A-G page. To start with though. 5.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Targeting Pod (TGP) Set Up
Prior to the attack. 3. When the cursor is over the symbol. You will want to do this from the TGP A-G page. TGP Standby Page
S ea rc h Tar g e t A re a
With the TGP A-G page selected. the TGP is a valuable tool to visually inspect the area from long range and to mark a SPI.

you may wish to set it as the SPI. This will place the SPI symbol on the TAD at the target location and the diamond TGP symbol on the HUD will now have the SPI line extending from it to the TVV when the symbol is in the HUD field of view. you can use the following commands to move and adjust the sensor:      Change Field of View between Narrow and Wide (China Hat Forward Short) Change camera type between infrared and CCD (Boat Switch center for CCD) If using infrared camera. the TGP point is the SPI but is outside the HUD field of view.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Once the TGP is oriented to this location. If the target is moving. TAD with Hooked SPI
EAGLE DYNAMICS 509
. press TMS Aft Short. press TMS Forward Long. you may wish to stabilize the TGP on that location in either an AREA or POINT track. In the case of the diagram below. To do so. If you wish to return to an INR track.
S e t S P I wi t h TGP
After you have found a target/location of interest using the TGP. change polarity between Black Hot and White Hot (Boat Switch Forward and Boat Switch Aft) Adjust zoom level (DMS Forward and Aft) Slew camera in horizontal and vertical (Slew Control)
Once you have found a target of interest. a POINT track would be your best choice.
TGP TAD Diamond Set as SPI
Figure 393. To toggle between AREA and POINT track press TMS Forward Short.

you will need to do the following: Laser Designate Target Using the laser of the TGP. Both of these functions can be performed from the TGP A-G page.
S e t Up L a se r a nd L S S
When approaching the target area. This can be a useful tool when handing off a target to a wingman or other unit or laser designating a target for a laser-guided bomb attack.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
TGP Diamond as SPI Outside HUD FOV
Figure 394. To do so. you can slave other systems like Maverick and the HUD TDC to the SPI by using the Slave All to SPI command by pressing China Hat Forward Long. After displaying the A-G page. you may also either laser a target with your TGP to designate for a flight member or use the TGP to search for and lock on to the laser designation from a flight member or JTAC. The first thing you need to do is set the laser to a pre-briefing code that both you and the entity to search for the laser spot will use.
510 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. A friendly unit using a laser spot tracker can then detect that laser energy and track it assuming both your laser and the laser tracker are set to the same laser code. you can track a target (stationary or moving) using the TGP and then mark it with the encoded laser. Navigation HUD with TGP as SPI Once you have set the SPI using the TGP. go to the A-G Control (CNTL) page.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Select A-G Control Page
Figure 395. an ―L‖ will appear on the Laser Status field on the TGP A-G page. there are two primary settings you will want to make: 1.
Laser Illumination Code
Laser Illumination Latch On or OFF
Laser Spot Search Code Entry
Laser Status
Figure 396. Additionally. a flashing ―L‖ will also appear on the HUD.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 511
. 2. the laser can be toggled On and Off with the nosewheel steering button and does not require you to hold the button down. the laser will fire only as long as you hold down the laser illumination button (Nosewheel Steering Button). With the Latch set to OFF. The default code is 1688. Set laser illumination to Latch ON or OFF. TGP A-G Page From the A-G Control page. TGP A-G Control Page After you are tracking the desired target with the TGP and are laser illuminating it. With the Latch set to ON. but you can change this by entering the new four digit code in the scratchpad and then pressing OSB 18 (L). Set the laser code.

initiate LSS mode by pressing and holding the DMS long press to the Right. As with the Laser code. the TGP video image will freeze and you will see the Situational Awareness Cue sweep back and forth as the TGP raster scans for the designation. there may be times when another aircraft or entity may laser designate a target for you. Upon doing so. the first thing you will need to do is go to the A-G Control (CNTL) page and enter the LSS code. a DETECT message will appear on the TGP. To do so. When a designation has been detected in the searched area at the correct code. CCRP HUD Search and Lock Laser Designation As you have learned to laser designate a target for another aircraft or friendly entity. you can then easily switch to an AREA or POINT track of that target and engage it. Once you are tracking a laser designated target. With TGP as SOI and the TGP pointed to the target area. After you have set the LSS code for the laser code you want the TGP to search for.
512 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. As with setting up your laser. this defaults to 1688 but any four digit code may be entered by first typing it into the scratchpad and then pressing OSB 17 (LSS).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Laser Illumination When Flashing
Figure 397. you will use the Laser Spot Search (LSS) and Laser Spot Track (LST) modes of the TGP. return to the main A-G page and either slew or slave the TGP line of sight to the general area you want the TGP to search for the designation laser.

TGP in LST Now that the designation is being tracked in LST mode. This is indicated by LST being displayed next to OSB 6 and the crosshairs will have a point track box in the center. TGP A-G Page With the laser designation detected. or an INR track with a TMS aft short press.
LST Mode LST Point Tracking
Laser Tracking Indication
Figure 399. you can switch the track to an AREA or POINT track with a TMS Forward Short press. if the designation point is mobile (like tracking a vehicle).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
LSS Mode
LSS Detect Message
Figure 398. the TGP will then attempt to track the spot and go into Laser Spot Track (LST) mode. A circle may also appear on the display that indicates where the TGP first detected the laser designation.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 513
.

Armament HUD Control Panel From the IFFCC Test Mode displayed on the HUD.
Master Arm switch
GUNPAC Switch
IFFCC TEST mode
Figure 400.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Gun Employment
Set Up IFFCC 30 MM Menu
From the AHCP.
514 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. use the Select Rocker switch on the UFC to select 30 MM and then press the ENTER button on the UFC. place the IFFCC switch in the TEST position.

When each is selected.
DSMS Status Page GUNS Indications
In the center of the DSMS Status page is the selected profile and above that is the current Master Mode setting. When you have completed the IFFCC 30 MM settings. place the IFFCC switch to the ON position to show HUD flight symbology.
Note: You will want to make sure this matches what was loaded on the aircraft in the mission editor and will generally be specified in the mission briefing. CM (Combat Mix) that includes both armor piercing and high explosive incendiary rounds. Set the ammunition manufacturer. You can cycle the Master Mode setting between NAV GUNS  CCIP  CCRP using
EAGLE DYNAMICS 515
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
ENTER Button
DATA Rocker Switch
Select (SEL) Rocker Switch
Figure 401. The three options include:    OLIN ALLT AVE
Regardless of choice. Best used for armored targets. AMMO MFG. Up Front Control Panel With the 30 MM menu selected. The three options include:    TP (Training Practice). all rounds have the same properties. Inert warhead rounds used for training.
MIN ALT. Best used for unarmored or lightly armored targets. This value can be set in increments of 100 feet and it determines the elevation in reference the Gun Minimum Range Cue (MRC) on the HUD. you can cycle the options for each by pressing the DATA rocker switch. AMMO TYPE. Set the ammunition type loaded on the aircraft. you have three options to cycle between using the Select Rocker switch on the UFC. HEI (High Explosive Incendiary) that only uses high explosive incendiary rounds.

At the bottom of the DSMS Status page is the Gun Status line. You may use the DSMS Inventory to assign new station loading or replenish depleted stores. TRAIN
The gun rounds remaining counter at the bottom of the DSMS Status page being in video or reverse video. GUNS will then appear on the DSMS Status page above the Profile name.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
the Master Mode Control Button on the stick. However. PAC is disabled and a second stage trigger pull will fire the gun. indicates the setting of the GUN/PAC switch. It will also be briefly displayed in the HUD.

Depending on the settings of the Master and GUN/PAC switches on the AHCP. SAFE Reverse Video.
Set the GUN/PAC switch to either ARM or GUNARM  If you set to ARM. you can practice expending weapons and DSMS and HUD will act accordingly. ARM or GUNARM
516 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. SAFE Green. weapons can be launched from the aircraft and active weapon stations and status are indicated in green.  Master Arm switch Setting. the data on the DSMS Status page will change accordingly. o o Video. If you set to TRAIN. ARM Blue. Cycle the Master Mode to GUNS. This indicates the number of gun rounds remaining and the type of gun rounds loaded (as set on the IFFCC 30 MM menu). If you set to GUNARM. You will next want to ARM and enable the GUN from the AHCP. the first stage of the trigger will active the Precision Attitude Correction (PAC) system and will attempt to keep the gun pipper over the target as long as the trigger is held down. Active weapon stations and status are indicated in blue. The reverse video color of the selected profile (center of DSMS Status) will indicate the Master Arm switch setting: o o o  White. Set the Master Arm switch to ARM or TRAIN   If you set to ARM. no actual weapons will be released. The second stage of the trigger will fire the gun.

To cycle between the different gunsights. Master and Gun SAFE
Master Arm switch ARM
GUNPAC Switch ARM
Figure 403. Each of these gunsights provides unique aiming and the choice of them often depends on personal preference or if there is a system failure. set HUD to SOI and then press the DMS Left Short. you will now have one of four types of gunsights on the HUD (CCIP Gun Reticle by default).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Master Mode Set to GUNS
Master Arm switch SAFE Gun Rounds Remaining and Ammo Type
Figure 402.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 517
. Master and Gun ARMED
Gunsights
With GUNS Master Mode selected and AHCP switches set up correctly.

the Minimum Range Cue indicator will appear to the right of the reticle. CCIP Gun Cross The CCIP Gun Cross acts much as the CCIP Gun Reticle. it is simply a case of ―putting the thing on the thing‖ and pulling the trigger. The position represents the lead required for a target moving at 20 knots perpendicular to the LOS. accurate data.
518 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. Using the pipper. but is more compact and removes the analog range bar and Moving Target Indexes.
C C IP G un Cr os s
Pipper
Range
Figure 405. The reticle contains Moving Target Indices that consist of vertical lines on either side of the pipper. The MIN ALT setting is calibrated to when the cue is at the 3 o’clock position of the reticle. If a MIN ALT other than 0 has been entered in the IFFCC 30 MM menu. When the reticle does not display true. The Moving Target Indices are roll stabilized such that an imaginary line between the vertical lines passing through the pipper remains parallel to the horizon. The center of the reticle is the aiming pipper and represents where the gun rounds will go assuming the target is within range.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
C C IP G un R e tic l e
Pipper Minimum Range Cue
Moving Target Indices
Analog Range Bar
Range
Figure 404. CCIP Gun Reticle The CCIP Gun Reticle is the default gunsight and provides the most aiming information of the four gunsights. an ―X‖ is drawn in the center. an ―X‖ is drawn through it. When the CCIP Cross is not providing accurate aiming information. Line of Sight range is indicated by the digital range numeric below the reticle and the analog range bar that winds or unwinds within the reticle.

As the rounds come out of the gun. . Don’t make yourself an easy target for the machine gun on the top of that tank!


EAGLE DYNAMICS 519
. and you should attack from behind the target where its armor is weakest using CM. place target half way between the pipper and left moving target indices before firing. It is primarily used when inaccurate target elevation information prevents an accurate CCIP solution. 8. Decreased dispersion and loss of velocity reduce the accuracy and effectiveness of the gun. you will want to keep the following points in mind:  Slant range greatly affects gun effectiveness. Effective engagement range generally ranges from .000-. For tanks. 4/8/12 Gun Reticle When accurate target elevation is not available.
Gun Use
When engaging with the gun in a strafing attack. you may want to use the moving target indices on the CCIP Gun Reticle.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
4/8 /12 Gu n Re t ic le
4.000 foot wind-corrected slant range solution.000-feet.000-foot pipper
Figure 406. and 12.5 to 2 miles slant range.000-. they will gradually disperse and lose velocity. this reticle provides three pippers calibrated to a slant range of 4. When lining up a shot. For example: if a target is moving left to right at an estimated 10 knots. If the target is moving. 4000-foot Gun Cross The 4000 ft Gun Cross displays a 4. Target fixation can lead to you not noticing an unseen threat or pressing the attack too close. be careful to avoid target fixation.5 miles should be maximum range.000-foot pipper
8.Fo o t Wi n d Co r re c te d G u n C r oss
Figure 407. They assume lead for a moving target at a constant speed of 20 knots perpendicular.
400 0 .000-foot pipper
12.

For heavy armored targets like a tank.5nm. Be careful not to spot your target though! If the expected target is enemy infantry. Prior to the strafing attack. 2.


Gun Strafe Not Using Precision Attitude Control (PAC): When engaging a target with the gun and the GUN/PAC switch set to GUNARM. you have two options: 1. You may also wish to release flares in case an infraredSAM near the enemy target has been launched at you but you did not see it. it is best to load the aircraft with an HEI gun load. the system cannot generate proper target altitude and a ―CCIP INVALID‖ message will appear on the HUD. To attack such a target accurately.5 and 1 nm. it is best to fire between . PAC does this by applying elevator and rudder control through the SAS to stabilize the aircraft nose pointing during gun fire. Generally conduct a strafe between 2 and . break off in both the horizontal and vertical to avoid hostile return fire. the PAC will not be used.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Once you have reached the minimum attack range. you will want to keep the following points in mind for a successful strafing attack:  Armored/fortified targets are best attacked from a High Angle Strafe in order to increase round density on target. As such. Increase altitude above target altitude Switch to 4/8/12 Gun Reticle or 4000-Foot Wind Corrected Gun Cross
520 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. The further away you engage will result in decreased rounds on target density. you may want to track the target using the targeting pod so that you can perform a battle damage assessment while coming off the target. CCIP INVALID HUD Message If the target is at an elevation higher than the current aircraft altitude (target on a hill higher than your current altitude for instance).

Gun Strafe Using PAC: PAC assists by stabilizing the aircraft during strafing and allowing much greater round density on target because the pitch and yaw will be controlled during gunfire to keep the rounds from walking from the initial target point. Area targets or lightly armored targets can be attacked in a Low Angle Strafe due to the increased round dispersion over an elongated area.

DSMS Status Page. Rocket Profile Selected
DS MS C o n tr ol P a g e f or R ock e ts
There are three release settings available for rockets on the Control Page. stations loaded with rockets will contain the following information:
Rocket Warhead Designation Number of Rockets Remaining on Station
Rocket Type
Figure 408.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Rocket Employment
DSMS Rocket Pages
On the DSMS Status page. Cycle this option to choose between four release types:  SGL (Singles).
EAGLE DYNAMICS 521
. Each press of the weapon release button will launch a single rocket. Release Type (OSB 6). Rocket Loaded Station    Top line indicates the warhead type of the rocket Bottom line indicates role of the rocket Left or right of box is the number of rockets remaining on the station
Weapon Station with Rocket
Figure 409.

 Escape Maneuver (OSB 20). you have additional setting options.
Note: When releasing a ripple of rockets. Each press of the weapon release button will launch the set number of rockets set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting. Each press of the weapon release button will release the number specified in the RIP PRS setting. Turn Level Turn maneuver
522 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
.
Release Type
Ripple Quantity
Release Mode
Figure 410. they will land centered around the pipper aimpoint. will determine if the profile is selected in the CCRP or CCIP rotary. Rocket Profile
DS MS S e t t in g s P a g e f or R ock e ts
On the Settings page for a rocket profile. This setting. Ripple Quantity (OSB 8). RIP SGL (Ripple Singles). Select type of escape maneuver between: o o o o NONE CLM. explosive warheads and illumination warheads may differ. Release Mode (OSB 10). Turning maneuver TLT. you may use this to set the number of rockets to release in each ripple. Climbing maneuver TRN. Select to release rocket in CCIP or CCRP release modes. Each press of the weapon release button will launch a single rocket from two different pods.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
   PRS (Pairs). along with being assigned to the HUD rotary. DSMS Profile Control Page. Note that some settings may not be available for all types of rockets. If either RIP SGL or RIP PRS are selected as the Release Type. in pairs. RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs). For instance.

Bomb Rack Delay (OSB 10). and the Master Arm switch set to ARM. On the left side of the HUD. Set desired time of flight of rocket from launch to time of impact. Horizontal Offset (OSB 7).
Much like the CCIP Gun Reticle. the projected flight time of the rocket if fired now is displayed. Set bomb rack delay between -0. Weapon Eject Velocity (OSB 9).
EAGLE DYNAMICS 523
. The profile name is both listed on the DSMS Status page and in the bottom left corner of the HUD. set the HUD as SOI and:   Select CCIP mode by pressing the Master Mode Control Button until selected. Set horizontal offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils. DSMS Profile Settings Page. You can either deliver rockets in CCIP or CCRP mode. you will place the CCIP Rocket Reticle over the target by maneuvering the aircraft. Used to set Minimum Range Caret (MRC) for illumination flare activation. Both have their advantages and disadvantages. The current mode is displayed in the center of the HUD. Vertical Offset (OSB 8). When greater than 2 nm slant range.40 and +0. the range to target will be displayed below the reticle as a numeric. To most easily select rockets in CCIP mode. Press the DMS Left or Right Short until you select a rocket profile.40.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
      Desired Time of Flight (OSB 19). Set vertical offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils. Minimum Altitude (OSB 18). Set ejection velocity of pod between -10 and +30 feet per second. you can put some rockets down range.
Escape Maneuver
Horizontal Offset
Desired Time of Fall
Vertical Offset
Minimum Altitude
Weapon eject velocity
Bomb Rack Delay
Figure 411. Rocket Profile
Rocket CCIP Use
With a rocket profile selected and configured.

the range numeric under the CCIP reticle is removed and the analog range bar within the reticle starts to unwind. Out of Range When the slant range to target is less than 2 nm.
524 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Rocket CCIP Reticle
Rocket Time of Flight
Pipper
Range Numeric Profile Name
Figure 412. CCIP Rocket HUD.

Upon doing so. A short distance from the top of the ASL is a small circle with a dot inside called the Solution Cue. Maverick.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 525
. The main advantage to using CCIP mode to deliver rockets is that it is more accurate than CCRP mode. a vertical Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) will be drawn on the HUD along the heading to the SPI.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Range Analog Bar
Figure 413. This could be done with the TDC. but unlike CCIP mode. there will be no range numeric or analog bar. Before using this mode. select a rocket profile and set the master mode to CCRP. Gun pipper or TGP. CCIP Rocket HUD.
Rocket CCRP Use
CCRP rocket delivery mode allows you to launch rockets in reference to the SPI and can be done from level flight or even a lofting delivery. In Range At around 1 nm. you will first need to designate the intended target as the SPI. hold down the weapon release button to launch rockets. Once the target is set as SPI. Also on the HUD will be the rocket reticle. The disadvantage is that it generally requires you to get closer to the target and keep your nose on it. TAD.

The advantage of rocket CCRP delivery is that you can engage from further way while in level flight or even pitched-up to loft rockets.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Solution Cue
SPI
Rocket Pipper Azimuth Steering Line
Figure 414. In doing so. Note that this can happen quickly and you may need to launch several rockets in a short time before you can no longer keep the pipper in the Solution Cue. You would generally use CCRP mode against a heavily defended target in order to suppress it. The disadvantage is that it can be much less accurate than CCIP delivery. CCRP Rocket HUD To aim and fire and rockets. you align the aircraft along the proper heading and attitude to launch rockets and impact at the SPI location. you must fly the aircraft to place the rocket reticle pipper inside the small Solution Cue.
526 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
.

While Manual Release is used as the default. 3.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Unguided Bomb Employment
Set Up IFFCC Menu
If you wish to deliver an unguided bomb in CCIP mode. 3/9 Consent to Release. you have the option to do so in Manual Release (MAN REL). you can select 3/9 or 5 MIL CR from the IFFCC Test menu. DSMS Status Page
EAGLE DYNAMICS 527
. You can directly select the weapon by pressing the OSB next to the weapon station box and creating a Manual profile of the selected weapon type (M/weapon name). and 5 Mil Consent to Release (CR) modes. move the IFFCC switch to the ON position
DSMS Unguided Bomb Pages
When an unguided bomb has been loaded on one of the 11 weapon stations and it has a corresponding weapon profile. 2. press the DATA rocker on the UFC to cycle between the three options When complete. To do so: 1.
General Purpose Bombs High Drag
Cluster Bomb
General Purpose Bombs on TER
Training Bombs
Figure 415. The selected weapon type (by Profile or Manual) will have its weapon station boxes shown in reverse video. its data will be shown in the appropriate weapon station box. Place the IFFCC switch on the AHCP in the TEST position With the CCIP CONSENT OPT line selected.

BDU-50 Low Drag General Purpose Practice Bomb
U ng u id e d B o m b DS M S P a g es
The following setup sections will show configuration options to deliver the three general types of unguided bombs. show the Pilot Release Option.
528 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. or indicate TER Left or right of box is the number of bombs remaining on the station
Weapon Type Mk82
Figure 416.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
DS MS S ta t us P a g e W ea p on S ta t i on B o x es
According to the type of unguided bomb. the information in the weapon box on the Status page:    Top line indicates the weapon type (ie MK-82) Bottom will either be blank. MK-82 Station Box
Pilot Release Option
Figure 417. MK-82AIR Station Box
Low Drag General Purpose Practice Bomb
Figure 418.

Unguided Bombs There are four possible release settings available for general purpose bombs on the Control Page. DSMS Profile Control Page.    Fuze Select (OSB 7). Select to release bomb(s) in CCIP or CCRP release modes. and N/T (Nose and Tail). Each press of the weapon release button will release two bombs from opposed wing stations. along with being assigned to the HUD rotary. RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs). Cycle this option between NOSE. Cycle this option to choose between four release types: o o SGL (Singles). Each press of the weapon release button will release the number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting. RIP SGL (Ripple Singles). you may use this to set the number of bombs to release in each ripple.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
DSMS Control Page for General Purpose (Low Drag) and Cluster Bomb
Release Type
Fuze Select
Ripple Quantity
Ripple Interval
Release Mode
Figure 419. If either RIP SGL or RIP PRS are selected as the Release Type. they will land centered around the pipper aimpoint.
o
o
Note: When releasing a ripple of bombs. Ripple Quantity (OSB 8). TAIL. Each press of the weapon release button will release a bomb.  Release Type (OSB 6). Release Mode (OSB 10).
EAGLE DYNAMICS 529
. Each press of the weapon release button will release the set number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting. This setting. will determine if the profile is selected in the CCRP or CCIP rotary. in pairs. PRS (Pairs).

Horizontal Offset (OSB 7).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
DSMS Settings Page for General Purpose and Cl uster Bomb
Escape Maneuver Horizontal Offset
Vertical Offset Desired Time of Fall Weapon eject Velocity Minimum Altitude Bomb Rack Delay
Figure 420. This setting will determine the placement of the Minimum Range Staple (MRS) on the PBIL and the Minimum Range Caret (MRC) within the CCIP HUD reticle. Set desired time of fall in seconds of the bomb from release to time of impact. Unguided Bombs On the Settings page for a general purpose bomb profile. Set horizontal offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils. DSMS Profile Settings Page. Set ejection velocity of pod between -10 and +30 feet per second. Weapon Eject Velocity (OSB 9).  Escape Maneuver (OSB 20). Used to set the minimum weapon release altitude cues on the HUD. release the bomb and it will have the inputted TOF.40. Minimum Altitude (OSB 18). Select type of escape maneuver between: o o o o  NONE CLM. Turning Maneuver TLT. you have additional settings options.

   
530 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. When the DRC and the bombing pipper coincide. Bomb Rack Delay (OSB 10). keep the DRC on the target when bombing pipper is over the target. Turn Level Turn maneuver
Desired Time of Fall (OSB 19). Climbing Maneuver TRN. Set vertical offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils.40 and +0. If you wish to have the bomb drop according to the set TOF. Vertical Offset (OSB 8). The time set will determine the Desired Release Cue (DRC) location on the Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL). Set bomb rack delay between -0.

Cycle this option between NOSE. This setting. DSMS Profile Control Page. If either RIP SGL or RIP PRS are selected as the Release Type. setting the fuze to NOSE will have the bomb drop without the ballute deploying (low drag). Cycle this option to choose between four release types: o o o o SGL (Singles). TAIL. Ripple Quantity (OSB 8). the bomb will be dropped as a high drag bomb with the ballute deploying. If however you select N/T or TAIL. in pairs. Each press of the weapon release button will release a bomb. you may use this to set the number of bombs to release in each ripple.  Fuze Select (OSB 7). Each press of the weapon release button will release the number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting. and N/T (Nose and Tail).
 
EAGLE DYNAMICS 531
. Release Mode (OSB 10).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
DSMS Control Page for General Purpose Bomb. High Drag Unguided Bombs There are four possible release settings available for general purpose high drag bombs on the Control Page. they will land centered around the pipper aimpoint. Each press of the weapon release button will release two bombs from opposed wing stations. PRS (Pairs).
Note: When releasing a ripple of bombs. will determine if the profile is selected in the CCRP or CCIP rotary.  Release Type (OSB 6). RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs). Select to release bombs in CCIP or CCRP release modes. Each press of the weapon release button will release the set number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting. High Drag
Release Type
Fuze Select
Ripple Quantity
Ripple Interval
Weapon Type
Figure 421. RIP SGL (Ripple Singles). If a MK82AIR is selected. along with being assigned to the HUD rotary.

Used to set the minimum weapon release altitude cues on the HUD. Select type of escape maneuver between: o o o o  NONE CLM. Turning maneuver TLT. Set desired time of fall in seconds of the bomb from release to time of impact when it is set to high drag pilot option release mode. This setting will determine the placement of the Minimum Range Staple (MRS) on the PBIL and the Minimum Range Caret (MRC) within the CCIP HUD reticle. Set vertical offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils. Low Drag Time of Fall (OSB 16). DSMS Profile Settings Page. If you wish to have the bomb drop according to the set TOF. Vertical Offset (OSB 8). The time set will determine the Desired Release Cue (DRC) location on the Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
DSMS Settings Page for General Purpose Bomb. keep the DRC on the target when bombing pipper is over the target.


 
532 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. Turn Level Turn maneuver
Minimum Altitude (OSB 18). If you wish to have the bomb drop according to the set TOF. Horizontal Offset (OSB 7). The time set will determine the Desired Release Cue (DRC) location on the Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL). keep the DRC on the target when bombing pipper is over the target. High Drag
Escape Maneuver
Horizontal Offset
Minimum Altitude
Vertical Offset
High Drag Time Of Fall
Weapon Eject Velocity
Low Drag Time Of Fall
Bomb Rack Delay
Figure 422.  Escape Maneuver (OSB 20). High Drag Unguided Bombs On the Settings page for a general purpose bomb high drag profile. Set horizontal offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils. you have additional setting options. Set desired time of fall in seconds of the bomb from release to time of impact when it is set to low drag pilot option release mode. High Drag Time of Fall (OSB 17). Climbing maneuver TRN.

Start a shallow dive between 10 and 45 degrees towards the intended target. 3. 2. it is a case of placing the reticle pipper over the target and then releasing the weapon. Set bomb rack delay between -0.
5. Doing so will cause the PBIL to swing left and right and cause a windshield wiper effect. Press the DMS Left or Right Short until the desired weapon profile is selected.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 533
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
  Weapon Eject Velocity (OSB 9). If wings level. We can do so in either manual release (MAN REL) mode or one of two Consent to Release (CR) modes.
Ma nu al Re l eas e ( MA N R EL )
Manual release is the default release mode in CCIP and requires no changing to IFFCC TEST settings. Bomb Rack Delay (OSB 10). Set the Master Arm switch on the AHCP to ARM.40 and +0. 4. we will now discuss delivery HUD symbology and steps when using the Continuously Computed Impact Point (CCIP) weapon delivery method.
CCIP Bombing Use
Having configured your profile and possible inventory settings for an unguided bomb delivery. Set ejection velocity of pod between -10 and +30 feet per second. Quite simple! To deliver an unguided bomb using CCIP manual release: 1. a dashed Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL) will appear. You want to keep the wings as level as possible and avoid banking left and right. Much like rocket and gun CCIP delivery. Press the Master Mode Control Button until CCIP is selected (as displayed in the center of the HUD).40.

534 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. CCIP Bombing HUD.
3. Out of Solution 1. If dropping multiple bombs in a ripple mode. The reticle and the pipper in the center represent where the bomb(s) will drop if the weapon release button is pressed.
2. Depending on range and altitude to target. the CCIP Bombing Reticle will come into view from the bottom of the HUD and the PBIL will turn from dashed to solid.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL)
Release Mode
Profile Name
Figure 423. you must hold down the weapon release button as long as it takes for all the bombs to be released. Maneuver the aircraft to place the pipper over the target and then hold down (do not just tap) the weapon release button. In the lower left side of the HUD is a countdown numeric that indicates the time until the first bomb will impact.

From IFFCC Test menu. CCIP Bombing HUD. The reticle with central pipper will stay clamped to the bottom of the HUD. a dashed PBIL and reticle will appear on the HUD. you will need to do the following: 1. To use a CR mode. and then pull up out of the attack with the target well below the HUD lower field of view. place the IFFCC switch in the ON position. In Solution
C on se n t t o R el e as e (C R) (3 /9 or 5 M IL )
The two CR modes allow you to designate a target much as you would attack it with a CCIP Manual Release attack.
2. This can be a useful delivery when you want to reduce the time you are in an attack dive and it allows you to start your escape maneuver earlier.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 535
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Time to Impact
CCIP Bomb Reticle
Figure 424. select the CCIP CONSENT OPT. When you are pitched down more than 3 degrees. this will be set to OFF which provides Manual Release. Maneuver the aircraft to place the pipper over the intended target and then press and HOLD the weapon release button. When complete. By default. press the DATA rocker on the UFC to select either 3/9 or 5MIL.

On the ASL a small circle will appear called the Solution Cue and next to the cue is the Time To Release Numeric (TTRN). If 3/9 is selected. the PBIL will turn solid and an Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) will appear along the heading to the designated target. Out of Solution 1.
536 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
.
2. the Solution Cue simply needs to pass through the reticle. 4. With the weapon release button held down. The TTRN indicates the time in seconds until the weapon should be released. As you fly to the target along the ASL. After the bomb(s) have been released. With the weapon release button still held down and the Solution Cue passing through the pipper / reticle. In the lower left side of the HUD is a countdown numeric that indicates the time until the first bomb will impact.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL) Release Mode
Profile Name
Designation Pipper
Figure 425. 5. CCIP CR Bombing HUD. the Solution Cue and ASL will start to drop down on the HUD.
3. You must maneuver the aircraft such that the solution cue passes through the pipper of the reticle if 5 MIL is selected. you can release the weapon release button. the bomb(s) will automatically be released.

you will need to do the following: 1. There are several ways you can set the target as SPI. Like CCIP. 2. 3.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Solution Cue and TTRN
Reticle and Pipper
Figure 426. Set the Master Arm switch on the AHCP to ARM. but also from wings-level or a nose-high attitude.
CCRP Bombing Use
Continuously Computed Release Point (CCRP) mode allows you to attack a designated ground point based on SPI location. Press the Master Mode Control Button until CCRP is selected (as displayed in the center of the HUD). Set desired target as SPI. Press the DMS Left or Right Short until the desired weapon profile is selected. an X will appear through the Solution Cue. 4. To use a CCRP mode. Pre-release If the aircraft computes that the current flight conditions will not allow the solution cue to fall through the 5 MIL (if 5 MIL selected). In Solution. which includes:   Moving TDC over target and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI Move TGP cursor over target and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI
EAGLE DYNAMICS 537
. this could be done from a dive. CCIP CR Bombing HUD.

Pre-release 1. Locking target with Maverick and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI Set any TAD object as SPI
When the SPI has been set. or the TVV will have a SPI locator line extending to the target. you can release the weapon release button. As you near the SPI target. MAN REL and 3/9 are not options.
7. the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) on the HUD will indicate heading to SPI (target). At about 6 seconds on the TTRN. CCRP mode only uses 5 MIL mode.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
  5. depending on if the SPI target is within the HUD field of view. The designated target SPI will also have a SPI locator line extending from it to the TVV.
538 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. the Solution Cue will start to fall down the ASL. Maneuver the aircraft to align the CCRP Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL) with the ASL.
Projected Bomb Release Line
SPI with Locator Line
CCRP Pipper Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) CR Release Mode
Profile Name
Figure 427. 2. Hold down the weapon release button and maneuver the aircraft so that the Solution Cue falls through the CCRP pipper.
3. the Time to Release Numeric (TTRN) next to the Solution Cue on the ASL will indicate the time in seconds until the weapon should be released. After the bomb(s) have been released. The CCRP pipper should lay along the ASL. 6. CCRP Bombing HUD.

To cycle between stations loaded with the same illumination flare type. an X will appear through the Solution Cue. cycle through the HUD rotary using DMS Left or Right Short when HUD is SOI. only one station can be selected at a time when selected as a profile. CCRP Bombing HUD. On the DSMS Status page.
Illumination Flare Employment
DSMS Illumination Flare Pages
Regardless of how many stations are loaded with the same type of illumination flare. In Solution at Release If the aircraft computes that the current flight conditions will not allow the solution cue to fall through the 5 MIL (if 5 MIL selected).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Solution Cue
Time to Impact
SPI
Figure 428. each station loaded with an LUU series will have the following information in its station box:    Top line lists the name of the flare type Bottom line lists the name of the container pod (always SUU25) To the right and left of the station box is the number of flares remaining on that station
EAGLE DYNAMICS 539
.

Press the DMS Left or Right Short until the desired weapon profile is selected. Each press of the weapon release button will release two flares. There are several ways you can set the target as SPI. 4. Set desired target as SPI. the difference being that only Manual Release mode is used. Cycle this option to choose between two release types: o o SGL (Singles). This setting allows you to enter the altitude in feet that the flare will be at when at its mid-burn point. Set the Master Arm switch on the AHCP to ARM.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
 Release Type (OSB 6). a message on the HUD will instruct you USE CCRP. However. If you select CCIP.
Illumination Flare Use
Delivering an illumination flare is very much like delivering an unguided bomb using CCRP mode as we described earlier. Press the Master Mode Control Button until CCRP is selected (as displayed in the center of the HUD). 2.
Note: Rippled release is not an option for illumination flares. DSMS Profile Settings Page.  Release Mode (OSB 10). Illumination Flares  Height Over Target (HOT). CCRP is the only release mode available. you will need to do the following: 1.
DS MS S e t t in gs pa g e f or Il lu mi na t i on
Height Over Target
Figure 432. 3. PRS (Pairs). which includes:  Moving TDC over target and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI
EAGLE DYNAMICS 541
. Each press of the weapon release button will release a flare. To release an illumination flare.

9.
Solution Cue and TTRN Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL)
CCRP Reticle and Pipper
Release Mode
Profile Name
SPI
Figure 433. Move TGP cursor over target and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI Locking target with Maverick and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI Set any TAD object as SPI
When the SPI has been set. the Time to Release Numeric (TTRN) next to the Solution Cue will indicate the time in seconds until the flare should be released. depending on if the SPI target is within the HUD field of view. 8. The CCRP pipper should lay along the ASL. press the weapons release button. Unlike bombing CCRP.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
   5. CCRP Illumination Flare HUD
542 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. Maneuver the aircraft to align the CCRP Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL) with the ASL. or the TVV will have a SPI locator line extending to the target. Maneuver the aircraft so that the Solution Cue falls through the CCRP pipper. At about 6 seconds on the TTRN. When it does. you must manually press the weapon release button and not simply hold it down for automatic release when solution is achieved. the Solution Cue will start to fall down the ASL. the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) on the HUD will indicate heading to SPI (target) The designated target SPI will also have a SPI locator line extending from it to the TVV. As you near the SPI target.
7. 6.

since maneuverability of the UGB is related to the weapon velocity during terminal guidance. a warhead (bomb body with fuze). the UGB attempts to keep its velocity vector aligned with the instantaneous line-of. Therefore.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 543
. The canard deflections are always full scale (referred to as "bang. With the assistance of build-up guidance kits. another aircraft. At the instant alignment occurs. bang" guidance). the delivery attitude takes on additional importance. The guidance canards are attached to each quadrant of the control unit to change the flight path of the weapon. the reflected laser energy centers on the detector and commands the canards to a trail position. the weapon continues on the unguided trajectory established by the flight path of the delivery aircraft at the moment of release. During the transition phase. and a wing assembly attached to the aft end to provide lift. The transition phase begins at acquisition. or a ground source. transition. and an airfoil group. general GP bombs are turned into laser-guided bombs (LGBs).control group (CCG). The kits consist of a computer. and terminal guidance. All LGB weapons have a CCG. free-fall weapons requiring no electronic interconnect to the aircraft. The designator can be located in the delivery aircraft. which causes the weapon to fly ballistically with gravity biasing towards the target. During terminal guidance.sight. LGBs are maneuverable.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Laser-Guided Bomb Employment
The development of laser guided weapons has dramatically improved the accuracy of weapon guidance and delivery. In the ballistic phase. The LGB flight path is divided into three phases: ballistic. The computer section transmits directional command signals to the appropriate pair(s) of canards. the weapon attempts to align its velocity vector with the line-of-sight vector to the target. airspeed lost during the ballistic phase equates to a proportional loss of maneuverability. They have an internal semi-active guidance system that detects laser energy and guides the weapon to a target illuminated by an external laser source. guidance canards attached to the front of the warhead to provide steering commands. During the ballistic phase.

3. you will first want to configure your switch settings on the AHCP. Armament HUD Control Panel 1. 2. we will discuss the steps needed to do so: 1.
Master Arm Switch
Laser Switch
Targeting Pod Switch
Figure 434.
Laser Designate Target
Assuming you will be self-designating the target with your own targeting pod. Master Arm switch to ARM Laser switch to ARM TGP (Targeting Pod) to ON
Note: You do not need to set a Consent to Release (CR) mode because LGB delivery will default and only use 3/9. Select the TGP page to be displayed on one of the two MFCD From the default STBY (standby) page. 2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
AHCP Configuration
Prior to setting up the attack. selected the A-G (air-to-ground) page OSB 2
544 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
.


EAGLE DYNAMICS 545
. you will want to make sure this code matches the laser code set for the weapon in the DSMS Inventory Store page. Set the laser code that the laser will fire. TGP A-G Page 4.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Select A-G Page
Figure 435. TGP Standby Page 3. From the TGP A-G page. When the latch option is set to ON. you will need to hold down the nosewheel steering button as long as you want it to fire. From the A-G Control (CNTL) page there are three control options you may want to adjust:  Laser Code. select CNTL by pressing OSB 1
Select A-G Control Page
Figure 436. If self-designating. this code will need to match the code the other aircraft is searching for in Laser Spot Search (LSS) mode. a single press of the laser designate button (nosewheel steering button) will active the laser and keep it on until you press the button a second time. If Latch is set to OFF. Latch. If buddy-lasing for another aircraft.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Tip: For best accuracy. If the target is moving. When set to other than OFF. Press TMS Forward Long to set as SPI if not already set as SPI. It will display meters or feet depending on the selection of Metric or USA. USA and OFF. After you have adjusted your control settings. 9.
 Yard Stick. Once the TGP line of sight is over the target. TGP A-G Control Page 5. To slave the TGP to SPI. use the slew control. start to lase the target 12 seconds before impact. the right side crosshair arm distance across the ground is displayed as the numeric to the right of the crosshair. This can be cycled between METRIC.
Return to A-G page
Yard Stick Distance
Latch Enable
Laser Code
Yard Stick Enable
Figure 437. To manually slew TGP line of sight. slave or slew the crosshairs over the desired target. Confirm Laser Status is set to Laser (L).
546 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. 6. From the A-G page. you will want to use POINT Track Mode.
8. press OSB 1 to return (RTN) back to the main A-G page. press DMS Right Short until Laser is selected. press TMS Forward Short to either stabilize on the location in either AREA or POINT Track Mode. press China Hat Aft Long. 7. If not.

GBU Loaded Station Box
EAGLE DYNAMICS 547
. as set on the DSMS Inventory Page To the left or right of the weapon station box is the remaining number of LGB on the station
Remaining Number of Weapons
Name of Weapon
Laser Code
Figure 439. TGP A-G in Point Track
DSMS Laser Guided Bomb Pages
With the target being tracked on the TGP.
DS MS S ta t us P a g e f or L G B
Stations loaded with either GBU-10 or GBU-12 will contain the following information on the Status page:    Name of LGB will be listed on the top line Laser code will be listed on the bottom line.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Situational Awareness Cue Point Track Box Laser Status
Track Mode
Range and Source
Figure 438. you will want to check your DSMS settings to make sure all is in order before pressing the attack.

and N/T (Nose and Tail). Each press of the weapon release button will release the number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting. LBG  Escape Maneuver (OSB 20). they will land centered around the pipper aimpoint. Turn Level Turn maneuver
Desired Time of Fall (OSB 19).[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
o o RIP SGL (Ripple Singles). Turning maneuver TLT. you will set this to CCRP so that it will appear on the CCRP HUD rotary. Cycle this option between NOSE. Ripple Quantity (OSB 8). Select to release bomb in CCIP or CCRP release modes. Set desired time of fall in seconds of the bomb from release to time of impact. along with being assigned to the HUD rotary. If you wish to have the bomb drop
EAGLE DYNAMICS 549
. If either RIP SGL or RIP PRS are selected as the Release Type. RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs). TAIL. you may use this to set the number of bombs to release in each ripple. will determine if the profile is selected in the CCRP or CCIP rotary. When delivering an LGB. This setting. Each press of the weapon release button will release the set number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting.
DS MS S e t t in gs P a g e f or L G B
The DSMS Settings page allows you to configure an LGB delivery as follows:
Escape Maneuver Auto Lase
Desired Time Of Flight
Horizontal Offset
Vertical Offset Minimum Altitude Weapon Eject Velocity
Laser Time
Solution
Bomb Rack Delay
Figure 442.
Note: When releasing a ripple of bombs. The time set will determine the Desired Release Cue (DRC) location on the Projected Bomb Impact Line (PBIL). Climbing maneuver TRN. Select type of escape maneuver between: o o o o  NONE CLM.    Fuze Select (OSB 7). in pairs. Release Mode (OSB 10). DSMS Profile Settings Page.

Press the Master Mode Control Button until CCRP is selected. Master mode name is displayed in the center of the HUD. 5. Set HUD to SOI and press the DMS Left or Right Short on the control stick left or right to select the desired LGB profile. Maneuver the aircraft to align the PBIL on top of the ASL. Solution (OSB 16). Set ejection velocity of pod between -10 and +30 feet per second. 2. Set vertical offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
according to the set TOF.  Minimum Altitude (OSB 18). If set to 0.40. Auto Lase (OSB 6). keep the DRC on the target when bombing pipper is over the target. AUTO LS must be enabled.40 and +0. set this to 8 seconds before impact. 1. 3. Vertical Offset (OSB 8).
    Horizontal Offset (OSB 7). the laser will default to firing 4 seconds before impact. TGP and DSMS set up correctly.
  
Tip: For best accuracy. Set horizontal offset of weapon between -15 and +15 mils.
Laser Guided Bomb Use
With the AHCP. As range to target decreases. Bomb Rack Delay (OSB 10).
550 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. the laser will fire automatically according to the LS TIME (seconds before bomb impact). Used to set the minimum weapon release altitude cues on the HUD. Weapon Eject Velocity (OSB 9). you will follow these steps to attack the TGPdesignated target with an LGB. Set this value in seconds to determine how many seconds before weapon impact that wish the laser to start firing. This setting will determine the placement of the Minimum Range Staple (MRS) on the PBIL and the Minimum Range Caret (MRC) within the CCRP HUD reticle. Lase Time (OSB 17). Set desired flight path of bomb between ORP for Optimal Release Point and BAL for Ballistic release point. Set bomb rack delay between -0. Both the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) and the SPI will indicate the proper heading to reach the target. the Time To Release Numeric (TTRN) will appear next to the Solution Cue and display the time in seconds until bomb release. If set to ON. 4.

CCRP LGB HUD.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Solution Cue and TTRN
Azimuth Steering Line (ASL)
Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL)
Profile Name
SPI
Figure 443. hold down the weapon release button until the solution cue passes through the CCRP Bombing Reticle. When this starts. the ASL and Solution Cue will drop down the HUD. Out of Solution 1.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 551
. When approximately 6 seconds from release. When it passes through. the bomb(s) will be released.

Is there is masking.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
CCRP Bombing Reticle
Figure 444. In Solution 2. As the bomb guides to target. CCRP LGB HUD. To the left of the laser status indication is the countdown timer of bomb time to impact. Use the situational awareness cue on the TGP display to monitor this. Avoid any masking of the target by the aircraft. If the laser is firing.
552 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. release the weapon release button and press the nosewheel steering button to fire the laser if AUTO LASE is not set to ON. the M indication will be visible on the HUD. the ―L‖ laser status on the left side of the HUD will flash. A high altitude and keeping the targeting pod on the same side as the target will reduced masking probability. 4. With the bomb released.
3. ensure that the targeting pod has an unobstructed line of sight to the target.

Ready
Figure 447. Aircraft on Ground
Figure 448. GBU-31 Station Box Loading. Weapon station is currently powered off
To the left or right of the box will be the number of IAMs on the station
Remaining Number of Weapons
Name of Weapon
Status of Weapon
Figure 446. Station OFF
DS MS GP S / IN S -B o m b S ta t us P a g e
Below is an example of the DSMS Status page with IAMs loaded on all six 1760 smart stations. GBU-38 Station Box Loading. they directly tie into data exported from the EGI system. Weapon is ready to be employed ALN GRDY. because they are only mounted on 1760 smart stations. the station itself needs to be under power as determined on the DSMS STAT page.
554 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. Additionally. GBU-38 Station Box Loading.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
IAM Bomb Employment
DSMS IAM Bomb Pages
Due to the nature of the guidance system of these weapons. Weapon is aligned but aircraft is on ground OFF. Each of the six 1760 weapon stations has the following data in the weapon station boxes:   The top line lists the name of the IAM The bottom line lists the status of the IAM o o o  RDY.

IAM  Minimum Altitude (OSB 18). Select to release an IAM in CCIP or CCRP release modes.W ea p on S e t ti n gs P a g e
The DSMS Settings page provides the following options for an IAM. will determine if the profile is selected in the CCRP or CCIP rotary.
Minimum Altitude
Figure 451. Used to set the minimum weapon release altitude cues on the HUD.
DS MS GP S / IN S . DSMS Profile Settings Page.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
 Release Mode (OSB 10). This setting. This setting will determine the placement of the Minimum Range Staple (MRS) on the PBIL. along with being assigned to the HUD rotary.
556 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
.

2. 3. To drop an IAM bomb on a SPI designated target. There are several ways you can set the target as SPI. CCRP IAM HUD 1. follow these steps:
Maximum Range Caret
Release Cue IAM Reticle
In Range Indication
Profile Name
Minimum Range Caret
Azimuth Steering Line (ASL)
Figure 452.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
IAM Bomb Use
Using an IAM bomb is simplicity in itself. 4. Set desired location/target as SPI. which includes:     Moving TDC over target and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI Move TGP cursor over target and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI Locking target with Maverick and pressing TMS Forward Long to set as SPI Set any TAD object as SPI
EAGLE DYNAMICS 557
. Set the Master Arm switch on the AHCP to ARM Press the DMS Left or Right Short on the control stick until the desired IAM-weapon profile is selected Press the Master Mode Control Button until CCRP is selected (as displayed in the center of the HUD).

9.
558 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. or the TVV will have a SPI locator line extending to the target.
7. When the SPI has been set. you can HOLD DOWN the Weapon Release button to drop the weapon. 6. MAN REL will appear in the In Range Indication field. When In Range. Maneuver the aircraft to align the IAM Reticle on the ASL. The designated target SPI will also have a SPI locator line extending from it to the TVV. 8. depending on if the SPI target is within the HUD field of view. The Release Cue will move from the 12 o’clock of the IAM Reticle counter clockwise and when the Release Cue is between the Maximum Range Caret and the Minimum Range Caret. Do not simply tap the weapon release button or this could result in a hung store. the Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) on the HUD will indicate heading to SPI (target).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
5.

you will also use the HUD to assist in aiming.
Ma ve ri ck P a g e
All versions of the Maverick use an internal gyro to stabilize the seeker and missile before and during attack. The alignment process takes 3 minutes.
Maverick Power OFF Indication
Maverick Power ON/OFF
Figure 453. To do so: 1. you will need to align the gyros of all Mavericks loaded on the aircraft. Once the weapon has been configured. The page will initially indicate OFF. you will use both the Maverick (MAV) MFCD page and the DSMS pages. Prior to engaging with a Maverick. but by pressing the EO OSB 6. Power Off 2. DSMS Maverick Page.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
AGM-65 Maverick Employment
DSMS Maverick Pages
When using the Maverick. Select the MAV display on either MFCD. you will start the gyro alignment process for all Mavericks loaded. The EO Timer in the bottom right corner of the display shows the time since the Mavericks were turned on. There are no IFFCC Test settings needed for Maverick.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 559
.

FLAPS. RDY. The Maverick station is currently active. Power Off
560 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. Maverick power is set to OFF on the Maverick MFCD page. Mavericks loaded on those stations will have weapon station boxes with this possible information:   Top line lists the name of the Maverick version The bottom line will list the type of launcher (88 for LAU-88 or 117 for LAU-117) on one side and the Maverick status on the other. Possible Maverick states are: o o o o o
Name of Weapon
OFF.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Maverick Alignment Indication
EO Timer Time Since Powered ON
Figure 454. The Maverick is undergoing the 3 minute alignment. ALN. Maverick Station Box Loading. STBY. DSMS Maverick Page. Flaps are down and must be raised.
Number of Weapons on Station since power ON
Launcher Type and Maverick Status
Figure 455. Mavericks can be loaded only on stations 3 and 9. Alignment
DS MS Ma v eri ck S ta t us P a g e
On the DSMS Status page. The Maverick station is in standby mode but is aligned.

2. set the Master Arm switch to ARM From one of the MFCD. the Maverick will be in SENSOR mode as indicated on the left side of the display. select a Maverick profile by setting HUD as SOI and then pressing DMS Left or Right Short to cycle through HUD rotary profiles. 3.
2. You can do so with the following steps: 1. but you cannot launch a weapon. On the AHCP.
562 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. This indicates that you can use the sensor normally.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Maverick Use
After the Mavericks are aligned. you can now display video from the Maverick seeker on an MFCD and engage a target. select the MAV OSB Maverick video will now be displayed on the selected MFCD in either Electro-optical or Imaging Infrared
Ma ve ri ck i n S en so r an d W ea p o n M o d es
Station Number Adjust Maverick Boresight Position Sensor Mode Indication
Adjust Maverick Slew Speed
Pointing Cross
FOV Corner Markers
Figure 460. Without a Maverick profile selected. Maverick in Sensor Mode 1. To put the Maverick in Weapon mode.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 563
. 4. after a few seconds. In addition to the slew and release method of locking a target. The number at the bottom of the DLZ indicates the projected flight time of the missile. the seeker will go into Break Lock mode and the crosshairs will expand out to the edges of the display.
2. 6. The caret on the right side of the DLZ indicates line of sight range from the aircraft to the ground point under the tracking gate. You can also do this when the tracking gate has been moved over a target while in a slave state (such as slaving your Maverick to the SPI). slew the tracking gate back on to the target and release the slew control.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Ma ve ri ck i n C en t ro i d Tr ack i ng M od e
Profile Name
Open Tracking Gate (No Locked Target)
Dynamic Launch Zone (DLZ)
Figure 461. You can change your field of view by pressing China Hat Forward Short on the throttle. this may take a few tries. When you release. If the seeker is slewed from a stabilized position (boresight or slaved to SPI). Maverick in Weapon Mode. Depending on the range to target and the size of the target. No Track 1. it will no longer be stabilized once slewed off.
5. If it cannot lock on to a target. 3. Use the slew switch or Slave All to SPI command (China Hat Forward Long) to move the tracking gate over the desired target. you may also keep the tracking gate in boresight and fly to place the tracking gate over the target and then press TMS Forward Short to initiate a lock. the Maverick will attempt to lock onto the center of mass of a target it detects inside the tracking gate. To try to lock again. With the Maverick in Weapon mode. Slew the tracking gate over the target and release the slew control. SENSOR on the left side of the display is replaced with the Dynamic Launch Zone (DLZ). The top and bottom of the DLZ staple indicate the maximum and minimum range of the Maverick.

2.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Expanded Break Lock Crosshairs
Figure 462.
564 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. If you wish to re-cage the Maverick seeker to its boresight position or the seeker has reached its gimbal limits.
If you have fired a Maverick from a LAU-88 launcher. you must cycle your profile using the HUD rotary by pressing DMS Left or Right Short. Tracking 1. Maverick in Break Lock Mode
Collapsed Tracking Gate (Target Locked)
Figure 463. When the Maverick has locked on to a target. At this point you can hold down the weapon release button to launch the missile. If however you wish to select a Maverick from another station. Maverick in Weapon Mode. This is termed a ―Quick Draw‖. you can re-cage the seeker to boresight by pressing China Hat Aft Short. the next Maverick on the launcher will automatically be selected and slewed to the last Maverick lock location. the Pointing Cross that represents the pointing angle of the Maverick in relation to the aircraft’s longitudinal axis will stop flashing.

When the Maverick is caged. AGM-65K. You can now launch the Maverick by holding down the weapon release button. The Pointing Cross will go steady. 3. This mode allows the seeker to create a basic picture of the scene and home in on one specified area of that scene.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Using a Maverick in centroid track is best for moving vehicles or small. 2.
Fully Collapsed Tracking Gate
Figure 464. the HUD provides much of the same information but allows you to keep your eyes out of the cockpit. 4. 5. it will automatically return to its boresight position. you can use force correlate mode with AGM/TGM-G. Maverick Force Correlate Track To use the Maverick in force correlate mode: 1. Slew the tracking gate over the target and the tracking gate will fully collapse. Ground stabilize the Maverick by pressing TMS Aft Short. Important Maverick HUD information includes: 1. and CATM-65K. Below the symbol is the range to target. Slew the tracking gate near the intended target. The Maverick wagon wheel symbol displays the line of sight point that corresponds to the Maverick tracking gate on the MFCD MAV page.
Ma ve ri ck H UD Us e
Although you can complete an entire Maverick engagement from just looking at the MFCDs. You can manually set this position by:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 565
. Place the Boat Switch in the center position. stationary targets.
Ma ve ri ck i n Fo rc e C or r ela t e T rac ki n g M o de
If you need to attack a specific part of a large object (such as a particular window in an office building).

CCIP Maverick Mode HUD
566 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. the SEEKER BORESIGHT message will switch to reverse video.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
     Set MAV to SENSOR mode Lock a ground or air target with the Maverick Set the Boat Switch to the center (AUTO) position.
Dynamic Launch Zone (DLZ)
Maverick Wagon Wheel Symbol
Figure 465. When you do so.
2. When you do so.
The information of the Maverick Page DLZ is duplicated on the HUD. SEEKER BORESIGHT will display on the MAV page Place the Depressible Pipper over the locked target and press TMS Forward Short. Move the Boat Switch out of the center (AUTO) position.

The bottom line indicates RDY (ready) if Air-to-Air mode is selected and that station is selected. AIM-9 Station Box Loading In the lower center of the DSMS Status display is the number of 30 mm cannon rounds remaining and the type of cannon rounds loaded.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Air-to-Air Employment
DSMS Air-to-Air Status Page
Stations loaded with AIM-9M or CATM-9M have the following information in the Status page weapon station boxes: The top line lists the name of the missile.
Selected and Armed AIM-9M Station
Figure 467. If all missiles have been expended on the station.
Name of Weapon Weapon Status Number of Missiles on Station
Figure 466. DSMS Status Page
EAGLE DYNAMICS 567
. DRA (Dual Rail Adapter) is displayed. COOL is displayed when in Air-to-Air mode but the station is not currently selected.

4. TGP A-A Default 5. you will need to do the following: 1. 3. you can also use the targeting pod when in A-A (Air-to-Air Mode).
568 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
. press the A-A OSB 4.
Select TGP A-A (Airto-Air) Mode
Field of View Corner Markers
Crosshairs
Figure 468.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Using the Targeting Pod for Air-to-Air
In addition to using your eyes to spot and track aerial targets. Select the TGP OSB from one of the MFCD to display the TGP page. you can adjust the Field of View between Narrow and Wide by pressing China Hat Forward Short on the throttle. Set the TGP switch on the AHCP to the ON position. To use the targeting pod to target aerial units. 2. The field of view setting is indicated by the corner makers. Once the TGP has cooled down and is displaying the default STBY (standby) page. Maneuver the aircraft to place the aerial target within the crosshairs. With the TGP in A-A mode.

a smaller crosshair will be placed over the target to indicate that the TGP detects it. a tracking gate box will surround the target and the TGP will go into POINT tracking mode. Upon doing so. To initiate an auto-track of the target. you will now have the SPI locator line on the HUD to help locate the target when not in the HUD field of view.
Point Track Box
Figure 470. When the target is within the crosshair area. press TMS Forward Short. Once SPI. TGP A-A Target Point Track 7. the tracking crosshair will disappear. 8. you may then wish to set it as the SPI by pressing TMS Forward Long.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Detect Cross
Figure 469.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 569
. If the target flies outside the crosshair area. You may also automatically slew the AIM/CATM-9M seeker to the target with the Slave All to SPI command by pressing China Hat Forward Long. TGP A-A Target Detect 6. With the target being tracked.

the seeker reticle will appear near the top of the HUD and represent where the seeker is currently looking.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
AIM/CATM-9M and 30 MM Cannon Use
Gu n U se
The funnel is your gun aiming reference on the HUD and you will want to place the wing/rotor tips of the aircraft on the sides of the funnel to ensure proper angle and lead. This is a vertical line which represents the lead angle due to trajectory shift and gravity drop of rounds from close range out to approximately 2 seconds time of flight. With the HUD as SOI. hold the gun trigger down. press DMS Left or Right Short to cycle through the AAS aircraft options to match the aircraft you are engaging.
AI M/ C AT M -9 M Us e
With an AIM/CATM-9M station selected on the DSMS. When you have selected the correct AAS setting and have the target within the funnel with just the wing/rotor tips touching the sides of the funnel. and this can lead to inaccuracy in the funnel sight. When keeping the seeker at this boresight position and maneuvering the aircraft to place the reticle over a target. Because the wing/rotor span can vary between aircraft. you will want to select the correct Air-to-Air Submenu (AAS) setting. The top of the AMIL shows where the bullets will be just after the firing burst and the distance they will fall towards the earth after 2 seconds due to deceleration and gravity drop. you will likely hear the seeker detection or lock tone. You can also use the AMIL to assist in gun aiming.
AIM-CATM-9 Seeker Reticle
AMIL
Gun Funnel
AAS Setting
570 COMBAT EMPLOYMENT
.

EAGLE DYNAMICS 571
.
4. The seeker will then perform a circular scan around the boresight and automatically lock on to any good infrared target that enters the scan area. 3. press and hold the weapon release button to fire the missile.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Figure 471. 5. Air-to-Air HUD To lock the seeker on to a target. you can uncage the seeker to make sure it stays on the intended target by pressing TMS Aft Short. 2. To ensure a good lock. If it detects a good infrared target. If you have set the target as SPI. You can uncage the seeker by pressing China Hat Forward Short and the seeker will randomly drift. Initiate a seeker conical scan by pressing TMS Forward Short. you have several options: 1. With a valid lock. it will lock on to it. you can use the Slave All to SPI command by pressing China Hat Forward Long and the seeker will automatically slave to the target.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
572 /
.

Either the left or right aileron has jammed. When encountering an emergency. AIL DISENG. and a full understanding of the applicable systems. Land at the nearest suitable airfield immediately. ANTI-SKID. This will only happen when in manual reversion mode when the roll servo tab shift actuator has been extended. you should be able to ensure maximum safety for you and the aircraft.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 573
.
Caution Light Panel Indications
This section discusses the possible caution light indications you may see and the corrective action to take. brake carefully and avoid locking the brakes when landing. Land as soon as practical. move the disengage switch back to center and then roll the aircraft back and forth if necessary. By these terms we mean:   Land as soon as possible. By applying what you learn in this chapter. or when the switch is set to ON but there is a failure in the circuit. you should always abide by the following three rules:    Maintain aircraft control Analyze the situation Take the proper action as defined in this chapter
It is important to quickly recall the following procedures by memory and use sound judgment. AIL TAB. L/R. set it to ON. Corrective Action: To re-engage either aileron. Either the left or right aileron has been disengaged from the control stick. Corrective Action: Exit out of manual reversion mode. Corrective Action: If switch is set to OFF. L/R. This light will illuminate when either the anti-skid switch is set to OFF while the landing gear is down. Often in this chapter we will use the terms ―land as soon as possible‖ and ―land as soon as practical‖. Mission should be terminated but immediate landing is not necessary. If already on.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
This chapter discusses the possible emergency conditions you may encounter and how to best address them. common sense. Corrective Action: Set the aileron emergency disengage switch towards the affected jam indicator light and monitor the AIL DISENG caution light. AIL.

BLEED AIR LEAK. 2. The Central Air Data Computer (CADC) has failed. ENG HOT. EAC. 3. The Central Interface Control Unit (CICU) has failed. Corrective Action: 1. Corrective Action: Select STBY or PNEU on the altimeter and monitor pitot-static airspeed indicator. The APU is not generating power yet the APU generator switch is set to PWR. ENG OIL PRESS. Corrective Action: 1. Corrective Action: To re-engage either elevator. A temperature sensor has detected bleed air leak. set the affected engine throttle to OFF to avoid engine damage
574 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
. Set throttle of affected engine with oil problem to minimum (not IDLE) If oil pressure can be maintained at 30 psi. ELEV DISENG.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
APU GEN. L/R. Certain failures of the CADC can cause erroneous data to be displayed. The LASTE Enhanced Attitude Control (EAC) switch has failed. Either the left or right elevator has been disengaged from the control stick. Corrective Action: Check status of CDU on CDU Systems (SYS) page. Oil pressure in either engine falls below 34 psi. The HUD will display the last valid airspeed and altitude data before the failure and you will see a CADC FAIL and an INS DEGRADED message on the CDU. Turn the bleed air switch to OFF Set APU switch to OFF Land as soon as practical
CADC. move the disengage switch back to center and then pitch the aircraft up and down if necessary. set the affected engine throttle to IDLE If oil pressure is still below 30 psi. Corrective Action: Land as soon as possible. L/R. Either Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) indication is exceeding 880-c. L/R. Corrective Action: Set the elevator emergency disengage switch towards the affected jam indicator light and monitor the ELEV DISENG caution light. 3. Left or right elevator has jammed. Corrective Action: Retard throttles until ITT temperature returns to normal operating range. ELEV. CICU. press the MALF button on the UFC by pressing FUNC and then CLR. Either the left or right electrical converter has failed. Corrective Action: Reduce the electrical load (shut down some electrical systems) and then cycle the APU generator switch. 2. Corrective Action: Cycle the EAC button and if that fails. L/R. CONV.

A live round remains in the barrel after the gun has been fired. you can restore yaw dampening and trim by: EGI is operating:
EAGLE DYNAMICS 575
. Corrective Action: Allow engine start cycle to complete or move engine operate switch out of MOTOR position depending on engine start method. The Ground Collision Avoidance System (GCAS) is inoperative. Such a failure will also lead to the failure of the Main and Wing fuel boost pumps and SAS channels. set the right boost pump switches to OFF and set the SAS switches to OFF. HARS is offline and not providing usable data. Corrective Action: 1. c. set the affected engine throttle to OFF and pull the fire T-handle of the affected engine. Corrective Action: Do not attempt to fire the gun and set the GUN/PAC and Master Arm switches on the AHCP to SAFE. Set the failed generator back to OFF/RESET Start APU when below 15. If it appears a leak does exist. set the Crossfeed switch back to OFF and monitor fuel quanity to determine if a leak exists. Set the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED. This light will also illuminate when either engine operate switch is in the MOTOR position.000 ft AGL. d. If this does not extinguish the light(s).
3. FUEL PRESS. If the right system continues to leak. set the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED Reset the failed generator switch back to OFF/RESET and then back to PWR If after three attempts the generator does not come back online: a. Corrective Action: Set radar altimeter switch on LASTE panel to NRM and reset master caution light in UFC. If still the leak continues from the left system. 2. If above 10. Corrective Action: If HARS fails and is the active attitude reference source. GEN. 2. HARS.000 ft AGL Set APU generator switch to PWR Land as soon as practical
GUN UNSAFE. Indication of fuel pump failure due to either low differential fuel pressure or a clog in the engine feed line. L/R. b. L/R. Either the generators are set to OFF/RESET or there is a failure. set the left boost pump switches to OFF. Corrective Action: 1. An engine is conducting its automatic startup cycle and the air turbine starter solenoid valve is open with the throttle at IDLE but core engine speed below 56%.
GCAS.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
ENG START CYCLE. 3.

4. b. Set the SAS/Anti-skid paddle to OFF Keep Pitch SAS OFF Enable Anti-skid if left hydraulic system is still operable Land as soon as possible
If both systems fail: 1. Corrective Action: If left system fails: 1. This light will illuminate if either hydraulic system falls below 900 psi or manual reversion mode is enabled. 3. Corrective Action: If left system fails: 1. 2. b. Select EGI on the Navigation Mode Select Panel Reengage the YAW SAS channels
EGI is not operating: 1. 2. Set the FLAP EMER RETR switch to EMER RETR on the Emergency Flight Control Panel
576 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
. L/R. 2. 2. Set the FLAP EMER RETR switch to EMER RETR on the Emergency Flight Control Panel If pressure continues to decrease: a. c. Set the SP BK EMER RETR switch to EMER RETR on the Emergency Flight Control Panel If pressure continues to decrease: a. c. Maintain 1G flight between 180 and 210 KIAS Set flaps to full UP (use emergency retract if needed) Jettison stores to produce symmetrical loading Enable Manual Reversion Mode
HYD RES. Volume of hydraulic fluid in the reservoir is low. d. Set the SAS/Anti-skid paddle to OFF Keep Pitch SAS OFF Land as soon as possible
If right system fails: 1. 2. L/R. Set the CDU switch on the Auxiliary Avionics Panel to OFF Set the EGI switch on the Auxiliary Avionics Panel to OFF Set the HARS/SAS switch to the OVERRIDE position
HYD PRESS. 3.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
1.

An imbalance of greater than 750 lbs of fuel between the two main fuselage tanks has been detected. Set the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED on the Fuel Control panel
EAGLE DYNAMICS 577
. b. Set the SAS/Anti-skid paddle to OFF Keep Pitch SAS OFF Land as soon as possible
If right system fails: 1. 2. Instrument inverter switch is inoperative and indicates no power is being provided to the AC essential busses. c.000 MSL Set the APU generator switch to PWR Land as soon as practical
L-R TKS UNEQUAL.000 MSL Cycle Inverter switch between TEST and STBY and then leave in STBY Start APU when below 15. d. 5. c. Such a condition will also lead to the L and R ENG HOT caution lights illuminating. 4. Corrective Action: 1. Corrective Action: Set correct mode or exit interrogation environment. b. Set the SP BK EMER RETR switch to EMER RETR on the Emergency Flight Control Panel If pressure continues to decrease: a. Corrective Action: 1.000 MSL and 85% when above 25. 4. Mode-4 is inoperative due to IFF panel being zeroized or system failure. Set the SAS/Anti-skid paddle to OFF Keep Pitch SAS OFF Enable Anti-skid if left hydraulic system is still operable Land as soon as possible
If both systems fail: 1. If pressure continues to decrease: a.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
2. INST INV. Attain 1G flight between 180 and 210 KIAS Set flaps to full UP (use emergency retract is needed) Jettison stores to produce symmetrical loading Enable Manual Reversion Mode
IFF MODE-4. 2. 3. Engine core speeds should be below 90% when below 25. 3. This is indicative of the loss of both AC generators. 2.

engine operation may suffer. 2. MAIN FLOW LOW. 3.000 ft. 3. press the REINIT INS line select key. 2. verify a GPS FAIL message On the Navigation Mode Select Panel. Assuming wing boost pumps are still operating. The Low Altitude Safety and Targeting Enhancement (LASTE) system is inoperative. Set the Navigation Mode Select Panel to HARS from EGI Verify an EGI FLY INST FAIL message on the CDU From the RESET page of the CDU. Corrective Action: Land as soon as possible.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
2. select HARS On the CDU REINIT page. NAV. press the REINIT GPS line select key
EGI INS failure 1. There are multiple reasons this light may illuminate and most of them involve EGI state. In this event. 4. Set wing boost pumps to OFF If right system has less fuel: set right main boost pump switch to OFF If left system has less fuel: set left main boost pump switch to OFF
LASTE. L/R. 5. ensure EGI is selected From the CDU RESET page. pull the All Fill Disable. 3. if failure persists… On the Navigation Mode Select Panel. the engines will still be provided fuel due at that pressure. set the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED. verify an INS FAIL message
578 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
. 2. 4. Verify EGI switch is set to ON on the AAP Set the EGI switch to OFF for at least 10 seconds Reset the EGI switch back to ON
EGI GPS failure 1. MAIN PUMP. On the CDU. suction-feed will supply the engines below 10. If this causes rapid fuel transfer between tanks. Above this altitude. Corrective Action: Cycle the IFFCC switch on the AHCP. 3. Corrective Action: Failure of either main boost pump will illuminate the MAIN PUMP. On the CDU. Indication of possible fuel boost pump failure due to fuel pressure differential at outlet of indicated main fuel boost pump is low. L/R. Possible reasons for this caution and corrective actions include: EGI flight instrument failure 1. L or R caution lights. Fuel quantity is below 500 lbs. select the EGI line select key
EGI is not ready failure 1. If both main and wing boost pumps are not working though.

set the CDU switch to OFF for at least 4 seconds Set the CDU switch back to the ON position. press the REINIT GPS line select key
CDU failure 1. 3. 3. select HARS On the CDU REINIT page. 0.000 ft AGL and land as soon as practical. ensure EGI is selected From the CDU RESET page. the slats extend automatically. if failure persists… On the Navigation Mode Select Panel.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
2. 4. Turn the bleed air switch to OFF Set APU switch to OFF Land as soon as practical
STALL SYS. L/R. Corrective Action: N/A WING PUMP. On the Navigation Mode Select Panel. SEAT NOT ARMED. Avoid single-channel operation as it can result in undesired loading on the interconnector shear bolts. 2. There has been a failure in the alpha/Mach computer and the stall warning will be inoperative. PITCH SAS. leave both off. Indication of possible fuel boost pump failure due to fuel pressure differential at outlet of indicated wing fuel boost pump is low. select CROSSFEED from the Crossfeed switch on the Fuel panel.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 579
. If left unchecked. If however there is too rapid fuel transfer between tanks. press the EGI line select key. WINDSHIELD HOT. If the problem persists… Reload DTS data Select desired Navigation Mode Select Panel settings
OXY LOW. Corrective Action: Descend below 10. Indication of excessive pre-cooler output air temperature. 3. 5. you can pull the All Fill Disable switches. Corrective Action: N/A . 2. On the AAP. Corrective Action: 1. This will allow the tanks to equalize and maintain fuel balance. Seat ground safety lever in SAFE position. Corrective Action: Reengage one channel at a time and if both cannot be reengaged. To remedy. 4. SERVICE AIR HOT. One or both SAS channels have been disengaged. In such a situation. it indicates the fuel in the tank of the boost pump will not transfer until the amount is below 600 lb. Corrective Action: If the L or R WING BOOST PUMP caution lights illuminate. this can lead to a weight imbalance.5 liter or less of liquid oxygen remains in oxygen converters. Windshield anti-icing temperature is in excess of 150-F or aircraft is on battery electrical power only. Corrective Action: Do not exceed 20 units of AoA.

L/R or ELEV.
Hydraulic Failure
The aircraft has both left and right hydraulic systems and the failure of one still allows adequate flight control response. Disengage the control and allow normal movement of the controls. However. L/R caution panel light. Re-select the flap position at which the asymmetry first occurred. 3. On the Navigation Mode Select Panel. one or more aileron or elevator control surfaces have jammed. Avoid single-channel operation as it can result in undesired loading on the interconnector shear bolts.
Aileron/Elevator Jam
Indicated by either a AIL. One or both YAW SAS channels have been disengaged. 2.
Speed Brake Asymmetry or Failure
On the Emergency Flight Control Panel. you will lose the following systems:    Flaps Nosewheel steering Normal landing gear operation
580 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
. you should attempt the following remedies in order: 1. move the emergency disengage switch on the Emergency Flight Control Panel in the direction of the jam indicator light. If the left hydraulic system fails.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
YAW SAS. enable the FLAP EMER RETR switch by moving the switch up. Failure of either the systems can be indicated by the L and R HYD RES (hydraulic fluid reservoir low) caution light or the L and R HYD PRESS (hydraulic pressure low) caution light. cycle between HARS and EGI to reset the attitude reference system and then attempt to reengage the channels. Corrective Action: Reengage one channel at a time and if both cannot be reengaged. If that does not work… On the Emergency Flight Control Panel. If that does not work… Set flaps to MVR setting when speed and altitude allow.
Flight and Flight Control Emergencies
Flap Asymmetry
If the flaps fail to extend or retract symmetrically. move the SPD BK EMER RETR switch up to close. the loss of one hydraulic system will reduce rudder authority. leave both off.

If pressure continues to decrease: a. Set the SAS/Anti-skid paddle to OFF Keep Pitch SAS OFF Enable Anti-skid if left hydraulic system is still operable Land as soon as possible
If both systems fail: 1. If pressure continues to decrease: a. c. 4. Maintain 1G flight between 180 and 210 KIAS Set flaps to full UP (use emergency retract if needed) Jettison stores to produce symmetrical loading Enable Manual Reversion Mode
EAGLE DYNAMICS 581
. Set the SP BK EMER RETR switch to EMER RETR on the Emergency Flight Control Panel. 3. d. 2.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
    Wheel brakes Anti-skid Hydraulic control of the left elevator and rudder actuators Lose of dual channel pitch and yaw SAS
If left system fails: 1. 2. Set the FLAP EMER RETR switch to EMER RETR on the Emergency Flight Control Panel. b. b. you will lose the following systems:      Slats (will extend with loss of hydraulic power) Air refueling slipway and nozzle hatch rollers Speed brakes Right elevator and rudder actuators Lose of dual channel pitch and yaw SAS
If right system fails: 1. c. 2. Set the SAS/Anti-skid paddle to OFF Keep Pitch SAS OFF Land as soon as possible
If the right hydraulic system fails.

4. Oxygen flow indicator is blinking. 2. Set throttles to IDLE. 3.000 and 10.000 ft MSL. If you start to see visual effects.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Trim Failure
If the normal aircraft trim system fails. If in a spin.000 feet to recover from depending on severity.5 to 2 degrees with low sink rate. Extend landing gear either normally or with AUX LG EXT handle. If set correctly and effects are still present. Jettison external fuel tanks. 2. 5. Ensure oxygen lever is set to ON. 3. Oxygen pressure is above 55 psi. you must: 1.
Hypoxia
If you are not receiving enough oxygen above 20. Trying to rush the recovery may only exacerbate the problem. no ECM pods can be loaded on stations 1 and 11. you may suffer the effects of hypoxia and lose consciousness. full input of rudder opposite of turn needle. Neutralize all controls until oscillations have ceased. maximum allowed crosswind is 20 knots. Pull the EMER BRAKE handle. If you cannot meet these conditions. Fly a straight in approach at 1. the landing should only be attempted in ideal conditions and flight controls should not be degraded. it can be easily recovered from after a few control oscillations. 3. 2. set the PITCH/ROLL TRIM switch to EMER OVERRIDE on the Emergency Flight Control Panel and then use the emergency pitch and roll trim switch to set desired trim. Note that a spin can take between 4.
Manual Reversion Landing
When landing in Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS) mode. you should eject from the aircraft.000 ft. 4.
582 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
. pitch response becomes degraded. To perform an MRFCS landing: 1. and you must never use pitch trim for flaring the aircraft.
Out-of-Control Recovery
If the aircraft departs from controlled flight as the result of an un-commanded roll-reversal or spin. To recover: 1. descend below 13. 4. When below 50 ft AGL.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
6. APU Restart.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 583
. Move the inoperative engine throttle to the OFF position. 2. 4. In case of such a fire. If both presses of the discharge agent switch fail to put out the fire. Press the fire discharge agent switch left or right. Aircraft altitude should be below 20.
Single Engine Restart
If an engine needs to be restarted while in flight you can either use the APU to restart the engine or perform a windmill air start. land as soon as possible. follow these steps: 1. land as soon as possible. Observer that the shut down engine ITT value cools down rapidly. set the APU switch to OFF.000 ft AGL. 5. If the fire persists… Pull the fire T-Handle of the APU. Press the fire discharge agent switch left or right. 3. 3. When below 15. Using the APU to restart an engine is performed as follows: 1. 2. 4.000 ft AGL and increase airspeed. APU.
Engine. If both presses of the discharge agent switch fail to put out the fire. 5. follow these steps: 1. Reduce power to affected engine and monitor if the fire light goes out. move the APU power switch to the PWR position. In case of such a fire.
APU Fire
If an APU fire is detected the APU fire T-Handle will illuminate. 4. This will likely be accompanied with a Bleed Air Leak caution light. Maintain minimum airspeed around 140 KIAS to touchdown. Pull the fire T-Handle of the affected engine. If the fire persists… Set the throttle of the affected engine to OFF. 2. Move the still operating throttle to MAX. and Fuel Emergencies
Engine Fire
If an engine fire is detected in either engine. the engine fire right or left T-Handle will illuminate. If the APU is operating. 3.

Set the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine to IGN. 5.000 ft AGL. Given the altitude requirement. 7. To purge an engine of fuel: 1. the engine combustion chamber may be flooded with fuel and needs to be purged before it can be restarted or risk a hot start.
After completing the purge.
Windmill Restart. Place the aircraft in a 30-degree dive. this is not an option when below 10. you can try to restart the APU and closely monitor it. 8. which fails to provide power to the engine igniters. 4. A failed start can happen if you fail to set the Inverter switch. Set Bleed Air switch to ON. you need to shut it down immediately by setting the APU power switch to OFF.
Engine Start after a Failed Start
If an engine fails to start using the automatic NORM mode. 8. 6. To perform a windmill restart: 1. Set the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine to the MOTOR setting. 7. Move Crossfeed switch to OFF. If engine restart is successful. If airborne. 3.
584 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
. 2. land as soon as practical. This method will use the bleed air from the operating engine to provide the power to start the affected engine.000 ft AGL. Set the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine to the MOTOR position for 30 seconds. 9. Once ITT of affected engine is below 150-c. When affected engine ITT is below 100-c when below 15. set both throttles to MAX. Avoid running the APU when one or both engines are running above 80% core RPM as a bleed air failure can cause aircraft damage. Move the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine back to the NORM position. reengage the SAS switches and set engine operate switch back to NORM. Set the Bleed Air switch to OFF. Set the Crossfeed switch to Crossfeed. 2.
APU Over-temperature
If the APU temperature begins to fluctuate or experiences an over-temperature.000 ft to complete because it requires a steep dive of at least 30-degrees. If however the APU is needed for engine start or electrical power. move Engine Operate switch back to NORM. Using a windmill start will take 6. restart the affected engine by moving the throttle from OFF to IDLE. Once engine is operating.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
6. you can attempt to restart the engine after correcting what prevented the engine from starting earlier.000 to 8. Set the Throttle of the affected engine to OFF.

2. If left unchecked. If either light illuminates. it indicates the fuel in the tank of the boost pump will not transfer until the amount is below 600 lb. this can lead to a weight imbalance.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 585
. pull the Fill Disable switches. select CROSSFEED from the Crossfeed switch on the Fuel panel. To remedy. set the Crossfeed switch back to OFF and monitor fuel quantity to determine if a leak exists. you can pull the Fill Disable switches. set the affected engine throttle to OFF to avoid engine damage. In this event. 3. If however there is too rapid of a fuel transfer between tanks. Assuming wing boost pumps are still operating. If the right system continues to leak. engine operation may suffer. If this causes rapid fuel transfer between tanks. If the leak still continues from the left system. If this does not extinguish the light(s). Above this altitude. If both main and wing boost pumps are not working though. If oil pressure is still below 30 psi. L or R caution lights. If it appears a leak does exist. set the left boost pump switches to OFF. set the affected engine throttle to IDLE. the engines will still be provided fuel due to that pressure. This will allow the tanks to equalize and maintain fuel balance.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Engine Oil Malfunction
If the oil pressure for either engine is outside its normal operating limits you need to take the following steps: 1. set the affected engine throttle to OFF and pull the fire T-handle of the affected engine. set the Crossfeed switch to the CROSSFEED position. suction-feed will supply the engines below 10. set the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED. If oil pressure can be maintained at 30 psi. set the right boost pump switches to OFF and set the SAS switches to OFF.
Wing Fuel Boost Pump Failure
If the L or R WING BOOST PUMP caution lights illuminate.
Fuel Pressure Low or Fuel Leak
This is indicated by either the L-FUEL PRESS or R-FUEL PRESS caution lights illuminating.000 ft. Set throttle of affected engine with oil problem to minimum (not IDLE).
Main Fuel Boost Pump Failure
Failure of either main boost pump will illuminate the MAIN PUMP.

7. If possible. external stores should be jettisoned. 2. 6. 4. If level flight with maximum power cannot be maintained. A straight in approach should be used and all set up maneuvering completed 2 to 3 nm from touchdown point. Reduce power slowly during landing flare with careful and coordinated rudder input to keep aircraft aligned down the runway. Use the rudders to compensate for yaw due to single engine operation. Close speedbrakes if open. Lower the landing gear and compensate for increased drag. 3. a landing can still be performed using the following guidance: 1.
586 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
. Ensure the failed engine will cause no damage to the aircraft due to fire. Set flaps to MVR setting.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Emergency Landings and Exiting
Single Engine Landing
When one of the engines has failed and a safe. controlled flight is still possible. 8. bank into the direction of the operating engine. 5. Advance the operating engine throttle to MAX. 9.

1 2
3
5
4
Figure 472. All turns within the pattern should be limited to 30-degrees of bank.500 and 4. 3. a flameout landing should be attempted.000 and 6.000 ft from the runway. Flameout Approach 1. Lower landing gear with a minimum airspeed of 160 KIAS.000 ft AGL. A flameout landing is when both engines are not producing any thrust and you must land. Maintain 160 KIAS and altitude should be between 3.500 ft AGL.
2.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Flameout Landing
If an ejection is not possible. Altitude should be between 7.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 587
. Enter landing pattern with a very steep approach using a circular pattern which will result in a low displacement 8.

4. 3. Note that pitch response will be greatly degraded when below 50 ft AGL due to the ground effect. 5. To use this handle: a. Lower flaps to 20-degrees. Push in the AUX LG EXT handle. shallow the flight path to 1. Touchdown at a minimum sink rate on center of runway. Touchdown should occur 1/3 down the runway. 4. If moving the landing gear handle to the down position does not result in three down and locked lights. emergency brakes should be used because no anti-skid. follow these steps: 1. 6. flaps. The landing flare should be done at 120 KIAS when 200 to 300 ft AGL over the runway.500 ft AGL. 8. Once on the ground. Burn off excess fuel. Pull the EMER BRAKE. Increase airspeed to 200 KIAS and pitch and roll the aircraft to shake loose the gear. 2. When 50 ft AGL.000 and 2. On the base leg. If pressure looks good… Cycle the landing gear handle back up and then down again.
588 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
4. Set speed brakes to 40%. c. 5. Jettison all stores and flares. Fly shallow approach at 2-degrees at normal airspeed. use the Landing Gear Alternative Extension Handle. you will need to perform a wheels up landing. you should try the following: 1. Roll out on final should be initiated early due to the slow roll response of the aircraft if in manual reversion mode. Check that there is pressure in the left hydraulic system.
Landing Gear Extension Failure
Ideally. maintain 160 KIAS and an altitude of between 2. 5.5 to 2 degrees. Reduce airspeed below 200 KIAS Ensure landing gear handle is down Pull AUX LG EXT handle along the lower left side of the center dash
No Gear Down or Partial Gear Down Landings
If you are unable to lower the landing gear as described above. Final approach will have aircraft at 150 KIAS wings level above 500 ft AGL. b. 3. you always want to land with all three landing gears extended and locked with three green gear-down indicators on the landing gear panel. To perform a wheels up landing. or speed brakes will be available. If all this fails. 2. Press the Signal Lights button to make sure the lights are operating. 7.

10. 12.
When ready to eject. If below 2.000 ft AGL. Reduce throttles to IDLE. If in uncontrolled flight. 4. Move control stick to full aft. you can exit the aircraft at most any speed and altitude. the following steps should be taken before ejecting from the aircraft: 1.000 ft AGL wings level is preferable. set the throttles to OFF.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 589
. Transmit ―May Day‖ call on UHF guard channel. do not delay in making the decision.
Ejection
Using the ejection seat. Once you have come to a stop.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
9.000 ft AGL. Turn aircraft to uninhabited area. pull either ejection handle and the process will start immediately. Set IFF panel to EMER and set appropriate Mode 3/A code. but ejection above 2. 3. open speed brakes to full. eject at an altitude above 4. After touchdown. If time permits. 2. 11. Trim aircraft for lowest practical speed with wings level.

fuel system panel Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. confirm on Landing Gear and Flap Control panel Speed brakes
Confirm to be fully closed Set to OFF
APU power (APU) switch
Engine operate (ENG OPER) switches Engine fuel flow (ENG FUEL FLOW) switches Main fuel boost pump (BOOST PUMPS MAIN) switches Wing fuel boost pump (BOOST PUMPS WINGS) switches Main fill disable (FILL DISABLE MAIN) switches
Both set to NORM
Both set to NORM
Both set to MAIN
Both set to WING
All depressed
592 CHECK LISTS
. throttle quadrant area Left console. fuel system panel HARS/SAS switch Set to NORM
Refuel Status and Indexer Lights dial (REFUEL STATUS & INDEXER LTS) Night vision lights (NVIS LTS) switch Master exterior light switch
Rotate to desired brightness Set to OFF
Set to aft
Throttles
Confirm full aft to OFF Confirm to UP
Flap lever.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. fuel system panel Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console. throttle quadrant area Left console.

landing gear panel Front dash. APU. fuel system panel Left console. AHCP Front dash. fuel system panel Left console. AHCP Front dash Front dash Front dash Wing fill disable (FILL DISABLE WINGS) switches Air refuel lever All depressed
Forward to CLOSE
Tank gate (TK GATE) switch
Set to CLOSE
Crossfeed (CROSS FEED) switch Landing gear handle
Set to OFF
Set to down position Set to OFF
Landing/Taxi lights (LIGHTS)
Master Arm (MASTER) switch GUN/PAC switch LASER switch Targeting Pod (TGP) switch Central Interface Control Unit (CICU) switch Joint Tactical Radio System (JTRS) switch Integrated Flight and Fire Control computer (IFFCC) switch Multi Function Color Displays (MFCD) power switches Accelerometer (G-Meter) Fire T-Handles (Left Engine.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Left console. fuel system panel Front dash. AHCP Front dash. fuel system panel Left console. Right Engine)
Set to SAFE Set to SAFE Set to SAFE Set to OFF Set to OFF Set to OFF Set to OFF
Both set to OFF Reset All three are in
EAGLE DYNAMICS 593
. AHCP Front dash. AHCP Front dash. landing gear panel Front dash. AHCP Front dash. AHCP Front dash.

electrical power control panel Right console. AAP Right console. AAP Right console. electrical power control panel Right console. Countermeasure Signal Processor panel Right console. TACAN panel Right console. Countermeasure Signal Processor panel Right console. electrical power control panel Right console. lighting panel
Set to OFF/RESET
Set to OFF
Set to OFF
MODE dial
Set to OFF
SYSTEM switches
All set to OFF
Power switch Control Display Unit (CDU) switch Embedded GPS INS (EGI) switch PAGE knob STEER PT knob Mode dial Lighting controls
Set to OFF Set to OFF Set to OFF Set to OTHER Set to MISSION Set to OFF Set as desired
594 CHECK LISTS
. AAP Right console.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Front dash Front dash Front dash Fire agent discharge switch Standby compass Auxiliary landing gear extension handle (AUX LG EXT) Auxiliary Power Unit generator switch (APU GEN) switch AC Inverter (INVERTER) switch BATTERY switch Switch is centered Check reading accuracy Handle is in
Right console. AAP Right console. ILS panel Right console.

throttle quadrant area Front dash Engine operate (ENG OPER) switches Left throttle Confirm both set to NORM Move from OFF to IDLE position Monitor that the left engine core speed normalized at 56% Confirm switches set to PWR
Engine group instruments
Right console. throttle quadrant area Left console. fuel quantity panel Speed brakes
Right hydraulic system pressure gauge
Speed brakes
596 CHECK LISTS
. throttle quadrant area Front dash Right throttle Move from OFF to IDLE position Monitor that the right engine core speed normalized at 56% Monitor that pressure is between 2.350 psi
Right engine startup Left console.350 psi Cycle speed brakes open and closed and
Engine group instruments
Front dash.800 and 3.800 and 3.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Engines Startup
Panel Controls Operation Key commands Left engine startup Left console. fuel quantity panel
AC generator (AC GEN) switches
Left hydraulic system pressure gauge
Monitor that pressure is between 2. electrical power control panel Front dash.

AAP Right console. CDU Right console. AHCP Front dash. TAD
EAGLE DYNAMICS 597
.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
monitor hydraulic psi Left console. AHCP Front dash. message Set to ON Set to ON Allow BIT and alignment to complete Select NAV when alignment complete Load Flight Plan from FPM FSK Set to ON Set to ON Set to ON Set to ON Key commands Right console. Configure datalink. AHCP Front dash. CDU Right console. AAP Right console. CDU Front dash. operation. checks Check. throttle quadrant area APU power (APU) switch Set to OFF
Pre-Flight Checks and Set Up
Panel Controls. AHCP Front dash Control Display Unit (CDU) switch Embedded GPS INS (EGI) switch BIT and alignment
Alignment Page
Load Flight Plan Targeting Pod (TGP) switch Central Interface Control Unit (CICU) switch Joint Tactical Radio System (JTRS) switch Integrated Flight and Fire Control computer (IFFCC) switch MFCD
Turn on both MFCD with power knob Set GROUP and OWN ID from TAD
Front dash
MFCD.

CDU PAGE dial PAGE display Waypoint Info page Set to WAYPT Select Waypoint branch Select Copy (?xx) function to create new Mission waypoint Enter elevation of new waypoint in scratchpad and press EL line select key Enter latitude of new waypoint in scratchpad and press N/S line select key Enter longitude of new waypoint in scratchpad and press E/W line select key Enter unique name of new waypoint in scratchpad and press name field line select key
Right console. CDU HUD PAGE dial Steerpoint Info page HUD as SOI Set to STEER Cycle with ± rocker on CDU DMS Up and Down
EAGLE DYNAMICS 601
. CDU Right console. CDU
Waypoint Info page
Right console. CDU
Waypoint Info page
Right console.
Creating New Waypoint Right console. AAP panel Right console. AAP panel Right console.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
select key. CDU
Waypoint Info page
Right console. CDU
Waypoint Info page
Set Steerpoint Right console.

and Maverick Right console. CDU Right console. AAP panel Right console. CDU TDC.
Right console. CDU HUD MK (Mark Point) button Designation point Press to create overhead Mark Point TMS Right Short to set Mark Point Set to MARK Press to cycle Mark Points DMS Up and Down to cycle Mark Points
STEER PT dial ± Rocker switch HUD as SOI
Create Flight Plan Right console. TAD Cursor.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Set Anchor Point Right console. CDU PAGE dial PAGE display Anchor Point Info page Set to WAYPT Select Anchor Pt branch Enter name of Waypoint in scratchpad and press top right line select key. AAP panel Right console. TGP. AAP panel Right console. CDU
Anchor Point Info page
Mark Creation and Cycling Right console. AAP panel Right console. Enter ID number of Waypoint in scratchpad and press top left line select key. CDU PAGE dial STEER PT dial FPM Function Select Key Set to OTHER Set to FLT PLAN Press
602 CHECK LISTS
.

CDU
FPM Info Page FPM Info Page Flight Plan Build page
Right console. CDU FPM Info Page Enter name of new FP in scratchpad and press NEW FP line select key Press line select key of new flight plan Press FPBUILD line select key Enter waypoint number of waypoint to be added to plan in scratchpad and press line select key of flight plan slot Repeat to add all waypoints of new flight plan
Right console. CDU PAGE dial Waypoint Page Set to WAYPT Enter name of Waypoint in scratchpad and press top right line select key. AAP panel Right console. Enter hour/minute/second (xx-xx-xx) of DOT in scratchpad and press DTOT line select key
Right console.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Right console. Enter ID number of Waypoint in scratchpad and press top left line select key. CDU Right console. CDU
Waypoint Page
EAGLE DYNAMICS 603
. CDU
Flight Plan Build page
Set Desired Time on Target (DTOT) Right console. CDU Right console. CDU
Waypoint Page
Right console.

radios Left console. Fuel panel Left console. Fuel Panel Left console. AHCP Front dash. CMSP panel Left console. IFF panel Left console. fuel panel Left console. MFCD Left console. AHCP From dash. radios Control stick Throttles Refueling door slipway lever Refuel status lights Select flight frequency and set the formation to Echelon Master Mode dial Mode Select dial Exterior Lighting dial Select tanker frequency Stick and throttles Set to OPEN Confirm READY is illuminated Fly flight to precontact position in trail of tanker Set to STBY Set to STBY Set as desired Request contact Close to contact position at 2-3 knots and establish contact position Confirm LATCHED light when connected Reduce power and pull back and down from tanker when fueling complete GUN/PAC switch Laser switch Maverick page Fill disable switches Tank Gate switch Set to SAFE Set to SAFE Set EO power to OFF Set as needed Set to CLOSE
Canopy bow
Refuel status lights
Control stick Throttles
Stick and throttles
EAGLE DYNAMICS 615
. Fuel Panel Canopy bow Left console.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
AHCP Front dash.

Controls Pitot Heat switch Operation Set to OFF Key commands
EAGLE DYNAMICS 619
.000 ft over runway at 250 KIAS at -300 feet for each mile traveled.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Inner Marker Beacon Short final and prepare for landing on glide slope Land aircraft
Land
GCA Approach Radio Radio ATC Approach Request vectors to final Land according to circle or straight in approach
Circle Landing Approach Downwind Leg 2. Start base leg 60degree bank turn when runway is 45 degrees off wing.500 ft AGL and 150 KIAS Roll out from perch on final and configure for landing and maintain on-speed AoA -500 FPM Land aircraft
Base leg
Final Approach
Land
Aircraft Shut Down
Panel Right console. 1.

and Anti-Collision lights to OFF Close speed brakes Set brake Set to OFF
Left console. countermeasure panel Left console. Signal lights to Bright. landing gear panel Right console. AAP
Speed brake lever
Wheel brake handle Anti-skid switch
Canopy switch TACAN mode dial ILS power control knob IFFCC switch CICU switch MFCDs Landing / Taxi light switch
Open Set to OFF Set to OFF Set to OFF Set to OFF Set both to OFF Set to OFF
Mode dial
Set to OFF
Flap lever
Set to UP
EGI switch CDU switch
Set to OFF Set to OFF
620 CHECK LISTS
. TACAN panel Right console. ILS panel Front dash. lighting control panel Light settings Set Position lights to Flash. throttle quadrant Front dash Front dash.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
environment control panel Right console. AHCP Front dash Front dash. throttle quadrant Right console. AAP Right console. landing gear panel Right console Right console. AHCP Front dash.

throttle quadrant Right console. VHF 2 and UHF radios
EAGLE DYNAMICS 621
. electrical panel Right console. throttle quadrant Left console.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
Front dash. radio panels Mode dial Left engine throttle Set to OFF Set to OFF after 5 minutes at IDLE Set to OFF after 5 minutes at IDLE Set to OFF Set to OFF Turn off
Right engine throttle
Inverter switch Battery switch VHF 1. TISL panel Left console. electrical panel Left console.

DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
622 /
.

After a recipient has been selected to communicate with. Upon doing so. This is the more realistic mode and requires you to know the correct modulation / frequencies for each recipient and you must manually enter the frequencies on the correct radio. Each will also have their modulation / frequency listed.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
As with DCS: Black Shark.. Using the Mic switch. You also have the option to use the Mic Switch to select radios:     Mic switch forward: VHF AM radio Mic switch aft: VHF FM radio Mic switch down: No function Mic switch up: UHF radio
There are two optional modes of using the radio that depend on the "EASY COMMUNICATION" OPTION under the GAMEPLAY tab. Top Level Recipient List: If using "Easy Communications". you would press the F4 key.. recipients not present in the mission will not be listed. other language keyboards may vary). Recipients that cannot be contacted due to range or terrain masking / earth curvature are colored black. When you select a recipient. the appropriate radio will automatically be tuned to communicate with the selected recipient. When the radio menu is displayed. F1. recipients are color-coded as follows:    Recipients on which at least one of the radios is tuned to is colored white. the radio communications window is accessed by a press of the \ forward slash key (this is for US keyboards. the appropriate radio will be automatically tuned to the correct frequency. Wingman.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 623
. the list of radio command recipients is displayed along with the function (Fx) key required to view its subcommand window.. Easy Communication is not enabled. recipients will be color-coded according to their being on the same modulation as the selected radio.. When in radio command mode. there is no color-coding of availability and no listing of their modulation / frequency. Recipients on which at least one of the radios can be tuned to but is not currently on the correct frequency is colored gray. Flight. For example: if you want to access the JTAC radio commands. Easy Communication is enabled. When recipients are displayed. the function key views are disabled. F2.

F5. Maneuvers..... These are: F1.. Your wingman will return to and land at the airbase designated in the flight plan. Ground Crew..
F1 Wingman
Upon selecting F1 Wingman from the main radio communications window.. F6. Engage with.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
F3. you can also press the ESC key. F7. JTACs. F8. F3. you have the option to select the basic type of message you wish to send to your number 2 wingman. AWACSes.. Engage. Exit Hot keys will also be available to directly issue any command in the structure.
The Navigation options allow you to direct where your wingman will fly to. Previous Menu F12.. F4.. F10.
624 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
.. ATCs. F4. F5.. Exit
F1 Navigation.. Your wingman will orbit at its current location until you issue a Rejoin command. Rejoin Formation F6. Out F11. F2 Return to base. Second Element.. These can be found in Input Options... F12. To exit radio communications. Other. F2. F3 Fly to My SPI.. Tankers.... Navigation.. F1 Anchor Here.... Your wingman will fly to the location of your SPI and orbit there until told to do otherwise.

Note that most surface combatants are heavily armed and that the A-10C is not well-suited to attacking such targets. and engineering units it can locate. F11 Previous Menu F12 Exit
F3 Engage With. If available.. Wingman will engage enemy any fixed-wing and rotary-wing aircraft it can locate. the wingman will attempt to locate the specified target type and attack it. power generation. the flight will rejoin with you. the F3 Engage With set of commands not only allows you to determine target type. Your wingman will fly to your steerpoint and orbit there until you tell him or her to do otherwise. your wingman will rendezvous with the nearest tanker and refuel. After issuing the order. F5 Engage Utility Vehicles.. F2 Engage Armor. transport. F5 Fly to Tanker. Wingman will attack all supply. F6 Engage Infantry. While the F2 Engage options are fast to issue. Wingman will attack any enemy anti-aircraft artillery and surface to air missile units that it can locate. and finally the attack heading..
EAGLE DYNAMICS 625
. but also the direction of attack and what weapon type to use. F8 Engage Bandits. Wingman will attack any tanks. command and control. Note that the A-10C is not best suited to air-to-air combat and such an order should be a last resort when confronted with enemy fighters. Wingman will attack any enemy ground unit it can locate. Note that the infantry units are very difficult to detect unless they are moving or firing weapons. The wingman will then attempt to locate targets of the specified type at your SPI location and attack them according to your specified weapon and attacking heading. F3 Engage Artillery. then weapon type.
Whereas the F2 Engage command allows you to give basic orders for your wingman to attack a target type.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
F4 Fly to My steerpoint. Wingman will engage enemy surface combatants. This is done in a tiered manner by first selecting target type. F7 Engage Ships. the F3 Engage With options provides much greater control. Once complete. fuel. F1 Engage Ground Target. F4 Engage Air Defenses.
The Engage options allow you to direct your wingman to attack a specific type of target. Wingman will attack hostile infantry units.. and armored personnel carriers it can locate. infantry fighting vehicles. Wingman will attack any tube artillery or multiple rocket launchers that it can locate. F11 Previous Menu F12 Exit
F2 Engage.

Wingman will attack the target from east to west.... command and control. Wingman will attack the target from west to east. F2 Unguided Bomb. GBU-31. Note that most surface combatants are heavily armed and that the A-10C is not well-suited to attacking such targets. transport. F1 Engage Ground Target.. and engineering units it can locate... Wingman will attack all supply. GBU-38. Mk-82AIR.
626 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
. This includes bombs such as Mk-82. Wingman will attack the target from north to south. This can be useful to help it avoid overflying enemy defenses.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Target Type. F4 Engage Air Defenses.. Wingman will use the most direct heading to attack the target. and CBU-97. F5 Engage Utility Vehicles. This includes the type of rockets that your wingman is carrying with explosive warheads. These include:       F1 Missile. F7 Engage Ships. CBU-87. F4 East. F2 North. F3 Engage Artillery. GBU-12. Wingman will attack any tanks. and armored personnel carriers it can locate.. Weapon Type. Mk-84. CBU103. This includes the type of rockets that your wingman is carrying with white phosphorus (WP) warheads. F4 Rocket.This includes such bombs as GBU-10.. Wingman will attack the target from south to north. F5 West. F2 Engage Armor. infantry fighting vehicles. the third and final step is to determine the attack heading that you wish your wingman to use. F6 Gun. Note that the infantry units are very difficult to detect unless they are moving or firing weapons. fuel. After you've selected the weapon type for your wingman to use. F3 South. Wingman will attack any tube artillery or multiple rocket launchers that it can locate. Wingman will attack hostile infantry units. The options include:      F1 Default.
Attack Heading. and CBU-105. Wingman will attack enemy anti-aircraft artillery and surface to air missile units that it can locate. Wingman will attack any enemy ground unit it can locate. This includes the type of AGM-65 Maverick your wingman is carrying. Your wingman will use its GAU-8/A cannon... Wingman will engage enemy surface combatants. Once you have selected the target type. These options mirror those of the F2 Engage orders and allow you to determine the type of ground target you want your wingman to engage. you will be given a list of weapon types that you want your wingman to engage the target with.. F3 Guided Bomb. F5 Marker. F6 Engage Infantry. power generation.

it will turn 180-degrees back to the original heading. Once reached. F2 Break Left.. or to better set up an attack. Flight stabilizes hostiles at 60 degrees left aspect. F6 Crank Left. During a break call. F8 Clear Left. your wingman will also automatically expend chaff and flares.. F7 Clear Right. F1 Break Right. This could be in response to a threat like an incoming SAM. This command will order your wingman to make a maximum-G break low. This command will order your wingman to make a maximum-G break to the left. This will hopefully force the missile to pull more G than it can generate and thus fall behind your wingman. Note: The Break orders are most often as a last-ditch evasive maneuver to a threat. F4 Break Low. This command will order your wingman to make a maximum-G break to the right. Your wingman will perform a 360-degree turn to the left of the current flight path while searching for targets. Flight stabilizes hostiles at 60 degrees right aspect. Your wingman will perform a 360-degree turn to the right of the current flight path while searching for targets.
F5 Rejoin Formation
Issuing this command will instruct your wingman to cease its current task and rejoin formation with you.
F6 Out
This command will cause your wingman to execute a maximum performance ―out‖ maneuver (180 degrees) to put threats on their six and to maintain formation with player or to rejoin. This command must override all other AI logic (for example threat reactions). Your wingman will perform a 180-degree turn from its current heading and fly 10 nm. F9 Pump.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 627
. This command will order your wingman to make a maximum-G break high. there may be times when you want to give him/her a very specific maneuvering order.
Although your wingman will generally do a good job of knowing when and how to maneuver. F5 Crank Right. F3 Break High. You generally want your wingman to break into the missile 3 or 4 seconds before the missile will impact.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
F4 Maneuvers.

Increase the distance between each aircraft in the current formation.
. Decrease the distance between each aircraft in the current formation. When
636 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
.
F9.
F3 Second Element
Upon selecting F3 Second Element from the main radio communications window. Float Formation. The second element consists of flight members 3 and 4 with number 3 being the element lead. you have the option to select the basic type of message you wish to send to the second element of your flight. Tighten Formation.000' envelope by flight lead. F8.
F6 Rejoin Formation
Issuing this command will instruct your flight to cease their current task and rejoin formation with you.
F8 Fence Out
Flight will turn on navigation and collision lights and disable ECM.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Figure 479: F7 Go Spread Four Position may be modified within a 4000-12.
F7 Fence In
Flight will turn off navigation and collision lights and enable ECM.

F4 Maneuvers.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
F7 Engage Ships F8 Engage Bandits F11 Previous Menu F12 Exit These commands mirror those of the Wingman Maneuvers commands but apply to the second element... F1 Break Right F2 Break Left F3 Break High F4 Break Low F5 Crank Right F6 Crank Left F7 Clear Right F8 Clear Left F9 Pump F11 Previous Menu F12 Exit These commands mirror those of the Wingman Maneuvers commands but apply to the second element.
Although your second element will generally do a good job of knowing when and how to maneuver. or to better set up an attack.
638 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
. This could be in response to a threat like an incoming SAM.
F5 Rejoin Formation
Issuing this command will instruct your second element to cease its current task and rejoin formation with you..
F3 Engage with. there may be times when you want to give him/her a very specific maneuvering order.
These commands mirror those of the Wingman Maneuvers commands but apply to the second element..

Formerly known as Forward Air Controllers (FAC). the JTAC is generally a ground force element assigned to coordinate Close Air Support (CAS) with friendly ground forces. The JTAC has a variety of methods to mark targets for you that depends on line of sight. and proximity of attack to friendly forces. 3. there must be at least one in the mission. smoke. but units that have night vision and laser
EAGLE DYNAMICS 639
. it will respond with its flight number following by unable. unable‖
F4 JTAC
The Joint Terminal Attack Controller (JTAC) is one of your most valuable tools for locating targets. you will have one of two responses: Flight number of responder (2.
Flight Member Responses
After sending a radio message to any of your flight members. weapon to be used. These include coordinates. There are three types of terminal attack control:  Type 1: JTACs use Type 1 control when the risk assessment requires them to visually acquire the attacking aircraft and the target under attack.


In order to communicate with a JTAC. For example: ―2. time of day. IR pointer. laser designation. This is the most common and restrictive of the three types. it will respond simply with its flight number. Any unit can be assigned as a JTAC (including aircraft like a Predator). This command must override all other AI logic (for example threat reactions). and SADL datalink. (Flight member number) unable. Type 2: Type 2 control will be used when the JTAC desires control of individual attacks but assesses that either visual acquisition of the attacking aircraft or target at weapons release is not possible or when attacking aircraft are not in a position to acquire the mark/target prior to weapons release/launch. Depending on the battlefield situation. or 4). Type 1 is most often used when friendly forces are "danger close".[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
F6 Out
This command will cause your second element to execute a maximum performance ―out‖ maneuver (180 degrees) to put threats on their six and to maintain formation with player or to rejoin. When a flight member will carry out the order. Type 3: Type 3 control may be used when the tactical risk assessment indicates that CAS attack imposes low risk of fratricide. When a flight member cannot carry out the order. This is the least restricted control type. the level of JTAC control of the attack may vary.

After a pause. 8. You will then be prompted to Check-in with the estimated time you will be available for tasking (Play Time). you will need to ensure that the correct radio is tuned to the correct frequency that the JTAC is on (most often listed in Mission Briefing). Press F4 to select JTACs from the Radio Main Menu. 9. press the \ key to view the radio menu and then press F1 "Ready to copy". If using Easy Communications. along with their frequencies and callsigns (if using Easy Communications). 2. the JTAC will reply with the terminal control type (1. The Initial Point (IP) that the attack should be started from. 7. JTAC Engagement Flow To contact a JTAC. 5. The JTAC will now read the 9-line as follows: 1. JTACs are assigned a radio frequency that they need to be contacted on. the correct radio and frequency will be set automatically. 4. 3. a list of JTACs in the mission will be displayed. This is most often done over the VHF FM radio. This is a point created in the Mission Editor and is a NAV point in the CDU Attack heading to the target and any offset needed Distance to target Elevation of target (MSL) Target type UTM coordinates of target How the target is marked (None. Select the JTAC that you wish to contact. When you are ready. After selecting "JTACs". either select the main radio menu (\) or the Mic switch in the direction of the appropriate radio (most often the Mic switch Aft for VHF FM). If you are using realistic radio. When you check-in. White Phosphorus (WP).DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
designation are most often used. 2 or 3) that will be used and then ask if you are available for the 9-line. you will automatically radio the JTAC key information that includes:     Your mission number Location from Initial Point (IP) and your altitude What you are armed with How long you are available (hours + minutes)
You will then automatically ask what tasking the JTAC has for you. 6. The 9-line is a standard briefing form that provides the pilot key information to prosecute the attack. Laser. or IR Pointer) Location of nearby friendly ground forces Control point to egress to
640 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
.

You can then use the TAD cursor to make this new symbol your SPI. you need to wait for the JTAC to mark the target with smoke. you will either be cleared to re-attack or cleared to depart. The JTAC will then radio back the location of the target from the smoke marker. the JTAC will ask you to report when you are IP inbound. the engagement can vary according to how the JTAC designates the target: Coordinate. Laser Designation: If the JTAC has tasked you to use GBU-10 or GBU-12 laser-guided bombs on the target. the target will be marked with white smoke and the JTAC will radio that the "mark is on the deck". smoke. If you are inbound from the IP.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 641
. or IR pointer. When you are ready to proceed from the IP to the target. the JTAC will then tell you to continue. During the 9-line. laser. Once heading toward the target. Depending on the results of your attack. the JTAC will clear you to engage. press \ and F1 "IP Inbound" to start your attack. the JTAC will message "Standby for data". If not. he will clear you in hot. We'll discuss each of these separately: Coordinate Only Designation: When the JTAC does not have line of sight to the target (often the case with Type 2 and 3). To accept the tasking. You will now need to read back the target location and elevation. Once you have released your weapon. Soon after you will receive a text message digital 9-line on your MSG page and a small. Smoke Designation: After receiving the point data. press \ and then F1. you need to start the process again from the IP Inbound stage of the attack. press \ and press F1 "Attack Complete". it will laser designate the target for you. At this point. that generally include the weapon to use. You can also create a new waypoint using the coordinate and select it as a Mission point from the CDU. Remarks are additional information not included in the 9-line. the laser code that you should search for is listed (1688 as default). press the WILCO OSB. red triangle will appear on the TAD at the target location.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
After completing the 9-line. When you are within 10 nm of the target. Once you have a visual on the smoke. The easiest way to target the coordinate is to make the red triangle data link symbol on the TAD your SPI. When ready. If cleared to re-attack. If all looks good to the JTAC. and other data if applicable such as final attack heading. The JTAC will then radio the remarks. At this point. weather information. To do so. press \ and then F1 "Contact the mark". press \ and then F1 "Off". After your attack is complete. press \ and then F1. he will abort the attack. press \ and then F1 "In" to indicate that you've started your attack run. the JTAC will automatically ask if you are ready for remarks. and/or attack headings. With the read back complete. it will only be able to designate the target as a MGRS coordinate. After receiving the point data.

If all looks good to the JTAC. The IR pointer appears as a line between the JTAC and the target.
  
642 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
. you will either be cleared to re-attack or cleared to depart. he will abort the attack. the JTAC menus allow some additional options not mentioned above. press \ and F1 "IP Inbound" to start your attack. These include:    Repeat Brief. you need to start the process again from the IP Inbound stage of the attack. Informs the JTAC that you are unable to carry out the instructed task. slew the TGP to the target point and perform an LSS/LST search. replaces the smoke marker during low light conditions. JTAC will update you on the status of the directed target. press \ and then F1 "Off". To locate the designation. The only difference are the options for "Pulse" and "Rope" that instruct the JTAC to flash the IR Pointer on and off or move it around. Ends JTAC control. Depending on the results of your attack. You could also press F2 to "Shift" the designation to a different target in the group. With the designated target in LST. Other JTAC Radio Options: During a JTAC directed attack. the JTAC also provide directions to the correct target.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
After receiving the point data. What is my target? JTAC will repeat the type of target that you are tasked to destroy. press \ and F1 "Spot". When you have detected the designation. Once you have released your weapon. You will report contact and provide a target description and MGRS coordinates. the process flow for the IR Pointer is the same as for the smoke marker. Request BDA. To see the IR Pointer. The JTAC will respond with a positive acknowledgment or with warning about contacting the wrong target. he will clear you in hot. As such. press \ and F1 "In". you'll tell the JTAC to lase the target by pressing \ and then F1 "Laser On". Contact. set it as your SPI and attack using standard LGB delivery steps. or "Terminate" the attack. When you are ready to proceed from the IP to the target. As you are running in. or IR Wand. In its response. Unable to comply. This command is made to the JTAC to verify that the correct target is at the SPI location. At this point. you must have the Night Vision Goggles (NVG) on. IR Pointer Designation: The IR Pointer. If not. the JTAC will then tell you to continue. the JTAC will ask you to report when you are IP inbound. If cleared to re-attack. Check Out. JTAC will repeat the 9-line briefing. If you are inbound from the IP. respectively.

[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
F5 ATC
The Air Traffic Control (ATC) system of this simulation is context sensitive to the location of your aircraft: on the parking ramp or runway/airborne. you must first have
EAGLE DYNAMICS 643
.0Mhz Nalchik: 136.0Mhz
Tip: You can also find the ATC frequencies of the nearest airfields to you by selecting the DIVERT page from the CDU.0Mhz Kopitnari: 134.90Mhz Sochi-Adler: 127. ATC VHF FM Contact Frequencies:                      Anapa: 121.0Mhz Senaki/Tskhakaya: 108.0Mhz Novorossiysk: 123.0Mhz Tbilsi: 138.
Parking Ramp Start Before you can communicate with ATC/Ground Control to get permission to start your engines.0Mhz Beslan: 141.0Mhz Kobuleti: 133.0Mhz Sukhumi: 129. To do so.0Mhz Batumi: 131.0Mhz Maykop-Khanskaya: 125. you first need to have your VHF AM radio up and running.0Mhz Mineralnye Vody:135.0Mhz Mozdok: 137.0Mhz Vaziani: 140.0Mhz Gudauta: 130.0Mhz Krasnodar-Pashkovskty: 128.0Mhz Soganlug: 139. If the airfield supports it.0Mhz Gelendzhik: 126. it will also list ILS and TACAN data. To do so though.0Mhz Krymsk: 124.0Mhz Krasnodar Center: 122.

After the aircraft has been started and configured. Set the radio to the frequency of the airfield you are starting from. Once the airfield ATC is selected. you can taxi to the "hold short" area of the taxiway. you can access ATC by either pressing the \ key or the VHF AM Mic switch. If you have wingmen. After you have landed. If you are using "Easy Communications". and select "Request Engine Start".
Runway and Air Start If you are not starting from the parking ramp. press \ to bring up the radio menu and then press F1 "Request Engine Start" if using the Easy Communication option. proceed to the parking area and shut down the aircraft. you can either send them an "Inbound" message to indicate that you intend to land there. The QFE. select F1 "Request taxi to runway". If you have wingmen. they will also now taxi to the runway. When you select "Inbound". you can taxi on to the runway and takeoff. When permission is granted. or atmospheric pressure at the airfield elevation.the area on the taxiway just short of entering the runway. you can select F5 "ATCs". a list of airfield ATCs are listed along with their contact frequencies. "I'm lost" requests navigation assistance to reach the airfield. "Abort landing" indicates that you will not be landing at the directed runway. the ATC will respond with the following information:     Heading to fly to reach landing initial point. or an "I'm lost" message that will result in the ATC providing you guidance to reach the airfield. With the radio now operating. If not using Easy Communications. Once you receive permission. press \ and F1 "Request takeoff". radio request landing a second time and ATC tower control will provide permission if the runway is clear. It will also provide wind direction and speed. Range to landing initial point. they will also now start their engines.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
the APU and APU Generator running and the VHF AM radio turned on. Which runway to land on. Select the airfield ATC you wish to contact. Upon doing so. you will first need to enter the ATC frequency of the airfield you wish to land on the VHF AM radio.
You can then radio:    "Request landing" indicates your intent to land at directed runway.
644 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
.
If you've requested landing and are on final approach. If not using Easy Communications. press forward on the Mic switch (activate VHF AM radio). When at the hold short area.

and aspect of the nearest enemy aircraft.[A-10C WARTHOG] DCS
F10 Ferry
F1 1xTK600 / 2xCTU-1 F2 2xTK600 / 2xCTU-1 F3 3xTK600 / 2xCTU-1
F7 AWACS
After selecting the F7 AWACS option from the main radio menu. new picture. and altitude of known enemy air threats. Sending this request to AWACS will result in AWACS providing you bearing. After selecting the F9 Tanker option. <altitude>. <number of groups detected> groups. (repeats up to three groups)

F9 Tanker
To aerial refuel from a friendly KC-135 tanker. F3 Vector to tanker. Sending this request to AWACS will result in AWACS providing you heading. (repeats up to three groups) If BRA (under 50 nm): (Your flight’s callsign). range. (AWACS callsign). along with their VHF AM contact frequencies. <altitude band>. (AWACS callsign). Upon setting your VHF AM radio accordingly and contacting the desired AWACS. Sending this request to AWACS will result in AWACS providing you heading. hits <altitude band>. bra <bearing> for <range>. The AWACS response differs according to the range of enemy air groups:  If BULL (over 50 nm): (Your flight’s callsign). you will first need to contact it over the VHF AM radio. a list of all friendly AWACS in the mission will be listed. range.
EAGLE DYNAMICS 649
. Second group. bra <bearing> for <range>. new picture. bulls <bearing> for <range>. Sending this request to AWACS will result in AWACS providing you heading and range to the bullseye/anchor point set for the mission. First group. AWACS will provide heading. First group. altitude to the nearest KC-135 tanker. follow on-screen directions from the tanker to refuel. altitude. Second group. range. hits <altitude band>. <number of groups detected> groups. F4 Request bogey dope. and the ATC frequency of the mission specified landing airbase. bulls <bearing> for <range>. you'll be given the following options: F1 Vector to bullseye. After contacting the desired tanker. a list of tankers in the mission will be displayed wth their contact frequencies (if using Easy Communications). F2 Vector to home plate. F5 Request Picture.

Generally. These are generally noted in the mission briefing and should be set to your radios at the start of the missions. each friendly flight and airfield is provided a VHF AM and UHF frequency. AWACS is assigned a unique VHF AM frequency. The JTAC is most often assigned a unique VHF FM frequency.DCS [A-10C WARTHOG]
Radio Frequencies
In order to receive radio communications from other mission entities and have your transmitted messages received. Other friendly flights operate on a common VHF AM frequency assigned to the operating area. Each airbase ATC is assigned a unique VHF AM frequency. you may have to juggle multiple frequencies during the course of a mission and the frequency preset features on the radio will become a big help. the following rules apply:   Your flight is most often assigned a UHF frequency.
  
As such. You will use this channel for inter-flight communications. When set correctly.
650 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
. you will hear radio communications from other flights operating in the area. When a mission is created. it is vital that you have your radios set up properly! If not. you will be essentially talking to yourself.